A list of super simple and super epic completely free rabbit hutch plans follow, these will help you construct a strong solid structure that ought to keep the fluffiness safe and sound from predators and weather alike. All the items in our list feature photos and complete instructions, often with diagrams and step-by-step building instructions and all free rabbit hutch plans below have past the the test of time and they have been vouched for repeatedly in their communities and therefore one simply cannot go wrong with the rabbit hutches below; we invite you to simply choose the one that fits your needs.
In the list all rabbit hutches naturally have common attributes but their structure and style varies and as a result, your experience will too. We strongly encourage to compare all these options carefully before starting building, make sure that you need a one or two story rabbit hutch or that you actually need any of the outdoor rabbit hutch plans below before going the extra mile; it goes without saying that you have to adapt the hutches to the number of rabbits you are going to grow.
A rather simple rabbit hutch tutorial with complete diagrams for every step, is recommended for beginners and professionals alike. Jack recommends wood essences resistant to weather such as pine and cedar for this particular project as the materials will greatly improve the construct`s behavior in time. Your little furry friend will greatly appreciate his new home and you have everything you need everything thoroughly explained thanks to Jack`s tutorial, it is also worth noting that the project can be easily scaled and customized for your bunnies!
Tutorials on Ana's website always seem super simple, and super easy to realize and that happens every time because they actually are! Ana White has simply made the world a better place thanks to her easy-to-follow tutorials. The two-story rabbit hutch above has everything a fluffy friend would need and happily it can shelter his friends as well, cast a glance over the complete project and see how it would fit your situation, this is one that should definitely be shortlisted.
A beautiful rabbit hatch that connects the little critter with soil and vegetation thanks to a lower deck where he can roam freely. The upper deck is marvelous and it includes a small apartment where the rabbit can take refuge when the weather is uncertain.
Rogue Engineer happily presents this rabbit hutch plan with everything that one would need for completion, material list, tool list, color photos, diagrams as well as detailed written instructions that will help any beginner realize this stress-free.
A proven technique for fast DIY rabbit hutch shelters uses PVC frames to materialize the ensemble; this technique is used for all kinds of structures, we have featured such a unit in our chicken coop list and here it comes the PVC frame rabbit hut; all you need is 1 1/2 SCH 40 pipe and wire-frame cages. One can find these PVC pipes and their connectors at any local hardware store and the complete instructions that accompany the tutorial make this DIY project readily available to anyone in the world happily. A super efficient, modular project that will shelter your furry friends for decades.
A rabbit hutch can be cool but an entire hotel for your little bunnies is certainly better, you will simply adore the free rabbit hotel plan featured on Instructables and so will kids as the low height of the ensemble invites them to interact with the bunnies. In the link below you will find complete building instructions with color photos, a supply list, and a tool list, all you need to create his masterpiece that will be enjoyed by all parties i
Create a hotel for your bunnies with this free hutch plan that is created so your kids can interact with the rabbits as much as they like.
This free plan for furry rabbits has been featured in Instructables too and it uses reclaimed wood to assemble an epic small rabbit hutch almost 5 feet long that ought to be sufficient for 3 to 6 young rabbits. In the following tutorial 12 steps of instructions part you from the completed object and these include images that you can follow but please take note that the materials and tools are not listed. The process and the images explain a great deal though, analyze them carefully and you will surely succeed!
A super simple rabbit hutch that you can complete in a couple of hours easily. Instructions and a complete material list properly synced with the diagram make the DIY project swift but written instructions ease the process even further and so does the tool list nestled in the following link. Needless to say that you can scale this to your needs.
If you want to spoil one happy rabbit you can use the free plan featured on Instructables below. The sectional diy rabbit hutch that you will complete can hold up to five furry critters and happy you have the option of creating the hutch sections either 4' or 6'.
Step-by-step instructions for the construction include diagrams, materials, and too lists as well as photos.
As you can imagine the following rabbit hutch plan is a super simple DIY plan and that is all true, it has nothing to do with it being featured on Simple Easy DIY. Follow the tutorial and you will find out exactly how to cut the material, how to ensemble the frame, install the roof and door, and everything from top to bottom. The rabbit hutch tutorial includes a video that will help a great deal, an educational medium that in this case replaces the written instructions.
As you can deduct from the exploded illustration above the tutorial above is super easy to follow and it provides clear instructions and a lot of support illustrations that will help you complete an epic rabbit hutch. The Woodworking website even provides illustrations that will help you understand how the piece connects with one-another, all pieces are numbered carefully so you can track them down easily. For this tutorial, you will also need some hinges and wire mesh, elements commonly used in rabbit hutches.
An awesome free rabbit hutch plans with wheels! It might sound odd when you first hear it but the great advantage is that you can move the rabbit hutch easily.
The thoroughly presented step-by-step instructions spread across three pages in BuildEazy`s plan with a dozen diagrams with specific dimensions and a complete material list that starts on the second page if you want to browse it rapidly.
The bunny condo that follows is more of a bonus item to our list, it presents a super simple tutorial that you can assemble in your home in less than an hour, please take note that the diy rabbit hutch above is nothing short of extraordinary and will definitely make a bunny super happy!
A short list of only 13 items presented super epic solutions for the furry friends that we love to take care of so much, have you found this free rabbit hutch plan interesting enough to craft? We would love to hear your thoughts in the comment section below!
Just imagine - you’re driving home from an exhaustingly busy day at work, only to find that there’s been a load shedding in your locality!
Sorry, didn’t want to give you an anxiety attack right away; but let’s just be honest here, isn’t this one of everybody’s worst nightmares?
Now you may say, generators are pretty cool at making up for it. Well, ask yourself - how do you like the deafening noise of your old loud generator that probably wouldn’t run throughout the night?
We certainly don’t, and that’s why we have enlisted 7 of the quietest 5000-watt generators for household use, which could also come in handy for upgrading your home appliances. Also, we’ve added a brief buyers’ guide for your convenience so that you acknowledge the key factors to consider while buying one of these models.
So, let’s get going, shall we?
1. Champion 6250-Watt DH Series Open Frame Inverter
There’s hardly any other home appliances brand in the market that lives up to its name as well as Champion. Being one of the major players in the top-notch generator market, Champion has been recently making waves with its all-new 6250-watt DH series model. We’re quite intrigued by its advanced quiet technology, and we believe you’d be too!
Right off the bat, this model has proven to be pretty efficient for both household use and outdoor operations. The secret behind it is its motor, which runs on 5000W and is capable of creating up to 6250 starting watts. This way, the model can take care of your water pump system, refrigerators, and air conditioners without breaking a sweat.
However, despite delivering such a high energy output, this product is specially engineered to remain gentle on sensitive appliances such as smartphones, laptops, and TVs. Speaking more about its efficiency, this model comes with a massive 4.2-gallon fuel tank. Here, every consecutive gallon of fuel enables the machine to generate electricity for a little more than 3 hours. A filled tank guarantees you up to 13.5 hours of electricity coverage at 25% load.
Now coming to its USP, this model features an advanced quiet technology that cuts down its noise levels very low. Fun fact - at one point, we weren’t even aware that the machine was running in the other room! Plus, another fun fact - this model is 20% lighter than the typical Champion 5000w generators, so we’re seeing a decent improvement here.
Although we’ve personally tested this product for quite a while now, we’re quite impressed to say that we haven’t found any flaw that’s worth being mentioned. There are some users who have complained that the model fails to provide 3 hours per gallon after a year or so if used regularly. Nonetheless, it entirely depends upon how roughly you use the model.
What We Like
Highly fuel-efficient
Advanced quiet technology
Reasonable price tag
Lightweight frame
What We Don’t Like
May decrease efficiency if used roughly
Dimensions: 26.6" x 25.6" x 23.7" | Weight: 121 lbs | Power Source: Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil | Voltage: 120/240V | Wattage: 6250W (Starting), 5000W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 301cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: 69 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 4.2 Gallons | Run Time: 13.5 Hours (25% Load) | Warranty: 3 Years
Duromax is best known as the brand that doesn’t only manufacture high-end appliances but also sets the bar higher for portability and user comfort. The best way to experience this is by testing its best-selling product, the XP5500E Portable Generator range. Read on to know more about the power and durability this model provides at such a reasonable budget.
If you were impressed by the Champion 6250-watt generator, but don’t have enough space in your apartment to store it, you can go for the Duromax XP5500E. Now we’re not claiming that this model will offer you the exact power and performance, but it’s quite efficient at saving you from hours of load shedding. What’s more, it’s also one of the most compact generators we’ve come across by far, which makes storage look like a cakewalk.
So, what else makes this model worth your consideration? It's a high-powered engine, without a doubt. This model comes with a 7.5 HP 224cc patented Duromax engine that also features a spark-ignition technology and a 4-cycle air-cooling feature for higher convenience and durability. Plus, as the name implies, this machine runs on gas that is further converted into electricity.
This powerful setting, combined with the MX2 technology, makes this product eligible to generate 120-240v of electricity. This way, it becomes easier to keep heavy appliances such as refrigerators and air conditioners running for quite a few hours.
Now, unlike the Champion DH series unit, buyers have complained that it isn’t the best recommendation for outdoor operations. However, the manufacturers claim it to be powerful enough to be compatible with RVs. Furthermore, Duromaxx needs to fix the wheels by adding air valves.
What We Like
Full-metal sturdy frame
Can generate up to 240v of electricity
Advanced MX7 technology
Low noise levels
What We Don’t Like
The wheels don’t have air valves
Dimensions: 25" x 24" x 21" | Weight: 122 lbs | Power Source: Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil/Electric | Voltage: 120/240V AC, 12V DC | Wattage: 5500 (Starting), 4500W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 224cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: N/A | Fuel Tank Capacity: 3.9 Gallons | Run Time: 19 Hours (25% Load) | Warranty: 30-day Replacement, 1 Year (Parts)
3. Briggs & Stratton Q6500 Inverter Generator
It’s hard not to mention the legacy of the globally-leading brand Briggs & Stratton when it comes to innovations that have changed the game forever. Speaking of which, it’s an all-new Q6500 inverter generator that looks like it’s a part of Tony Stark’s Iron Man armor. However, apart from its sassy looks, this product has a lot more to offer.
To begin with, this product defines reliability at its best. If you’re looking for one of the quietest and most durable generators, and are open to raising your budget a little high to avail the best product, this is your cup of tea. We’ve found out that at a 25% workload, this model produces a maximum noise level of 66 dBA. Our expert analysis says that it’s quieter than 60% of our alternative recommendations, which is quite amusing.
Furthermore, it comes equipped with the classic B&S 306 cc engine that creates a maximum energy of 6,500W, giving itself the upper hand over the Champion 6250W model. However, its consistent wattage is similar, i.e., 5000w. In other words, the B&G QuietPower model serves every task that the Champion generator can fulfill, that too, at a higher power.
Plus, the model comes with a 5-gallon tank, which is higher than any product that we’ve tested by far. Also, we’ve found this model to be quite efficient at conserving fuel while being used, entitling itself as an environment-friendly model.
Although this model has a bigger fuel tank than the Champion model, it offers less run time. In other words, this model offers 14 hours of run time at 5 gallons, whereas the 6250 series provides 12 hours at 4 gallons. Apart from that, we’re not entirely satisfied with its fragile plastic cover.
What We Like
Powerful engine for higher wattage
Eye-candy design
Highly fuel-efficient
Affordable price tag
What We Don’t Like
Lesser run time
Fragile plastic cover
Dimensions: 25.5" x 21.1" x 21.4" | Weight: 139 lbs | Power Source: Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil | Voltage: 120/240V | Wattage: 6500W (Starting), 5000W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 306cc 4-stroke w/ Integrated Alternator | Noise Level: 66 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 5 Gallons | Run Time: Up to 14 Hours (25% Load) | Warranty: 2 Years (Consumer)
Some brands do not require any introduction as their global popularity makes all of the noise, and Honda is undoubtedly one of them. We were fortunate enough to have hands-on experience with the EU7000IS 7000-watt generator, and we are very impressed with its extended runtime. Let’s check out what more this product brings to the table.
The internationally accomplished brand image of Honda makes this product a little too exciting to begin with. Honestly, this one makes an appropriate household appliance, considering the excellent value that it had offered us. Also, why wouldn’t it? This model features the patented Honda 389cc GX390 EFI engine, one of the most advanced motors engineered by the brand in a while.
Also, as the name implies, this model can generate up to a maximum wattage of 7000W, thanks to its groundbreaking motor mechanism. However, its efficiency is experienced the best when it’s used at its running wattage, i.e., 5500W. But, the icing on the cake is that when it’s run at 25% load, this model can extend up to 16 hours of runtime!
Now let’s move on to the new add-on features it offers, such as the electric start and Honda’s trademarked Oil Alert settings. These features combine to give us a satisfying user experience as the machine shuts down on its own when it’s not being used. So, overall, it appears to be quite a smart and powerful device that you can consider if you’re looking for peak performance.
A thing or two could honestly be done better with this model, for instance, fixing its considerably heavy body. Although we understand that high-end appliances are usually heavier, we think it’s a little too heavy for a home appliance. Also, the price seems a little too high, if compared with most of its alternatives.
What We Like
Impressive run time
Automatic shutdown features
Produces up to 7000W
3-year limited warranty period
What We Don’t Like
A little too heavy
Tad pricey for a home appliance
Dimensions: 33.4" x 27.6" x 28.4" | Weight: 263.2 lbs | Power Source: Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil/Electric | Voltage: 120/240V | Wattage: 7000W (Starting), 5500W (Running) | Frequency: N/A | Engine: 389cc GX390 EFI | Noise Level: 52 - 58 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 5.1 Gallons | Run Time: Up to 16 Hours | Warranty: 3 Years (Residential)
5. Yamaha EF6300iSDE Quiet Inverter
Yamaha is a brand that has reshaped the dynamics of technology with its trailblazing innovations over the years. If you’re searching for impressive performance under a reasonable budget, the Yamaha EF6300iSDE quiet inverter is one of the best options you can consider. Its cutting-edge remote control feature is guaranteed to offer you a satisfying user experience.
We believe that it can be a potential competitor to the Honda EU7000IS unit. Well, yes, we know that this product offers us a maximum efficiency of 6,300W, whereas the Honda model offers us 7000 watts. So, how is this comparison relevant?
Well, an average household wouldn’t require the appliance to crank up to its peak performance every time, except outdoor use. So it’s more important for the model to have an impressive running performance instead. On that note, this model features a 357cc OHV 4-stroke engine that offers a similar running wattage of 5,500W.
It also comes with a 4.49-gallon tank that offers around 13.3 hours of run time at 25% load, which is also quite close to the Honda model. However, the cream of the crop here is that this model can be availed at a very lower price than the Honda EU7000IS unit. Also, it weighs less, saving us from some of the inconvenience.
Although we haven’t found any technical fault that is worth mentioning, we’re not a very big fan of its design. We wish the manufacturers would have designed it a little more ergonomically, as it features insufficient areas for gripping that make the device tough to move around.
What We Like
Generates up to 6,300W
4.49-gallon fuel tank
Runs up to 13.3 hours at 25% load
Reasonably priced
What We Don’t Like
Not designed ergonomically
Dimensions: 30.7 " x 24.2" * x 27.2" | Weight: 200 lbs | Power Source: Gas Powered | Start Type: Electric | Voltage: 120/240V | Wattage: 6300W, 5500W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine:357cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: 58 - 64 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 4.49 Gallons | Run Time: 13.3 Hours (Constant 25% Load) | Warranty: 3 Years
6. Westinghouse WGen5300s 6600W Generator
Westinghouse has been recently making waves in the appliances market with its cutting-edge innovations. One of its highest-rated products, the WGen5300s generator, had our attention at first glance.
It has a reliable 274cc OHV engine which makes this model capable of running up to a peak performance of 6600 watts and offers a decent running performance of 5300 watts. Furthermore, it has a runtime of 14.5 hours at 25% load and stands out to be CARB compliant, which makes it an environmentally friendly generator.
Now coming to its noise levels, this model produces around 68 decibels, which is decent for its price range. The model further comes with a 3-year warranty period, so you don’t have to stress over it being damaged anytime soon.
As per the customers, the carbonator of this model isn’t quite durable and can show signs of malfunctioning if it’s run at its peak performance for a considerable time. Also, some buyers have complained that the parts get damaged during shipping, which needs to be taken care of by the manufacturers.
What We Like
Decent runtime
The low fuel indicator feature
3-year warranty
What We Don’t Like
Carbonator isn’t durable
Dimensions: 26.7" x 21.6" x 20.3" | Weight: 132.5 lbs | Power Source: Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil | Voltage: 120/240V | Wattage: 6600W (Peak), 5300W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 274cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: 68 dBA | Fuel Tank Capacity: 4.7 Gallons | Run Time: 14.5 Hours | Warranty: 3 Years
7. SIMPSON SPG5568 Portable Gas Generator
As we’re featuring some of the best value options for our bargain hunter pals out there, it’d be somewhat unfair not to mention the SIMPSON SPG5568 unit. Although it isn’t the most technologically advanced option you’ll find in the market, this manual generator is guaranteed to satisfy the simple requirement of an average household.
We were searching for a reliable generator under a reasonable budget when we came across the SPG5568 model. After testing it, we can say that the model is capable of handling the medium-duty household requirements because it offers a running wattage of 5500W.
We believe that the SPG5568 can give stiff competition to the WGEN5300s, mainly because both of them have a similar low oil indicator feature for higher user convenience. Furthermore, the SPG5568 adheres to the EPA standards, meaning that it’s certified to be a reliable appliance. However, it comes at a cheaper price tag than the SPG5568, making it a smart option to consider.
Moving further, this model comes equipped with a powerful 420cc engine that has been specially engineered to conserve fuel. This way, the machine delivers up to 4.07 KW-hours per gallon, which is considerably higher than an average generator.
It’s rather disappointing to find out that the duplex 120v outlets of this model aren’t GFCI-protected. This can expose the engine to the damages inflicted by extreme temperature conditions, dirt, and debris. So, we can’t guarantee that this product will last for years to come.
What We Like
Reasonable price tag
Low oil shutdown feature
EPA certified
Fuel-conserving engine
What We Don’t Like
Outlets are not covered
Dimensions: 27” x 21” x 23” | Weight: 174 lbs | Power Source: Gas Powered | Start Type: Recoil | Voltage: 120/240V | Wattage: 6875W (Starting), 5500W (Running) | Frequency: 60 Hz | Engine: 420cc 4-stroke OHV | Noise Level: N/A | Fuel Tank Capacity: 6.6 Gallons | Run Time: 9.5 Hours (25% Load) | Warranty: 3 Years (Residential)
Cross your heart and answer this- Now that you have access to 7 of the quietest 5000w generators in the market, are you confident enough to choose the one that fits your needs precisely?
There still is some vital information that you may be missing out on, which is a common mistake for buyers. Anyway, just a reminder- Before you buy a product, you have to understand the key features that make it a smart option to consider.
So, let’s have a quick peek at the key features that make one of these products worth your investment, shall we?
Noise Level
Speaking of the quietest generators in the market, it’s quite apparent that it’s a critical feature that you have to cross-check. Now, we’re saying this because generators are deafeningly loud in general, which isn’t a pleasant thing to experience. As per our expert opinion, any product that produces over 74 dbA at a distance of 23 ft is too loud.
Generator Type
Honestly, conventional generators are a thing of the past nowadays. Inverter generators are trending now, as they are environment-friendly and do not damage sensitive electric appliances. However, on the other hand, conventional generators are super cheap. That’s pretty much the only advantage of the conventional ones because it’s quite inferior in terms of performance.
Engine
What good is a generator that fails to generate an average wattage of 5000w? Yes, you’ve to make sure that the model you’re choosing comes with decent capacity and horsepower and does not malfunction when thrust at peak performance. Our average recommendation would be a 350cc/10 HP powered engine.
Fuel Type
If you’re buying a generator for regular use, you have to consider the operating costs involved with the purchase too. On that note, which kind of fuel the model runs on makes a massive difference in how much the product will cost you post-purchase. So, if you’re buying one for frequent use, you should opt for cheaper fuel options such as gas. If not, then you can go for the petrol/diesel-powered generators.
Fuel Tank Capacity
Being a motor that acts as a substitute for electricity, it’s apparent that it won’t run on electricity as an active power source. So, no matter what sort of fuel it uses to function, it’s more important to check how much of it the model can store. Fortunately, most of the recommendations on our list offer an average fuel capacity of 5 gallons.
Start System
There are mainly two ways to start a generator- the typical manual pull system and the automatic switch feature. Now, this is a significant factor that the user convenience of the product depends upon because the pull system can be quite stressful at times. That’s why we recommend that beginners should always opt for automatic features.
Our Verdict on Quietest 5000-watt Generator
It’s hard to decide what we hate more - the frequent power cuts or the loud noise of the generator? Let’s just say that the most common answer to that question is “both”.
And that’s where a quiet 5000w generator comes in handy. On that note, we hope that you enjoyed going through our list of the top 7 quietest 5000-watt generators.
Remember folks - the Westinghouse WGen5300s model delivers the highest wattage while providing the largest fuel tank. On the other hand, the Honda EU7000IS offers the most durable and powerful engine among the other alternatives. If you’re looking for the lowest noise levels, the Champion model is our top pick.
That being said, we’ll see you soon with more and more exciting content.
Till then, stay tuned!
When people look for generators, fuel efficiency is one of their top concerns. After all, the right fuel goes a long way toward savings.
And when it comes to the choice of fuel, propane is clearly the winner. True, generators that run on gas are also popular, but when it comes to fuel efficiency and ease of use, propane generators beat the rest by a long shot.
Plus, they are also quieter than their non-propane counterparts. This makes them perfect for both home and recreational use. But, how do you choose the best one among the plethora of options available in the market?
To help you do just that, we’ve decided to compile this list of the ten best propane generators that you can buy. What’s more, we’ve even created an easy-to-digest buyers’ guide to aid in your decision-making!
We begin our journey with the Champion 3800W portable generator, which is as much a winner as its name suggests. Built with dual-fuel capacity, this is a device that’s absolute value for money. If you’re looking for a generator that works equally well indoors and outdoors, this is the one to go with.
Dual Fuel: Operate your 3800-watt portable generator right...
Electric Start: Power up the 224cc Champion engine with the...
Why Did We Like It?
The first thing that caught our attention about this machine is its dual-fuel technology. It runs equally well on propane as well as gas, so you don’t have to worry about fuel efficiency.
The next thing that we like about it is the 224cc, 4-stroke Champion engine that comes with a push-button electric start. It delivers 4750 starting watts and provides 3800 running watts with up to 9 hours of run time on a full tank of gas.
With propane, you get up to 10.5 hours on a 20-pound tank, which is a lot if you ask us. Plus, the device is air-cooled to maintain operating temperatures to a minimum. It even has the option of both electric as well as recoil starts.
Finally, we were pretty impressed by the Volt Guard, Intelligauge, and Cold Start technologies on this unit. Coupled with the durable cast iron sleeve, portable wheels, and low-oil shut-off mechanism, we’d say this is one for the keep.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Even though it’s advertised as a quiet generator, we found the device to be rather noisy. In fact, when we checked, the noise levels were closer to 80 dBA. Now that’s pretty loud if you ask us. But if you don’t mind a bit of noise, then this is undoubtedly one of the best ones in the market.
The next item we have for you is the GEN4000LP from Sportsman, one of the reliable brands in the generator realm. Ideal for camping trips or emergencies, this is a product that delivers superb value for money to all consumers. Utilizing dual-fuel technology, this is one of the most fuel-efficient products available.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
When it comes to generators, power capacity is one of the biggest concerns. And we are glad to say that the GEN4000LP scores high in this account. With 3250 watts of continuous operation and 4000 watts of peak power, this is one heck of a machine.
We really liked the running times on it, which we clocked at ten hours on a full tank and fifty-percent load. The generator has a 7HP 4-stroke OHV recoil start engine that delivers enough power for common household appliances and power tools.
Also, the product is affordably priced, which means you don’t have to break the bank to buy one. Apart from the above, it also boasts circuit protection technology, which ensures that it operates safely at all loads.
We were pleased to find that it comes included with a propane fuel hose and regulator, which makes the task of refueling a lot easier. Plus, the automatic low-oil shutdown feature helps to protect the engine from damage. Overall, a must-buy, in our opinion.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Although it comes with two 120V AC and One 12V DC outlet, the generators lack a 240V AC outlet; this limits its usage somewhat. Also, there’s no 30A receptacle, so that’s another issue you’ll have to deal with.
The next product that we have for you is an inverter generator, again from the house of Champion. And we’re pleased to say that this one has a better noise rating than the first item on the list. However, it’s a lower-powered device as well, so that’s the trade-off you’ll have to live with.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
First off, it’s a dual-fuel device, which means you can operate it on either gasoline or propane. The engine is a four-stroke 192cc one and can deliver 3400W of power for domestic as well as on-the-road operation.
Talking of the engine, we must mention the extreme fuel efficiency that this device boasts of. Running times vary from 7.5 to 14.5 hours based on the fuel type, and it goes without saying that propane gives better running efficiency.
Convenience is one of the first things that comes to our mind when we think of this generator. The 3-position ignition switch makes starting it convenient, and the Quick Touch Panel allows us to access all the controls in one location.
In the end, we must also mention the low-oil auto-shutdown feature that protects the engine from damage and expensive repairs. Plus, it even comes with parallel capability, and the economy mode makes for quieter operation and more fuel savings.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The weight is a bit heavy when compared to other devices. However, the puncture-free wheels make the product portable, which is a blessing, in our opinion. Plus, the battery needs to be regularly charged to keep it operational.
Westinghouse is a name that needs no introduction among those in the know. With a reputation for providing quality generators, the manufacturer distills their experience of over a century into every product they make. And the WGen7500DF is a prime example of their superior craftsmanship. Interested to know more? Just read on.
7500 Rated Watts and 9500 Peak Watts (Gasoline); 6750 Rated...
Intuitive Control Panel Features Two GFCI 5–20R 120V...
Why Did We Like It?
Honestly speaking, there’s nothing quite like a Westinghouse generator for those emergency requirements. The WGen7500DF gives you the advantage of propane as well as gasoline-powered operation.
With gasoline, we ran it at 9500 peak watts and 7500 runnings, while propane gave us 8550 watts peak watts and 6750 when running. This means that no matter what fuel you use, you’ll have enough juice to power all your household or camping essentials.
This monster is powered by a massive, 420cc, 4-stroke Westinghouse engine that is encased in a cast-iron frame for extra durability. It even comes with a digital hour meter and a low-oil shutdown feature.
Ease of use is one of the factors Westinghouse has paid particular attention to, and this reflects in the plug-and-play nature of the device. It even comes with a remote-start key fob, a 12V battery charger, and a complete engine-oil tool kit. Talk about convenience!
What Could’ve Been Better?
As this is an open-frame generator, the device is considerably louder than other inverter generators. This means if you’re looking for ultra-quiet operations, you’ll be disappointed. Also, at 194 pounds, the device is pretty heavy.
If a portable powerhouse is what you’re looking for, then you can’t go wrong with the XP2000EH Sidekick from DuroMax. Perfect for those outdoor trips, this is a combination of portability, power, and durability; that’s a rare blend. Lighter, quieter, and more fuel-efficient than regular generators, this is one of the good ones.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
Power on the go is hard to find, but DuroMax has the formula all figured out. Its Sidekick series is unsurpassed in its class and has the capability to deliver 2000 peak watts and 1600 running watts. This makes it perfect for camping and tailgating, among other things.
When we review a generator, we look not only for power but also for the kind of power that the machine provides. And we’re glad to say that this one incorporates inverter technology for providing clean and stable energy for electronics.
And if you’re worried that one generator won’t be enough for your purposes, then do not worry! The sidekick has a parallel connection feature that allows the bridging of two units together for double the wattage.
If even that isn’t enough for you, then it also sports a low-oil shutoff feature, together with idle control that lowers the generator RPMs and saves fuel. Plus, it also reduces the noise by a considerable degree, which is an added advantage.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We mentioned that this device could be paralleled together, right? Well, the kit for doing so must be bought separately, which means you’re going to have to shell out money over and above the generator cost. We would’ve preferred it if the kit were included. Also, at 6.5 hours, the peak runtime is a little lower than what we’ve seen till now.
DuroMax does it again! The next item on our list is also from the very same manufacturer, and this time we have an open frame offering for you. Sturdy and durable, the XP4850EH is one mean machine. And while we’re by no means saying this is our top pick, if you’re looking for a conventional generator that gets the job done, look no further.
Plenty of Power – With 4,850 starting watts and 3,850...
Dual Fuel Technology – This generator runs on gasoline or...
Why Did We Like It?
If durability and sustainability are what you’re looking for in a generator, then the XP4850EH is just for you. Designed with dual-fuel technology, this unit can operate on either gas or propane.
It’s equipped with a massive 7HP 208cc engine that’s designed to give you peak wattages of 4850W and running power of 3850W. This is enough for most domestic as well as RV requirements.
On a full tank at 50% load, it gives you 8 hours on gas and 10 hours on propane. Now that’s efficient! Also, it’s an inordinately sturdy product, as can be seen from the rugged steel frame and rubberized wheels.
Finally, coming to the sound. This generator comes with an oversized muffler, which stops it from generating large amounts of noise. At 23 feet, we measured the sound levels to be 69 dBA, which is quiet enough to be comfortable. Plus, it also has an electric start key, voltmeter, and circuit breakers, among other features. Overall, an excellent product.
What Could’ve Been Better?
At 130 pounds, this is a rather heavy device. This means despite the presence of wheels, you’ll have a tough time lugging it around. Plus, the fuel tank is smaller than we expected.
After the double deal from DuroMax, we’re here with yet another stellar product, this time from the house of Pulsar. The PG7750B is an open-frame monster that delivers a massive 7750W of peak power. But power is not the only thing under its hood, as you’re about to learn right now.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
For those of you who’re looking for decent performance at a modest cost, this model from Pulsar is one you just can’t ignore. It comes with a dual-fuel running capacity that gives up to 7750W of peak power and 6250W of running power.
This makes it perfect for running your RV and domestic devices. Plus, this generator even comes with a digital power and runtime meter, four standard AC outlets, and a DC port for battery charging. What’s more, it’s even got a 30A outlet for RV purposes.
The switch-and-go technology makes it easy to shift between propane and gasoline without turning the device off. With propane, the PG7750B gives an impressive eight hours runtime at 50% load. Now that’s impressive!
And when all is said and done, this is a durable device that’s designed with a strong powder-coated steel frame. It’s even got a pair of no-flat tires and a foldable handle for portability, which is much needed in this device, as you’ll find out below.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The weight, of course! At over 200 pounds, this is as heavy a product as it is powerful! Without the portability features, it would have been a really hard task lugging this one around.
When it comes to propane generators, we’ve rarely seen runtimes go above 10 hours, that too at minimized loads. But the Firman H03652 proves that a propane generator can be powerful and still deliver impressive runtimes. Don’t believe us? Well, take a closer look and decide for yourselves.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
Clean fuel, efficient power, and perfect portability, that’s what the Firman H03652 promises you. Whether it’s an outdoor frolic you’ve planned or a domestic requirement that’s your need, this is a machine that has your back.
Equipped with a 208cc Firman Max Pro engine, this generator provides massive power of up to 4550W, yet runs coolly and efficiently. This is on account of its Phoenix Fat-Head Block technology. The engine is also equipped with a low oil shutoff and is encased in a cast iron sleeve.
But the highlight of this device is undoubtedly the five-gallon fuel tank that delivers a whopping fourteen hours of runtime. Plus, it’s also RV ready and comes with a multi-feature control panel and extended propane hose.
As for the weight, the device is considerably lighter than the last product and is exceptionally portable. It comes with a wheel kit that’s got heavy-duty tires that don’t go flat and a U-shaped padded handle that offers extreme ease of use. Overall, one of the best buys on the list, in our opinion.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only point of concern in this unit is that it doesn’t come with a 220V outlet. This means it can’t be used in case you want to connect a transfer switch or a breaker panel.
And at long last, we’re on the final item on our list. And this one is yet another beauty from the house of Ford. Like the other offerings, this one too runs on both propane and gasoline. Also, its Switch-and-Go feature allows a seamless transition from one fuel type to another at the touch of a button.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
A powerful, 224cc, Single-Cylinder 4-Stroke OHV engine that’s air-cooled is responsible for the 5250W peak power that this machine delivers. Protected by a heavy-duty powder-coated steel frame, this is a durable generator.
Coming to the fuel tank, the 4-gallon capacity does seem a bit too low. But with eleven hours of continuous operation at half loads, its efficiency speaks for itself. It’s also equipped with a 12V AC 30A RV port, which makes it perfect for your next on-road adventure.
Weighing at a little over 100 pounds, and equipped with never-flat wheels, this generator takes portability to a whole new level. It even comes complete with a propane hose, so you don’t have to shell out extra for it.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only flaw in this otherwise decent product is that it doesn’t come with a battery charging port. Which means you’re going to have to charge the thing separately. In today’s age of well-rounded devices, this is not something that we expected.
Pros
Powerful dual-fuel engine
Switch-and-Go technology
Twist-lock outlet
Cons
No battery charging port
Quiet Propane Generator Buyers’ Guide
So, now you’re equipped with information on the ten best, and quietest propane generators on the market. But don’t think that’s enough to make the correct decision. Settling on the right propane generator takes more diligence than knowing a few model names.
There are quite a large number of factors to consider when you’re selecting the propane generator of your choice. And to make sure you’re well acquainted with the lot of them, here’s a nifty buyers’ guide that can help you make the decision.
By coupling the information in this guide with the unbiased reviews above, you can be sure to make the wisest decision. So without further ado, let’s take a look at the factors that you must keep in mind while choosing a propane generator.
Types Of Propane Generators
The first thing that you need to keep in mind is the type of propane generator that you need. This depends on the use to which you’ll put it. If you’re in need of a generator for mostly home purposes, then go with a home standby one.
On the other hand, if you’re looking for one to use on the go, you need to settle with a portable propane generator. However, these can get rather noisy, so for quieter operation, you can go with inverter generators.
Your Power Level Requirements
Once you’ve determined the purpose and the type of generator that you need, now it’s time to choose the power level requirements for your machine. Usually, the more the number of appliances you’re planning to run, the higher the power you require.
In case you want a generator that can power your whole house, you’ll need to go with one that’s at least 5000W or more. However, if you’re looking to power an RV or a campsite, then a smaller one with 3000W peak power will be enough.
Generator Runtimes
The next important factor that you need to keep in mind is the runtime of your generator. This is essentially the number of hours that your generator can run at a stretch. For powering your entire house, you should go for one with at least 10-12 hours of runtime.
For RV applications, you’ll usually need the power in specific intervals, which means an extended running time is not really needed. Still aim for one with at least 6-8 hours of runtime for best results.
On that note, do remember that runtime is usually calculated at fifty percent load. So the usage to which you put your generator also plays a role in this.
Portability Factor
Not all portable generators are made equal, and this needs to be kept in mind while settling on the right model. While some measure within 100 pounds and can be wheeled around, others can be over 200 pounds and virtually impossible to move, even with wheels.
To decide on portability, consider how frequently you need to move the device. Is it mainly meant for home use and is more likely to sit in one spot? Then you can go with a heavier model. For on-the-road use, make sure to select a portable one that can be easily carried.
Electric Start Mechanisms
Forget the old pull cord that’s usually associated with generators. When selecting your model, choose one with an electric start mechanism that makes turning the generator on a cinch. What’s more, you can even choose one with a remote start mechanism for greater convenience.
Safety Factors
At the end of the day, a generator is an electromechanical device and can pose serious safety concerns. When choosing one, go with models that feature low-oil alert and auto-shutoff features. Better still, make sure that your device of choice has a surge protection mechanism built in to protect sensitive electronics.
Number Of Outlets
Finally, the last but very vital thing that you need to take care of is the number of outlets on the generator. Go with ones that have four or more standard AC outlets, as this will allow you to plug in several small appliances. And for RV use, don’t forget the 30A outlet.
Verdict
And there you have it! Now you’re ready to go out and purchase the best propane generator of your choice! Before you set out to shop, however, we want to share our favorites with you.
From our list, the overall winner is decidedly the Champion 3800W, which despite being a bit noisy, delivers a stunning performance. However, if raw power is what you’re looking for, then the Westinghouse WGen7500DF is a better option. And if portability is your prime concern, then go with the XP2000EH from DuroMax.
So, keep the above in mind when settling for the right generator, and rely on the buyers’ guide to help you out! On that note, we’ll take our leave, hoping that you get exactly what you’re looking for.
There is no denying that 4000-watt generators can prove to be lifesavers during power outages.
After all, they produce consistent power for extended periods and prevent disruption of activities. Not just that, they are quieter than the traditional units and can be carried anywhere, which makes them ideal for camping, tailgating, and powering RVs. So, going for such a device would certainly be a wise decision.
However, since there are many options and factors to consider, selecting the right model can be quite time-consuming and challenging.
That is why we have brought together a list of the nine best quiet 4000-watt generators currently available on the market after extensive research and testing. We have also provided a buyer's guide towards the end of the article to help you make an informed purchase.
Now, without any further delay, let's get started!
When it comes to manufacturing durable and reliable portable generators, DuroMax is one of the best brands on the market. Thus, it should come as no surprise that the DuroMax XP4000S portable generator is among our top recommendations. Equipped with a robust engine, the product offers sufficient power to deal with multiple jobs.
Plenty of Power – With 4,000 peak watts and 3,300 running...
Powerful Engine – The DuroMax 208cc OHV engine is a...
Why Did We Like It?
With 3300 running watts and 4000 peak watts, this portable generator can withstand heavy loads, making it suitable even for power tools and home air conditioners. Additionally, it boasts a robust 208 cc OHV engine to ensure it can handle numerous jobs involving high-voltage appliances with ease. Rest assured, it will fulfill your requirements during a power outage.
We were also pleased to find out that it features a sensor that automatically shuts off the device when the oil is low to protect the device. We must also mention that all the windings in the device are made of copper for a longer lifespan.
Apart from that, the generator is approved by the EPA, which means it produces low emissions and is more eco-friendly than traditional generators. Last but not least, it sports an affordable price tag, making it a top choice if you are on a tight budget.
What Could've Been Better?
We didn't come across any significant drawbacks to this product that would be considered a deal-breaker. However, we have to admit that the power fluctuates once in a while, which can be noticed on the voltmeter. But then again, given the economical price tag, we don't think most users would mind this minor issue.
Founded in 2003, Champion Power Equipment has been dedicated to producing and designing the best power equipment for over a decade. And this open-frame inverter from the brand is yet another feather in its cap. Packed with plenty of functional features, the product ranks high in terms of performance and fuel efficiency.
Advanced Open Frame Inverter Design: 50% quieter and 20%...
Quiet Technology and Extended Run Time: 64 dBA is great for...
Why Did We Like It?
The modern open-frame design is what caught our attention from the get-go, which not only makes the product stand out from other traditional generators but also makes it lighter. Therefore, users should face no problem carrying it from one place to another.
And thanks to Quiet Technology, the inverter generator operates at under 64 decibels, making it ideal for RVs.
Apart from that, the product is parallel-ready, allowing you to double the power output by connecting up to two high-watt inverters. We were also quite impressed with its Economy Mode, which makes it incredibly fuel-efficient and extends the engine life.
Additionally, the inverter generator is backed by a three-year warranty. Thus, you don't have to pay to repair or replace the product during the first three years of purchase. And there’s more; the company offers free lifetime technical support, thus providing one of the best customer experiences in the industry.
What Could've Been Better?
Without a doubt, this product is one of the best quiet 4000-watt generators currently available on the market. However, it may not be ideal for those with a modest budget. Other than the steep price tag, we found a few issues with the instructions, which was a little disappointing.
Our next pick is from Westinghouse, a prominent US-based power equipment brand that has been providing clean energy solutions since 1886. Meet the iGen4500 inverter generator that can help meet your various power needs whether you are on the go or camping. Read on to know what all it offers.
5000 Peak Watts and 3900 Rated Watts at Less Than 3% THD;...
Features a 5–20R 120V Duplex Household Outlet, an RV-Ready...
Why Did We Like It?
For us, the main highlight of this product is the reliable push-button electric start that ensures the generator stops and starts without any hiccups. It also comes with a key fob for wireless remote start, allowing you to stop and start the generator from up to 260 feet away. Needless to say, these features make the product superior to traditional portable generators.
As far as the engine is concerned, it is fuel-efficient, thanks to the active throttle system that regulates the engine speed and power as per the load that's demanded. It also features a low-oil automatic shutdown sensor, which ensures that the product powers off automatically to prevent damaging itself. And the best part? It is exceptionally quiet.
The inverter generator sports a convenient and intuitive digital data center that displays lifetime run hours, voltage output, power output, and fuel level. Thus, it enables you to track real-time information and maintenance intervals.
What Could've Been Better?
The hatches for the oil compartments and the battery are small. So, people with large hands may find it difficult to screw and unscrew the oil cap and secure the battery. Other than that, the product may be slightly expensive for some buyers. However, given the features on offer, we would say that it is worth the investment.
Wen has been manufacturing and supplying top-grade yet affordable power equipment for over 70 years. So, it made sense to add a product from a brand of such caliber to our list. Whether at the campsite, at home, or on the job, the GN400i Inverter Generator makes sure you don't have to worry about outages.
Dimensions: 19.8" L x 13.8" W x 18.9" H | Weight: 66.1...
Generate clean power to safely operate sensitive electronics...
Why Did We Like It?
We must single out the design as the USP of the inverter generator. At 66 pounds, it is incredibly lightweight and portable, allowing you to carry it wherever you go. Not to mention, it takes up only a small space, making it an ideal choice for trailers.
Moving on, we were thoroughly impressed with the engine power. The four-stroke engine can generate up to 3500 running watts and 4000 surge watts of reliable power. Additionally, the Eco-Mode feature deserves special mention as it enables the motor to automatically regulate fuel consumption, thereby preventing gasoline wastage and saving you money.
You will be pleased to know that the product is designed to prevent voltage drops and spikes, which means it is safe for use with mobile phones, laptops, and other electronics. And lastly, it is backed by a two-year warranty, so you don't have to worry if it malfunctions down the road; the brand has you covered.
What Could've Been Better?
Unfortunately, the noise level of this Wen generator is relatively high but not as loud as a traditional generator. So, you might want to keep it in mind if you decide to purchase this product. Also, it would have been excellent if the manufacturer had provided a bottle of oil with it.
Now that we are midway through the list, let’s take a look at the G450RN portable backup generator from the house of Pulsar. Pragmatic and highly versatile, this product can be your go-to option for an alternative power source on your next adventure. So, let's see what it brings to the table in the next few sections.
Capable of up to 15 hours of extended operation at half load...
Why Did We Like It?
For starters, it is a quiet generator because it operates at only 63 decibels, allowing you to have a normal conversation just 10 feet away. This makes the product a great choice for a power source while camping. Additionally, the product is CARB-approved, which is excellent news for eco-conscious users.
The fuel capacity of this portable generator is 3.2 gallons, making it capable of providing uninterrupted power at half load for up to 15 hours. Therefore, you can use this product during blackouts and outdoor events without worrying about fluctuations. We also loved its compact construction and never-flat wheels that support easy storage and maneuverability.
Apart from that, the wireless remote start deserves mention; it allows you to control the product from up to 80 feet away. And did we mention that it is parallel-ready? Indeed, you can hook up to two portable generators to enjoy double the wattage from this portable inverter generator.
What Could've Been Better?
We did not find any information about the warranty offered by the manufacturer. As such, we can’t confirm whether it is backed by a warranty or not. Other than that, we found the oil access point a tad difficult to open, which was a bit frustrating.
Bilt Hard is a brand that specializes in the production, development, and research of high-quality gas tools and power tools. And this inverter generator is an ideal example of what the brand is capable of designing. Praised by customers from across the globe for its range of compelling features, this is an option you wouldn't want to ignore.
Dual-Fuel Operation (Gasoline & Propane): Features a 141cc...
Clean Inverter Power (<3% THD): Our gas generator delivers...
Why Did We Like It?
The product features innovative inverter technology, which ensures that it delivers clean power that's safe to use with phones, laptops, and other sensitive electronics. We were also impressed with the built-in casters and the sturdy collapsible handle that make the product easy to maneuver. On that note, this versatile product is an excellent addition to an RV and small homes.
Additionally, it comes with both recoil and electric start. While the electric start allows you to switch the unit on with a press of a button, the recoil start comes in handy when the engine fails. Beyond that, you will be pleased to know that it operates at just 68 decibels, which means it won't disturb your entertainment and rest, much less the neighbors’.
Not to mention how it comes with a two-year warranty, proving the brand has faith in the quality of its products. Overall, it is a great backup power option during a power outage and outdoor events.
What Could've Been Better?
A few disgruntled users have expressed their disappointment over the run time of the unit. They mentioned that it runs just a little over three hours, whereas the brand says it would run for 14 hours. Other than that, we would have liked it if it came with an oil bottle.
Next, we have chosen this quality unit from PowerSmart, a prominent name in the power equipment industry. It is a great option if you are looking for a gas-powered generator that provides green electrical energy for home power backup, RV camping, and powering mobile phones. So, let's dig a little deeper.
Power: 4400 starting watt and 3600 running watt clean power...
Convenience: Equipped with a 30A outlet for RV, Home use,...
Why Did We Like It?
Straight off the bat, you get a 2.54-gallon massive fuel tank, enabling the machine to run for 15 hours straight. So, be it a power outage or an outdoor event, you can trust this inverter generator to provide an uninterrupted power supply for extended periods.
It features a digital display, which shows the total runtime, session runtime, frequency, and voltage to help you keep track of its performance and know when it's time for maintenance. Apart from that, we were pleasantly surprised to find out that it runs at 61 decibels on max power output, meaning it's incredibly quiet and a perfect choice for camping.
Now, what makes it a truly powerful generator is its four-stroke, single-cylinder, OHV engine that provides top-notch performance as a reliable power backup option. It is also parallel-ready, allowing you to connect two inverter generators to boost the total power output. Naturally, this unit is one of the most highly rated and sought-after inverter generators.
What Could've Been Better?
A major gripe that we have with this product is that it doesn't come with built-in casters, which could make it difficult to carry, especially for elderly people. Other than that, we must mention that we couldn't find any information related to the warranty.
We will not be wasting any time introducing you to Champion Power Equipment as we have already reviewed an exceptional inverter generator from the brand previously. Now, as for this model, it is a notch above most options on our list. Keep reading to know more about it.
QUIET TECHNOLOGY: 61 dBA is great for RVs, tailgating, or...
PARALLEL READY: The optional parallel kit (sold separately)...
Why Did We Like It?
In our opinion, one of the most notable features of this generator inverter is the Intelligauge which allows you to monitor the operating hours, frequency, and voltage with ease. Thus, it helps you keep track of the performance of your device.
Additionally, it comes with the EZ start dial that ensures that the engine starts easily and quickly, without the user putting in the effort, unlike generators with recoil starts. Another thing that we liked about this device is that it produces clean electricity (< 3% THD), which means you can connect your mobile phones, laptops, and other sensitive electronics confidently.
Like most Champion Power Equipment inverter generator models, this one also features Quiet Technology, which ensures it operates at a lower noise level (61 decibels).
Finally, we must mention that the product is CARB compliant, which means it meets the emission standards set by California Air Resource Board. Thus, you can buy it without worrying about harming the environment.
What Could've Been Better?
Unfortunately, it doesn't come with a parallel kit. So, be prepared to make additional expenses to buy one if you want to connect it to another inverter to increase the output power during outdoor events or tailgating. Other than that, the product works perfectly.
This list would have remained incomplete had we not included the GN4500 RV-Ready Portable Generator from WEN. Affordable yet with extraordinary features, this generator can provide you with the required power where and when you need it most. Want to know more? Well, then keep reading.
Generate up to 4500 starting watts and 3600 running watts
4-gallon fuel tank provides a half-load runtime of up to 13...
Why Did We Like It?
Firstly, those planning to use it on their RVs will be pleased to know that it comes with a 120V RV outlet, making it incredibly easy to connect with RVs.
As far as the engine of the generator is concerned, we are pleased to inform you that it couldn't be more robust. In fact, it is a 4-stroke, 212 cc engine that can generate up to 3600 running watts and 4500 surge watts of steady, clean, and reliable power.
Beyond that, the tank needs to be discussed as it is decently large and can hold up to four gallons of fuel, enabling the product to run long (13 hours). And finally, it is backed by a two-year warranty; hence repairs and replacements should be the least of your concerns for the first two years with this product.
What Could've Been Better?
Although the product is compact, it's not lightweight as advertised. In fact, at nearly 108 pounds, it is one of the heaviest generators on this list. So, make sure you purchase the wheel and handle kit to move it from one place to another.
Pros
Backed by a two-year warranty
Sports an affordable price tag
Has a highly-efficient engine
Comes with a large fuel tank
Cons
Quite heavy
Quiet 4000-Watt Generators Buying Guide
Now that you have gone through our top recommendations for quiet 4000-watt generators, we think a buyer's guide will help you make an informed decision. In this section, we have discussed the important aspects of a 4000-watt generator so that you don't have any problem choosing a unit that works best for you.
Make sure you read the entire thing; otherwise, you might miss out on a thing or two. Also, if required, note these points down on a piece of paper and keep it handy while purchasing.
1. Runtime
The runtime of a 4000-watt generator is an essential factor that you need to consider while making a purchase. After all, it determines the total time the generator will run on a tank full of gasoline at half the rated wattage. More often than not, the runtime depends on the size of the tank and the engine.
However, it also significantly depends on the load. In other words, the number of electronics that you are connecting at a time. To increase the runtime, make sure you don't power too many devices simultaneously.
2. Portability
You want to make sure that your generator is portable for transportation and storage. Fortunately, most 4000-watt generators are not bulky and can be carried from one place to another. Also, these days, many models have wheels underneath them that further enhance their portability and ease of storage. We recommend that you choose one such unit.
3. Noise Level
Generally measured in decibels, the noise level is yet another important factor that you can't afford to ignore while purchasing a portable generator. You wouldn't want the generator to be too noisy to ruin the camping experience or disturb your rest.
Therefore, make sure that you go with a unit with a lower noise level between 50 and 70 decibels; the lower, the better. Don't worry; all the products we have reviewed are within that range.
4. Warranty
Make sure that the generator you are going for comes with a warranty. This is because a warranty ensures that you don't have to incur additional expenses to repair or replace the generator if it malfunctions in the future.
Apart from that, a warranty means that the product is of good quality and it will last a long time. Usually, 4000-watt generators are backed by a two or three-year warranty, and some brands may even offer lifetime technical support, but still check before purchasing to be safe.
Here, we have answered some of the most commonly asked questions about 4000-watt generators. Hopefully, you will find them useful.
Q1. How is a 4000-watt generator better than a traditional unit?
A 4000-watt generator is better than a traditional generator in many aspects. To begin with, inverter generators don't cause voltage spikes and distortions too often, making them an ideal option for connecting phones, laptops, and other sensitive electronics.
On the other hand, traditional generators tend to cause voltage spikes when there is a sudden increase or decrease in the current. Apart from that, 4000-watt generators are portable and produce low noise levels, while that's not the case with the traditional units.
Q2. What are the items that a portable 4000-watt inverter generator can power?
A 4000-watt generator can power many electronic appliances such as TVs, refrigerators, and even air conditioners. Furthermore, you can use it as a backup power supply in your home during power outages.
Quietest 4000-Watt Generators Verdict
With that, we have almost reached the end of our review-based guide. And hopefully, now you are equipped with all the necessary information to get yourself the right 4000-watt generator. However, if you are still confused, then stick around for a couple more minutes as we let you in on our favorites from the list to make things crystal clear.
According to us, the DuroMax is the overall best, simply because it can handle heavy loads and sports a budget-friendly price tag. Additionally, the Champion Power Equipment Open Frame Inverter is also a decent option, as it is highly fuel-efficient and backed by a 3-year warranty.
And if you are looking for the quietest portable generator, you cannot go wrong with the Westinghouse.
Are you on a budget but still in need of a bicycle parking rack, toddler chair, or other essentials? Do you have some spare PVC pipes that you don't know how to dispose of?
We have a DIY solution for any home project problems, whether you're short on finances but need to finish a project or have excess PVC pipes from previous plumbing works.
This article will present 50 easy and useful DIY PVC pipe projects you can make from the comfort of your home.
50 DIY PVC Pipe Projects You Can Do Today
Polyvinyl Chloride pipe, or PVC pipe, is a type of economical material used in sewer systems and water lines as it is durable and resistant to environmental factors over time.
Yet, there are instances where excess PVC pipes can be left rotting in the nooks and crannies of our storage space after construction or DIY repairs.
There will also be times when we'll need budget-friendly solutions for everyday needs, such as storage racks or even interior design elements.
So, instead of stocking PVC pipes, we can reuse them for other purposes which are laid down below. Let's get started!
If you are a habitual cyclist who uses bikes to-and-from work or are a serious cyclist who competes in marathons and races, you'll surely need a bike rack for your two-wheeled buddy.
To make a sturdy and reliable PVC bike rack while keeping your budget on track, use 3/4-inch PVC pipes and assemble them to replicate the image above.
The key challenge here is ensuring that your front wheel can fit and balance between the gaps.
During summer beach days or camping trips, you would want your toddlers to feel comfortable sitting down while getting some sun through this DIY PVC pipe project – a toddler chair!
In making the toddler chair, you must have a 3/4" PVC pipe, eight elbows, and six PVC tees.
You will also need to add a cloth that will serve as the seat and backrest. You can use fabrics showing your toddler's favorite cartoon character, superheroes, or preferred colors.
An organized station for your drilling tools can bring joy to every individual immersed in mechanical work. You can work with PVC pipes to make organization happen even on a budget.
In making a drill dock PVC pipe project, you'll need to measure your drills and buy PVC pipes with diameters that can fully accommodate your equipment once slotted in.
Providing your kids (and kids at heart) a fun time means creating PVC pipe projects that are entertaining, like a water shooter.
Making this PVC pipe project is easy because you only need the barrel (external) and the piston (internal), both of which can be made with different-sized pipes.
You'll need to insert the piston into a relatively larger barrel with a seal cap on top that has a drilled hole. This creates enough pressure to push the water out in the signature super soaker style.
Keep the intensity (and fun) high during kiddie parties or family gatherings by shooting marshmallows everywhere! To have enough for everyone, you must have a cost-effective alternative – a DIY PVC pipe marshmallow gun!
It is easy to make, as you only need to combine PVC pipes, tees, and elbows to create a gun-like shape. Just ensure both ends are open to blow on one end and push the marshmallow out the other.
When teaching your kids, and even some adults, to swim, they need reassurance that they will float no matter what, and you can do that through pool noodles.
To elevate your pool noodle's buoyancy and ease your tutees, you can cut it in half and insert a PVC pipe between the two noodles for additional stability and rigidity.
You can also use this for pool photoshoot designs if you keep the water noodles festive and on theme.
As you create a PVC pipe aquaponic garden, sustainability and healthy living can now be found within your household.
To do this, you have to connect your PVC pipe (fluid conveyance) with holes to a water source (hose) and make sure that the latter can generate water throughout your pipe system.
Living in the modern world also calls for modern solutions, including a DIY laptop holder made of PVC pipes.
To do this, you need a 1 to 1-1/4-inch PVC pipe and six elbows. Then, you can sand and paint them to your liking. Lastly, connect them using glue to form an angled-laptop stand based on the size of your device.
If your hobbies include collecting shoes, the first thing you need to remember is the answer to the question: where will I put the shoes?
The most obvious answer is a shoe organizer. Yet, if you are on a tight budget for organizers, as most of your funds are focused on buying shoes, PVC pipe may be your friend!
You can cut a standard-sized 6-meter PVC pipe into 15 to 20 short lengths, depending on your shoe size, arrange them like the image above, and you can have your very own DIY shoe organizer.
Relaxation is not complete without a cabana, whether by the swimming pool, at the beach, or right in your backyard.
Lounging in the comfort of a cabana while sipping your coffee does not need to be expensive, as you can include it in your lists of PVC pipe projects.
To do this, you must have at least eight PVC pipes, which can be six to ten meters long, depending on your desired design. Then, connect these PVC pipes using L and T-shaped fittings.
Recycling your stock PVC pipes can also help up your indoor design by making it the mirror's frame. As we know, mirrors are essential parts of a home that can create the illusion of a bigger space in a smaller area.
To make a starburst pattern mirror, any tutorial would include cutting each pipe, gluingthe pipes together in your chosen design, and attaching them to your walls via screws.
Moreover, you can also elevate this inexpensive way to decorate your home through light spray paint or aerosol paint.
During the summer, one thing that both you and your kids will enjoy doing is making a lemonade stand to sell lemonade.
Before we proceed with the selling part, you can create a lemonade stand PVC pipe project with your young entrepreneur using a 40-foot PVC pipe, and slip tees, all of similar diameters.
After you have assembled the PVC pipe system, you can paint the signage by hand or with spray paint, add a stand cover, and let your kids start selling!
If you want to spark excitement among the young ones during your annual family gathering or just for your usual weekend leisure, DIY projects like this kids' sprinkler will be perfect for any occasion
To make this DIY PVC pipe happen, you must use your imagination, lay out a design, buy PVC materials, use colorful tape and design all over the sprinkler, and connect to a water source like a hose.
When you want your kids to feel the excitement and sensory stimulation from a ball pit without actually going to a ball pit park, ball pit PVC pipe projects are a great idea.
Aside from using a PVC pipe, it would be best to have some water noodles, elbow connectors, pipe glue, zip ties, netting, and balls.
Moreover, an additional way to boost your kids' mood is by incorporating their outdoor slides as an entrance to the kids' ball pit.
In trying to introduce the world of books, and life in general, to your kids, you are left with so many books and so little space to keep them. A bookshelf DIY PVC pipe can save your day!
With a bookshelf DIY PVC pipe, you secure the books and keep your little ones' areas nice and tidy. Make sure to make a shelf they can reach when their need to read arises.
Tip
The bookshelf design in the image above can also be used as your bag organizer within your closet.
During summer breaks, we need something that will keep our kids' minds busy, their bodies moving, and their hearts gleaming with joy, and there's no better way to do that than with a kiddie carwash in your backyard.
Aside from using a PVC pipe for the structure and fencing, make sure you have fabric, textiles, water toys, paper designs, sponges, a pool noodle, an expansive lawn, and colorful cones to add to the fun.
In the digital age, where content creation has been the topmost priority to earn money, and social relevance, an overhead camera mount is another essential that you need to have to take pictures or videos from a bird's eye view.
Overhead camera mounts on the market are expensive, so including this in your DIY PVC pipe projects is a must.
For this, you must ensure the lower PVC pipe mount is sturdy enough to support the neck and the weight from the camera once mounted.
Birds need water to drink and to keep their bodies clean. To do that, they will need a bird bath.
But, a bird bath does not need to be expensive, it just needs to be efficient, and you can do that by creating one in your backyard using PVC pipe.
You can use a thick PVC pipe as the column of the bird bath. You can also cut a PVC pipe into sections, cut them in half (vertical), and form a frame using elbows to create a table-like bath.
Birthday shoots, homecomings, and other celebrations need a photo booth; in that booth, you will need a backdrop stand. Well, with that problem, the best solution is a DIY PVC pipe square frame covered in fabric.
It's easy to do as you only have to ensure the mount is well-built, the stands that hold it are well-balanced, and the fabric you attach is aligned with the theme.
If you or your kids' hobbies involve arts and crafts, something that will surely spark joy in your lives is a craft room tool organizer.
Aside from the end product, you will also enjoy the process of making PVC pipe projects like the image above.
To make it more creative, aside from when you cut PVC pipe, remember to paint the tubes in your favorite hues and incorporate different patterns to make them lively and fun.
Things can get messy in a hardware store or workshop when tools and accessories are in disarray. Yet, you can prevent it with tool pockets PVC pipe projects.
This project's straightforward process only involves cutting the PVC pipe into a tube with lengths depending on the tools.
Then, proceed by painting (optional), attaching them to a wooden wall board, or just letting them stand tall above your work desk.
Cleaning the gutter takes tons of energy as you need to climb the roof and clean it from there. However, times have changed, and the DIY PVC pipe projects game has leveled up as you can now have a no-ladder-toss gutter cleaner.
To make this gutter cleaner, you must assemble the nozzle and the valve. The nozzle will be the one that will clean the gutter, and the valve is the one connected to your air or water source.
Having kids means providing them with their own beds. Yet, what if you are on a budget or have a small space? The answer is a DIY PVC pipe bed!
In building a pipe bed, the foundation is the main thing you need to stabilize. They must be adequately connected using elbows and have different columns attached through a T-shaped PVC pipe.
Moreover, you can use cute rainbow washi tape designs to make it more appealing for the kids and tape it all over the poles.
If you are looking for fun and games to keep your kids away from the spell of gadgets during the summer, you can create a fall wall for kids inside your home or in your garden.
For a complete tutorial, what you need to have are PVC pipes, elbows, a board where you can glue these materials, and a container so that the balls will not go anywhere upon falling.
You can also add some colors to your pipes using spray paint. Make sure that the colors you incorporate are eye-catching and can stimulate visual sensations.
A fence is a protective element that protects the perimeter of your yard, yet it sometimes costs a lot, especially in this economy. However, there are cheap but reliable alternatives, such as a PVC pipe fence.
Aside from securing your homes, it can also be an excellent addition to level up your garden aesthetics, especially when you know how to design the fence using T and L-shaped PVC pipes.
Another inexpensive way to organize your cords is by creating a PVC pipe cord organizer.
To do this, you only need to cut a PVC pipe horizontally to the lengths you need, attach them to the wall using glue or an adhesive, or drill a hole and lock them with a screw.
In every pool session, your kids would gladly want a place to get or hang their wet towels to dry off quickly. A PVC pipe drying rack is the best affordable idea you can get in this case!
You can have it in a two-way parallel design or a layered rack similar to the image. Just remember to make the frame foundation well-connected to ensure the balance of the rack.
You can permanently mount the drying rack in your garden. It will act as your pool towel hanger and washed clothes dryer instead of letting them dry inside the bathroom.
Extracting honey from honeycombs can be done quickly using a honey spinner. To help small-time beekeepers, a DIY PVC pipe spinner can be used as a cheap yet efficient alternative.
In making the PVC pipe honey spinner, you only need about a meter and a half of PVC pipe to seal the deal.
When you are a busy person who goes to the office before sunrise and leaves after sunset, you surely won't have spare time to water your garden. Yet, it's not a problem when you have a sprinkler socket system.
You must assemble and connect the pipes to a primary water source or hose for an irrigation sprinkler socket system to work.
A fun detail to add in a kitchen is a floating window planter for your herbs, which means having flavor and health benefits right within your reach while preparing food.
You must have at least a 4-inch PVC pipe to have this kind of magic indoors. Then, you must put holes in the pipe's body, depending on how many herbs and shrubs you will plant.
Also, ensure the holes are big enough for the plants to breathe and take in enough water for sustenance.
If you are tasked to decorate your house's interior design, an idea worth doing is a PVC pipe lamp project.
For PVC pipe projects like this, you need to follow this tutorial: cut a PVC into a tube, depending on the diameter of your liking, carve different shapes and patterns on its shell, paint, and put a light source inside.
In addition, you can also put this as a table centerpiece to level up your table décor and preparations.
Remember
You can always complement the PVC with a wooden lamp by following the full instructions in this DIY wooden lamp article!
A PVC pipe can also save your dull day by helping you create a ladder golf game for kids and adults.
The tutorial for this project is simple, as you only need to connect the lower frame with the standing frame and add other accessories using yarns or ropes.
A PVC pipe can transform a plain and simple yard into a play and training area for kids who like playing soccer or association football.
To create a sturdy soccer goal, use a thicker PVC pipe about 2 inches in diameter, and attach a net around it. You'll have your little FIFA players scoring goals in no time.
Sometimes the floor area of your garage is not enough to cater to all of your stuff (given your car and associated tools), which is why you need to be creative and integrate additional overhead storage using PVC pipe.
To do it, you must connect the pipes and use a screw to safely fasten the pipes to the garage's ceiling.
Oils can be reused, but sometimes, recovering them after every use isn't easy. Yet, it's an easy task to do when you have an efficient oil recovery system made of PVC pipe.
For this, you must assemble a tube that connects to a particular funnel. You will need another pipe that will act as the main line for all the other tubes and another connection that will lead the oil right into the recovery bin.
If you think glass and wood are the only table materials that bring out the aesthetics in every house, then you're wrong because a PVC pipe table can be an elegant addition to your interiors, too.
Aside from being sophisticated furniture when it comes to visuals, a PVC pipe table can also be a valuable item that can house your fish, just like in the image above.
Dogs like to play and sleep anytime and anywhere, but it will surely make them feel more loved and cared for when they have their very own dog cot to play and sleep on.
A PVC pipe dog cot is simple to make. Its complete tutorial only involves making a frame, cot feet, and adding fabric that will act as the dog's bed.
When using a vacuum, we tend to forget where we placed a specific attachment, and in turn, delay our cleaning or storing.
To help you keep things tidy and secure, we have a solution allowing you to store all your vacuum attachments in a single area – a PVC pipe vacuum attachment holder!
All you need is a pipe with a diameter that fits the opening of your attachments, connect it to wood or wall using a screw, and stick and store your vacuum attachments.
Earlier, we discussed how to build a cabana, and the best pair to a cabana is a PVC pipe utensil serving station to complement your outdoor set-up with a fitting buffet.
To make your serving station, cut the PVC into the length of your utensils from the neck down to the handle. After that, you can style the pipes using ribbons or other colorful accessories.
Then, you can store the utensils inside your DIY PVC utensil serving station.
Tip
You better check out the tutorial on plastic spoon crafts to be aware of the other creative and fun activities you can do with your utensils.
When your life revolves around fishing, you most likely have a lot of fishing rods stored in your garage. That raises the question: how can I store all these rods?
The answer is simple, use a PVC pipe similar to the image above. A PVC pipe organizer can house at least eight fishing rods. But it can still accommodate more, depending on the size of your PVC pipe.
You do not need heavy equipment to cut through a PVC pipe, as a string can help you get the job done.
This is done when you create friction by continuously rubbing the string around the area of the pipe you want to cut. After a few tries, the friction will neatly divide the PVC pipe.
Moving a mattress from one place to another is a no-brainer with a full tutorial on how to make a PVC pipe mattress transport sling.
To do this, you need to make a bottom structure based on the average length of your mattress, vertical stands to connect the bottom and top parts, and a rectangle-like upper part that will serve as holders.
Doing your hair is all fun and games until you finish the actual hair styling part, and you are left with nothing but a question about where to put your hair dryer and flat iron.
Well, we have an answer – a PVC pipe hair dryer stand!
The complete tutorial for the hair dryer stand is undemanding, as you only need a Y connector PVC pipe to solve any hairy situations.
Last but not least from this PVC pipe full tutorial list is the flower vase that can elevate the visual aesthetics of your home, office, or other places.
To do this, all you have to do is get a Y connector or an elbow PVC pipe, put some flowers on it, and display it on your coffee table or give it as a gift on Mother's day.
DIY PVC Pipe Projects FAQs
We know you want to clarify some things related to PVC pipes and DIY activities. Well, we have some of the answers to your FAQs in this section. Read on!
How can you make a PVC pipe look nice?
You can make a PVC pipe look nice by doing the following:
Adding light to dark paintcolors
Decorating with a stylish Washi tape
Reusing it in your garden, bathroom, or as house decor where you wouldn’t expect to see PVC pipes
How do you bend PVC pipe DIY projects?
You can easily bend the PVC pipe by putting oven-heated sand inside the pipe for about a minute.
Conclusion
With all the do-it-yourself projects on PVC pipes from this list, you can surely have an enjoyable, productive summer with your kids through the different activities listed above.
Just remember that a PVC pipe is not only for sewers and water systems, as it can also be your best companion for a fun-filled activity and the best one for organizing stuff.
Now, get your pipe, follow the tutorial of your preferred DIY, and create magic with your PVC pipe projects!
Fall is here, finally; we are prepared, the 111 world's coolest pumpkin designs to carve this fall follow, these ought to transform everything.
Fall is already awesome, we all know it.
Fall embellished by the scent of freshly cut, curved pumpkin occasionally animated from within by a candle is something different entirely though, it is simply magical so cast a glance and surge inspiration, regardless of event or celebration, the pumpkin that will inspire you is in the following gallery and from that point on you are solely responsible to create something unique, authentic, original, something truly memorable. In the following gallery, you will find both carvings that can appeal to Halloween per se as well as general or specific themes that can serve certain events or simply the fall itself throughout.
From simple tutorials to extraordinarily advanced ones, the gallery invites creative enthusiasts to start playing, preferably with friends and loved ones; it invites one to use this decorating motif to express themselves in a creative, artistic manner, Cast a glance in the following gallery and tell us what do you think, we would love to hear your thoughts in the comment section below.
World's Coolest Pumpkin Designs
1. Diy cool owl pumpkin carving
A pumpkin can hold an owl carving beautifully thanks to its shape, whether the pumpkin is round or elongated, an owl will fit beautifully. One could search for free owl pumpkin stencils online yet the the simple design above can be reinterpreted with ease without a stencil too!
2. Showcase your harvest with a sunflower pumpkin carving
Super swift, super graphic, and extraordinarily meaningful is to carve one of the fall's most beautiful and most representative plants on a pumpkin; they are part of our harvest, and we ought to cherish them in home decor too!
Halloween will soon be upon us and getting that scare-factor all carved out through one pumpkin only is not such an easy task, get in the zone, and practice in your next craft session!
The background of this carving, here animated by light is something spectacular, something different entirely, it might take some practice but it will be worth the effort!
It is super rapid and super efficient, quite scary too! You can create the holes with any knife and the plastic mouses are super accessible. Get creative, use them wisely!
6. Snoopy pumpkin carving
Snoopy ought to be able to rest wherever he pleases and a pumpkin carving can apparently make him great great justice, how does he look on your end?
We all have this super awkward smile from time to time when we silently politely agree with a friend against our inner will. Such a smile might be creepy, and frightening at times and this pumpkin carving can surely vouch for that, just cast a glance!
Death can go places, it is actually all around, death pumpkin carvings are a recurring theme during Halloween but they surely aren't for those weak of heart, how do you see these?
Pumpkin carvings can be standing or they can be part of an installation that does not necessarily imply other pumpkins, The picture above describes a little zombie attempting to grab someone or reaching out, emerging from the grave, it might give someone quite the scare, a really impactful installation.
24. Beautiful and insanely creepy pumpkin carvings
The superb pumpkin carvings above simply present distinct qualities, and grim human-like features that set them apart and give them that wow factor, beautifully spooky.
A rather rapid carving that can be greatly interpreted thus offering one great freedom of expression, the general theme can also translate into versatility.
Here the teeth and eyes are greatly accentuated, they convey an awkward situation for the pumpkin in a really funny manner, creating as much depth as possible to emphasize your design.
36. Pierce pumpkins and illuminate them from within
A rapid carving option if realized with a power drill; be playful and you will have extraordinary results.
37. One pumpkin carving art piece that will scare your guests
Simply frightening, extraordinarily detailed, and graphic, a piece of art that once accomplished should sit on the fireplace mantel, gaining the much-deserved attention.
A super creative craft, one that will surely surprise your guests, especially children around the Halloween dinner table, have fun, and maybe even attempt to sculpt the whole outer pumpkin as a metallic cage.
via lhj.com
41. Sculpt an epic pumpkin installation
It might require some work yet a big pumpkin eating a pumpkin brain is surely great eye candy for your Halloween celebration. Needless to say, the scent of the carved pumpkin will be beautifully combined with the one of the candle thus creating great coziness and warmth in your fall-decorated home.
A really really simple carving that will surely grasp everyone's attention, get creative, get carving!
Source Unknown
47. Dazed Pumpkin Carving
Simply present the pumpkin dazed, stunned, it is splendidly playful, and children will love it!
Source Unknown
48. Leaves and Traditional Motifs
All regions can particularize their pumpkins through different means, and different patterns, speak of your traditions with traditional motifs on your pumpkin!
via designsponge.com
49. One evil smile
Things can come easily to pumpkins and carvers alike, simply choose something that you would enjoy doing!
Source Unknown
50. Use the tail of the pumpkin
The tail of the pumpkin can greatly accentuate carvings in a super creative manner, the eyes can be placed within the folds thus creating super playful faces.
via smithratliff.com
51. Pierce and scale
One electric drill can make this process super easy and once scaled and illuminated from within, your pumpkin set will look extraordinary.
Use paint if needed, add some leaves to further emphasize the apple image yet pay great attention to the middle, beautifully carving the core can make or break your design.
Great solution for immense pumpkins that you would like to place around the yard, feel free to use the elect drill to accentuate the middle even further.
via Gayle Schmidt
54. Pumpkin eating small pumpkin design
A super creative piece that you can easily realize with the little ones, simply find the right-sized pumpkins.
A great showcase of how the right cut can transform the volume, extraordinarily creative and ingenious installation, materialize it, scale it, and scare!
Numerous possibilities here but the head of the killed pumpkin, smashed, is extraordinary and so is the pumpkin throwing the head of another pumpkin. You will gather numerous smiles with this installation in your front yard, get creative.
The crescent moon is an iconic shape for Halloween, it can fit anywhere and it can beautifully emphasize its settings, on the black background, in particular, it shines.
Pumpkin carving ideas can beautifully surprise during Halloween and so can various pumpkin installations and playful sculptural ideas. A Halloween without a pumpkin is like a fall without a harvest, one might argue. Gather your family in a craft session and get creative with simple, beautiful ideas, it will be memorable, and splendid.
What do you think? Are the World's Coolest Pumpkin Designs in the gallery above? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
One of the most common problems seen while resin casting is the presence of air bubbles.
When the project cures, these air bubbles can leave unpleasant holes on its surface. Even though it's possible to sand and remove some of these holes, it can become a tedious job for large projects.
Hence, the best solution is to use a tool to take out the air bubbles from the resin before it is cured. And, this is why professional resin casters use a pressure pot to solve their problem.
A pressure pot is usually used to spray liquids and do paint jobs, but modifying it for resin casting is quite simple. However, the challenging part is choosing the right unit for your job. Therefore, we thought of creating this informative guide recommending some of the best pressure pots available on the market.
So, without further ado, let's begin!
1. California Air Tools 5 Gallon Pressure Pot
A professional resin caster would instantly fall in love with this pressure pot because of its excellent design. And, it takes only a few minutes to convert the pressure pot for resin work. So, you will be able to work with it as soon as the package arrives at your home.
When it comes to resin casting, most people have to settle for small pressure tanks. But, that isn't the case with this product as it has a massive ten-gallon cavity. The tank has a diameter of 15 inches and a height of 17.5 inches which is enough to hold medium-sized molds.
However, what we really like about this pressure tank is its Teflon coating. This ensures that you can quickly clean up the tank, especially during those times when there has been a spillage. The base material of the tank is steel which makes it even more durable, and it doesn't wobble when it's filled with air.
The pressure capacity of this tank wouldn't disappoint you as it works at a range of 20-30 psi which is enough for resin casting. And, the large lid gasket ensures that the compressed air won't be able to escape until you open the pressure relief valve.
The only complaint we found about this California Air Tools pressure pot was that some people received products with a maximum pressure label of 50 psi. However, most people seemed to have received the correct product. So, if you come across a similar problem, make sure to contact the company to get the correct item.
If you're just starting with resin work, you may not want to initially invest in a big pressure pot. This product from TCP Global has the perfect tank capacity for accommodating smaller resin molds. So, let's check out some features present in this unit.
The first thing we noticed about this pressure pot was the clamps. Every clamp is soldered onto the body of the pot, so there's no way you can lose them. And, when you tighten the clamps after lowering the lid, it creates a firm seal so that none of the compressed air can escape the tank.
Moreover, the best feature of this pressure pot has to be its size which is comparable to a medium/large-sized pressure cooker. So, this product is excellent for those who have to work with limited space. And, once the task is over, you can easily store it on a regular shelf.
Besides, this pressure pot is made of heavy-duty solid steel, so you don't need to worry about denting even while using it at maximum working pressure. And, the stainless steel finish makes it easy to clean the tank of this pot if there's any resin spillage.
Even though this is an excellent pressure pot, our only gripe is the time taken to modify it for resin casting. This isn't really a drawback as this product was originally meant for paint jobs and other similar tasks. However, once modified, this pressure pot will remain an integral part of your resin workspace.
Are you looking for a small yet effective tool for resin casting? If yes, then this vacuum chamber from Ablaze would be an excellent choice for you. It might look small, but along with the right vacuum pump, you can get a lot of use from it to make several projects.
One of the reasons people are wary of getting a pressure pot is because of its weight. This vacuum chamber weighs only 5 pounds, so anyone can lift it without any challenges. You can even place this product on a wooden or plastic table, and it won't weigh down the surface.
We especially liked the transparent lid of this vacuum chamber, as it gives you a peek inside the tank. This helps you to keep an eye on the resin project to see the progress. It's especially helpful for catching spillages as early as possible for easy cleaning.
Moreover, this product comes with an extended 5-foot pipe, so it can be easily connected to any vacuum chamber even if placed at a distance. And, the lid has a silicone gasket to create an airtight seal that would resist the loss of pressure.
We have read a lot of positive reviews about this vacuum chamber. However, some customers saw slight cracks on the lids that may have been caused during transit. So, if you face a similar problem, try contacting Ablaze to resolve it as soon as possible.
BACOENG is a leading producer of vacuum chambers, and this has to be one of their best models. Along with being an essential tool for degassing materials like rubber and epoxies, this product looks aesthetic because of the orange accents. So, let's have a look at the advantages of using it for your projects.
Even though many vacuum chambers do have glass lids, most aren't up to the mark. So, there's always a fear of it breaking, but you wouldn't need to worry about that with the glass lid provided with this item.
Unlike acrylic lids, this one is made of thick tempered glass so that it won't break even with the highest vacuum pressure. Moreover, it also allows you to take a look at your project during the curing process.
When it comes to the construction of this vacuum chamber, high-quality stainless steel has been used to make it. And, there's a small amount of chromium in the steel, which shields it from oxidation and chemical damage.
Furthermore, the company provides a food-safe square silicone mat with this vacuum chamber, which helps catch any leaking resin.
This isn't really a drawback of this vacuum chamber, but we have observed that it's significantly more expensive than other similar products. Having said that, it's also important to note that this unit comes with a high-quality tempered glass lid and a robust stainless steel body to make it durable.
Tired of looking for a vacuum chamber that's easy to use? Check out this one from P PBAUTOS as, along with being user-friendly, it has a large tank which is excellent for larger projects. So, let's take a peek at this stainless steel vacuum chamber.
Often, using a vacuum chamber can be complicated because of all the things that a person has to do. But, a resin artist hardly has time to go through it. Have no fear, as this item from P PBAUTOS has one of the most straightforward assemblies we have seen. Moreover, it comes with carrying handles, so you don't need to worry about transporting it.
A common concern among resin artists is the ability of vacuum chambers to hold the pressure, and this product does manage to do it quite well. The acrylic lid does have a good weight, which makes the seal even more effective. And, it won't release the pressure until you have opened up the valve.
Another excellent feature of this vacuum chamber is its quietness. Because of the silencers, the pot works in silence even when the vacuum pump is set to its highest pressure.
We can't complain about this product as it's a really great vacuum chamber for professional resin artists. However, it does have an acrylic lid which can be a drawback to some people. But, using the pot carefully will reduce the chance of damaging its lid, which is, in fact, bulletproof.
When it comes to purchasing a pressure pot, it's easy to get confused about the various options available in the market. One common mistake people make is that they don't check if the pressure pot can even be modified for resin casting.
Here's a guide for making the process easier for you to choose an excellent pressure pot that would last for a long time.
1. Size
One of the first things to check in a pressure pot is its size, as it would define the resin molds that can fit into the tank. Usually, the capacity of a pressure pot is represented with gallons, the most common one being the 2.5-gallon variant.
But, you should also check the diameter and height of a tank to make sure that your usual molds will fit into it. The dimensions are usually mentioned in the specifications of a product.
If you're looking forward to working with resin on a larger scale, it's better to get a bigger pot. However, you should also remember that a bigger pot will need considerably more air to build up the required pressure.
2. Pressure Capacity
The main goal of using a pressure pot is to create an environment to compress any air bubbles present in a resin project. Hence, the pressure capacity of a product will matter a lot, and the recommended pressure level for resin casting is between 30-50 psi.
Keep that number in mind while looking for a pressure pot so that it can be of use. As most units are made for spraying liquids, the capacity can stop at around 25 psi, which won't be helpful for resin casting.
Moreover, make sure to get a pressure pot that mentions its maximum pressure limit. This would let you know when to stop filling air into the tank. Be careful while setting the pressure, and if there's even a bit more, try to let the air out to achieve the recommended pressure level.
3. Ease Of Modification
You can't just use a pressure pot for resin casting after getting the product. The first thing you should do is change some of the valves and apply tapes to any areas from which the air may escape.
Hence, you should always pick a pressure pot that is easy to modify, as there's no justification for spending hours changing things up. We especially like those products that come with instructions about modifying them for resin casting, but it's also easy to find on the internet.
And, if a company states that its pressure pot isn't suitable for resin casting, don't even think about getting it for your work.
4. Safety
While picking a pressure pot, you should take some time to check its safety features. The products will often have things like a gasket on the lid for an airtight seal, safety valves, and clamps on the side to make sure that the pot is secure.
We also like pressure pots made with high-quality metal as it adds durability. If possible, look for pressure pots with commercial-grade safety features and certifications to remain tension-free while working.
Having said that, you should also remember to follow all the safety instructions while using the product and never exceed the suggested working pressure.
5. Pressure Pot Vs Vacuum Chamber
You must have noticed that we recommended some vacuum chambers along with the pressure pots. The reason behind this is that both products work equally well when it comes to getting rid of air pockets while the resin is curing.
Compared to pressure pots, the air is drawn out of the tank in a vacuum chamber, which shrinks the bubbles. Vacuum chambers also perform better when you are using rubber molds for resin casting.
And, those interested in DIY jobs can figure out a way to turn a pressure pot into a vacuum chamber and vice versa. But, always be aware of the pressure or vacuum limit to ensure safety.
Final Words
So, that's everything we had to tell you about the best pressure pots available on the market. We hope that this guide will help you find the right pressure pot or vacuum chamber for your resin projects. Also, do remember to go through the buying guide to make the correct choice.
Among our recommendations, we will suggest the California Air Tools 10-gallon pressure pot to anyone who works with bigger resin molds and doesn't want to spend much time in modifications.
In comparison, the TCP Global PT8310 2-1/2 gallon pressure pot is better suited for those who work on small projects. However, modifying this unit does take a little more time.
With that, we come to the end of this informative guide about pressure pots for resin casting. Do let us know if you have any queries regarding the suggestions.
Till then, take care and stay safe!
When it comes to measuring, precision is key, be it in distance or thickness; nearly every field calls for high levels of accuracy.
In environments where the slightest fractional difference can determine success or failure, these precision instruments are an essential tool. For measuring out ingredients or materials, there is nothing that comes close to using a precision scale to get the readings you need.
With so many variants to a precision scale on the market, how can one find a suitable model for their needs? Worry not, dear reader. We have included the absolute best scales available as well as a guide, so you can get the accurate readings you need.
This Nicewell digital scale is an easy-to-use precision scale to serve all your precise measurement needs. The scale measures accurately and has a tare function that makes it perfect for a digital kitchen scale. With four high-precision load sensors and a stainless steel platform, this is a complete package as far as digital scales come.
PRECISE WEIGHT： The digital food scale built-in four...
MULTIFUNCTION LARGE SCALE：9"x6.3" platform and Large lcd...
Why Did We Like It?
Being a digital kitchen scale, this Nicewell precision scale features a backlit LCD display that has multiple units for easy conversion. It is easy to change the units on display from the standard American ones to other units of measurement, like kilograms.
Additionally, there is a tare button to easily subtract the weight of a mixing bowl or container and get an accurate reading. This feature comes especially in handy when measuring food and other high-precision items.
Another handy feature is a low-maintenance design that is fingerprint-resistant while being durable. A stainless steel platform prevents items from sticking to the scale and makes cleaning a breeze using just a damp cloth. The tempered glass layer underneath also helps to bear the load for larger measurements.
What Could've Been Better?
Although there is an auto-off function that comes in handy for preserving the battery, it tends to switch the unit off quite quickly. This feature can become a minor inconvenience while cooking or going through a recipe, as you have to turn the scale back on after every few minutes.
Etekcity has designed this multi-functional and versatile scale to measure both liquids and solids. A uniquely designed stainless steel bowl is attached to provide high-precision measurements no matter what material you are measuring. Using strain gauge sensors and a clear LCD screen, the EK4150 makes for an excellent scale with various applications.
One feature that stood out in the EK4150 was the storage method when not in use. The scale turns into its own storage unit by using the bowl as a cover. Placing the stainless steel bowl upside down on the scale will protect it while being stored away.
Furthermore, the scale features an alarm and built-in conversion on the display to help speed up the cooking process. Having a bowl attached to the scale helps the tare calibration weights to provide accurate measurements in liquid and solid materials. The timer feature is also handy to notify you when preparing dishes without a separate timer.
Another outstanding feature is the LCD screen having a backlight, meaning it is easy to read no matter the lighting conditions. A built-in unit converter also helps make adjustments to get measurements as accurately as possible.
What Could've Been Better?
Where most scales require the user to manually input the units the scale should be measuring, the EK4150 does this autonomously. However, this can become counterintuitive as getting measurements in ounces for anything above 16 ounces is impossible; the scale will convert it to pounds.
Packaged with a digital meat thermometer, this food precision scale from Nicewell is a perfect tool to keep around the kitchen when preparing meals. Sporting a durable metal body design that is quite spacious, it can accommodate and measure a large number of materials with precision and ease.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
Measuring out liquid or solid materials is a seamless experience when using this Nicewell food scale. With a metal body, the scale is easy to clean and has a high load capacity. Even heavier or more robust materials will not damage the measuring platform so it can have an extended lifespan.
High-precision load sensors also allow the scale to give a fast and accurate readout in g, kg, lb, oz, fl.oz., or ml. The tare function and durable design allow this digital scale to accommodate wet and dry ingredients alike.
Furthermore, the control panel has a wide range of information besides the actual weight readout. There is an overload alarm and a low battery alert so that you can stay on top of maintenance. However, with its maximum 22-pound weight capacity, this shouldn't be too much of an issue.
What Could've Been Better?
This Nicewell scale has a metal body construction, so it is easy to see why it has a hefty weight. While carrying it around or getting it out of storage is not difficult, the extra weight may be a minor inconvenience to some users.
This precision scale from OXO International has several great features that make it a standout for measuring ingredients and materials quickly. A large digital screen and pull-out LCD display make it a contender as one of the best precision scales today.
Stainless Steel is Smudge and fingerprint-resistant
Zero function for taring the scale before weighing...
Why Did We Like It?
Although this precision scale already has a large area for placing material, OXO International has increased the effective area by including a pull-out feature on the display screen. Usually, large bowls and plates cause the screen to become shadowed, making readings challenging to see. This makes it much more convenient to use the scale even if you need a larger area than what is provided.
Furthermore, the weighing platform can be removed to make cleaning more accessible. And as it has a stainless steel construction, wet or sticky materials can be wiped off or washed away with a damp rag. Another benefit of having a stainless steel design is reducing the number of fingerprints and smudges on the scale between cleans.
Another feature that increases the OXO precision scale functionality is a dedicated button for unit conversion. Switching between oz, lb, g, or kg is tactile so that it won't be accidentally activated.
What Could've Been Better?
One slight caveat to using this scale is the half-second delay that it takes when the material is added or taken away from the platform. This forces the user to pause between adjustments to ensure the correct amount is being measured out.
An elegantly designed scale from Framar, the 0203 is both stylish and accurate, with a tempered glass platform and bright LCD display. With a low-profile design, it is easy to store away when not in use and is lightweight to allow for easy transportation.
⚖️ PROFESSIONAL – Unit Button instantly converts...
Why Did We Like It?
Using tempered glass as the base for the measuring platform, the Framar precision scale has an easy-to-clean design that is practical for various uses. It can withstand up to 11-pounds and is low-maintenance, only needing a quick wipe-down to get it clean.
Powered by two AAA batteries, the scale will power off after two minutes of inactivity. This gives the user more than enough time in between measurements to prepare ingredients without having to pause and turn the scale back on.
Additionally, the scale features a dedicated conversion button to switch between three units. Grams, pounds, and ounces give a range of measurements to work with and provide total accuracy with graduations of 0.05 oz at a time.
What Could've Been Better?
While the range of units that the Framar precision scale comes with is quite precise, it is limited to only three units. This simplification of units does restrict it if you are looking to measure a particular amount of material.
Megawise, as the name suggests, is a brilliant piece of equipment that provides accurate results every time. Apart from its functionality, this sleek and modern digital scale goes well in any contemporary-style kitchen.
High Precision & Wide Capacity – Measures from 1g up to...
5 Measurement Units – Easily switch between g, oz, lb:oz,...
Why Did We Like It?
From its sleek design to its functional aspects, the Megawise Digital Kitchen scale is modern through and through. First off, this product comes in a light white color and is made of sturdy tempered glass that is easy to maintain over time.
An LCD screen, tare, and unit button are conveniently located on one side of the horizontal screen so that you can look at the measurements and change the units with ease. The scale itself has four precision sensors that take accurate readings from 1g to 33 lbs, making it versatile in the amount of material it can measure.
Furthermore, there are dedicated buttons for both the unit conversion and tare functions, so the user interface is quite intuitive and easy to use.
What Could've Been Better?
A slight inconvenience to using a digital control panel is the accidental touch that occasionally happens. When working with wet material, the probability of having a "ghost touch" increases. While it is not a deal-breaker, digital controls are a factor that should be considered for this precision scale.
This kitchen scale from Greater Goods is trendy and accurate in measuring ingredients to the slightest gram. Preparing meals and portioning ingredients is much easier; from the bright LCD display to the intuitive and straightforward user interface, the Greater Goods kitchen scale is a solid choice for any kitchen.
Whereas other food scale models use multiple calibration weights, the Greater Foods kitchen scale uses only one. This increases the accuracy by having the total weight of the material measured on one axis. As a result, the scale is able to detect the slightest changes in weight, with a total of four different units of measurement.
Additionally, the scale has a beautifully minimalist design that blends into any kitchen decor. The body is also sleek enough to be easily stored out of sight when not needed. No longer will a singular scale stand out and take away from the overall aesthetic of the kitchen.
What's more, the measuring platform and body of the scale are low-maintenance. They can both be used and cleaned easily without worrying about sticky materials leaving marks and stains.
What Could've Been Better?
While the precision scale itself is accurate, the measuring platform does not offer much in terms of measuring real estate. It is narrower than the body of the scale, meaning large bowls or plates tend to shadow the display. A pull-out screen or larger platform would have been a welcome feature to have.
Whether you are baking, cooking, or simply prepping for meals, the Geekclick scale is a valuable tool to keep on hand. With high-precision load sensors, accurate measurements are taken in no time at all. The large LCD display is backlit as well to help you read out measurements in any lighting condition.
【ACCURATE WEIGHING】The digital food scale allows you to...
【OPTIONAL UNIT CONVERSION】Food weight scale is equipped...
Why Did We Like It?
Right off the bat, the control panel on this Geekclick scale has a user-friendly layout that is easy to understand. In particular, there is a button specifically for unit conversion, allowing you to measure the unit that you need. The scale will not automatically change units when a specific weight limit is reached, which makes following recipes much more effortless.
Another handy feature is the durability and ease of use that the scale. As it is made of robust stainless steel, cleaning is straightforward, and staining is pretty much non-existent.
Storing the scale away is made easy as well, thanks to the attached hook on the underside of the unit. With its slim profile, it lies flush against the wall and stays out of the way until you need it.
What Could've Been Better?
As is the case with several scales that use a touch-sensitive control panel, this Geekclick scale is prone to ghost touches. When measuring out ingredients, moisture or spilled material can cause the buttons to activate at the wrong time. This minor inconvenience isn't a deal-breaker, just an occasional instance that could have been solved with physical buttons.
Made from two of the most durable materials in kitchenware, this Geekclick kitchen scale has a solid build that will last you a while. Maintenance is also much easier thanks to the robust nature of these materials. Not to mention the incredibly hefty 22-pound capacity, it is sure to meet any meal prep measurement needs.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
Equipped with four unit measurements, this kitchen scale has a dedicated button to switch between them depending on your needs. It measures in one-gram increments, so there is as much accuracy as possible when adjusting ingredients on the platform. The sensors in the scale have been upgraded as well to give a faster readout as elements are added or taken away.
Besides, the scale features three modes for measuring out different mediums. There is a standard weight mode, a water mode, and a milk mode. Each mode is calibrated to accurately measure that specific medium to provide the best performance and versatility possible.
Of course, Geekclick has added a sharp LCD display screen that can be seen in various lighting conditions. This screen can also be put on a two-minute timer to preserve battery life and consumption.
What Could've Been Better?
One addition that would have been welcome in the control panel of the Geekclick kitchen scale is a dedicated button for the tare feature. While there is a button for unit conversion, the tare option is part of the power button, which is already used for auto-off and turning the scale on and off.
Pros
Fingerprint and smudge resistant
One gram increments
Auto-off feature
Lightweight design
Cons
No separate tare button
Precision Scale Buying Guide
Before you get into ordering a precision scale, there are a few things that you should keep in mind in order to get the best performance out of it. There are so many features and models from various manufacturers, so it is essential to know precisely what you should be looking for on a scale.
To highlight a few essential factors in the selection of precision scales, here are a few facets to consider.
1. Types Of Precision Scales
A. Tabletop
Usually, these types of scales are kitchen scales and are some of the most commonly seen precision scales. Some of these scales come with a container attached to the unit to help weigh out wet and dry ingredients alike. Otherwise, a separate bowl or storage container may need to be used alongside the scale.
Whether you are baking or simply brewing coffee, these food scales are able to accurately measure out the required amount of ingredients. Essentially, a tabletop scale is a perfect option if you are looking for kitchen scales and regularly engage in cooking.
B. Pocket Scales
As the name suggests, a pocket scale is a compact version of a precision scale. Being so portable, a pocket scale is ideal for making measurements on the move or for easy transportation. Of course, being so small, the scale will not have many advanced features like a tare or a container for measurements.
2. Design
Depending on the construction of the scale, the net weight that the weighing platform is able to support can vary. Durability and maintenance are also affected by the materials used in the design of the scale.
The weighing platform is an essential component of the scale, as most tasks that involve measuring use the platform as a base. This is why having an adequately sized platform is critical. After all, if you don't have much space to measure, then the scale won't be as functional as you would have hoped.
Another important feature to look for is anti-skid padding, which secures the entire unit and prevents it from moving while adjustments are made. By stabilizing the scale, it is able to take measurements more accurately. The more accurate the tool, the better performance you can get out of it.
Furthermore, if weight is a consideration, then you may want to opt for a hefty and robust or lightweight scale. Compared to other scales, the weight of a robust scale usually has a higher net weight capacity. On the other hand, lightweight scales like glass scales may have a lower capacity but are easier to transport.
Digital scales offer a backlit display to give readings to the user. For the absolute best in terms of functionality, then a pull-out display is the way to go. The benefit of having a pull-out display is being able to measure large items without it blocking the display while taking measurements.
3. Power Supply For Digital Scales
With the development of technology, today's scales usually run on battery power or use a USB connection to function. While a battery-powered scale is dependent on the battery life, a USB is able to run so long as it remains connected. Additionally, the battery life of a scale is determined by how power-efficient the scale is, which can be considered a maintenance factor in the long run.
4. Weight Capacity
When looking for the best precision scales, a high weight capacity does not always equate to better performance. The minimum capacity should also be considered, as it tells how accurate and precise measurements the scale is able to detect.
Of course, maximum weight limits are essential for weighing out heavier items; however, the maximum capacity is not always needed for regular, everyday use. Weight limits should only be considered if you plan on using the scale for an extensive range of materials and measurements.
5. Advanced Features
A. Auto-Off Function
The purpose of an auto-off function is self-explanatory. It will turn the scale off after some time in order to preserve battery life. An auto-off runs on a timer, so this feature may be a minor inconvenience if you take too long every time you measure ingredients.
B. Tare Function
One of the most common features found in precision scales is a tare feature. This setting will negate the weight of the container holding the material to be measured from the overall weight it detects. As such, it is incredibly useful for measuring fine or wet ingredients in a container without making a mess.
Verdict
With that, it is safe to say that you are now more equipped with the knowledge to get the correct amount no matter what you are measuring out.
Our top choice has to be the Nicewell, being the best all-rounder in terms of durability, accuracy, and functionality. However, the Etekcity and Nicewell Food Scale are worth looking into as well, with high-quality performance and build to match.
These precision scales come in handy for a simple weigh-in of ingredients when following a recipe or preparing a well-portioned and healthy meal. As the famous saying goes, measure twice, cut once; you will be cutting down on those pounds in no time with these handy scales by your side!
Are you looking forward to building a suitable chicken coop in your backyard?
Well, the first thing you need to do is to choose a plan that will fit your needs and give your chickens the right room to stay in. A portable coop plan lets you be more flexible in designing your coop and is also a popularly chosen option. So, it will be an ideal style to go for.
But there are a multitude of portable chicken coop plans available across the internet. As such you might get confused while searching for a plan that will fit your requirements.
To make your task simpler, we have selected the 30 best options for you. Also, we have included the details of the materials to be used, the structure, and a few instructions for each coop plan.
Read on to know more.
Portable Chicken Coop Plans
Classic A-Frame
If you want your chicken coop to be easy to manage, you will love this classic coop with an A-Frame shape. It has a whole lot of amenities that you can’t help being impressed with.
First of all, it has a large living area that is fit for breeding lots of chickens. Added to this, durable wheels help easy movement, while convenient handles enable pushing and lifting. Thanks to the sturdy material of the wheels, there is also not much wear and tear during the movement.
Most importantly, the coop can be moved to your grass lawn whenever you feel. In this way, the chickens could have sufficient insects and grass to graze on.
Also, the A-frame helps you to cover the lower portion easily during inclimate weather for added protection. Even placing water and food within the coop is not much of a problem.
Vacation Home
This one truly looks great and seems like it would be perfect for any beachfront. It has a run styled like a porch and a cute ‘upper-story’ living area. Equipped with wheels and handles, it is quite easy to move from one location to another.
Note that this coop is ideal if you have 8 to 10 chickens or a few more. The design is a very simple one and has few angular ends. There are quite a few segments so as to house more chickens than the tractor-shaped ones.
To make the plan a reality you can start by forming the structure through rectangular wooden blocks. Then move on to complete the coop through old treated plywood pieces and discarded vinyl floorings. These can make the walls and floor of the ‘vacation home’ respectively.
Besides, large windows can be made by cutting through the plywoods, but the openings must also be covered by hardware cloth. As such, the ventilation would be perfect for both scorching summers and freezing winters.
On The Go
Being one of the most innovative plans that you will come across, this would let you move the chickens just about anywhere. What does the magic is a combination of supportive and strong frames and large and durable ties.
Interestingly, this coop is made to look like a hutch and consists of an enclosure with both an outdoor and indoor area. Also, an external door lets the chickens free-range and forage prior to returning to the safely built coop.
To construct this coop, you just have to centralize the weight of the hutch so as to balance the gravitational centre of the two-wheels used for movement. Once this is done, your on-the-go chicken coop is all set to be used!
As for the number of chickens that can be housed, it can range from a dozen to more than 30. However, this doesn’t make any difference in the ease of movement, thanks to the balancing of the wheels. Also, the wire mesh windows keep away any predators, thus providing complete safety to your chicken.
Compact Hen House
If minimization of space is a priority for you, this plan would be the perfect option to go for. It is designed to be upright and compact and is meant for keeping a few hens.
Though its size is smaller than other coops, it has sufficient room to provide optimal comfort to the chickens. The structure is such that it provides a lot of vertical space, which is ideal for chickens as they roost in perches above the ground level.
Constructing this coop is simpler to many others and just requires wood pieces, fencings, pallets, wire mesh, a roofing sheet, and other odds and ends. As for the cost involved, it is just that of the PolyCarb sheet used for the roof and the wire mesh for the windows.
However, the process can be a bit time-consuming, since you need to get rid of nails and break down pallets from the fencings and wood pieces. But then, the completed coop will have two doors on the bottom “run” and two at the top, along with medium-sized wheels. So, it’s definitely worth the effort!
PVC Run Framework
Giving your chickens more space for roaming while also keeping them safe might seem tough on the face of it. But with this coop plan using a PVC framework makes this super easy to achieve. All you need for building this one is some fittings, nettings, and PVC pipes.
Ideally, hens should be given the freedom to roam in your backyard and scratch up some insects. In this regard, a coop made primarily from PVC pipes is quite convenient. It provides a protected space that you can move to different areas of the yard.
And the best bit of the story is that the whole thing can be put together in a matter of minutes. It may be done with or without tools, cutting, or glue.
Wrapping the safety netting around the PVC frames and securing the ends with wire ties may seem a bit difficult. However, two people working together on it can make the task much easier.
Cottage Classic
As the name suggests, this coop looks exactly like a mini cottage on wheels and is actually a diy chicken tractor. While turning this plan into a reality, you can make as many modifications as you desire to make it exactly like you want it to be. The result? Your chickens can have a ‘luxurious’ home.
However, the fun fact behind making this coop is that most of the things required are obtained from lay-offs of old structures. Wood pieces can be obtained from garden sheds or fencings, while wheels can be gathered from old mowers. You only need to buy the hinges for doors and the wire-mesh.
Also, as lovely as it looks from outside, it has an unbelievably easy design. While the ‘cottage’ part is meant for the living area and the nesting, the extended part built by pieces of rectangular fencing is the run area.
The rectangular pieces are also extra long to make for handles so that it becomes easy to pick the coop up. Apart from this, a medium sized window and a small hole at the back for ventilation make the coop complete.
Chicken Wagon
You might not have thought about it before, but an old trailer dumped in the backyard can act as a great foundation for your chicken coop. In fact this is the best possible way to reuse a trailer instead of letting it be trashed in a dump. Your coop will have great potential for placement as well as addition of run areas.
For making the living and nesting areas, you can take inspiration from the structure of gypsy caravans. Materials that can be used are odds and ends of rough wooden planks and frames of old windows. Interestingly, T posts can be used to make a sufficiently large portable yard and also to move the coop around easily.
As many as 8 nest boxes can be made inside the coop and you can access those from behind the doors. Storage areas are also present below and above the nest boxes. Also, there are two kinds of doors suitable for use in different climates.
Chicken Barrow
With this chicken coop plan, you can give the home for your chickens a different look altogether. It can be made by following some easy steps and only requires a few basic tools and supplies. Such a coop can also fit well in any backyard and is a quite budget-friendly idea to go ahead with.
This coop plan gets such a name due to its wheel-barrow-like shape. The design is actually referred to as a “hoop-house”. For the base, a rectangular piece of plywood with dimensions of about 8’x3’x3’ has to be used.
For the arched ends of the barrow, jigsaws have to be used to cut out the arch shape. One one end there is a nesting box with a hinged lid while the other end has a door cut out in between.
Ball-bearing wheels must be attached to base, and PVC pipes must be fitted as support for constructing the cover of the barrow coop. Thereafter, both chicken wires as well as welded wires are attached to cover the coop.
House in the Woods
Is building a cabin in the woods for your chickens a long-cherished dream of yours? If so, then this chicken coop plan will let you fulfill this dream in the easiest way possible. A playhouse that the kids may no longer want to use can form the basic structure of this coop. It can be conveniently used for 6-9 chickens that will also help in fertilizing your garden soil.
This playhouse-coop will have one door for the chickens and a human door to the run. Besides, the nesting boxes will be external and hence can be accessed without entering the coop. It will also have a flooring that is easy to clean. As for the transportation, the ‘cabin’ can be built on a low trailer or on skids to enable easy movement.
Ultimately, this chicken coop would keep your birds protected from attacks by predators as well as mosquitos. It would also provide you with maximum convenience, thanks to the doors and nesting boxes which will enable easy feeding and accessibility.
Rolling Coop
Most of the chicken coops seen nowadays are built at at least a slight elevation from the ground to enable more mobility. This is one such plan and allows for 4 wheels which make it easy to push it from one area to another without lifting or straining.
This coop has an inverted-V shape and has one nest box each on both the ends. While the back wall is made solid to keep away critters, a lift door is added to the main entry at the front. To make it further protected from racoons and other predators, the bottom portion is covered with chicken wire.
You can build this coop for housing 4 chickens at most but it needs to be moved often to allow the birds to forage. Once it’s ready for use, it can comfortably fit in average garden beds. Also, to make sure the wooden portions last longer, it would be best to paint those.
Geodesic Home
This plan might require you to get a bit more creative, but it is an ideal option if you need to move the run and coop across seasons. For fresh grass lawns or dorman garden areas, this is hence a perfect coop to go ahead with. Further, as a bonus, you will get free fertilizer for your gardening escapades next year.
This structure is strong enough to house and protect as many as 12 chickens. You can also build it quite conveniently with materials that are readily available. Also, a circular bed makes much more efficient use of the space than the rectangular one.
To build up the structure you require PVC pipes for making the dome and chicken wire to cover it up. As for the amenities, you can put in one nesting box and some perches for roosting. Nesting boxes can be made from the grass-collector of a mower. To ensure durability, you should clad it with scrap chicken wire.
Basic Frame
A-frames are one of the most popularly made forms of chicken coops. And this is another simply designed A-frame option that lets you easily access the nesting and roosting space of your birds. It also makes cleaning much simpler and allows convenient egg collection. You can fit it as per a wide range of flock sizes and can easily connect it to an additional run as well.
This chicken coop consists of a built-in nesting box and a perch. It would be suitable for rearing 2-4 chickens. The bottom run portion is clad with chicken wire, while there is a coop-cum-living space at the top.
With this plan your chickens will get as much as 40 square feet of run space and 10 square feet of coop space. Also, keeping the bottom covered with wire provides the chickens utmost protection. All in all, this plan is a perfect fit for someone who is looking to make a simple but also convenient and protective chicken coop.
Making The Rounds
This is another coop plan that offers you a fancy looking house for your chickens. Though it foregoes the traditional run, you can easily add one if you feel that to be more convenient. Being a compact and mobile henhouse, you can close it up for safety on each night, bring it to a garage or shed and then wheel it back each morning.
This plan will allow your chickens free range while also protecting them for hawks and other predators. It can be placed in a pasture and has beneficial effects on the land, thanks to the free range that the chickens get. There are also no major chores involved for cleaning the coop. What you have to do every couple of days is to push it onto fresh grass.
For building the coop, you must first make a box-shaped structure with dimensions of about 7’x3’. Supporting wooden planks fitted on all sides of the coop frame and the nesting box should be added on the end. As for the door, it is built in an easy-to-operate two-in-one fashion.
Little Egg Factory
This coop basically has an A-shaped design but it gives much more portability than other A-shaped plans. There are easy-grip handles at both ends to facilitate the movement.
As the bulk of the weight lies near the bottom portion, it becomes easier to move the coop. Added to this, there is perfect space-utilization with the run being placed beneath the living-space.
This coop is built by firstly joining thin rectangular wood -pieces just the way a basic A-frame is structured.
Two nest boxes are kept on the two sides, while a space for moving is cut out from the partition separating the living space from the run. Glue as well as screws are used for attaching the pieces, with the holes being pre-drilled.
As for the wheels for the coop, they can be installed on one end or both ends depending upon your preferences. If one end has wheels, then the handle should be on the opposite end.
Barn Inspired
If you would want your chicken coop to have a unique design but also not be too difficult to make, this plan is a great one. Your chickens would have a barn of their own, but it still won’t be too large and hefty in terms of the design. This style is also most suitable for simple customization, such as external access to windows, decor and nesting boxes.
This coop can be built just with the help of leftover building material and pieces of reclaimed wood. While the top part of the barn has the nesting boxes and the coop, the remaining part is entirely devoted to the run. And it is the top part where the doors and the arrangement for ventilation is made.
Most of the barn is covered by good-quality chicken wire to ensure maximum protection. There is also a ‘stair-way’ ramp connecting the top to the run. Easy movement is facilitated by wheels on all four sides.
Traditional Design
PVC pipes are commonly used in making chicken coops as they are lightweight and can be moved easily. This traditionally-styled coop is another hen house which uses PVC pipes as the main building material. It can be moved from season to season or just whenever you feel the chickens need a change of environment.
This coop has such an easy design that you can alone put it together in no time. Basically, it is a box of dimensions 2 mt x 1 mt x 1 mt and is suitable for holding 2-4 chickens. However, you can also accommodate more chickens by adding an extension to the original structure.
For moving the coop, you can just drag it along since it’s really lightweight to move. Thus there is no need to attach wheels either. Two nest boxes can be created with plywood and put within the coop, along with two planks placed above to act as the roosts. Clearing the nest boxes and accessing them for egg collection would also become very easy through this arrangement.
Budget-friendly Design
To make your chickens a coop with the maximum amenities as well as protection, the budget may often become a constraint. But this plan would provide you all that you desire and would yet not involve costs beyond your budget.
This coop is made by attaching pieces of 2x4 wood pieces to make the floors and walls. A firm base is constructed by using pallet wood which is a really cost-effective option. The wall is made sturdy by screwing the 2X4 wood pieces to the base and adding beams to cover it. Also, the floor made by adding the plywoods over the base gives the chicken flock a firm place to rest and stand on.
Even the roofs of this simple tractor are created through such plywood pieces, by attaching them to make 22 degree angles. After that, you would just need a corrugated metal sheet for the roof.
It is also super easy to make the doorway, as you just need to attach the front playwoods to the base at a gap of 16”. This large space is great for the chickens to travel in and out of the coop and also makes the leaning quite easy.
Easy Access Plan
Most people living in urban areas neither have many chickens nor have the space for making an average-sized chicken coop. This plan with an easy-access design will just be the right one for them.
It is also very simple to make and can be easily moved from one place to another. While the nesting and roosting space is in the upper portion, the lower part gives the chickens enough room to roam about. You can also connect a larger run without too much of hassle.
This coop has two nest boxes on both sides at the front, which can be easily accessed for egg collection by using the handles attached. As for the living area, it is divided into three segments and can be opened through hinged doors for feeding the chickens. Once built up, this chicken coop can also be maintained very easily.
The Kerr Center Chicken Tractor
This chicken coop plan is another suitable choice for producing home-grown eggs in urban settings. It is raised slightly above the ground and is actually a portable tractor. This design allows maximum run space for chickens, along with easy egg collection and cleaning of the rear part.
While the nesting boxes and an enclosed shelter are positioned at the backside, the front portion is entirely devoted to the run area. Also, the boxes are placed at a height of 20 inches, which also allows a part of the rear portion to be used for grazing.
A ramp is attached at the front opening of the shelter to let the chickens move out to the run area easily. Besides, the coop also has a door flap at the back that must be raised to access the eggs. It provides complete protection to the birds during the night.
Kevin’s Chicken Tractor
Among the range of portable chicken coop plans available, this one has an unique look and design. It closely resembles a rabbit pen due to the arched shape. You can easily move it from place to place since it is lightweight and has a set of wheels at the backside. And the best part is that no special tools or expensive materials are required to build it up.
As for the structure of the coop, the base is square-shaped and is actually made up of wood pieces. Three arches are made by attaching PVC pipes to the base, and welded wire is used to cover the coop up.
Chicken wire may be used in place of the welded wire, but the former is rather flimsy. Also, the door is made from wood as well, with its upper portion being arched to match the shape of the coop.
At the back is the external nesting box, with a pull-up hinged lid. All in all, if you are looking forward to constructing a light, portable yet well-built pen for your flock, this will be a great plan to go for.
The Mobile Stage Coach
This chicken coop is especially suitable for organic urban landscapes and gardens. It is in effect a chicken tractor, which will allow you to move the birds all over your property.
Note that those of you who are not that confident about building a coop all by yourself will love this option. That’s because you can order a precut version. This will save a lot of the work involved in building it up. It will also have a nesting radiant misting system or heater installed.
This coop has an extended roost area of as much as three feet. You get a plastic-lined roost floor to enable easy cleaning, along with an auto-feeder and auto-waterer. A stainless solar day/night ventilation facility is also made at the back.
Besides, there are plastic nesting insert trays that make cleaning the nesting space much easier. To sum it up, this chicken coop plan is a ‘super-speciality’ unit of your chickens and also ranks high in terms of convenience.
Back to Basics
The A-frame structure can be used for making a lot of simple and easy to maintain chicken coops. This is another such chicken coop plan which is also a cost-effective way to keep the birds in one place. You can even move the coop to any desired spot whenever you feel.
To make this coop, you will require lumber pieces of several dimensions for the A-frame. Both the tent-shaped sides of the frame should be supported by additional wood pieces attached in between. Similarly, the base must also have such supports in the middle.
Importantly, in this design, chicken wire must be used to cover the entire coop instead of plywood pieces. Movement takes place through wheels attached at about 3 feet from each corner of the A-frame. These wheels have to be accompanied by swing-up arms for moving the coop, that can be swung down to allow it to rest on the ground.
Hen Hideout
You can use PVC pipes not only to make the simpler and smaller chicken coops, but also relatively bigger ones. This hen hideout coop is among those great chicken coop plans and also represents fair value for money. You don’t require using any wood pieces to build the frame. For the movement, a large wheel is fixed at each corner.
This coop will provide your chickens with a fairly large protected enclosure to roam about. You can make the structure wholly out of PVC pipes as they won’t rot out or absorb any foul smell from the chickens. It should be made based on your requirement for living and run area. After this, you can cover the coop by attaching ½ ” wire mesh screens to the PVC pipes.
For making the ‘henhouse’, you have to use plywood. The quantity would again depend on the size you would want it to be. A medium henhouse generally requires about 11/32” inches of plywood. At the bottom of this structure, there would be swing-up doors to access the feeder, and for letting chickens out to forage.
The Hyperion
This plan is among the most affordable options in the list. Though it looks fairly basic, it is a truly effective solution to all problems that you might be facing with many smaller coops. Importantly, it has the coop space raised to a two feet height above the base. This gives the chickens a large area to roam about.
While plywood is used to make the coop space, hardware cloth is used to cover the bottom and rear run and perching areas. This coop has a waterer as well as a feeder attached to the wall by electric cables.
A chicken door is set on the wall of the coop. It can be opened or closed from the outside, which ensures that the chickens can’t escape when you do it. At the backside of the coop is a human door with side-hinges. If you have a door with a hinge at the top, when you go inside the chickens can run out through the side opposite to you.
Lane Brooder
Having a unique design, this coop offers two entrances for the chickens, one up to the coop and the other into the run. If you find that the chickens use the coop entrance, you can build a ladder for them. For making the basic structure of the coop, you can either gather a discarded wide wooden box or have to make one with plywoods.
Attaching the legs beneath and a door on the open end will give you the coop space. After this, you need to make the long rectangular run area by fixing pieces of plywood on the sides of the henhouse.
For making the nest box, a 4 x 4 plywood piece is used that keeps the hay piled up properly. As for the wheels, they are attached in the same manner as a wheel-barrow. So when you lift the small end of the run, it should tip up on the wheels.
Meaties Tractor
This a coop plan suitable for keeping meat chickens. Those of you who own a small flock can go for this plan which is simple to transform into reality. There also won’t be any budget problems as all the materials to be used are quite affordable. This coop can be made by using scrap lumber pieces for the coop space. For the run area, thin rectangular plywood pieces and wire mesh can be used.
While the run area is made in the form of a long horizontal extension from the hen house, the coop space is a box with dimensions of about 3’ x 3’. It has a door of medium height at the backside. You can paint the plywood portions of the coop black so that chicks are provided with extra warmth during the spring.
To allow easy access for cleaning the coop, there is a hinged opening on top of the run. As for the wheels, they can be repurposed from an old wagon or mower. Wide handles are also made from wood pieces which make movement very easy.
The Roadhouse
If budget is not a major constraint for you, this coop plan will be quite a nice option to go ahead with. Besides having a sheltered area for roosting, the coop also has a nesting box at one end.
As for the basic structure, it is the same as that of an A-frame coop and is made by using plywood. The coop is slightly raised and has a doorway to the run with a ramp attached for the chickens to move out. Corrugated vinyl sheets are laid on the floor, which makes it easy to clean the coop.
Welded wire is used to cover the run part as well as the lower portion of one side. Your chickens get a run of about 4x10 ft, which is quite a lot of area. They would enjoy this freedom, while also remaining protected, thanks to the strong welded wire. The nest box at the back end can be accessed from the top and is also easy to clean.
Coco Channel
This spacious as well as protected chicken coop is an ideal for anyone who can devote weeks to its construction and has a large budget as well. It is capable of holding more than 12 chickens comfortably. This plan even consists of flower beds for decorating the exterior and would definitely be a high-end coop for you birds.
This coop must be spread across an area of at least 80 square feet. It is basically a long rectangular cottage, with a “house” for the living area at one end. A ramp from the house leads to the long and sufficiently wide run area.
High-quality plywood has to be used for constructing this coop, which has a large nest box at the back. You can use the roofing material of your choice, but there must be a large tent-shaped roof. As for the wheels, they should be placed on all four ends.
The Mini Coop
This is another plan which utilizes available space quite efficiently. It is suitable for 3 to 4 chickens and can provide them pretty much room for roaming about. This coop is shaped like a tent, with the front run area being relatively lower in height and having a roof with a gentler slope.
While the run is covered with welded wire, the walls of the coop space as well as the roof are created by corrugated metal sheets. As for the frame of the henhouse, it is built by joining scrap wood pieces.
Large wheels are attached to the backside of the coop, and can be obtained from a discarded lawnmower. To move the coop, you just have to drag a bit from the front.
Perfectly Portable
This plan is pretty basic but looks quite adorable. Its design is also quite convenient and spacious. Moreover, the design is such that you can readily make it larger if you wish to have more chickens over time. A larger run can also be added when you need it.
But the most amazing thing about this coop is that it can be moved with just one hand. What does the trick is the use of PVC pipes to make a wide handle at the front. While the base is square-shaped and has dimensions of 5 x 10, the height of the coop is 6 feet. This size is perfect for a few home-grown chickens.
Also, the wood pieces used are made by ripping 2 x 6 pieces into two halves instead of the regular 2 x 4s, which reduces the weight of the coop substantially. A large nest box at the back and the front run area makes the coop a complete home with roaming-area for the chickens.
Conclusion
If the idea of having chickens seems exciting to you, you will surely want them to be safe and able to have enough room to roam. Chicken coops are exactly what you need to fulfill that purpose and keep your chickens healthy and happy.
However, for choosing a suitable plan, you must be clear about your priorities when it comes to a chicken coop. For instance, if space is not a constraint for you, plans such as a PVC framework or a perfectly-portable design may be suitable.
That said, if space is not ample but you still cannot compromise on the run, those such as the Little Egg Factory or the compact chicken coop would be ideal.
So, sort out your priorities and go on to choose a plan for making your chicken house. All the best!
Taking a shower in the bathroom in December can feel like quite a task. But not when you have the right portable bathroom heater.
During the winter months, your bathroom might feel colder than the rest of the house. That is not a very pleasant experience, meaning that your bathroom would feel unwelcoming at most times.
You can install the best space heaters to combat this situation. People are slowly shifting from natural gas space heaters to more portable variants.
But the problem actually arises when you visit the market and feel bombarded with a plethora of choices. To make your task easy, we decided to compile this guide with the top 13 products that you can try.
You will find a detailed round-up of the best products with a buyer’s guide at the end. Without any more delay, let’s dive right in!
If you are on the lookout for excellent compact bathroom heaters, it is best that you try the GiveBest 905. The heat output capacity of this bathroom heater is nothing short of incredible; rest assured, there will be no dearth of warm air once you install it.
2 in 1 heater fan: This ceramic heater provides two heat...
Multi protection safety system: These heaters are made of...
Why Did We Like It?
What stood out for us about this bathroom heater is that it comes with multiple heat settings. You can either put it on 1500W or 750W, depending on the exact temperature outside.
Once you set the temperature range, the heater will automatically turn off when the built-in thermostat reaches the correct value. As you can understand, it is pretty energy efficient and includes the best overheating protection.
It is ideal that you use the adjustable thermostat feature to keep the temperature of the room comfortable at all times. Moreover, it is important to note that this is one of those portable heaters that hardly makes any noise when switched on. The noise level does not go above 45 decibels, meaning it would sound like humming.
To sum it up, this portable space heater is a great buy because it is compact and highly energy-efficient.
What Could've Been Better?
As a bathroom space heater, this option is actually a great one as it ensures that the bathroom air is warm at all times. However, keep in mind that it is not good for large spaces for which you might need to install a central heating system.
When it comes to checking out the best bathroom heaters, there’s no way you can miss out on the Lasko CD08200. This ceramic space heater is designed to keep your bathroom warm in all weather conditions. Hence, it is suitable for both small and big bathrooms.
HEATS UP THE BATHROOM FAST – Say goodbye to stepping out...
SMALL & MIGHTY – Powered by an energy efficient 1500-watt...
Why Did We Like It?
The heating power of this bathroom heater is incredible and functions quickly. If switched on before entering the shower, you will see that the bathroom is completely heated up by the time you get out. The heating speed is pretty fast, and it is one of the best bathroom technologies if you like a spa setup.
Now, to be the best bathroom heater, a device does not need to be big. Just like this space heater, it can be small and mighty. The Lasko CD08200 is compact and comes with adjustable heat settings. But keep in mind that even if it looks small, it can generate a good amount of heat.
Additionally, unlike many portable bathroom heaters, this one is easy to assemble. You need to simply unpack it and plug it directly into a power source. Not to mention, using it is pretty straightforward too. There’s only one button, and you can adjust the heat settings with it.
What Could've Been Better?
If we are being picky, we have to say that we were not really happy with the size of the cable. Unless the charging point is nearby, you will see that the cord is short, and that might make the device fall. In that case, it is best to get an extension cord.
Next, we have one of the best bathroom heaters called the BEYOND BREEZE BNT-15L. Because of its great performance and excellent customer service, this item enjoys much popularity across the world. Once you buy it, this electric heater will surely make your winter nights more comfortable.
Ceramic Heat Elements - Ceramic small space heaters are fast...
Compact & Portable - Eelecric space heater has carry handle...
Why Did We Like It?
Finding the right ceramic heater is not an easy task. And once you use this item, we are sure you are not going to look any further.
This bathroom heater will make you feel comfortable after you are done taking a bath. When you start using it, you will notice that it heats up small bathrooms in a few minutes and large bathrooms in under 15 minutes. The electric coil ensures that it heats up the space fast and offers consistent heating.
Furthermore, this electric fan heater does not compromise safety. It comes with overheat protection technology, and you can rest assured that there are no risks involved.
There is an automatic overheat protection device installed in it. In case it gets too heated up, the overheat protection function will turn off the device immediately.
What Could've Been Better?
It is one of those bathroom heaters that make a lot of noise when switched on and many people have trouble dealing with this issue. However, its performance is incredible, and you can always put on some music to drown the humming sound of this fan heater.
The design of this device is noteworthy and will go with all kinds of bathroom furniture. Be it small rooms or big ones; the Dreo DR-HSH004 will ensure that you enjoy hot air in winter by distributing heat evenly. Means, you will feel comfortable even during the cold months of the year.
Faster Heat Than Ever: Powered by Dreo Hyperamics...
Shield360° Protection: Dreo Room Heater Heat up your day...
Why Did We Like It?
When winter is knocking on your door, it is an absolute must to try this good space heater. This ceramic heater is compact in size and will effectively heat up any space irrespective of where you put it.
We really loved how this portable heater comes with a hidden handle that makes it easier for you to carry it around. On top of that, it has an adjustable built-in thermostat and touch control technology that makes this electric heater super easy to use.
Not only that, this fan heater is pretty noiseless, and you will hardly feel its presence when it is switched on. This ceramic heater is designed keeping the comfort of users in mind.
What’s more, you can rest assured that there are no risks involved in using the product. The heating power is adjustable, and there are overheat protection mechanisms, ensuring that the device does not get too heated up and cause a fire.
What Could've Been Better?
Though the product exhibits an excellent heating element, we were not really impressed with the kind of packaging it had. On receiving the item, we noticed that the box in which it was delivered was tapered. From a brand as good as this one, we expected better,
For the ones who are looking for bathroom heaters that can effectively make winter more comfortable, the Antarctic Star 3618-B is their best bet. It is one of those ceramic heaters that provide quick heat and is also super convenient to use. We are not surprised that so many people love it.
Overheat & Tip-over protection：The heater has an anti-tilt...
Compact and Powerful :Dimensions:9.1" x 7" x 6", 3.3 pounds...
Why Did We Like It?
A bathroom heater should always be good at ensuring that the space heats evenly and this device aces this function. It is one of the best bathroom heaters to provide quick heating and is super simple to carry around. There’s a small handle by the side, and you can take it anywhere you wish to.
Apart from that, it is pretty suitable for small rooms and bathrooms. The size of this bathroom heater is small, and it will hardly occupy any floor space if you decide to keep it on the ground. So, even if you do not have a very large space, you can keep this device anywhere.
Also, it comes with adjustable heat settings. There are 3 modes that let you decide which temperature would work best for you.
Long story short, this device is highly energy-efficient, and there would be no hefty electric bill by the end of the month.
What Could've Been Better?
After using it for a week, we noticed that the switches on this portable bathroom heater are a little stiff. We complained to their customer support team and requested a replacement. They quickly resolved the issue, and we got a replacement in a week’s time.
Up next, we have the R.W.FLAME bathroom heater, which is pretty popular for providing heating all year round. You can simply use it as a fan during summer and as a heater when it gets cold. It is good at heating up any space quickly without fail.
The best bathroom heaters are not ones that can be used only in the bathrooms. For example, this product is suited to be used in your living room or your home office too. It is pretty compact in size, and the attached handles make it one of the best portable bathroom heaters that you can get your hands on.
Unlike most other space heaters, you will forget that it is even switched on after a while because it hardly makes any noise. The sound it produces is less than 40 decibels and will create no distractions while you work or sleep. So, it can be a good companion throughout the year.
What is more, is that it comes with in-built heat protection technology that ensures that the device automatically tips off the moment it gets overheated. This will ensure that you or other members of your family do not have to face any adverse impacts of a bathroom heater getting overheated.
What Could've Been Better?
Unless you have used portable heaters before, you might feel a little challenged to use this as there’s hardly any user instruction. The manual is not at all detailed, and you might have to look up the internet for help with installation and operation.
If you are on the lookout for a cute space heater that is portable and energy-efficient, it is best that you try the BabyExo Space Heater. With this, you will be able to enjoy a night of good sleep and say goodbye to chilly nights. When the room is adequately heated, the device gets turned off automatically.
The first thing to come to our mind when talking about this bathroom heater is its design. It is simply stylish and one of the best-looking heating units that we had the opportunity to try. With 4 plastic non-skid legs, this item can be placed anywhere and will surely enhance and add to the decor.
Moreover, this is a great space heater when it comes to saving energy. It comes with PTC ceramic heating technology and a high-speed fan that ensures that your indoor space is heated up in seconds and the electric consumption is less.
What is more, is that its safety features are top-notch! In case the device gets overheated or accidentally falls over, it will get automatically turned off. So, you can rest assured that there will be no risks in using this product.
What Could've Been Better?
On the downside, this product makes quite some noise when switched on. If you are planning to work or sleep when it is turned on, it can be a bit of a problem. However, to drown the sound, you can put on some music. We would suggest that you keep this factor in mind before you make the purchase.
Up next, we have one of the best convection heaters that you can try: the Potulas Space Heater. When you are trying to make a room in an old house warm during winter or make your office space more comfortable, this ceiling heater can be a great buy.
1000W/500W Energy Efficient Heater - up 1000 watts of power...
2S Fast Heating Heater - Equipped with PTC ceramic heating...
Why Did We Like It?
This item is high on energy efficiency and helps you ensure that you do not have to pay hefty electric bills by the month-end. If you are using it in small rooms, you can put it on low heat and save a considerable amount of energy. For a bigger room, however, you have to put it on high heat.
Apart from that, you do not have to wait for a long time for this device to work its wonders. It comes equipped with PTC ceramic technology and a high-speed fan that helps to spread the heat fast in the rooms. And this ensures that the sound it produces is minimum.
Furthermore, this powerful heater is suitable for use in all kinds of spaces. You just need to ensure that the space is enclosed and the exhaust fan (if any) is switched off. It is no doubt a compact wall heater, but it can easily heat up small to medium-sized rooms.
What Could've Been Better?
Despite its brilliant performance, we were not very pleased with the fact that it uses plastic grates. If you are sensitive to the smell of plastic, this might not really work for you. For home products, odor is a major factor, and you should take note of this aspect.
Do you hate chilly winter evenings in your garage and office? With the Luwior LWIH002, you will no longer face this trouble. Once you start using this bathroom heater, you will not be required to put on layers of winter clothing to avoid the cold. This ceramic heater will drive the cold away efficiently.
This is one of those portable heaters that can work well as ceiling heaters too. With the high-quality thermostat system, you can rest assured that once you switch it on, the temperature in the room will be optimum. You can use the thermostat knob to adjust the temperature according to your requirement.
On top of that, you would be happy to know that this is one of those space heaters that can heat up your room in a few seconds. Within 30 seconds, a bathroom of 200 square feet can be easily heated up. Because the fan comes with high-speed functioning, there will be no unwanted noise.
Apart from that, you do not need to worry about the safety of your pets or kids when using this product. Even if someone accidentally trips over it, the device gets automatically turned off.
What Could've Been Better?
After using it for a few weeks, we noticed that the plug got too heated up. There is no risk for safety hazards, but in case you end up touching it, you might feel uncomfortable. We hope the manufacturer fixes this issue soon.
If you have a thing for good designs, there’s no way you can miss out on the F.EASY.D Space Heater. This space heater will help you enjoy a warm and comfortable winter with your loved ones. And the super cute design of this bathroom heater will surely turn some eyeballs.
Portable Mini Space Heater: 7 x 4 x 8 inches and heating...
Safer to Use: The small space heater has overheating &...
Why Did We Like It?
It does not make sense to invest hefty amounts in buying heaters that can function only in bathrooms. This one can be used in bedrooms, office spaces, and garages too. In short, this is good for small to medium-sized rooms and will help you warm them up efficiently.
Moving on, the design, as we have already mentioned, is pretty attractive and will surely add some charm to your desk. Not only does it look good, but it also comes with excellent fire safety features. The construction is done entirely in fire-resistant material, and there are additional tip-off protective measures too.
It is one of those electric heaters that will help you enjoy warm winter evenings without occupying much space in your house. The compact and sturdy design helps you place the device anywhere you like and is best suited for indoor use.
What Could've Been Better?
We have no complaints about how well it performed. However, its packaging could definitely have been better. The styrofoam layers in the package were a bit less, and we were worried that the product was damaged during transit. Luckily that wasn’t the case.
We are almost reaching the end of our list, and next up, we have the Yeslike Space Heater. This item can be used as a wall-mounted heater or as a ceiling heater. Whichever way you choose to use it, rest assured that it will provide the best heating conditions during the cold winter months.
It is understandable if you do not like to wait for hours for the room to get heated up after you switch on the bathroom ceiling heaters. This device will help you get the room heated up in a few minutes. Because of the PTC ceramic heating element, this space heater displays great thermal efficiency.
Moreover, you can choose to place this item anywhere you please, and it will provide 360-degree heating. This is possible because of the oscillating technology that enables it to dissipate heat in multiple directions.
Apart from that, we have to score this product a full ten for its high-quality construction. There are no exposed blades that can affect your safety. And the construction is sturdy enough to make sure that the product lasts for a few years.
What Could've Been Better?
Despite it being pretty sturdy, we were not very happy with the fact that it does not come with an automatic thermostat. So, in case the heat gets too much, it won’t become less automatic, and you would have to adjust it manually. And when you have to do this at night, it might feel a bit hectic.
SWEETFULL S710 bathroom heater is one bathroom heater that does not make noise even when you put it on high heat mode. The unique noise reduction technology is what makes it stand out among its contemporaries. To know more about this product, keep reading!
【ELECTRIC HEATER FOR SAFE】The safety protecting measures...
【3 HEATING MODELS AND 4-MODE TIMERS】Ceramic Heater Fan...
Why Did We Like It?
Not all portable heaters are actually easy to carry, and some of them are quite bulky. But not this item, thanks to its compact size as there’s an additional handle that enables you to carry it wherever you like.
Other than that, you will not have to worry about your carpet catching fire when using this item. It is constructed of fireproof material and comes with added heat protection facilities that provide good coverage even if the device tips over.
Furthermore, this ceramic space heater is exceptional when it comes to generating and retaining heat. Once you switch it on, the room will be warm for a long time. In other words, you can expect a medium-sized room to turn warm within a few minutes.
What Could've Been Better?
Unfortunately, this bathroom heater comes with a short cable. Unless you place it close to a power source, there’s a good chance that your device might topple and fall. To prevent such problems, consider using an extension cord.
There was no way we were going to wrap up our list without having mentioned the Ordenando Space Heater. During the cold winter months, this space heater can turn your rooms considerably warm and comfortable. Plus, it works its magic within a few minutes.
FAST HEATING CERAMIC SPACE HEATER: Do you hate the cold days...
Why Did We Like It?
Unlike many other standard space heaters, this device comes with double protection to ensure that you face no risks. In case your device gets knocked over accidentally or in case of overheating, it will immediately shut off.
Moreover, it scores a perfect ten on ease of use. It is compact in size, hardly occupying any floor space, meaning it can go well in offices, garages, and definitely bathrooms.
Apart from that, you have the option of easily controlling the heat that this device produces. When the days are too cold, you can turn the heat up a notch to feel comfortable. Similarly, when the days are a little warm, you can turn down the heat and save excess energy consumption.
What Could've Been Better?
The only problem that we faced when using the item was that their customer support team was not very responsive. We reached out to them with some queries, and it was weeks before they got back to us. Honestly, we expected a faster response from them.
Pros
Easy to use
Lasts for a long time
Adjustable heating function
Compact size
Cons
Customer service is slow
Portable Bathroom Heater Buying Guide
Now that we have given a detailed round-up of the top 13 bathroom heaters that you can try, were you able to decide which one to go for? We understand that deciding which bathroom ceiling heaters would be the best bet is difficult.
And in order to make the right choice, you need to look beyond the heating element and consider a few other factors. Let’s quickly take a look at them.
1. Safety Is Crucial
To opt for the best bathroom heaters or space heaters, it is essential that you pay special attention to safety. Electricity and water are not the best of friends, and when opting for wall-mounted heaters, you need to make sure that protective measures are in place.
It is best that you put the bathroom heaters as far from the shower or any other water source as possible. And make sure that the plug of your device complies with the ALCI Safe Plug standards. It should get turned off automatically when it gets too heated up or gets overturned for some reason.
2. Energy Efficiency
There’s an ongoing debate about whether ceramic heaters are better than infrared heaters. According to us, the best bathroom heater is one that is energy efficient.
There’s no point investing in bathroom heaters that will generate a hefty electric bill by the end of the month. You need to ensure that the heater warms only as much as needed.
These days, most space heaterscome with adjustable thermostats which will help you cut down usage costs significantly.
3. Noiseless Operation
After a long day at work, when you are relaxing in a hot bath, you would not like the bathroom heaters to make noise, right? Just because you focus on the heating element, do not forget about comfort.
Be it Pelonis space heaters or regular bathroom heaters; you need to ensure that they offer soundless operation. The best bathroom heaters come with PTC technology and a high-speed fan that would keep the noise at a minimum.
Verdict
That’s all we have for you folks!
We hope you had a great time learning about the best portable bathroom heaters that are available out there. They are pretty different from wall-mounted heaters and electric baseboard heaters as they are not permanently fixed into the electrical circuit of your home.
Before we say goodbye, we would like to let you in on our favorites. The GiveBest 905 takes the award for being our favorite model. But for fast heating, we recommend that you give the Lasko CD08200 a try.
In conclusion, bathroom heaters are an absolute must during winter. If you have any other suggestions, feel free to mention them in the comments section below.
Keep a watch on this space for more exciting reads. Until next time, see you soon!
I love porch swings. They are beautiful yet simple, comfortable yet small enough, and swinging is an extremely relaxing thing to do. Most ready-made swings cost a lot and I would love to make them on my own instead. The experience and the effort put in are rewarding. So, here are thirty porch swing ideas for me and you that we can most definitely do, all by ourselves.
White always stands out and goes with almost anything. This particular porch swing has a porcelain hue to it which is striking to look at. Cleverly using white rope for it only adds to the appeal. Contrasting the all-white subtly are yellow and green pillows, striated and vibrant.
This swing has a really simple yet bold design. I especially love the arms. They look robust and imposing yet very aesthetically pleasing. The backrest, on the other hand, is a little too low and might be deemed inconvenient by some. But, if you’re someone who doesn’t have a problem with it, then this will be a lovely addition to your porch.
More details at simplydesigning.porch.com
3. The Blue Bench Porch Swing
I adore the color of this porch swing. It reminds me of Greece. I also like how this swing is so simple in design yet has such a unique appeal to it. Moreover, it can be used as a bench too, and is easy to build.
This beautiful porch swing has such an antique allure. I love the large pieces of wood that make the porch swing look like a block and bulky. Using a crib mattress and a lot of fluffy pillows makes it look so comfortable that I’d love to sleep away on it. Plus, you can use this swing as a living room installation. I would personally love to do that in winter, with a quilt to complete it.
I love the color of this swing. It perfectly complements the abundance of white in its environment. A very sailor-like color scheme, I believe. It is also quite simplistic in its design and is something you can make on your own very easily.
Ah, brown! A color that blends into anything and everything seamlessly. This swing has a very earthy appeal and I like its subtle yet accentuated design of it. It is something I’d love both on the porch and indoors, and like many porch swings on this list, it is incredibly simple to make.
Turning a headboard into a porch swing is an idea that does not strike someone out of the blue, yet it is something that somehow makes perfect sense. Not only is a headboard elaborate in its design and when added to your swing makes it stand out, but it also offers really good back support. Again, it isn’t too tough to do it.
More details at therusticpig.com
8. The Carved Heart Porch Swing
I want this swing on my porch. It is beautiful in every way possible. I love the curve at the lower end of the seating area and the shape of the armrests. I like the empty spaces on them and the heart on the backrest. It is neat and looks very aesthetically pleasing. Even though it is traditional, it has a few modern elements that blend well with the other style.
By far the prettiest and most outlandishly innovative porch swing idea you can come across, this porch swing setup is complemented by the beams, the roofing, and a fire pit in the center bringing an exotic and mystical charm to the swing setup. You can very easily experiment with the swings regarding their shapes. You can also add curtains, blinds, cushions, and pillows to the mix and color the setup vibrantly.
This is an adorable little porch swing that can fit in almost any corner. It looks like a lego piece designed by Ikea but you can make it on your own following easy steps.
I need a good lumbar support system in my swing. Dealing with back issues, I need something to completely lean on and a porch swing with a high backrest is most welcome. I also like the rustic dual color scheme and the unique design on the back.
This particular porch swing is great for those who are tall. Moreover, it has a very neat design with the wooden strips being narrow and the same element replicated for the armrests.
This neat little porch swing has a lovely backrest and armrests, carved in a more old-fashioned way. It feels right at home in your backyard. It is a lovely option to sit and swing on during the evening and enjoy the mild breeze.
A very high backrest makes this porch swing a good purchase. Its seating area is compact and gives you a comfortable posture. But, it doesn’t look like something you can make on your own right away if you’re doing it for the first time.
More details at minwax.ca
16. The Placid Porch Swing
Nothing too elaborate and quite simple to make actually, this swing has been hung from a tree and instantly makes you remember old tree swings. I like the simplicity and the ease of making.
This porch swing has a beautiful backrest with a neat curvature and the marble white finish looks perfect for your porch. And you know what else is great about this? You can make it for under $100!
This particular swing comes with something that is more of a bonus than a standard, but a bonus you really do wish you had sometimes. We don’t just sit on a swing and swing along with it all the time. We might like to have something to drink while doing so. Maybe a soda, a glass of tea, or perhaps a cup of coffee. With this swing, you don’t have to hold it all the time. With a retractable cup holder, this swing just solved your problem.
This lovely swing is made in the vein of Adirondack chairs, which provide maximum comfort and look stylish while doing so. This swing has subtly accentuated arms that go well with the overall design. Wouldn’t you love to have it?
More details at getredwood.com
20. The Comfy High Back Porch Swing
I always prefer high backrests. It can get a little disorienting for me to swing when my upper back and especially my neck have no support for resting. I am one of those paranoid people who fear injuries, so I like the insurance a full backswing provides. It is also better for me to just rest my head and fall into a slumber sometimes. If you want the same, then you should go ahead and build this one.
More details at familyhandyman.com
21. The Garden Porch Swing
I love gardens. I love their sweet smell and the gentle wafts of air that brush my face and hair. I would love nothing more than rock gently in a swing in the breeze. This simple yet lovely swing is something I’d install in my garden for doing so.
More details at diynetwork.com
22. The A-Frame Porch Swing
I adore elaborate designs. Be it cars, interior decor, sculptures, paintings, or architecture. And this swing? It is an absolute winner in my book. The amazing A-frame is a refreshing change from the same old simple frames I see for swings. It has a sense of style that appeals to me. Moreover, the swing itself has a two-toned color scheme with a very accentuated border design with beautiful carvings on it. If you think you want this in your home, then you can make this porch swing on your own.
Alaska is a sweet place to be. It is a perfect getaway for any adventurer and romantic. The breathtaking landscape never fails to mesmerize. But, the way people in Alaska use logs to make just about anything fascinates me even more. And an Alaskan-styled porch swing is right up my alley. The lovely rounded logs for arms and for the borders are just so very appealing. And you can make it from scratch!
More details at diynetwork.com
24. The Dandelion High-Back Porch Swing
This porch swings not only fulfills my high-back criterion, it also has a lovely dandelion color that is so striking to look at. I would love to make this swing and I guess you would too. The plan for making this swing has everything you would need while building it.
Redwood is gorgeous and if you want to make a porch swing out of it, you should definitely go for this particular design. It is beautiful and will be a favorite of any visitors.
It is not too difficult to make this porch swing. You can build it even if it is your first time making furniture. What helps is the guide gives you detailed instructions on how to make it.
If you want to go with a longer and smaller yet high back porch swing design, this one is for you. I love the mud red color of this swing and it definitely stands out, complemented by the curved edges. You can make it too with the detailed list of plans.
More details at skiltools.com
28. The Pallet Swing
I love pallets. I love making things out of them and the one thing they are most useful for is the porch swing. The great thing about pallets is that they are extremely cheap to buy, which is why making a porch swing out of pallets is as cheap as $30.
29. The Royal White Porch Swing
I am in love with this porch swing. Not only does the gorgeous white appeal to me and the comfortable cushions relax me, but the rope work with the golden chains for this swing is also a piece of art and I want this swing in my house. Wouldn’t you too?
Source Unknown
30. The Placid Porch Swing
This porch swing is tailor-made for ultimate relaxation. It is essentially a long, single-person swinging bed with a beautiful combination of blue and green. It’s something I’d definitely love to have in my home.
Source Unknown
So, which porch swing plans appealed to you the most? Would you like to come up with a new design inspired by these? Let me know your ideas!
Testing your pool is a necessary step to ensure that it remains clean and usable all year round. For this, you can either use a pool test kit, which is more accurate, or pool test strips, which are more affordable and convenient.
No matter how much you clean your pool, it can still be full of unwanted chemicals, which can disrupt the balance of the water and make the pool unusable. That’s why it’s important to test your pool water regularly with a pool test kit or strip, which will help you keep it in the right condition.
But what should you choose between a pool test kit and a strip? Dive in to know!
Liquid Test Kits
For the unversed, liquid test kits are essentially testing liquids that are quite popular among professionals and homeowners alike. But what makes them so sought-after? To help answer that, we’ve listed its primary advantages.
Advantages Of Liquid Test Kits
1. Accuracy
These liquid test kits use a method called titration to test the chemical markers in your pool water. And the efficacy of this process makes liquid kits more accurate than their strip counterparts.
However, the accuracy further depends on the type of liquid test you use. Some examples of these types are OTO, DPD, and FAS - DPD.
The tester should add a titrant (testing liquid) to a sample of the pool’s water, observe the change of color, and compare it to the color chart to determine the pH balance or combined chlorine level.
A test strip is often called a “guess strip” due to their inaccuracy and how easily they can be compromised when in contact with humidity. That’s why liquid pool kits are worth their price as they help the user receive precise results.
2. Parameters
Liquid tests allow you to test different parameters, as you can perform various tests with these kits to get a clearer picture about the water chemistry of your pool. While OTO testing kits can be used to determine pH and chlorine levels, DPD kits can measure free chlorine and total chlorine levels.
This is in contrast to test strips, which cannot perform more extensive tests like acid demand demands. They are also ineffective when it comes to testing the calcium hardness in your swimming pool water. Considering how important calcium hardness testing is for a pool, test kits should be the go-to choice in such cases.
3. Longevity
If you purchase a liquid test kit, you will also get a set of reagents necessary for testing the water chemistry of the pool. And these liquid reagents last for a couple of years until they are considered expired or unreliable.
Besides, the kit container itself can last for years if you store it in proper conditions as mentioned on the package. Only the reagents will need to be replaced if they are expired or exhausted.
Pool test strips, however, only last a year at the most maximum. Once expired, they are considered unreliable and should be replaced immediately if you want to continue testing the swimming pool water.
4. Quality
The liquid kit testing method is used by a lot of pool professionals and health departments, as it offers high-quality results. If you are a pool professional, then liquid testing is the most ideal option for you. Or if you’re someone who is worried about what’s in your pool water and need the test results to be accurate, this kit will do the job efficiently.
Disadvantages Of Liquid Test Kits
As efficient as they are, they do come with their own share of disadvantages, which include:
1. Cost
Liquid pool tests, though quite accurate, are extremely expensive. So, if you plan on testing pool water within a budget, this method might not be the one for you. Besides, you may need to purchase the reagents every 12 or every 24 months depending on the testing frequency. They can can be extremely expensive if you test the pool occasionally, like the pool season
Test strips, on the other hand, are pretty cheap, more so if you purchase them in bulk.
2. Time-Consuming
Considering it is a thorough testing process, liquid tests can take pretty long to be done with. Preparation alone can take up half the time that you have allotted for testing your pool water. After that, taking a good pool water sample, cleaning the container and identifying which reagent to use will take up quite an amount of time.
Once you have everything in place, you have to also ensure the right number of drops are added. If you’re testing more than one parameter, you would have to go through this entire process for each test. All in all, liquid testing kits can be quite time-consuming.
3. Complicated Usage
Liquid tests can be quite complicated to use, especially for a beginner. Although they may seem quite easy when it comes to their usage, they can be quite tricky to get the hang when reagents are introduced.
If you fail using the right amount of drops of water required for the test, it will make the result invalid. This will mean you will have to start over and make sure you get the number of drops right, which can be hard to get right on the first try.You may mess up a couple of times, which can be quite frustrating.
Pool Test Strips
Test strips are very common when it comes to pool water testing and are easily available at your local pool store. They have plenty of advantages, and we’ll be taking a look at a few.
Advantages Of Test Strips
1. Affordability
Test strips or extremely cheaper, especially when compared to liquid tests. As such, they are the perfect choice for beginner pool owners or people who don’t really need to test their pool very often.
2. Faster Use
Using test strips is not as complicated as using a pool test kit. All you have to do is take a step from the bottle, dip it into your pool water, and lay it on a flat surface till it shows the result. This process may take you a minute at the most. Liquid tests, on the other hand, will take you much longer to complete.
If you would like to test your pool’s water chemistry without spending the whole day doing so, test strips are an ideal choice for you. This is also another reason why they are extremely popular among beginners or new pool owners.
3. Easy Usage
Test strips do not need any extra items to help it function to test the pool water accurately. You can just take one from the bottle and dip it into your pool water. All you have to do is give the strip a few seconds and you have your result in front of you.
Since the steps are a lot easier, it prevents the possibility of human error. With liquid tests, the same cannot be said. They are much more prone to errors and would need you to redo the test when you make said error.
Disadvantages Of Test Strips
As perfect as they sound, they have their fair share of disadvantages as well. Here are a few.
1. Inaccurate
Test strips, though very easy to use, can be quite inaccurate when it comes to results. They can even produce varying results from one strip to the next one.
Moreover, test strips can be influenced by the humidity present in the air. Moreover, it can be difficult to interpret the color on the strip even with the color chart provided. This is because the colors on the strip can change with time.
Even though these test strips are quite cheap and easily available, many pool professionals argue that the money spent would be pointless as the tests come out inaccurate.
2. Viability
Liquid tests allow you to perform various kinds of tests on your pool to help measure the pH scale as well as the free and total chlorine levels. Test strips, on the other hand, do not offer you this feature. They are pretty restricted when it comes to their testing capabilities. For instance, test strips cannot perform acid demand tests, or measure the total hardness of the water.
Some pool owners need these tests to be done and cannot afford to overlook them. In events like these, test strips are not of much use or may end up not giving the user satisfactory results. Now, you may purchase different test strips meant for different tests. However, it can be quite expensive to purchase test strips for conducting just one test.
3. Lack Of Longevity
One thing a liquid test kit can guarantee you is longevity. Purchasing one test kit can last you anywhere from a year to two. The only thing that may need constant replacing would be the reagents of the liquid test kits.
Test strips, however, generally last for only up to a year at the most. Once they are expired, you cannot rely on them to give accurate results. Hence, the whole pack should be replaced. This ends up overruling their feature of being affordable and you will end up spending every year for a brand new strip test kit. And this isn’t something many pool owners will be ready to do.
How To Test Salt Water Pools?
As surprising as it may seem, not all pool water has chlorine in them. Some of them contain other substances like salt, and these saltwater pools will need to be tested as well. For this, you can find a dedicated pool test kit for saltwater pools, that typically come in a pack of 40.
Depending on the conditions of the pool, you may have to test your saltwater pool at least once or twice a week. This will help you take the right steps for pool maintenance to keep it in the optimal condition.
If you’re someone who uses their pool quite frequently, you must make sure that your pool water is in good condition. And testing kits will be of great help in maintaining the right pool chemistry so that there are no health hazards.
Also, keep in mind that too many chemicals or the wrong pH level can damage the pool material, which may then take up thousands of dollars in repairs.
How To Use Pool Test Kits?
Now, you may be wondering “how to use pool test kits?” Although the exact testing process will be mentioned on the package, we will quickly walk you through the general steps to give you an idea.
First, detach the tube caps. Make sure you rinse the tubes before use
Proceed to fill the tube with water from the pool till the level mentioned on the tube
Make sure to take water from the end of the pool that is elbow-deep
You can now proceed to drop the provided reagents in the water.
Put on the tube cap and shake the solution gently to mix
Once you get a color, compare it with the color chart that is provided with the kit
Pool Test Kits Vs Strips Final Words
If you’ve recently built a pool for the first time, test strips will be a better option. They are convenient and they give you results within seconds. Besides, they are easy on the pockets so budget wouldn’t be an issue.
However, if you are an experienced pool owner and would like something that is a little more accurate, liquid pool water testing is the way to go. These testing options can be used to test different parameters of your pool. They can be considered a good investment as they last much longer than test strips and may also do away with the need for professional testing.
On that note, we’ve reached the end of today’s guide. Keep a watch on this space for more such reads.
Till we meet again!
If you have a saltwater pool, you need to monitor its salinity with pool test kits. From our testing, we found the AquaChek Salt Test Strip titrators to be the best overall. Likewise, the Easytest saltwater pool test strips and the Taylor Technologies K-2006-SALT test kit are viable options too.
A saltwater pool is an excellent alternative to conventional chlorinated pools. Compared to the latter, it is much safer on the skin. But even then, you will need to test its water chemistry with suitable pool test kits before diving in. This will help you maintain the correct salinity at all times and monitor the presence of other chemicals. However, selecting the right pool test kit can be a headache. So, we did the hard work and reviewed some of the best options available today. Dive in!
Listed below are the best pool test kits for saltwater pools:
AquaChek Salt Test Strip Titrators: The AquaChek strip testing kit delivers remarkable precision, recognizing sodium chloride levels from 400 to 7,000 ppm. It falls short on strip quantity, offering only 10 strips per unit.
Easytest Saltwater Pool Test Strips: Easytest saltwater pool test strips are distinguished by their extensive detection range (0 to 8,000 ppm) and color-coded testing. Its superior count of 25 strips per unit gives it an edge over the AquaCheck. It has a low shelf life post-opening.
Taylor Technologies K-2006-SALT Test Kit: The Taylor Technologies test kit, unlike the Easytest Strips, covers a broad spectrum of attributes, including chlorine balance, calcium hardness, total alkalinity, and pH level. Its complex process might prove a bit challenging for beginners.
Trudirection Salt Water Test Strips: A pool testing solution known for an extended shelf life of 24 months. It has a limited detection range compared to Taylor's test kit.
SuperCheck Salt Test Strips: The SuperCheck salt test strips offer accurate sodium chloride detection in various chloride-based salt solutions. The meager 10 strips per bottle, compared to the generous 25 strips offered by Easytest, restricts its comparative advantage.
1. AquaChek Salt Test Strip Titrators - Best for Accuracy & Convenience
When it comes to pool and spa testing Kits, AquaChek is a pretty reliable brand. You can find test strips, as well as digital test kits, to ascertain the water quality of your pool. But the saltwater testing strips made by AquaChek are of particular repute, which is why we have reviewed the AquaChek salt test strip titrators here.
The salt test strips are made with approved medical industry technology, due to which they give highly accurate results. These strips measure the exact level of sodium chloride salt present in the water of your pool. In that context, the lowest range of detection is 400 ppm, and the highest concentration of salt that can be measured is 7,000 ppm.
With these strips, there is no need to measure the drops of reagent, which reduces the margin of error significantly. The process of measurement is straightforward - all you need to do is dip the strip in the water for a few seconds and pull it out. After that, you can consult the water chemistry guide provided with it to determine how much salt there is. The only issue is that you get just ten strips with the kit, which isn’t sufficient enough.
But overall, it is ideal for pools with salt generator systems since it allows you to adjust the salt generator to maintain the correct amount of chlorine. You can also input the results into the free mobile app to get personalized water treatment plans for your pool.
What We Like
Easy to use
Provides highly accurate results
Includes a water chemistry insert
The mobile app offers tailored water treatment plans
What We Don't Like
A single unit contains only 10 strips
Type: Strip testing kit | Packaging includes: A bottle with 10 testing strips, pool chemistry insert with instructions | Tests for: Sodium chloride concentration
2. Easytest Saltwater Pool Test Strips - Best Range of Detection
Here we have reviewed the saltwater pool test strips manufactured by Easytest. The brand makes water testing strips for different fixtures, such as swimming pools, spas, hot tubs, and even aquariums.
On that note, this particular product has been specifically designed for testing the sodium chloride content in saltwater pools. Each unit contains 25 testing strips, and each of these strips is made from high-quality PET paper that produces fast and accurate results.
The strips have a fairly wide range of detection too, which makes them even more effective. From the lowest point of 0 ppm, they can efficiently detect sodium chloride concentrations of up to 8,000 ppm.
In order to measure the salt content of your pool water, all you need to do is dip the testing portion of the strip in the water for a second. Then, pull it out of the water and hold it horizontally for approximately 5 seconds. Once the immersed portion of the strip changes color, you will have to compare it against the color chart.
As you can see, the process is quite simple, which makes it convenient to use. The color-coded testing means that there are no additional calculations necessary. Besides, you can use these strips to test the water of a regular swimming pool, spa, or hot tub as well, which offers good flexibility. Just make sure to use the strips as soon as they are opened for accurate results since they have a low shelf life.
3. Taylor Technologies K-2006-SALT Test Kit - Best Complete Test Kit
Taylor Technologies is one of the leading names in the domain of water testing solutions. The brand has a portfolio of over 600 test-kit configurations, ranging from dry and wet chemistry systems to microprocessor-based testing instruments. Because of this reason, we have included the K-2006-SALT testing kit on our list.
This particular option is a complete test kit for your swimming pool that includes different components. Each of these components tests a particular attribute of the pool water, which gives you a clear idea of your pool’s chemical composition.
Apart from the salinity and chlorine balance, you can check the calcium hardness, total alkalinity, pH level, and cyanuric acid levels of the water. Most of them are drop test kits, which give fairly accurate results.
All the test bottles have a capacity of 0.75 ounces and come packaged in a box, which makes them convenient to use. And since it is a complete kit, you can use it for regular and saltwater pools, spas, hot tubs, and so on.
On that note, it tests for the chloride present as a salt, as well as free chlorine. That makes it a suitable option for saltwater pools with salt generator systems. But the test process can be a bit complicated for first-timers so make sure you follow the instructions carefully.
What We Like
Tests the pool water completely
Versatile
Produces accurate results
Comes conveniently packaged in a box
What We Don't Like
The testing process is a bit complex & time-consuming
Type:Drop testing kit | Packaging includes:0.75 oz testing bottles, testing guide, sample tubes | Tests for:Sodium chloride concentrations, free and combined chloride ions, cyanuric acid content, total alkalinity, pH with acid/base demand, calcium hardness
4. Trudirection Salt Water Test Strips - Best Shelf Life
Unless you are a highly knowledgeable and long-time pool owner, you might not have heard about the Trudirection brand since it is a bit obscure. However, it manufactures top-notch pool testing solutions that are on par with the products made by many renowned brands.
One such solution is the Trudirection salt water test strips, which we have reviewed here. These strips can precisely detect the sodium chloride salt concentration in your pool within the range of 1,500 to 5,000 ppm. The detection range is a bit limited compared to some of the other testing kits on our list.
But the testing system is relatively easy since you need to simply immerse the strip in the water for a second and then hold it in the air for 5 seconds. Its color will change, which can then be compared to the color chart provided on the bottle.
These strips are made from premium quality fiber paper, which ensures that the results you get are accurate and reliable. Moreover, the strips have a non-mixing color block, which prevents the color in the test portion from bleeding throughout the strip.
Each unit contains 25 testing strips packaged into a well-sealed bottle. Because of that, the strips have an extended shelf life of 24 months. Thus, you don’t need to worry about the strips degrading over time.
What We Like
Easy to use
Long shelf life
The color does not bleed
Affordable
What We Don't Like
The testing range is comparatively limited
Type: Strip testing kit | Packaging includes:A bottle with 25 testing strips | Tests for:Chloride ion content
5. SuperCheck Salt Test Strips - Best Packaged Test Strips
SuperCheck is a brand that manufactures water testing strips for pools, spas, and hot tubs. Its focus on quality has made it one of the most reliable brands in this domain. And the SuperCheck salt test strips act as a testament to this fact since the kit offers the quality and reliability that this brand is known for.
The strips are manufactured using medical industry technology and the best quality PET paper. They have a decent range of detection, starting from the lowest level of 0 ppm and going up to a maximum of 6,000 ppm.
These strips can accurately measure the chloride ion concentration in most chloride-based salt solutions, such as sodium chloride, calcium chloride, potassium chloride, and others. As such, the kit can help in calibrating saltwater chlorine generators in swimming pools.
The testing process is relatively simple and takes around 4 minutes to complete. You need to take a little bit of the pool water in a container and place the strip in it. The color level will gradually rise, and once the test is done, you can compare it with the chart provided on the bottle.
To enhance the reliability of the test, the colors on the strip are made in a way that they don’t bleed through the strip. Furthermore, the strips packaged inside the bottle come with an extended shelf life. They are sealed inside two individual packages, which protects the strips from getting damaged.
In addition to that, there is an individually packed descant for moisture protection. The only downside is that you get just ten strips in the package.
What We Like
Made from high-quality PET paper
Decent range of detection
Comes with a highly protective packaging
Detects most chloride ions in saltwater pools
What We Don't Like
Each bottle contains only 10 strips
Type: Strip testing kit | Packaging includes:A bottle with 10 testing strips | Tests for:Chloride ion content
6. Hofun Pool Salt Tester - Best Digital Test Strip
Hofun is a brand that specializes in making digital pool test kits. When it comes to user convenience, digital testing kits always have an innate advantage over conventional testing methods. And suffice to say, you get the same advantages with this pool salt tester.
To use it, all you need to do is turn the meter on and select the “salinity” function. Then you can dip it into your pool, and the digital display on the side will tell you the salt levels accurately. You won’t need to do any manual calculations, as all the details will be shown on the electronic display.
There are other functions present on this 5-in-1 testing meter, which allows you to test other water properties. Besides salinity, you can conduct pH tests, measure the water temperature, check the electrical conductivity (EC), and determine the total dissolved solids (TDS) present in the water. In short, it gives the digital tester a good idea about the water’s chemical levels and properties, which helps greatly with pool maintenance.
This digital pool test kit has multiple uses in addition to testing saltwater pools. In other words, you can use it to test the water quality of hot tubs, aquariums, and even seawater. So, it offers a lot more versatility than a standard pool test kit. Likewise, you’d have to spend a little more when purchasing this product.
What We Like
Extremely easy to use
Provides quick and accurate results
Tests different properties of the water
Highly versatile usage
What We Don't Like
Relatively expensive
Type:Digital testing kit | Packaging includes:A digital test meter, pH calibration powder, user manual | Tests for:Salinity, TDS, pH, EC, temperature
What is the Best Pool Test Kit for Saltwater Pools?
If you're on the lookout for the best pool test kit for saltwater pools, listed below is a table that compares the type, what the packaging includes, and the specific elements or properties each kit tests for.
A digital test meter, pH calibration powder, user manual
Salinity, TDS, pH, EC, temperature
Buying Guide for the Best Pool Test Kits for Saltwater Pools
We know that buying the best pool test kit is not as easy as it sounds. You need to buy a test kit that meets your requirements, or else you’ll just be wasting money. Keeping that in mind, here are some important factors to consider before buying a saltwater pool test kit.
1. Type
One of the most important things to check is the type of test kit. Many people get confused about the different types of pool test kits available today. And one of the most common ones is the confusion regarding pool test kits vs strips.
Contrary to what you might know, a pool test strip is not the same as a test kit. The strips are one of the sub-types of pool testing kits. Apart from strips, there are other types of pool test kits available, such as drop test bottles and digital test meters.
Pool water test strips are easy enough to use, but they cannot be used to test for multiple water properties. For instance, if you buy a saltwater testing strip, you can only test the amount of salt present in the water and nothing else.
Drop test kits, on the other hand, are much more versatile. Also known as liquid test kits, they require you to add the liquid reagents dropwise in a testing bottle. Such tests are a bit complicated, but they yield highly precise results in most cases. And you can conduct drop tests for different water properties, such as hardness, alkalinity, salinity, and so on.
Lastly, you have digital test meters, which are both versatile and easy to use. However, they are much more expensive than the previous two types, which can be a deterrent.
2. Use Case
Another key factor that you need to keep in mind is the use case of the test kits. If you intend to use it only for testing the salinity of your saltwater swimming pool, then you can just buy a kit that tests for saltwater or chloride ions.
But if you want to measure other properties, such as the water temperature and pH, then you will need to buy a kit that can perform those tests.
Similarly, to test the water of your hot tub or aquarium, you need to buy a compatible kit. If you don’t use a suitable kit, you might not get the desired results from the test.
3. Test Time
When it comes to saltwater pool test kits, you would want to get an option that gives you quick results. Besides being convenient, that will allow you to make timely adjustments to the filtration systems and chlorine generators of the pool.
If you buy a kit that takes a long time to produce results, you won’t be able to make these adjustments on time. And if it takes too long, the water quality may change slightly from when you started the test, which will make the results unreliable.
4. Range and Accuracy
In order to maintain a saltwater pool’s chemistry, you need to make sure that the test kit has good accuracy and range. An accurate kit will give you a clear idea about the water quality, which will help with pool maintenance. Likewise, a high testing range will allow you to detect a wide range of salt concentrations.
Salt levels are mostly measured in parts per million (ppm), but some kits have scales in parts per thousand (ppt). The former unit is used for high-accuracy measurements, while the latter is used mostly in high-range test kits.
5. Price
When buying a salt test kit, the price is obviously a crucial factor to consider. You should always look for a kit that is reasonably priced to help you stay within budget. That said, most saltwater test kits come at fairly low prices unless you are going for complete test kits or digital testing meters.
Is it hard to use a pool test kit for saltwater pools?
No, it's not typically hard to use a pool test kit for saltwater pools. Kits provide instructions for water sample collection, reagent application, and results interpretation. The process involves using provided chemicals or test strips and comparing the color change to a chart to determine chemical levels. Always follow the instructions offered with the kit.
How accurate are pool test kits for saltwater pools?
How accurate a pool test kit is for saltwater pools depends on the kit's quality, correct usage, and test conditions. Reliable results are typically given by high-quality kits used properly and within their expiration date. Factors like temperature, humidity, and kit storage can affect accuracy. For the most accurate results, follow the manufacturer's instructions.
How often should I test my saltwater pool?
You should test your saltwater pool at least once a week. During periods of heavy usage or after significant weather events, more frequent testing may be required to maintain optimal water balance. Always follow the manufacturer's guidelines for best results.
Does temperature affect the testing of saltwater pools?
Yes, temperature can affect the testing of saltwater pools. Both water temperature and ambient temperature can impact chemical reactions in the test, potentially altering the results. It's recommended to follow the test kit's guidelines to ensure accuracy.
How long can a pool test kit for saltwater pools last?
A pool test kit for saltwater pools can typically last one to two years, depending on the frequency of use. Keep in mind that the shelf-life of the reagents can decrease over time or due to improper storage, affecting the kit's accuracy. Always check the kit's expiration date to ensure reliable results.
Can I use my saltwater pool test kit for freshwater pools?
Yes, you can use a saltwater pool test kit for freshwater pools to measure common parameters like pH and chlorine. That being said, it won't measure freshwater-specific elements like calcium hardness. Always ensure the testing kit matches the requirements of the water being tested
There you have it - our list of the top test kits for saltwater pools. We hope that you have been able to come to a decision about which one to get by now.
Before we wrap up, allow us to mention our personal favorites from the list. The AquaChek salt test strip titrators are one of our top recommendations, owing to their high levels of accuracy and ease of use.
Glues are an essential ingredient to the recipe for perfect DIY projects.
And so, if you’ve been on the lookout for glue for all your quick fixes and DIY crafts, polyurethane glue is the perfect choice without burning a hole in your pocket. As such, crafters love polyurethane glue for its unique formula.
Crafters love polyurethane glues for their versatility and durability. From fixing your wooden cabinets of the living room to mending the fences of your backyard, polyurethane glues work exceptionally well in bonding anything and everything.
Due to the increasing popularity of polyurethane glues, we decided to give it a shot. And so, having used it for a few months, we decided to pen down this guide just for you. Plus, to make things easy-breezy, we’ve also added a buyer’s guide to help you even further.
Without any further ado, let’s dive straight into the deets!
Polyurethane Glue
Polyurethane is composed of polymer compounds that are close kin of epoxies. Also known as PU Adhesive, Polyurethane glues are an excellent alternative for PVA glues.
Having said that, polyurethane glues form exceptionally strong bonds when exposed to moisture. They feature a water-resistant formula, which makes them highly resistant to all elements. As such, they are ideal for outdoor applications.
What we absolutely love about polyurethane glues is their versatility. Unlike wood glues, you can apply this to almost anything you want. From wood, metal to ceramics and foam, you can use polyurethane to create the toughest bonds. For the last 20 years, because of its compatibility with a variety of materials, polyurethane glue has become the go-to glue for contractors.
Not only are these glues shrink-free, but are also sandable and paintable. This glue is perfect for filling challenging cracks and gaps as its formula perfectly wicks in the surfaces to create the toughest bonds that will last for years to come.
As such, these glues are pretty user-friendly. Much like cyanoacrylates, polyurethane glue is cured by moisture. You just need to dampen the surface slightly before applying the glue to ensure efficient bonding.
Moreover, polyurethane glues are available in two varieties, one-part and two-part. The one-part polyurethane adhesive is ready to use as everything is mixed together. Meanwhile, the two-part adhesive requires mixing the formula in precise quantities.
Having said that, the one-part polyurethane is perfect for beginners, DIYers, and crafters, while the two-part one is ideal if you’re a constructor or a professional.
Also, if you notice a light-colored foam appearing at the glue line; don’t fret, as you can easily scrape it away after the glue dries. All in all, these glues are perfect for all the DIYers, crafters, enthusiasts, and even novices.
Features Of Polyurethane Glue
By now, you have a brief idea of what polyurethane glues are. So now, let us hop on to features that make polyurethane glues worth considering.
High Versatility
Polyurethane glues are crafter’s and professional’s favorite because of their high versatility. As such, their unique formula is formulated to get along with a variety of materials. Whether you’ve accidentally dropped a porcelain bowl or somebody broke a wooden stool, polyurethane glue will perfectly mend whatever you throw at it.
Not only is it compatible with ceramics and wood, but also versatile enough to fix metals, rubber, wood, and even plastics. Besides, what we particularly love about polyurethane glues is their custom formulations. As such, you can customize them to meet different requirements.
Extremely Flexible
When it comes to glues, their flexible nature is of utmost importance. Polyurethane glues are perfect for application on those surfaces or areas which demand flexibility because once cured, they become highly flexible. Therefore, they can withstand thumps and vibrations efficiently.
And so, if you’re looking for glues to bond two dissimilar materials, polyurethane glues are an excellent choice because of their high flexibility.
Incredibly Strong Adhesion
Whether you have to assemble your DIY project or mend minor cracks and gaps in the furniture, a strong adhesive is the need of the hour. And, an appealing aspect of this glue is its adhesive strength. Unlike other glues, polyurethane glues form a tough bond even before the drying and curing of the glue.
Not only that, but it also doesn’t require clamping, thanks to its initial bond. As such, manufacturing processes are made easy-breezy. As such, these robust and durable bonds make polyurethane glues perfectly for challenging applications. Furthermore, it also acts as a sealant to seal porous surfaces excellently.
Resistant To Elements
If you have to fix the metal gates or the benches of the backyard, you need glues with excellent resistance. That being said, polyurethane glues are not only great for indoor purposes but also excellent for outdoor uses because of their excellent resistant power.
You can use this to mend whatever surface you want. And because they feature a waterproof formula, you can repair all the outdoor surfaces without worrying about the elements damaging the bonds.
Therefore, polyurethane glues are excellent for outdoor applications because of their ability to withstand heavy rains and high temperatures.
Endless Design Freedom
Looking for a strong adhesive to bond complex materials? Go for polyurethane glues, as they bond anything and everything effortlessly. Whether you have to bond complex objects or join dissimilar materials, polyurethane glues will perfectly bond whatever you throw at them.
That’s not all, even manufacturers use these glues for their lightweight applications. Plus, the bonds are seamless and smooth, which is what we absolutely love about glues. As such, they preserve the aesthetic appeal of your objects and surfaces, which is impressive. All in all, they are an excellent option for all your DIY craftworks and projects.
Pros
Highly durable bonds
Quick setting time
Resistant to water
Compatible with a variety of surfaces
Sandable and paintable
Cons
Toxic formula
Doesn’t cure properly in the absence of moisture
Uses Of Polyurethane Glue
For novices, crafters, and enthusiasts, polyurethane glue is an excellent choice for all DIY crafts and projects because of the incredible adhesive strength it offers. Because it doesn’t require clamping, it is used in construction projects, thanks to its strength.
That’s not all, these glues adhere excellently to even porous surfaces, thanks to their waterproof formula. As such, these glues are an excellent choice for all your crafts and projects because of their versatility and flexibility.
From wood, metal, fiberglass to masonry, ceramics, carpets, polyurethane glue will bond anything you want. Also, no matter what task you have at hand, the diverse variety of polyurethane glues are there to help you out.
That’s not all, they are available in both thick and thin viscosities. As such, the thick ones are perfect for all the large projects as they won’t mess up your surface or projects by running all over them. Moreover, it will also allow the novices to work at their own pace.
Meanwhile, the thin viscosity glue will be perfect for bonding minor challenges and cracks that call for immediate repairs. That being said, it is ideal for enthusiasts and professionals who can work at a quick pace.
Examples Of Application
The excellent adhesion of polyurethane glue makes it perfect for automobiles, as well. Because it is used in the automotive industry to bond a variety of materials, you can use it to quick-fix any damage in your car.
Looking for ways to fix the broken windshield? Polyurethane glue has got you covered with its excellent bonding strength.
Another appealing aspect of this glue is that it can be used to create MDF boards. Too good to be true, isn’t it? Mix wood dust and saw chips with polyurethane adhesive and create an MDF board for your next DIY project.
What’s more, you can use this in place of wood glue because it forms a strong bond and can withstand elements. Plus, you can use this glue to fix broken dishware in your home without worrying about a thing as they are rated food safe.
When it comes to polyurethane glues, Gorilla Original Polyurethane Glue is an excellent choice because it is incredibly strong and versatile. Moreover, the waterproof formula makes it ideal for both interior and exterior surfaces. Plus, it is highly versatile and can withstand extreme temperatures.
Standout Features:
Waterproof formula
Expands 3 times to bond to materials
Usable on both interior and exterior surfaces
Why Did We Like It?
Among all the polyurethane glue available on the market, the Gorilla Original Polyurethane Glue sits atop our list because of its excellent adhesive strength. Its waterproof formula makes it perfect for all minor cracks and fractures.
The versatility of this glue is almost endless. From ceramics, wood to glass and concrete, this glue excellently bonds anything and everything. What we loved about this glue is its easy application. Plus, it is sandable, and so you can sand off any extra glue peeking out from the cracks.
As such, it will withstand anything nature throws at it. Moreover, this 8-ounce glue is long-lasting and will surely last you for years to come. Plus, you need not worry in case of accidental spillings, as this glue is easy to clean. With a dry cloth or paint thinner, you can easily wipe off the wet glue.
Putting it bluntly, the Gorilla Original Polyurethane Glue is a dependable option for all your bonding needs.
What Could’ve Been Better?
All in all, we loved the Gorilla Original Polyurethane Glue for bonding surfaces because of its incredible strength and versatility. Having said that, this glue takes slightly longer to dry.
Although it might be a drawback for those looking for a quick fix, it is an excellent option for those working on large-scale projects. Other than that, this performs exceptionally well.
If you’ve been on the lookout for fast curing polyurethane glue, then Loctite 1390595 Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive is a perfect choice for you to consider. Moreover, it is environmentally-safe and usable on a variety of surfaces. Plus, it is waterproof and even cures in cold temperatures.
Standout Features:
High-performance adhesive
Curable even in cold temperatures
Contains no chlorinated solvents or water
Why Did We Like It?
There are a lot of things we loved about this glue; however, the thing that hooked us right was the fact that it is curable in even cold temperatures. That being said, you can use this for sub-floor installation without worrying about a thing.
Another appealing aspect of this product is its excellent adhesive strength which makes it compatible with even construction materials. Not only that, but it is highly versatile, as it can be used on multiple surfaces and objects. From cement-based products, ceramics, drywall to concrete, treated wood, and metal, this glue bonds almost everything excellently.
That’s not all, this polyurethane adhesive can withstand heavy rains, thanks to its waterproof formula. As such, you can use this to fix the cracks of the fences and gates without any worries. Plus, you can also paint this if you wish to.
What’s more, the formula of this glue does not contain any chlorinated solvents or water and is VOC compliant, which is pretty impressive. All in all, it is an excellent option for all your bonding needs.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The Loctite 1390595 Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive is an outstanding option, mainly because of its versatile application. However, unlike the previous product, it is messy to apply.
We strongly recommend you use a caulk gun to avoid the mess. Apart from that, it is a good choice for all your bonding needs.
Here is another polyurethane glue that you can use on any surface you want. This multi-purpose glue is perfect for all your minor repairs and DIY projects. Its long working time, along with short clamping time, is matchless. Plus, it features a waterproof formula which makes it ideal for outdoor applications.
Standout Features:
Epoxy-like strength
No-run no-drip formula
100% waterproof
Why Did We Like It?
If you’re a novice looking for a glue that provides ample working time, then this Titebond Polyurethane Glue is your best bet any day. With its long working hours of 20 minutes, you can work at your own pace without worrying. Plus, its clamp time of 45 minutes is a bonus.
Moreover, because this polyurethane formula is waterproof, you can use this to mend exterior surfaces without worrying about nature marring the bond. Not only that, but this glue is compatible with several other surfaces and materials, thanks to its versatile nature.
Whether you have to mend broken stools or fix a porcelain bowl, this glue is an excellent choice for all your needs. Also, its epoxy-like strength seals porous surfaces without difficulty.
What’s particularly impressive is the spout of this glue which makes application smooth and hassle-free. Plus, you can always sand off the excess glue peeking out from the surface. Lastly, such handy features are coupled with an affordable price tag, making it a go-to option for all professionals, DIYers, and crafters.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Although this product does stand out in terms of affordability and versatility, we suggest wearing a pair of gloves while working with this glue. This is because many users have complained about the glue bonding to the skin. Apart from this minor issue, it is an excellent choice for all your DIY projects.
Pros
Provides long working time
Compatible with various surfaces
Easy application
Easy on pockets
Cons
Bonds skin
Polyurethane Glue Buying Guide
Moving on, we’ve curated a buyer’s guide to help you pick the right polyurethane glues for all your tasks. While having a brief idea about polyurethane glue helps to a great degree, choosing the best polyurethane glue is still a daunting task.
Not only is the nature of your task important, but you must also consider certain factors before making a decision. Don’t worry, we’ve gone into the ins and outs and compiled a list of factors that you must keep in mind while buying polyurethane glue.
Adhesive Strength
To choose the perfect polyurethane glue for your projects, you need to consider its adhesive strength. And so, the nature of your task is of utmost importance to determine the kind of glue you need. For all your heavy-duty tasks, glues offering incredibly strong adhesion would be an excellent choice.
Thus, we strongly recommend you choose only those polyurethane glues that offer excellent adhesion to prevent chipping or flaking. As such, they’ll also create strong and durable bonds that will last for years.
Viscosity
While choosing polyurethane glues, you must also consider their viscosity or consistency along with the adhesive strength. For filling minor gaps and challenging cracks, a thin water-like viscosity glue will be excellent.
Meanwhile, if you have to bond large pieces together, a thick viscosity glue would be ideal. The thin viscosity glues are runny, so they aren’t suitable for vertical surfaces, while the thick viscosity glues are perfect for all kinds of surfaces because of their no-run no-drip formula.
The bonding process does not give you any second chances, so we strongly recommend you go for thick viscosity glues.
Curing Time
Not all polyurethane glues are formulated with a short curing time. And so, you must keep the curing time in mind while buying polyurethane glue. The glues with a long curing time will not be a perfect choice for woodworking professionals or constructors. So, a quick curing glue is what they must opt for.
Although this might not be a major factor if you’re a novice who loves experimenting, this certainly is important for professional woodworkers and constructors.
Ease of Use
Before you pick polyurethane glue for any DIY crafts and projects, you must consider its user-friendly aspect. Of course, this factor might not be a priority for professionals but is certainly crucial for beginners.
That being said, we strongly recommend you go for the glues, which are relatively easy to use. As such, they will give you the freedom to work at your own pace.
Shelf Life
Not to forget, shelf life is extremely important. As such, before buying polyurethane glue, you must consider the shelf life of the product. Irrespective of your needs, the glues with a longer shelf life are a better bet any day.
Plus, we strongly recommend you go for those featuring air-tight lids to prevent the air from sneaking into the bottle. This will ensure your product lasts long.
Summing It Up
It’s finally time to wrap up our guide.
To sum it up, polyurethane glues come with a number of perks. From bonding metals to assembling DIY projects, polyurethane glues are essential for all your bonding needs. Not only that, but they are excellent for all your DIY projects and challenging repairs.
That being said, they are one of the best options available on the market. And so, you must make sure to invest in good quality polyurethane glue as it will allow you to carry out all bonding and repairing tasks in a breeze.
With that, we shall take your leave. Hopefully, you’ll be able to pick the best polyurethane glue for your tasks. If not, you can always consider the buyer’s guide for making an informed decision.
"'Plein Air', a French term meaning 'outdoors', signifies a transformative shift in art dating back to the 19th century. This innovative approach was enabled by the advent of tube paints, portable easels, and canvases, allowing artists to step beyond the confines of their studios. In Plein Air painting, artists fully engage with the dynamic interplay of movement, color, and natural light in their chosen setting to capture the subject's intrinsic nature.
Originating from the French expression en plein air, plein air painting refers to creating artwork outdoors.
Too often, plein air painting style is confused with sketches made outside; however, that’s not what it is. In en plein air painting, painters capture the essence and spirit of landscapes in real-time.
Regardless of whether you’re a professional artist or a weekend warrior, this guide will help you get started with plein air painting.
What Is Plein Air Painting?
Plein Air, from the French for 'outdoors', marked a pivotal moment in the 19th-century art world. With the invention of tube paints and portable easels, artists left studio confines to capture the world's raw, dynamic beauty.
In Plein Air painting, artists fully engage with the dynamic interplay of movement, color, and natural light in their chosen setting to capture the subject's intrinsic nature. All that's required is an inspiring outdoor location, a sturdy easel, a quality portable watercolor set, brushes, and premium watercolor paper.
This method offers a uniquely intimate perspective, embedding the artist in the scene they seek to portray and infusing their work with a vibrant, natural authenticity."
Many painters sketched out a few plein air drawings before they made their finished painting in a painting studio. Looking at the real thing with so much space helped give the painting much more inspiration and realism than just sitting in an art studio.
En Plein Air Brief History
Diving into the depths of history, plein-air paintings originated from the historical practice of artists sketching outdoors. This indicates that painting outdoors has been a common practice for centuries.
In art history, the concept of painting en plein air is credited to a well-known French painter Pierre-Henri de Valenciennes. In the Reflections and Advice to a Student on Painting, Particularly on Landscape, he introduced the idea of landscape portrait– painters paint straight onto the canvas while being in the landscape.
Further, the introduction of pigments in tubes in the late 19th Century contributed to the popularity of en plein air painting. Earlier on, artists had to undertake the messy and laborious task of making their own pigments by crushing and mixing dry pigment particles with a pale yellow oil (linseed). And that is why they were fascinated with modern-day toothpaste-like paint tubes.
Slowly and steadily, the art world was revolutionized by paint in a tube, which made plein-air painting techniques widely accessible.
Why Watercolors Are A Great Medium For Plein Air Painting?
Watercolor paints are the first art mediums that come to anyone’s mind when thinking about plein air painting. This is because the characteristic watercolor effects are able to imitate the picturesque beauty of a variety of landscapes. Whether it’s a sunset or a serene lake, watercolors offer the best techniques to create outdoor scenes.
Other artists have also tried plein air acrylic or oil painting.
Plein Air Painting Experience Tips and Tricks
Mastering Your Subject: A Deep Dive
The first thing that you have to do when beginning your En Plein Air artwork is to understand the subject of your painting. Knowing what exactly to paint is the first step to creating a masterpiece.
Start out by taking a single detail and putting it onto your canvas. Zoom in for understanding the features of an escape. One thing that you should do is give yourself the time to study and analyze these features. You can even take an entire day to do this, as then, you will have a clearer idea about how the elements of shifting shadows and lights work in relation to colors and textures. These will change every hour of the day, hence making it necessary for you to perceive the free play of these effects that compose the scene for the casual eye.
Doing this will make it easier for you to start out. This will also provide you with a foundation for your art so that you know how exactly to calculate the intricacies of shapes and patterns for your art.
For making edits to the form, think about what would work best and about adding further details to the painting. Do not put anything to the picture if you’re in doubt as you can’t reverse the changes.
Decoding the Trifecta: Lighting, Time, and Texture
Time is of utmost importance when it comes to painting en plein air. Also, do track how and when the lights change for you to ascertain the fundamental features of exposures and shades. It is crucial for you to first identify and locate the light source to analyze shadows and determine a “value pattern.”
These are vital elements that lay the foundation upon which you’ll be creating your art. Values and shapes are essential elements for any kind of painting work.
Segregate and categorize the basic elements of your subject into three major areas of gray values: light, medium, and dark. Each will have its individual effects. But what is the most important thing for you to understand is that these will work in close relation with each other to actually give the painting its overall individual identity.
Every color and tonal valuation that you might want to achieve in your art, especially while sitting outdoors will depend on how you manipulate these three dominant values to your favor.
Concentrate on the subject and decode the patterns of its shapes into these three values. Squint if you have to, for eliminating any extra detail. Carry out a brief value study using the white tone of the canvas to establish a fourth value if you want.
The Art of Time Management in Creative Processes
Time is an essential aspect of any artwork. And when it comes to painting en plein, it will become doubly important for you to practice tracking the time for your session.
The shifting time will have a drastic impact on the tonal integrity of your outdoor scene. Shadows and lights will get affected changing your visual perception of the surroundings.
The changing hours of mornings, evenings, and nights will morph these scenes into different vistas. This could make you lose track of your tonal and textural consistency if you failed to capture the desired effects before the shift in time causing them to change.
Utilize the benefits of time constraints such as that offered by painting events, contests, and plein air workshops. These help you develop your skills by helping you to take quick decisions. These could also help you develop your very own signature techniques which will further help you complete in an even shorter time frame.
You could begin using a timer-controlled painting set to a specific time frame. Start off with larger time spans and narrow it down as you increase your speed and your strokes.
Avoid overthinking your strategies and techniques. Opt for the kind of size dimension and format that will help you finish your work within the allotted time limit.
Materials Matter: Comprehensive Analysis
Develop your personal techniques when it comes to managing your painting materials and supplies for an outdoor painting spree. A few artists may stretch their canvases for oil paintings which keeps it flat and tightly spread. This also prevents warps of any sort.
A real problem with watercolors is that they can get all dried up before you know it and if you haven’t checked up on them well before taking them out on an outdoor painting session, then you might just be in for an annoying and disappointing discovery.
Always check on your supplies before packing them up. Also, you should always ensure that your brushes are in working condition. These should be absolutely clean, and dry and the bristles should be intact in every way.
Think about what could make your work easier. A blotting material such as tissues, color blotting papers or cotton papers, or a self-cleaning brush pen would be a pretty efficient and handy tool while painting outdoors. Do not forget the pencils and erasers, as they’re the absolute basic and essential tools for any artwork.
And some may also carry an “all-weather” umbrella for sheltering their work from the rain. This can also protect the painting from the extreme glare of sunlight.
Weather Forecasts: An Artist's Unexpected Ally or Foe
This is one thing that you cannot just afford to miss out on! Do check the weather conditions before you go for an outdoor painting session. Apart from getting absolutely destroyed by rain, it can get visibly affected by extremely hot, cold, humidity, or snowy situations.
Although you can’t control inclement weather conditions, you do get the option of safeguarding your painting from it, such as using an isopropyl alcohol solution for keeping the washes from freezing on your palette if it’s very cold. You could also carry canvas and color guards to protect your materials from melting in extremely hot situations.
Also, fluctuating weather situations can impair the visual perception of the shapes and patterns that constitute the scene. An open scape that may have previously seemed to possess different tonal qualities due to a certain balance of lights and shadows may appear oddly drained off of its natural colors due to weather fluctuations.
This is especially noticed when there is an upcoming spell of rain or thunder in the distance that cast long shadows over a significant area. You have to be alert of all such situations before you set out to paint.
Or, best, you could simply cancel your plans if there’s rain or a storm on the bulletin.
Crafting Composition: Merging Shapes, Patterns, and Textures
Try connecting and linking various forms and shapes together to create beautiful complex patterns. Start by selecting a center or focal point of interest. After that, try to develop a strategy to direct the viewer’s eye through the entire painting by accentuating and developing the intricacies of the overall work.
A complex network of shapes and patterns can create a balanced composition in art. Do not hesitate or be scared to eliminate any detail to achieve the desired effect. Always remember that every painting no matter how similar it might look to another piece will always differ in its composition of shape patterns and texture. This is because such a formation in every painting is unique and no two pieces of art can ever be the same.
The fundamental point of studying your compositions is to develop your techniques to create these intricacies. These will undoubtedly be one of a kind in every way and reflect the special and unique skills of the painter.
In order to find the center point of interest, do refer to the ways that you could employ to detect and identify complementary shapes in work to begin linking these with one another determining their relations with each other.
Streamlining Your Artistic Toolbox: Assort, Simplify, Organize
Always try to simplify and organize your art supplies to maintain a clean kit and working area. You actually don’t need all your watercolor supplies and supplies even if you think you do. So, instead of carrying a whole stash of different types of colors or brushes, narrow it down to a lesser quantity, because the chances are that you’ll require even less than what you might want to carry.
We often tend to go overboard with our supplies when going on an outdoor painting venture. This is understandable as it’s quite psychological to be anxious about what you may be forgetting behind at your place that could be really important for your painting.
Well, this may not always be the case, and it can simply be that you’re piling on a lot of things that you may not need.
Do schedule in advance to avoid any last-minute last rush or indecision. Also, decide what kind of media you’d be working with as soon as you conceive a plan. Do not overthink your techniques, procedures, or subject for that matter.
A neat and clean arrangement will help you work faster and more importantly, better. Whereas, a cluttered scenario will stifle creativity and end up reflecting in your work of art.
Color Planning: The Rainbow Roadmap
Handling a color scheme, especially with water-paints media is undeniably one of the most difficult feats to achieve in art. This is because apart from being incredibly finicky to put on paper, watercolors have a shifting tonal feature that makes it incredibly tough for the user to figure out the exact effect that particular shade might have.
So while getting down to work with watercolors en plein air, you have to be exceptionally careful about what and how a certain hue would behave in the natural lights (compared to indoor situations) and what kind of tonal characteristic it will yield there.
Creating a color study can go a long way in creating complex shape patterns with regard to the color scheme. When it comes to assigning colors to these shape patterns, do stick to the value structure that you have established.
Your choice of colors or color scheme can be accurate and authentic to the scene that’s before you, or you could easily choose to interpret them as freely and creatively as you want.
Always remember that warm colors have the tendency to come ahead and forward, while cooler tones and colors tend to recede.
Also, warm lights will always create cool shadows, unlike cool lights that may give you warmer shadows.
Documenting Your Journey: Journaling Art Techniques and Experiments
Try and maintain a journal for all your methods and experiments regarding your artwork. Not only will this help you to go back to your signature strokes and techniques easily, but this is also a great way of boosting creativity. As you keep entering your techniques, you come up with newer ones.
This is even a good way of keeping track of your creations and exercising artistic control. A journal will let you know what to and what not to go for or do when creating a watercolor piece. It also reminds you of the effects and reactions that a particular stroke or technique might have had in the past.
An art journal is especially necessary for en plein air painting as this helps you complete your work within a limited period of time. An outdoor painting session will demand incredible control over all of your techniques and strategies while handling watercolors. A journal will be the ultimate guide that will continuously keep you on the right track with managing your moves on paper.
Also, a journal is a good way even to help others if they’re starting out with en plein air watercolor art, as you yourself would be experienced enough with your watercolor ways to help others develop their own skills.
Location, Location, Location: Becoming a Savvy Spotter
This is one of the vital aspects of painting en plein air. Choose the location for your painting session wisely and carefully.
The location for your outdoor watercolor paintwork should make you fall in love with the sights and scenes and then further inspire you to capture what you’re loving, onto the canvas.
If you’re not inspired by what you see, then it is probably not what you should be painting, to begin with. Heighten your senses to take in the impact of the beautiful natural surrounding that you’re in at the moment and feel what it inspires in you. Take your time to know it better. Do not rush. Study the details carefully. Form a mental picture in watercolors that you’d be pursuing. Then begin your work in a calm and relaxed state of mind.
A smart way of doing this is to walk around a bit in order to get accustomed to the location. Take in the sights and scenes and try to feel the sensations each of them produce to connect to the surroundings better.
Try and analyze the different aspects of the place and know what these make you feel. All of the different elements of the natural locations such as the light, shadows, views, and colors should come together in stunning form to you which should inspire you to begin your work without delay.
Here are a few factors to help you choose the best location for plein air painting.
Crowd/Number Of People
A beach or a park might seem like a good idea for plein air painting until you actually get there. With children running around and people making awkward small talk, you might find it quite distracting to begin painting. If that is something that would really hinder you, try finding a quiet and peaceful location to start painting en plein air.
Weather Conditions
Painting outdoors is an exciting idea, but you also need to think about the weather conditions. A sun hat and sunscreen might save you from the sun but what about rain? What about wind? That could possibly ruin your painting. Try choosing a day with dry weather and no wind for a pleasant plein-air painting experience.
Additionally, try finding a sheltered spot away from direct sunlight despite the sunscreen.
Accessibility
You will rarely finish a painting in the same sitting. So, you will definitely have to visit the same location multiple times to complete your painting. Additionally, you will have to visit the location around the same time every day to get similar light conditions. So, make sure the location you choose is accessible on a daily basis. After all, you must complete your painting!
Examples Of Good Locations For Plein Air Painting
Some examples of good locations for plein-air painting are local parks, hills, lakes, national parks, beaches, forests, etc. If you can’t think of any good outdoor painting spot near you, you should try joining a plein air painting community group. The group will help you discover new painting spots and will also have access to exclusive painting locations.
Exploring Watercolor Mediums: Paper, Pads, Sheets, and Blocks
So the quality of the watercolor paper is calculated in GSM which is “grams per square meter.” The higher the measure of gsm, the thicker your paper is and the more water it would be able to hold.
Usually, the preferred gsm for papers for watercolors is 200-300 gsm. However, more is not always correct. Do check out the requirements for the kind of paints you are going to be using. If you’re not going to use a higher content of water in your paintings and keep it mostly a dry-on-dry painting, then you can easily opt for lesser gsm.
But if you are looking to use a lot of washes and wet-on-wet techniques involving multiple layers and tonal variations, then ensure you have a higher gsm measure on your paper.
A Closer Look at Watercolor Blocks
So the papers for your watercolor paintings do come in many forms. You could get sheets, regular framed canvases, rolls, or pads of all kinds for your painting purpose.
A really nice alternative is watercolor blocks that are readily available in almost every local stationery shop near you. These are ideal for en plein air painting as the edges on these come glue-down and the surface is pre-stretched for easy and hassle-free usage outdoors. This mean that you do not have to worry about masking tapes or having to gum down your paper while setting up. Also, this prevents your paper from flying away if you’re working at a very windy location such as seasides or open fields.
Brushes Uncovered: Your Magic Wand
So, after selecting the appropriate paper for painting en plein air using watercolors, let’s talk about the kind of brushes for this purpose. You do get a ton of options in brushes to suit every requirement. From traditional to hi-tech, specialized and even self-cleaning brush pens that hack down on the amount of effort you have to put in with conventional supplies- you get it all.
So, when painting outdoors, you could either opt for these awesome brush-pens, or you could go for your usual brushes and glass jars.
Brush pens could be pretty easy to work with if you’ve gotten used to their overall mechanism and do not require for you to dip your brush frequently in the water. Some are even designed to regulate color and tonal consistency which would eliminate the need for mixing up or searching the right amount of saturation, time and again, for that matter.
However, the disadvantage of these is that they come with a particular pen tip that may not hold up under regular use and constant pressure. These are pretty delicate to work with and can in fact cause you to miss certain steps in the basic procedure of paintings if you hold in incorrectly or aren’t accustomed to the techniques.
On the other hand…
...the simple brushes and glass jars can be really comfortable to work with. Although they have no special mechanism to bring to the canvas, they do provide you with the ease of learning and mastering the fundamental strokes and techniques as well as developing your own in the process.
These could provide you with a steady supply of clean water, which might not be the case with brush pens all the time. Also, the basic glass jars are pretty inexpensive than brush pens. And if you can, pack two while preparing your outdoor paint kit: one for dipping the brushes and the other for rinsing them well.
However, if you think that all the extra jars are going to weigh you down, then do go for fine brush pens that are easily available at the market or online.
The Easel: Your En Plein Air Painting Partner
While hunting for the perfect easel for your outdoor painting session, you will definitely come across a wide variety of the same. Do consider going for something that will be immensely portable, yet very durable, matching up to every standard that ensures its strength.
You should get something that can really tough out the onslaughts of the weather for a substantial amount of time. One other thing that you should really make sure is that the entire structure is compact and sleek. Avoid getting anything elaborate that needs a ton of effort and procedures to set up.
The traditional French Ease is an incredible choice for this purpose that gives you all benefit of being an amazingly lightweight and compact easel for outdoor painting.
This could be folded right up like a briefcase and allows you to sit or stand up while painting comfortably. This makes it especially ideal for all of those planning to paint for hours or over a considerable span of time.
A French easel also comes with the added benefit of having all the essential compartments such as paint-mixing palette slots, troughs and holders for all your painting tools, and even a slot to fix your umbrella. This dispenses the need for you to pack any separate kit or bag for your requirements.
But the best part of this is that you can actually store all of these in the easel itself before you head outdoors to paint, with your canvas, or watercolor block right into the canvas holder.
The Sketchbook: An Artist's Best Friend
Keeping a “handy-dandy notebook” or a sketchbook is a brilliant thing to have by your side while you set out to work in plein air. An art sketchbook or one that’s specially made for watercolor work can efficiently serve two very important functions.
First, it comes in really handy as a journal for entries regarding tips and techniques. This can be your safe place to test out color schemes and tonal or textural variations. Work out your own techniques or develop an individual style even while painting to see what you can apply to your main work. This is especially helpful as it allows you to make all the mistakes you need to make on it rather than messing up your main artwork.
This is exceedingly helpful when...
...you have to ascertain the tones and textures of your subject as it changes with shifting the time period. You can even come up with your very own way of handling tonal shifts and develop a way to achieve the right balance of the values and elements of painting.
A sketchbook is a great way to practice and perfect the art of art itself.
The other advantage of having a sketchbook is that it is a less expensive alternative to costly watercolor papers, watercolor blocks or even a French easel.
A sketchbook would also be a lot more handy, compact, and portable than every other sketching media.
You could easily get a beautiful watercolor sketchbook rather than getting a full-size canvas itself. It is just a perfect thing for beginners in every way. You could get yourself one in soft bounds or hardbound or even in an attractive moleskin one.
These could also help you complete your paintings a lot quicker, especially when you have to do it in a congested place or somewhere with a lot of traffic.
Capturing Moments: The Role of Photography in Art
Because, when in doubt, always take pictures! Take quick snaps and several ones for that matter, if you’re doubtful or not very confident about achieving a particular effect for your painting. This works especially well for beginners who might want to study the different aspects of the scape.
Also, you might need to take several pictures of your subject during the entire course of your painting for studying the shifts of lights, clouds, and shadows at different points of time or hours in the day.
Since the quality or the basic overall effect of your watercolor painting doesn’t have to be “hyperrealistic” in any way, you need not take a professional camera or a ton of photographic arrangements with yourself to the location.
However, do ensure that your camera does have proper zooming to a considerable extent and captures reasonably clear details, if not crystal-clear, for you to work on comfortably and confidently.
Perfect Seating: Ensuring Comfort in Creativity
A seating arrangement for all outdoor artwork, in our opinion, is an absolute must. And it has got nothing to do with your age or fitness!
Wanting to sit, especially after a considerable amount of time, is a completely normal bodily requirement and impulse. And it is, in fact, important to be absolutely comfortable when you’re outdoors painting and studying and analyzing your surroundings because you’re feeling the environment with all of your senses at the same time. This is something that you can’t do if your body is tensed up all the time and is pressurized without being given the time to rest to function properly.
This is why a portable stool or compact, lightweight, foldable chair is always good to have around while painting plein air.
You could get a travel stool for the purpose or even one that is specifically designed for painters and students for school projects. These are very lightweight and are constructed in a way that makes them slide right into most travel-gear bags or backpacks. This makes them perfect for every plein-air art project.
Tools And Materials Needed For Plein Air Painting
Watercolor Paints
This is an obvious one. There are many forms of watercolor paints available in the market, like watercolor tubes, watercolor pans, etc. For plein air painting, however, you need convenient paints to carry and hold. So, your best bet would be watercolor pans.
Watercolor pans consist of a variety of vibrant colors available in convenient dried blocks of paint. All you need is a little water to activate the dried paint, and you can start painting right away!
In landscape painting, a variety of colors is required to capture the true essence of the scene on canvas. Rather than carrying each and every pigment to outdoor locations, select a white shade along with a cold and warm shade of every primary color.
Note that the French Impressionists didn’t include black in their toolkit because of 2 reasons:
Black color doesn’t exist in the environment, i.e., nature.
The effects produced by variations in hue are far more vibrant than those produced by changes in shades.
Tip
Creating black without using black is easy– all you’ll have to do is mix emerald green with magenta to produce a gorgeous black shade.
Watercolor Paper, Canvas, Panels, And Boards
Small to medium-sized panels are ideal for plein air painting projects, as they fit the majority of French-style easels.
If you are using watercolors, watercolor paper, too, is available in many different forms: watercolor blocks, watercolor painting books or notebooks, watercolor sheets, watercolor sketchbooks, etc. If you are a beginner, a small sketchbook is the best option for you. It is the format you are most familiar with and is also convenient outdoors. But you will see some warping and buckling with this.
For an experienced watercolor painter, a watercolor block might be the better option. You don’t have to worry about warping or buckling because the paper is already stretched. Blocks are also usually thick enough to withstand most watercolor techniques so that you can paint away without worry.
Please make sure the paper you are getting is 300 GSM or above to ensure it is able to withstand all wet mediums and techniques.
But, if you use pochade boxes, you’ll have to make sure the canvas is compatible with it. Keep in mind that quite a few canvas carriers accept canvases up to 70 cm, whereas some require sets of equal-sized canvases to function properly.
As a piece of advice, I suggest opting for a small-scale canvas since working on it will be fun.
Even ready-to-paint panels offer a nice rigid base, which is why they are excellent for plein-air paintings. The best part about primed panels is that they are compatible with both a French box easel and a pochade setup. And because they don’t occupy much space, you can carry multiple items.
In this regard, I suggest going for handmade linen panels.
Watercolor Brushes
When selecting a brush set for plein air painting, consider your painting style. You should also take into account the plein air painting techniques you plan to employ to finish your artwork.
In my opinion, opting for a set whose brushes are a perfect blend of spring and stiffness will be the best bet. Or you can create your own brush set by adding round, filbert, and flat brushes to use multiple techniques with ease.
As an artist, you should always go for high-quality brushes because the bristles of such brushes do not come off while mixing the paint. Alongside brushes, make sure to add a graphite pencil for sketching.
You might also want to invest in a quality brush holder to protect your brushes from damage while traveling.
Water Container
What else does watercolor painting require? Water, of course! For plein air painting, you can’t expect to get water quickly. So, you will need a handy water container, along with some jars, to make painting a smooth process. I suggest having two jars of water, one for painting and the other for cleaning your brushes.
Portable Easel
This is an optional thing to buy, but it is something that many plein air painters recommend. Some painters prefer to sit while painting, while others prefer to paint standing. An easel will significantly help in the latter case. You can find lightweight, portable easels that will make painting an easy and convenient process for you.
If you don’t want to invest too much money in an easel, you can also use an old camera tripod, assuming it is of suitable height. Use an ‘adapter’ so you can fix your sketchbook or block on the top of the tripod.
Sun Hat And Sunscreen
One thing you don’t want is a pesky sunburn while you are painting the sun itself. So, a sun hat and sunscreen are important.
Other Optional Material
You can also carry painting gloves, paper towels, a watercolor palette, a watercolor drawing board, a folding chair, a folding table, and watercolor pencils in your art bag. You can also bring along a folding picnic table to keep all your supplies on. None of this is technically necessary, but it will surely make your plein-air painting experience easy and pleasant.
Prepping For The Painting Session
Now you can start with prepping for your painting.
Setting Up Your Materials
Once you reach the desired location for your plein air painting, start setting up your supplies. Set up the easel and the folding chair if you brought one. Take out your watercolor pans, palette, and paintbrushes. Set up the jars of water on a table. And at the very end, place your watercolor paper on the easel, and you are ready to begin painting.
Sketching The Composition
Before you actually start painting, you might want to sketch out a rough composition. Bring out your graphite pencil and start sketching. The advantage is that if you get something wrong with the pencil, you can easily correct it using an eraser. But you might not be able to erase actual watercolor paint.
So, take in the feel of the scenery and make a quick sketch.
Mixing Colors
Your pan colors might not always have the exact color you require to paint your masterpiece. So, mixing colors always comes to the rescue. Watercolors are extremely easy to mix, so you don’t have to face the cons of a limited palette.
Just decide the two colors you want to mix to make the third one. Knowledge about the color wheel (and the color theory) can greatly help you in deciding the right colors. Next, put the two colors on a palette using your paintbrush. Now, mix the two colors together using however much water you need. Keep mixing until you reach your desired shade.
Plein Air Painting Techniques
Here are 3 techniques that will help you get started with plein-air painting projects.
1. Painting Light: Capturing Light And Atmosphere
In plein air painting, artists paint by observing the environment around them. Therefore, they come across a variety of light sources, including electric light, candles, window light, overcast skies, and direct sunshine.
It’s a well-known fact that all kinds of lights have distinctive qualities, which you, as an artist, need to understand in order to paint them realistically.
I. Overcast Light
Often, sunshine is diffused by cloud layers, wiping out the dramatic contrasts of shadow and light. One significant benefit of overcast light is that you can paint outlines in their true colors minus the need for extreme contrasts of shade and light.
II. Direct Sunlight
The blue sky, the sun, and reflected light from luminous things are 3 distinctive illumination systems that are at play on a bright, sunny day. Of all the 3 light courses, the light from the blue sky and the reflected one should be subordinate to sunlight because they derive from it.
III. Streetlights And Night Conditions
Other than the moonlight, metal halide, arc, sodium, mercury-vapor, neon fluorescent, incandescent, and LED lights make up the modern nightscape. Every single light source has a unique spectral power distribution.
I’ve listed a few tips that will help you understand night conditions, so you can capture night-time lights and conditions convincingly.
You can experiment with urban night-time painting by illuminating your palette with a portable LED light. Moreover, take a camera and set it to night mode to capture images at night. Make sure you use a modern-day camera because its lens will capture excellent pictures in low lights.
Most importantly, observe the variety of exterior lighting hues whenever you fly above a city in an airplane.
2. Painting Water: Sketching And Blocking
Believe me, no other subject is as challenging to paint as water in landscape painting.
Lake, pond, river, or ocean– each subject needs to be handled differently, which you’ll understand only when you study them carefully. Here are 3 techniques to handle water bodies:
A. Coastline
Both the water and the sky are similar in color, albeit the former is darker in tone. Sketch a solid coastline or horizon and block them simultaneously to ensure the 2 have a consistent color.
B. Reflections
Painting reflections on still water bodies like ponds, lakes, and tranquil rivers is challenging because they often glow in the colors of dawn or dusk. Remember, reflections should be rendered as gestural and loose as possible.
Instead of a lot of individual strokes, try depicting it as a huge tonal mass of color. Bear in mind that the objects are lighter than the reflections, so keep them dark.
C. Movements
Plein art painters with little to no knowledge and experience find it challenging to capture the light effects and the movements occurring in ocean waves. A trick I learned from my teacher is to use a palette knife when painting ocean waves.
3. Simplifying The Scene And Using A Limited Color Palette
Though prized for freshness and spontaneity, being deliberate and organized is one of the finest ways to learn the art of plein air.
Prior to heading outdoors, devise a plan and approach the painting deliberately from the get-go. Many a time, plein air painters, in their eagerness to start painting, begin adding color to the surface even before drawing the composition (visual arts) completely.
Capturing and painting each and every detail from the scene in en plein air is overwhelming. That’s why I suggest looking for scenes featuring basic shapes and sizes. At the same time, keep the value of 4 or fewer than that to simplify the values. Instead of every minute detail of the scene, like an animal, the texture of a leaf or a plant, flower petal, or fruit, captures small shapes in large groups.
Simplifying your palette is also important for every individual, starting with plein-air painting. A limited palette or a palette with cool/warm colors will be the best bet.
Challenges Of Plein Air Painting
1. Changing Light And Weather Conditions
One significant challenge plein air artists face is changing lighting and weather conditions.
The weather may become cloudy from sunny, rainy or windy in the spur of the moment. Even minor changes in the weather can affect your final painting, adding an element of uncertainty to the painting procedure.
But this isn’t the case with studio painting, as they aren’t affected by the changing outdoor weather. An artist creates studio painting in a controlled environment, where they have full control over the lighting conditions.
2. Insects, Bugs, And Critters
Bugs, critters, and other insects are also a source of distraction in plein-air painting. As insects are attracted to moisture, they tend to flock around watercolor or oil-based pigments you use in your artwork.
Pigments comprise animal fats and are usually present in oil-based paints, thereby attracting cockroaches.
3. Time Constraints
In the studio, you have plenty of time to work on your artwork, but things are different when it comes to plein-air painting. A painting that is completed within 2 to 3 days in a studio needs to be completed within a few hours outdoors.
This time constraint is what makes plein air painting challenging for painters.
4 Plein Air Painting Tips For Success
A. Plan
Plan ahead by searching for potential locations and checking the weather forecast so that you won’t have to deal with surprises later on.
B. Expect The Unexpected
Lighting and weather conditions change continually, so be prepared.
C. Keep Things Simple
Do not attempt to include every little detail in your painting. Instead, keep things simple by focusing on general and familiar shapes. Also, use a small canvas or paper so that you can complete the painting quickly and easily.
D. No Substitute For Practice
Practice, practice, and practice as much as you can only then will you master plein air painting techniques.
Benefits Of Plein Air Painting
1. Capture Real Scenes
When you paint outdoors, you can let your creative juices flow in your painting, which isn’t possible in studio painting. That’s because the scenery is right in front of your eyes, and you can read and interpret with your senses.
Compositionally, plein air artists’ eyes aren’t constrained by a camera viewfinder. Even observing proportions, depths, and object relations is easy, as you only have to move your eyes and head a little.
2. Disconnecting From The Digital World
For many artists, creating art or painting is a sort of meditative activity.
On days when everything feels dark and gloomy, landscape painting can calm your mind and result in healing. The point of landscape painting is to disconnect artists from the digital world. That means you’ll have to leave your phone in your studio to rest your eyes and set your focus on creating stunning scenery via plein-air painting techniques.
3. Recognize Colors Accurately
Painting outdoors is often considered the most effective way to recognize colors and study how they compare to each other.
Because of warmth, contrast, and saturation, the camera eye alters the values and colors of the photograph, which isn’t the case with plein air painting. By painting en plein air, you’ll be able to use actual colors in your artwork, including seasons and times of the day.
Regardless of what you think, you’ll be able to match the wintery whites and blues of snowfall or the pinks and oranges of spring sunset better in plein air painting.
4. Mentally Refreshing
Plein air painters, as a part of their job, are more physically active than studio painters. This is due to the fact that they explore the locale outdoors to capture scenes on their canvases.
While sitting in an open landscape, they soak in a lot of natural light, which is beneficial. Like, exposure to natural light or sunlight improves sleep patterns and the circadian rhythm to help the body produce Vitamin D.
Not only are you able to focus better on work, but you also feel happier. And if you’re a social person, painting en plein air in groups will refresh your mind and help you make new friends.
5. Step Out Of Your Comfort Zone
In studio painting, you work at your own pace and whenever you want– be it early morning or late night.
But things are different in outdoor painting. Painting en plein air means you only have a few hours to complete your artwork, so painters tend to work differently than they do at a studio.
Plein air painting (quite literally) forces painters to get out of their comfort zone. And during the process, you’ll learn new techniques and fresh approaches to complete your work within a certain time frame.
You can make marks via gouache, dry brush, wax, flicking water, spritzing, or other techniques. As a plein air painter, you must have the courage to be bold and use thick paints with as large a brush as possible.
Taking risks or getting bold in the studio is hard; after all, no one would want to ruin a final painting after spending 160+ hours on it. In essence, painting en plein air is a safe place to take risks and go bold.
Plein Air Painting FAQs
Are notebook pads good for plein air painting?
Notebook pads are ideal for sketching but not for plein air painting, so it’s best to avoid them.
Who are some of the well-known artists in present times?
Gordon MacKenzie is a talented watercolor artist whose landscape paintings are stunning. Cathy Johnson, another artist well-known for illustration, has written numerous books on creating textures in watercolor.
A self-proclaimed color theory expert, famous in the art world, is Jenna Rainey, who specializes in watercolor and hand-made drawings. Other artists specializing in visual art, including concept art, are Jean Haines, Ray Hendershot, Matthew Palmer, and Leslie Frontz.
Even Nita Engle, who passed away in 2019, was an American watercolorist and illustrator who had painted numerous landscapes from Alaska to Lake Superior.
What are the best locations for plein air painting?
Some of the best locations for plein air painting are:
Bali, Indonesia
Oia, Santorini
Grand Canyon, Arizona
Napa Valley, California
Paris, France
Can beginners paint en plein air with watercolors, or is it more suited for experienced artists?
Beginners can absolutely paint in plein air. It is not a matter of skill but a matter of inspiration. While painting en plein air, the big advantage you get is that you have your desired scenery in front of you.
Beginners can start by painting easy sceneries like a flower, a tree, an animal, parks, etc., and then move on to more complex landscapes. All you need is a good eye for your concept art.
How do I deal with changing light and weather conditions while painting en-plein air?
When you’re painting outside, quick changes in light and sudden shifts in weather are all part of the game. A good tip is to check your weather app before you head out. It’ll give you a heads-up if it’s going to rain or be too windy, saving you from a wasted trip.
And about the changing light, always note the exact time you start painting, if you attempt to paint on another day, the time reference will help you find similar conditions. A hack for the shifting light is to make a quick sketch of what you’re about to paint and snap a picture too. That way, even if the light changes, you’ve got a reference to help you finish your watercolor masterpiece.
How can plein-air painting improve my overall painting skills?
Practice makes perfect, right? That goes for watercolor painting too. Any type of practice will boost your skills. But with plein air painting, it’s special. You’re right there, looking at the real scenery, and it makes you feel super connected to your work. Plus, nature doesn’t always make it easy – you might have to paint rushing water, rustling leaves, or a setting sun. Sure, it’s a bit tough, but hey, that’s how you up your game. And believe me, you’ll see your skills sky-rocket!
Are there any famous watercolor artists who painted in plein air?
Yes, there have been several notable watercolor artists who painted en plein air, including Camille Pissarro, Edgar Degas, James McNeil Whistler, Jean Haines, Leslie Frontz, Matthew Palmer, Cathy Johnson, Gordon MacKenzie, Jenna Rainey, and John Singer Sargent.
How do I transport and store my paintings created en plein air?
Transporting and storing plein air paintings requires careful consideration to prevent damage. To transport wet paintings, consider a wet painting carrier, which keeps the artwork separate and secure. For dry artwork, use acid-free paper or glassine interleaves between each piece, stored flat in a sturdy, waterproof portfolio. Long-term storage should be in a dry, temperature-controlled environment, away from direct sunlight and extreme temperature fluctuations. Always handle with clean hands or use cotton gloves to avoid oils or dirt from damaging the artwork.
Final Words
That was a lot of information on plein-air painting, so take a couple of minutes to collect your thoughts.
To sum it up, plein-air painting is all about capturing the essence of a natural environment. As a plein air artist, you need not capture everything in the area, only a few large objects will do the trick.
Best of all plein air painting offers numerous benefits, as it relaxes the mind and you can start painting en plein air as a hobby. You can sell your artwork on social media to earn money.
Before starting painting, don’t forget to check out a few tutorial videos online, and I’m sure you’ll be good to go! Also, do not be afraid to experiment; in fact, unleash your creativity and draw whatever you want.
Plastic spoon crafts are one of the first things kids can do. It's a great way to challenge kids' creative freedom!
Not just that, but even adults will have a lot of fun with the different plastic spoon crafts ideas. You'd be surprised how lovely each craft turns out.
Take a break from the usualDIY bamboo projects. Today, we'll go through some of the best plastic spoon ideas you and your kids can make. Keep reading and start crafting!
50 Creative Plastic Spoon Crafts and Projects
We always end up with a ton of extra plastic spoons at home. Instead of throwing them out, consider transforming them into beautiful art pieces!
1. Plastic Spoon Christmas Trees
Make your Christmas memorable by creating small Christmas trees using plastic spoons. This project is easy, and you can use different colored spoons.
You can use green or red spoon heads in keeping with the Christmas spirit. Alternatively, you can go for a monochromatic look using only white spoons.
Did you know you can make roses out of plastic spoons? The results look stunning, especially if you use colorful spoons.
All you need to do is melt the spoon and mold it into a rose. Leave it to harden, and you're done! Just be careful with handling the heat, especially around kids.
Don't throw your old plastic bottle just yet — you can repurpose it as a bird feeder. You hardly have to do anything except cut two parallel holes in the body.
Insert old wooden spoons in the hole, which will serve as a holder for the bird feeds. This bird feeder project will take you only a short time to do!
Children love catapulting things at each other, and they can get very creative with what they use. Why not teach them how to make a plastic spoon catapult?
You only need popsicle sticks, rubber bands, and old plastic spoons. Your kids can use it to catapult marshmallows at each other!
Are you always confused about which plant is which in your garden patch? Why not add signage by using wooden spoons?
You can write the names of the plant on the spoon heads and even draw them! Stick it in your garden patch, and you will no longer have any trouble distinguishing them.
Disney princesses are an icon to every child — they know each character by heart. Why not let them craft their favorite princesses with the help of plastic spoons?
You only need dollar-store materials to end up with a really beautiful project. Your child will surely love this idea.
Many children look forward to thanksgiving because it's one of the few holidays to bond with their whole family and eat out.
Make this holiday extra memorable by creating this spoon craft. Cut out a few pieces of art paper to use as turkey feathers. Add eyes and watch the spoon come to life.
The next time you're looking for an art piece for your home, consider making one instead. This plastic spoon centerpiece looks stunning — you won't believe it only costs a few dollars!
All you have to do is stick your plastic spoons to a circular Styrofoam and spray paint it with your favorite color.
Start with this simple flower pot project to teach your kids how to have a green thumb. You need a small pot/vase and a few plastic spoons to stick on the pot!
Use a sharpie pen to draw on the spoon heads to get more crafty. Remember to place beautiful flowers once you're done!
Who would have thought a plastic spoon could be used as an accessory? Plastic spoon flowers make a good addition to your collection without spending a fortune.
Paint it with your favorite color, and viola! You have a DIY rose accessory that will be a show-stopper and a good conversation piece.
Crafting water lilies is so fun because of the overall results. There's something about the flower which looks so stunning, even if they're just plastic spoons.
Cut off the spoon heads, and start sticking them together until you form beautiful flowers. You can also paint the center yellow to make it more realistic.
There's something special about homemade décor, especially during the holidays. It's even more special knowing your children put much effort into making it.
This plastic spoon snow pot is one of the best DIY projects we love to plan for the winter. Let your kids dress up their plastic spoon to become their favorite snowman!
Besides princesses, children are all about monsters that spook them out. Help them conquer this fear by making monster spoon heads!
They can spray paint a wooden spoon their preferred colors, that'll surely give them the spooks! Their imaginations can run wild with the type of monsters they can create.
We loved playing with maracas as a child because of the different beats and rhythms to explore. Not just that, we were always so curious about where the sounds came from.
Feed your child's curiosity and craft maracas with them. This DIY project only requires plastic spoons, washi tape, and a few beads!
Transform your plain mirror into something spectacular! With the help of plastic spoons, you can spruce your average mirror to become a centerpiece.
We recommend using your favorite colors or one that matches the interior of your home. Creative plastic spoon projects like this one are always a crowd favorite.
Mark the start of the Christmas season with these beautiful and festive candle holders. Christmas trees aren't the only thing to help you feel the holiday spirit!
Layer your spoon heads to make them look like flowers, and paint them with festive colors. Glue them together and make sure they can lay flat on your table.
Conclusion
If you've got a ton of plastic spoons to spare, consider creating all these stunning ideas we've mentioned!
The projects range from very easy to slightly hard — but we're sure you and your children are ready to take them on.
We hope you enjoyed this article!
If you'd like to do more crafts, you can also check out the differentDIY wine cork projects, which are very fun and easy to do.
More and more people today prefer the suburbs to the hustle and bustle of the big cities.
If you are working in New York, you might be tired of the fast-paced life that the city offers. In case you are planning to move to greener pastures, New Jersey is the best place for you to consider. It is great for families as it has excellent public schools and a family-friendly atmosphere.
But New Jersey is no small space and is made up of numerous neighborhoods. So, to help you make a great choice, we have rounded up the best options starting from Princeton to Bridgewater. After reading this guide, you will not have difficulty selecting a place to create your next abode.
So, without delay, let’s dive right in!
Top Places To Live In New Jersey
1. Madison, New Jersey
Madison is the place to be if you are looking for a location in New Jersey that exudes a charming storybook vibe. People who like city life but not the regular monotony of it would really love this place.
Here, you will find a pretty downtown area filled with cozy cafes, restaurants, boutiques, and art galleries. The place is charming throughout the year!
However, during summer, it turns extremely beautiful with parks filled with happy kids and the aroma of hamburgers in the air. Other than that, every year during Memorial Day, you will see plenty of antique cars and can dance to the live music performances that take place.
This suburban Morris County borough is not idyllic, however. If you are looking to relocate, it would be a great idea to consider this place as there is almost a non-existent crime rate, great schools, and reasonable taxes.
All this topped with a small-town vibe is perfect for the ones who love the solitary calm of nature.
2. Chatham
Chatham is a top-notch school district in New Jersey. Most of the adult population in this area holds a college degree, so you can understand that education in this place is pretty good.
In this town, the children get the best of the public school systems and have the top educational tools at their disposal. Because of great education, the per capita income is pretty high and outperforms other places in New Jersey.
However, amenities like nightlife are not its USP but the advantages generally negate this problem. The crime rate is also pretty low, and you can engage in a range of outdoor activities of your liking.
3. Princeton, New Jersey
In the last year, home sales in Princeton have gone up pretty high. This is because Princeton’s current influx for people from Brooklyn and Jersey City has driven up the demand and Princeton may soon become the next place to be!
The population of this place is pretty diverse, with a mix of affluent professionals and some of the brightest minds in the country. Yes, brownie points for guessing we were going to talk about the IVY League university.
Students and young professionals from all across the world come to study at Princeton University, making it a melting pot of different cultures.
Not just that, the town even has excellent schools, which draw a lot of young families with kids. You will find plenty of restaurants, cafes, and bookstores in the area to spend quality time with your family. It's the best bet if you want to replicate city life but also want to enjoy the solitary calm of a suburban setting.
4. Montclair
One of the most premier locations where you can stay in New Jersey is Montclair. This area is quite popular among affluent city buyers and it will take around 30 minutes to reach Montclair from Penn Station.
It is not just true that it is very close to New York City but also flaunts a livability score of 86 out of 100. If you are planning to start a new family or planning to move with your kids, this place is ideal as it has excellent private and public schools. Apart from that, there are big green parks where you can engage in a range of outdoor activities in your free time.
Also, if you are an art-lover, you are in for a treat because Montclair has some of the best hip art galleries, poetry clubs, and theaters. You are sure to find something that you like here. And when in Montclair, do not miss out on the yearly film festival that showcases some of the most notable works in the field.
The median home value hovers is pretty steep, and unless you have a big budget, owning a property in Montclair can be quite difficult. But if you have the budget, owning a space in this glamorous suburban town will be worth it. Who knows, you may even end up being neighbors with Stephen Colbert!
Many people are shifting from New York to Montclair and you will see that most of the residents' cars have a New York license plate.
5. Ridgewood
To fulfill your suburban dream, Ridgewood is the place to be. This place offers a feeling of a tight-knit community to its residents, and that impresses the out-of-towners massively. It is the best neighborhood to arrange weekend family barbeque parties outdoors.
Moreover, it is important to note that you can arrange for some of the best education for your children here as there are many excellent schools. What further drives up the livability score is the fact that there are hardly any crimes in the town.
The only problem with the area is the fact that nightlife is almost non-existent in this area. Even the restaurants in this area aren’t that many, and you might not have plenty of options when planning dinner with your family.
But do not for a moment think that you will get bored here! There are beautiful trails and massive playgrounds to explore or spend time with your pet. You can even decide on dropping by the Schoolhouse Museum for a quick historical tour. There’s plenty of scope for outdoor recreation and it is a good space to raise children!
6. Manalapan
The Jersey shore area has witnessed a large influx of New York City buyers as commuting to New York City has become pretty convenient. In August 2022, the average sales price jumped quite high in Manalapan because of that.
Manalapan is located around 45 miles from New York City and 15 miles from New Jersey beaches. So, you can understand why the real estate market exploded in Manalapan once the transport facilities got better!
The other reason you should consider moving to Manalapan is that the taxes here are relatively low compared to New Jersey. Even the interest rates on home mortgages are significantly lower.
7. Closter Bergen County
New Jersey Realtors has seen that the closed sales in Closter have gone up pretty high in the last few years. The sale has multiplied in terms of both increased sales prices and volume. If you are wondering why Closter has witnessed this influx of people, let us break it down for you.
Over the years, transportation has become better, and this location has become pretty desirable because it is pretty easy to commute from Manhattan. Other than that, Closter has come up with charming downtown areas and now is a shopping district. In short, it has everything that a New Yorker wishes for!
8. Sparta Sussex County
Local real estate agents have seen a recent spike in the influx of people to rural Sussex County. And honestly, we are not at all surprised. To combat the work pressure, more and more people are opting for places to stay where there is a little calm, and they are closer to nature.
When in Sussex, you can enjoy and be a part of the 11 private lake communities. Furthermore, there is the historic Lake Mohawk boardwalk and plaza where you can spend quality time with your family away from the hustle-bustle of the city.
Sparta is just 45 miles from Manhattan and provides excellent commute options.
9. Bridgewater Somerset County
Coldwell Banker realty noted that many homes in Somerset got sold the moment they entered the market. There has been a considerable increase in the number of under-contract homes in the last few years!
A particular real estate company stated that there had been an increase in buyers in Bridgewater. People are moving from northern New Jersey counties and even from New York City. People want to be away from the busy life in New York but also want to stay close enough to take advantage of all the facilities that Bridgewater puts on the table.
Things To Know When Moving To New Jersey
If you are on the lookout for properties in New Jersey, there are quite a few exciting things to note! And in this section, we are going to take a look at some of the factors that you should keep in mind before moving to New Jersey.
Let’s take a quick look!
1. The Jersey Shore Is More Than What Is Portrayed On Television
Unlike how it is portrayed on TV shows, the shore area is much more family-friendly. That said, you will also find some towns that cater to the demands of a much rowdier crowd. But most of the areas are pretty serene, and you can have a pleasant time with your family.
Going down the shore during the summer months is almost a mandatory summer tradition for people living in the state. With a 130-mile long beachline and beautiful boardwalks, we are not surprised why!
2. Cost Of Living Is Considerably High
Some people complain that everything in New Jersey seems to be a bit expensive. And honestly, they aren’t wrong!
Taxes on consumer goods and insurance charges seem to be pretty high in New Jersey. So, we were not really surprised to find out that the cost of living index sits at a whopping 127 when the national average is at 100.
Living in New Jersey is by no means cheap, but then again, the state boasts the highest median income in the country.
3. Get Familiar With Some Strange Traffic Laws
In New Jersey, traffic circles are pretty popular, and you need to ensure that you learn to navigate them well before starting to drive here. What’s really interesting is that they have a thing called the Jersey Jughandle.
This is basically a ramp that is made on the right-hand side of the road that can be used to make left-hand turns when a route is super busy. This indeed enhances the driving efficiency manifold. But if you are from outside the state, it might take some time before you get familiar with the process.
Final Words
That’s all we have for you today!
Hope you had a great time learning about the top 9 places that you can consider when moving to New Jersey. Honestly, New Jersey is pretty enormous, and there are many neighborhoods that you can consider for setting down.
While there are some that will provide you with a luxury location and lifestyle, there are others that offer the serene calm of the suburbs. The public school system is well-established all throughout the state, and you can easily find a good school for your kids.
If you have any other tips that we have missed out on, feel free to write in the comments section below.
Are you intrigued by all the noise that the Piper Home Security System has been making of late in the market?
While going through the customer feedback, we wanted to find out what this security system brings to the table.
Does it have the potential to be everyone’s go-to security device, or is it meant for specific use? Do the features justify the price tag? These are the questions that popped in our minds, and that’s when we decided to get our hands on it.
Piper is a portable wireless home security and monitoring...
Get text/email alerts to your smartphone or tablet when...
Why Buy This Product?
The Piper NV Home Security system has grabbed eyeballs and earned a reputation for its efficient sensors and hassle-free installation. But there are a lot of other positives that make this product worth investing in. So, let’s check them out….
Design
Before we walk you through the software deets, it only makes sense to talk a bit about the overall design. The model that we reviewed comes with three main components: the main IP camera-cum-motion/temperature motion, one window/door sensor, and a smart outlet. You can plug the outlet into a single or series of lights, which will act as a visual alarm if an intrusion is detected.
The IP camera uses a 3.4 MP, 180-degree fisheye lens that records HD images of your property in a wide-angle view (1080p video recording). Beyond that, the lens is surrounded by multiple Infrared LEDs, which equips the camera with night vision (hence the name ‘NV’’). Long story short, it gives you clear visuals even in low light.
Complete with pan, tilt, and zoom features, the camera facilitates greater user control so that it doesn’t miss out on any detail during recording.
We felt that the camera was slightly bigger than some of its competitors, but the wall-mounting kit makes it easy to conceal the unit on a high corner of the foyer. On the other hand, the door monitor came across as a bit small, possibly due to the absence of RFID sensors.
Software And Integrations
Much of this security system’s efficiency can be attributed to the Piper Home Security App that offers great customization for specific requirements. We tested it out on iOS 10 and were quite impressed!
For one, you can actuate the alarm’s response upon detecting personal movement. Likewise, there’s the option of adjusting the camera’s sensitivity when it detects pet movement. This way, you don’t get unnecessary notifications if you’re away.
On that note, you can choose to get the conventional push/SMS notifications, or even get updates via call and email.
We also liked the timeline feature that gives you a detailed breakdown of motion detection. This, in turn, helps you define different alarming scenarios depending on the varied level of protection that you might need throughout the day.
For instance, there’s an away mode that sets the alarm to a ‘high-alert’ and a ‘stay secure’ option that minimizes motion sensitivity. While the latter won’t wake up your neighbors at midnight, it’s still loud enough to notify you if the door opens without your authorization.
Apart from that, there’s this ‘summary view’ in the app’s Home Vital section that displays multiple statistics. Simply put, it will tell you about changes in temperature, sound, humidity, and brightness of the room in which the camera is installed. So, you can keep your mold-related damage worries at bay. Now that’s what we call attention to detail!
One thing that we’d like to mention is that the brand no longer uses an IFTTT service due to changes in the service’s policies. Instead, all models come with Z-wave compatibility.
Installation
Piper is known for the convenient installation of its security systems, and this unit is no exception. That being said, the setup did feel a bit different than usual. The door/window sensor has a stick-on design for better convenience. Its strong adhesive ensures that the motions don’t fall off even months after installation.
Perhaps, the only time-consuming step is finding a suitable location to mount the sensor so that it can pick up the motion of an adult without being taken down by your bored pet. Plus, the wall-mounting kit does well to conceal the otherwise bulky unit.
Overall, it shouldn’t take you more than 30 minutes to get the system out of the box and initiate operation with your smartphone. But if you reach a dead-end, Piper will be there to help you out with its dedicated customer support team.
Subscription
Apart from the Home NV Security System that we are talking about, there’s a classic variation that includes almost the same components. The only exception is it uses a no night-vision, 2mp camera.
No matter which package you opt for, it includes one camera, three sensors, and unlimited app access for a one-time fee. Moreover, there are no additional installation or activation charges, although you may have to pay for shipping, if applicable.
Performance
In a nutshell, the Piper Home Security System enables you to keep an eye on multiple parameters. Sure, motion sensing is undeniably important to track a burglary attempt, but changes in temperature or light can also be crucial in detecting any unwanted entry in your house.
Furthermore, this unit has a two-way communication feature that allows parents to communicate with their children and vice versa at the push of a button. Hence, it also doubles up as a child monitor.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Despite showering it with praises, there are a couple of significant drawbacks that can’t be neglected. For starters, the Piper Home Security System is meant to be installed in one room, meaning one camera and three sensors can cover any one of your rooms.
Although both the variations have a budget-friendly price tag, the system may become expensive if you have a larger area to secure as you will end up buying multiple units.
This brings us to our primary concern- the lack of a professional monitoring system. As we’ve already mentioned, the system doesn’t require you to pay any additional charges, which correlates to the fact that there is no 24/7 monitoring feature.
In case the batteries run out of juice or the sensors are disabled, there is no alternative other than manual fixing. And that’s not something you’d want while you’re away. Lastly, without the IFTTT integration, setting up your Trust Circle will become a rather tedious task.
Pros
Loud, 105-decibel siren
Lighting and appliance control
Two-way audio
Environmental data tracking gives precise location
No monthly charges
Cons
No 24/7 monitoring system
Absence of IFTTT integration can hamper utility
Piper Home Security System Review FAQ
What Is The Type Of Power Source Required?
The Piper Home Security System runs on both batteries and A/C power supply. Each package includes three AA alkaline batteries and a wall adapter for flexible use. While the NV-version has a 6-feet long power cord, the Piper classic comes with an 8-feet long cord. In addition, the entire unit requires a stable Wi-Fi connection.
What Is Z-Wave? How Does It Work?
Z-Wave is nothing but an automated wireless network that has recently replaced the brand’s partnership with the web-based IFTTT service. It utilizes low energy radio waves to connect with other devices.
If you have any automated device from the Z-wave suit, you can easily sync it up with the Piper Home Security System. This will enable you to control lighting and temperatures remotely, all from the convenience of a single app.
Can I Store The Recordings?
Piper offers cloud storage for its users to store and sort up to 100 small clippings for reference purposes without any extra charge. Both live feed and stored videos are available on the mobile app.
How Many Pipers Can Be Added To One User Account?
Users may add not more than five Piper Security Systems on a single user account. Moreover, all the Z-wave devices can be linked to the Piper Home Security App for easy control.
Is The System Pet-Friendly?
Yes. The motion sensors are efficient enough to pick up human movement, but pet activities won’t make the alarm go off. Hence, there are minimal chances of false-alarm triggers.
Is There A Separate Night-Vision Indicator?
For the NV-version, the camera/motion sensor emits an infrared glow when the said mode is activated. On top of that, the unit automatically detects ambient lighting and switches over to the dark mode for user convenience.
Are There Any Terms And Conditions To Be Aware Of?
If you’re not satisfied with the purchase, Piper offers a 30-day return policy. But in that case, the client has to pay a ‘restocking fee’ during return, which is 10% of the equipment charge. A one-year warranty covers design faults, repairs, and replacement of defective components.
This system is not meant for professional monitoring, and the Terms Of Use state that the service ‘shouldn’t be relied upon for life safety’. Besides, the Privacy Policy mentions that Piper collects user information through the mobile app, website, and payment gateways.
If you ask us, we’d say that the system is very suitable for medium-duty monitoring. But as far as serious security is concerned, there are better models in the market. The thing to keep in mind here is that even if its affordable pricing fits tight-budget needs, security is something most homeowners won’t mind spending for.
So, if you don’t live in a decently populated area where the neighbors will be alarmed immediately with the alarm, we suggest looking elsewhere. That being said, it’s a good choice if you want to keep an eye on your pets, the children, or the house help.
This brings us to the end of today’s guide. Do let us know your thoughts on our verdict in the comments section below.
Although crafting world-class furniture may not appear as intricate on the outside, it’s always the fine details that add to its exquisite appeal.
Ask any professional or DIY carpentry expert - finishing these jobs calls for undivided attention, dedication, and consistent effort. If you’re aiming for your DIY project to be flawless, you have to focus on the littlest aspects that contribute to perfection.
And if you hold any experience in carpentry, you’re surely aware of the different types of finishing nailers. Whether you’re working on a brand new project from scratch or renovating an existing one, you’ll need an excellent reliable nailer.
Why? Well, to nail the job!
Now when it comes to nailers, many are frequently confused among two of the most common types - pin nailers and brad nailers. Let alone the key differences between these two types of nailers; they’re hardly informed about their advantages and disadvantages.
Worry not, we’re here to shed light on the pin nailer vs. brad nailer debate. So, what exactly sets these products apart? How do these individually benefit your cause? Let’s find out!
Pin Nailer vs. Brad Nailer 101
What is a Pin Nailer?
Before we dive deep into our discussion, let’s address the basics first. So, what is a pin nailer? Not rocket science, if not anything else. You see, finish nailers are sophisticated carpentry tools that vary broadly. And pin nailers are the smallest alternatives in that category, which apply a thin 23-gauge pin.
Also, these are the most common sort of finish nailers you’ll find in the market, which pretty much explains their dynamic popularity.
A vast number of brands have launched an abundance of pin nailers that vary in sizes amidst 2” to ⅜”. Now moving to its design, pin nailers are usually compact and headless, featuring a tiny visible hole for nail ejection. However, don’t underestimate its size for its efficiency, as these nailers are capable of penetrating the hardest of woods with utmost precision.
Regardless, these products are most commonly used by manufacturers while attaching ultralight materials, for instance, clothes. Usually, the ejected pins don’t come off as arched, but they can still conjoin the substances appropriately with cohesive force and utmost strength. Although this pin doesn’t feature heads, it adds a visually appealing finish touch to the job being done.
Instead, it finishes the job with such accuracy that you won’t need a putty to cover up the surface, which sets it apart from other nailers. And speaking of capacity, the pin nailers commonly work with pins that are somewhere between 1” to 2” in length. However, heavy-duty jobs call for larger nails, and that’s where you can push the nailer behind its limits by using ⅜” pins.
Types of Pin Nailers
Now that we’ve understood what are pin nailers, let’s have a look at their main types. Primarily, there are two types, i.e., pneumatic pin nailers and electric pin nailers.
Pneumatic Pin Nailer
As you can guess by its name, the primary characteristic of pneumatic pin nailers is being air-powered. To put it simply, these pin nailers are powered by compressed air and support headless pin nails. These nailers are quite useful when it comes to small-duty jobs such as DIY renovation, trimming jobs, and craft. Compared to electric pin nailers, these products come off to be quite low-priced.
Electric Pin Nailer
If you appreciate portability and high-end performance the most, then electric pin nailers are what you need in your professional toolbox. These products rid you of the stress of maintaining pneumatic tools, as it mostly runs on batteries.
The electric pin nailers cost more than the pneumatic alternatives. However, efficiency-wise, the electronic options can punch in a larger number of nails with higher precision, which justifies their higher price tag.
Advantages of a Pin Nailer
Here comes the good stuff - what are the primary benefits associated with the application of pin nailers? Let’s find out!
Prevents the chances of wood splitting
To begin with, most of the nailers have a common issue - they have higher chances of splitting the wood while conjoining the materials. Here’s where the pin nailer comes into action. While nailing, these nails do not leave any scope for the wooden surface to split due to excessive pressure. It’s mainly due to its tiny nail size, which does not leave such an impact upon the piece being crafted.
Ideal for delicate trim pieces
As we’ve already learned, these nailers do not split or break the workpiece while being used, which makes them appropriate to be used on delicate parts. Mind you, carpentry isn’t always about the solid wood, as the soft and subtle pieces also contribute to its visual and structural appeal. So, in case you’re planning to install any light piece on a piece of furniture or working on small trimming jobs, this is what you should opt for.
No visible nail holes
Last but not least, using a pin nailer enhances the overall visual appeal of the project significantly. For instance, most of the nailers leave visible portions of the nails while being pinned. Although it doesn’t harm the furniture, the visibility of the nails still disrupts the final look of the entire project. However, these pin nailers have tiny and headless pins that penetrate deep into the wood without leaving any visible portion outside.
Disadvantages of a Pin Nailer
Although using pin nailers comes off with numerous benefits, there are still reasons why these aren’t the best nailers in the game. On that note, let’s explore some of its significant disadvantages now.
Minimal holding power
Honestly, the pin nailers do not guarantee a handsome holding power at all. Although it manages to attach the material, for the time being, you have to resort to a more reliable alternative for a stronger hold. In this case, you can rely on strong adhesive or special wood glue. Furthermore, although the headless nails enhance its visual outlook, it is also the key reason behind its lack of holding strength.
Lack of versatility in application
Moving on, these products do not leave sufficient room for versatile applications. Yes, it can come handy for quick fixes while you’re working on delicate furniture. But, if you’re looking for a nailer that offers more than that, then the pin nailer isn’t your cup of tea. Its small nails aren’t capable of diverse functions, so it’s one of those power tools that you’d hardly need while working.
What is Brad Nailer?
When you’re dedicated to finishing a DIY project, you’d need an all-in-one tool that can be used efficiently at all times. If your expectations are quite similar to this, then a brad nailer is what you should be looking for.
Ask any professional carpenter; brad nailers are simply as versatile as a tool can get, without a doubt. It provides the utmost assistance during handling the finishing aspect of heavy-duty carpentry jobs, which makes it every professional’s top choice.
These nailers support 18-gauge nails, also referred to as brad nails, which come equipped with some of the most distinctive features in the game. You would not require any putty to cover up the holes created while using this tool in most cases. That’s because its flat heads ensure that there aren’t any large holes in the wood piece while working.
If you’re engaged in a heavy-duty job involving hardwood, this is the nailer you should keep in an arm’s reach. The brad nailers support nails between the size variations of 2” and 5/8”, which speaks volumes about its wide range of applications. But brad nailers may not be the best nailers to opt for if you’re trying to avoid chances of splitting the wood crafting.
Regardless, its superior holding strength is second to none. In many cases, an 18-gauge nailer can also compensate for a 16-gauge nailer while making it highly suitable for other tasks such as base-boarding. And although brad nailers are widely confused as a finish nailer, we can assure you that it’s way beyond that.
Types of Brad Nailers
Similar to the pin nailers, even the brad nailers are of two main types- pneumatic and electric. Let’s have a look at it!
Pneumatic Brad Nailer
These products are run by compressed air, as the name itself suggests. Although these are cheaper than the electric alternatives, these can be equally as useful while working. Many professionals recommend it for medium-duty finishing jobs. These nailers come equipped with a shooting gun and cartridges for quick shooting.
Electric Brad Nailer
These products run on batteries and guarantee a long product life. Although these can appear to be a little costlier, these are far more powerful and fast. Electric brad nailers are an appropriate tool that can accompany you through heavy-duty carpentry jobs.
Advantages of a Brad Nailer
Although you can have a basic idea of how these products stand out from its competition, let’s give you an even detailed insight. On that note, here are the most significant advantages of using a brad nailer.
Stronger holding power
First and foremost, the brad nailers shoot strong 18-gauge nails to finish the woodworking jobs with utmost precision. And, these nails possess a comparatively stronger holding strength that any 23-gauge nail. It may not be as powerful as a 15-gauge nail, but it still manages to suffice for heavy-duty jobs. It is mainly due to such superior holding power of these nails that the brad nailers offer such a wide array of applications.
Versatile nailer for a wide range of applications
As mentioned earlier, the brad nailer qualifies for a diverse set of usability, which makes it one of the most versatile woodworking tools available in the market. Whether it is a small-scale DIY home improvement job or a professional cabinet building job, a brad nailer is an ideal tool to add a finishing touch.
You can even use it to build DIY art and craft to decorate your interior or workspace by creating picture frames or wooden models.
The appropriate tool for base-boarding
If you’re someone who has considerable experience of professional carpentry, you’d realize how intricate of a job base-boarding can become. Unlike conventional furniture construction, this task calls for detailed finishing work. Otherwise, the covering of the wooden surface or vinyl to the lower wall surface can be disrupted.
Speaking of accurate finishing, no other tool can be as appropriate as a brad nailer. Also, because it can conjoin the materials as sharp as a high-end 15 gauge nail, it’s claimed to be eligible for base-boarding.
Disadvantages of a Brad Nailer
Even though brad nailers seem to be more advanced than it’s competition in numerous areas, it still thumbs its nose in a few criteria. Let’s check out the disadvantages of using a brad nailer.
Visible nail holes
Yes, we’ve mentioned that in most cases, you wouldn’t require to cover the wooden surface with putty as the nails don’t usually leave large holes. However, the remaining truth here is that in many cases, these nailers do leave considerably small and visible holes on the wood piece.
The holes may not be as large as the ones issued by 15/16-gauge nails, but it still has to be dealt with so that the aesthetic appeal of the project isn’t compromised.
Chances of splitting the wood piece
If you’re working on delicate surfaces, then you should avoid using any brad nailers. It’s because they’re comparatively robust and hold a more reliable holding power. Consequently, the light and delicate surfaces may not be able to withstand the pressure. It’s always suggested by professionals not to use brad nailers on soft pieces to prevent the chances of splitting.
Pin Nailer vs. Brad Nailer
As we’re towards the end of our discussion, let’s run a quick highlight of the key points that distinguish a pin nailer from a brad nailer.
Nail type
For starters, pin nailers are famously known for their headless nails, whereas the brad nailers feature a large flat head. Also, not to forget, pin nailers are compatible with 23-gauge nails. On the flipside, brad nailers support 18-gauge nails.
Gauge range
As the pin nailers support 23-gauge nails, its wide range of sizes varies between 2” to ⅜.” Whereas, the 18-gauge brad nailers are compatible with dimensions varying from 2” to ⅝” for a broader range of usability.
Nail strength
Although the pin nailers offer cohesive force, its best recommended being used on delicate pieces for the best results. It provides a balanced power to prevent the splitting of the wood piece. However, you have to add wood glue/adhesive for a stronger hold.
On the other hand, the brad nailers offer a much more durable holding power. Consequently, it can be used on the hardwood with ease, without resorting to any adhesive.
Versatility
Pin nailers do not usually offer any versatility. These nailers are only useful for joining delicate pieces to add a subtle finishing touch to any project. On the flipside, brad nailers provide so much versatility that you can use it for unusual tasks such as base=boarding too.
Pin Nailer vs. Brad Nailer Verdict
Finishing a project is one of the essential aspects of carpentry, and it calls for excellent tools that promise nothing less than precision. Speaking of which, brad nailers and pin nailers are what most professionals rely on in these situations.
With that being said, we hope that our extensive guide to understanding and differentiating between pin nailers and brad nailers helped you know these products a little better. Remember, nailers always offer higher versatility and holding power. However, pin nailers are useful when it comes to delicate pieces.
On that note, we’ll see you soon with more informational articles, so stay tuned!
Overwhelmed by the excess amount of pollution, smoke, dust, and odor in the air? It is about time you got yourself a personal air purifier.
With the increase of various airborne diseases, these products have started being in high demand, as they are portable and do a great job at purifying the air. However, selecting the ideal model that would serve your requirements can get a tad complicated as the market is flooded with too many cheap options that offer below-par results.
So, to simplify things, we have handpicked the 8 best personal air purifier options currently available on the market. It was after rigorous research and testing that we provided detailed and unbiased reviews of all our recommendations.
And, to help you make an informed purchase, we have further included a buyer’s guide towards the end of the article. Without further ado, let’s get straight to the good stuff.
Founded in 2010, Pure Enrichment is one of the leading manufacturers of top-quality personal care, health, and home products. On that note, meet the PEPERSAP PureZone Mini Portable Air Purifier from the brand. Tested by health experts to meet the highest air filtration standards, this product delivers the desired results.
Personal; Air Purifier: This convenient, portable travel air...
True Hepa Filter: The 2-stage filtration system eliminates...
Why Did We Like It?
For starters, it comes with an innovative 2-stage filtration, which sanitizes and cleans the air around you by trapping and destroying up to 99. 97% allergens. But despite its large filtration, it is compactly designed and weighs less than 1 pound. Meaning, it can easily fit into a briefcase, thereby making it perfect for travel.
Apart from this, it is integrated with 3 fan speeds from high to low, allowing you to tweak the purification level at your convenience. Naturally, it delivers a 54-square-foot coverage area, which is pretty generous in our opinion. Not only does this benefit you, but also your loved ones and colleagues.
Now, users who are not tech-savvy will love the easy-to-use button, which gets the device started with a simple press. But in case it malfunctions the 5-year warranty reduces the need for repair and replacement, ensuring that you have nothing to worry about.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We did not come across any considerable drawbacks that directly affect the performance of the product. However, we found out that it gets a little loud when used at maximum output, which could be an issue for elderly people. Other than that, it works perfectly.
Next up, we have another quality product from the house of AirTamer, one of the best-selling brands of air purifiers. Packed with practical features that work to purify unsanitary air, the AirTamer A310PM Portable Air Purifier is a must-have option if you want to stay safe from airborne irritants.
BREATHE CLEANER SAFER AIR: The AirTamer A310PMB is the...
GOODBYE FILTERS: Say goodbye to the hassle of replacing...
Why Did We Like It?
We were thoroughly impressed with what this product had to bring to the table. To begin with, it utilizes electrostatic purification by emitting negative ions into the air, which pushes airborne irritants away from your breathing area. This ensures that you breathe only clean air without having to go through the hassle of replacing filters.
Moving on, it has a rechargeable battery that provides backup for up to 150 hours on a single charge, ensuring optimal protection against airborne pollutants for longer periods. Integrated with the Power Boost Technology, this personal air purifier is certified to deliver more cleaning power than most options on the market.
We also liked the fact that it is very quiet in its operation, which is something that users will truly appreciate about this model. Plus, it comes with an adjustable lanyard and a leather case, making the product suitable for travel.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This air purifier is an exceptional choice, given its cutting-edge air purifying technology and portability. But, it may not be the ideal option for people who are on a modest budget, as it is one of the most expensive personal air purifiers on the market.
If you are looking for something that is different from conventional air purifiers in terms of looks and functionality, then this model from Rsenr could be your best bet. Featuring a mask-like design, the Wearable Air Purifier from the brand is an affordable option that can be easily worn to get effective protection against air pollutants.
Portable Design: Lightweight and compact, fitting perfectly...
HEPA Filter: Equipped with a HEPA filter to capture 99.97%...
Why Did We Like It?
We liked quite a few things but nothing compares to its unique 3D mask design, which sets it apart from the other options on our list. Understandably, it ranks as one of the best air purifiers and we were pleased to find that it comes with a HEPA filter despite its unique and minimal design.
It features a rechargeable battery that can last up to 6 hours on a single charge, which in our opinion, is decent for the price you are paying. This means that it can easily get rid of allergens and airborne irritants without breaking a sweat.
Furthermore, it is very easy to operate; just long-press the power button for 5 seconds, and you are good to go. However, in case you face performance issues, it guarantees free after-sales service, which means you don’t have to bear additional expenses for replacement or repair.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Without a doubt, this product is a note-worthy mention on the list, especially because of its unique 3D mask-like design and efficient performance. Having said that, we must say that it is a bit on the noisier side. During our period of usage, we found out that the fan makes a whistling sound, which is a little disappointing.
Pros
Free after-sales service
A budget-friendly option
Efficient purification results
Easy to operate
Cons
The fan makes a whistling sound
Buying Guide For The Best Personal Air Purifier
We are sure that you have through all 8 recommendations on our list by now. So, we were able to make a choice? Well, we wouldn’t be surprised if you weren’t, as knowing just the specifications is barely enough information when buying the best personal air purifier.
There are some key factors that you need to consider in order to buy the ideal model based on your requirements. So, in this buying guide, we have explained some of these factors in detail to help accelerate your buying decision. We strongly recommend reading this part very carefully.
1. Battery Life And Recharging
The battery life is one of the most important factors that you should consider while purchasing a personal air purifier. In general, a quality model should at least have a battery life of around 12 hours. So, going with a model that provides less than 12 hours of battery life is not advisable as it will run out of charge pretty soon.
Also, ensure that your device has USB support on it. These days, everybody has access to USBs, whether it be on PCs, televisions, power banks, etc. As such, buying a USB-supported model lets you recharge it easily; all you have to do is just plug it into a device having a USB port.
2. Filtration Technology
In this tech-driven day and age, most air personal air purifiers use ionic technology. In simple words, it emits negative ions in the air to eliminate various types of pollutants. It is simple and effective, and it works better with smaller models. That being said, it is not only filtration technology that is available.
There is also another filtration technology called HEPA. Now, they are far more efficient than ionic technology, but a bit on the heavier side. As such, models incorporated with HEPA filters tend to be heavier than those with ionic technology. HEPA filters work by pushing air through a fine mesh that traps all the pollutants.
So, if lightweight is your priority, we suggest going with a model that utilizes iconic technology.
3. Warranty
You should always choose a model that is backed by a minimum of 1 year of warranty. Since you are going to be spending a lot of money, ensure that you don’t have to incur extra costs on repair and replacement in case of any defect. That said, top brands always provide a warranty on their products, so you don’t have to worry too much about it.
Conclusion
With that, we have come to the end of our review-based guide; hopefully, it helps you choose the right model based on your requirements. However, before wrapping up, we would like to mention our favorite products from this list. So, let us rewind a little.
In our opinion, Pure Enrichment is the best product overall, mainly because it is backed by a 5-year warranty and is easy to use. Closely following Pure Enrichment is the AirTamer Parent, which delivers a long-lasting battery life and efficient purification.
But, if you are looking for an affordable option that is easy to operate, we strongly recommend going with the Rsenr Wearable Air Purifier. That’s all for now. Hope to see you soon!
Which is the best digital tablet or monitor to buy? Why should you buy one at all?
Gone are the days when artists used only traditional surfaces like paper or canvas. Digital tablets and monitors have emerged with the advent of digitalization.
There are various products available in the market, but Parblo’s Coast10 tablet is an excellent choice for artists looking to try a digital tablet for the first time. Coast10 offers best-in-industry features at a budget-friendly price, making it a favorite of many artists all over the world.
Before we dive into all the details about the Coast10 tablet, let’s take a brief look at Parblo.
About Parblo
Parblo – named after Pablo Picasso, one of the most renowned artists in history – is a relatively new brand that offers drawing tablets. The company was established in 2015. In the four years of its existence, Parblo has already made a name for itself on the grounds of offering affordable products without compromising on quality.
Parblo offers graphic monitors, graphic tablets, and accessories. If you have used digital gadgets for your artistic endeavors, you must have heard of Wacom. Wacom is the market leader, but its products are not affordable for beginners and students. That’s where Parblo comes to the rescue.
Coast10 Overview
Coast10 is one of the more reasonable drawing tablets available in the market, especially considering its size and features. Unlike professional artists and experts, it is aimed at students, hobbyists, and beginner-level artists looking for quality products that can fit into a modest budget. Some professionals might consider this tablet as a replacement or backup in case of emergencies.
The tablet comes with an incredible display that is fully functional — the LCD screen measures around 11.4 inches by 8.3 inches. You cannot use finger taps, as they will not be recognized. It can carry out nearly all the functions of its more expensive competitor, the Cintiq by Wacom.
We especially liked the high recognition rate and sensitivity of the Coast10 tablet, which makes it perfect for writing and drawing even the tiniest fonts and designs. The tablet works as a secondary display unit as it can only be powered on by connecting it to a computer or laptop – you get no power adapter to plug into a wall.
We have used the Coast10 tablet extensively for different projects to get a comprehensive understanding of its pros and cons. We have outlined the contents of the box and then explained the key highlights and some downsides that can be improved.
What comes in the box?
We especially liked the value for money that the Coast10 provides. If you are looking for a comprehensive set of accessories along with a digital tablet, Coast10 perfectly fits the bill.
Here is a list of everything you will get in the box:
Coast10 Graphic Tablet Monitor
A Battery-free Pen
A USB Cable
An Installation CD
Three Replacement Nibs for the Pen
One Portable High Speed 4 ports USB 3.0 Hub
One Parblo PR-01 Two-Finger Anti-fouling Glove
One Remove Ring
One Lanyard
Key Highlights
Now that we have talked about the Coast10 from a bird’s eye perspective and mentioned what you would receive in the box, it is time to take an in-depth look at the key highlights of this product. Each of the following characteristics of the Coast10 makes it an optimal digital tablet for you to buy.
Ergonomic Design
One of the essential prerequisites for consumer electronics to be of optimal use is its design. Whether it is a cell phone, a laptop, or a digital tablet, ergonomic design ensures maximum efficiency to the user. The Coast10 features top-notch design and is equally convenient to use for both left-handed and right-handed artists.
Artists usually spend hours creating and perfecting pieces of art, whether on paper or digital medium. Coast10 recognizes the importance of comfort and allows you to use it on a desktop as well as in your lap. We especially liked the back clips on the device, which unfold to allow upright drawing.
The viewing angles are highly comfortable – horizontal 170° and vertical 170°. Irrespective of how and where you place the tablet for work, you should get a clear view of the screen. Another feature of the ergonomic design of this tablet is the housing space for the pen above the screen, significantly reducing the chances of misplacing it frequently.
One thing we can say for sure is that the designers at Parblo put in a lot of thought while creating the Coast10. You will realize the effectiveness of this tablet’s design with every project you complete using it.
Display
The display quality is probably the most crucial element of a digital tablet. In that arena, the Coast10 tablet from Parblo fares well. The tempered glass screen is durable and has a display ratio of 16:10. The Coast10 features a TFT LCD panel measuring 10.1 inches. You get an adequate active work area that is 21.7 cm wide and 13.5 cm high.
With a sharp, bright resolution of 1280x800 pixels, the Coast10 tablet offers glorious display. If you have tried drawing on a general graphics tablet (non-display), you know that it can be frustrating looking at the computer screen repeatedly while drawing on the tablet. Display tablets are better, especially for beginners, but only if the display quality is up to the mark.
Drawing tablets can have pressure-sensitivity levels in the range of 300 to 3,000. The pressure-sensitivity level determines the thickness of the line based on the pressure you put. Basic tablets often have only 1,000 or lower pressure-sensitivity levels. You will be pleased to know that the Coast10 tablet comes equipped with a high pressure-sensitivity level of 2,048.
Portability
What was the need for digital tablets and monitors? Among others, portability was an immensely important reason that led to the popularity of these devices. Artists cannot take all of their art and craft supplies while traveling. Would it be convenient for you to pack and carry paint tubes, paint brushes, easel, canvas, and more?
Digital tablets are meant to allow artists to stay in touch with their creative sides, even when they are on the move. The Coast10 tablet measures only 0.73 inches in thickness and weighs about 630g, making it extremely compact and lightweight. Carrying the Coast10 tablet will never be a hassle for you.
We especially liked the thoughtful exclusion of a power adapter. The Coast10 functions via connectivity to a laptop or computer. If you want to use it, you can plug it into your computer instead of finding a wall socket. This added portability ensures that you can work comfortably in almost any setting and environment.
Drawing Pen
We found the drawing pen of the Coast10 tablet to be its best highlight. It is a battery-free pen, which makes it extremely lightweight. You do not have to worry about replacing the battery, battery levels, or battery leakage. The lack of weight makes using the pen very comfortable, and it smoothly glides across the screen.
One of the most frustrating things with digital tablets is the possibility of losing the stylus or pen, especially while traveling. The Coast10 features a safe and secure space at the top of the panel where you can store the drawing pen when not in use.
The pen makes up for the absence of hotkey buttons on the tablet with its clickable buttons that can replicate mouse clicks. The Coast10 tablet’s drawing pen can effectively replace your mouse.
We commend Parblo for the thoughtful inclusion of three replacement nibs for the pen. The pen is comfortable, easy-to-control, light, and sensitive – allowing you to draw the most delicate details effortlessly. The high pressure-sensitivity level is achieved with the help of this nearly flawless pen.
Value for Money
Who does not want the most bang for their buck? Parblo knows how to deliver the maximum value for money to its customers. When you buy the Coast10, you get much more than just the tablet. The drawing pen is a crucial component that comes with three replacement nibs. You also get a lanyard, a remove ring, and a USB cable.
We especially liked the thoughtful inclusion of the two-finger drawing glove. It is specially made to reduce the friction between your hand and the tablet surface, enabling comfortable drawing. The glove is made from high elastic lycra, and it features strong tensile resistance and high air permeability. It comes in a free size that can fit either hand.
Another valuable inclusion in the Coast10 box is the portable four-port USB 3.0 hub. Working with a laptop or computer usually gives you access to two USB ports. For as long as you work on the Coast10, one of those ports would be occupied. The four extra USB ports give you added flexibility and allow you to plug in multiple devices.
Versatility
One of the advantages of using the Coast10 tablet is that it can be used with a wide variety of software – including CorelDraw, Corel Painter, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Fireworks, Adobe Illustrator, Comic Studio, SAI, Macromedia Flash, 3D MAX, Manga Studio and so on.
Irrespective of the computer or laptop you have, plugging in the Coast10 and using it should not be a problem. It can work with various operating systems including Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Mac OS X 10.11 or above.
Given its high sensitivity and responsiveness, you can use the Coast10 for all kinds of projects. The drawing pen and glove add significantly to the versatility factor of this device.
What can be improved?
Perfection is a myth, especially when it comes to consumer electronics. You need to know that it is not flawless, and there is some scope for improvement. However, given its price range and features, these drawbacks are not significant enough to render the Coast10 inefficient or not viable.
Screen Glare
The display of Coast10 is top-notch, but you may face an occasional glare when you position the tablet in certain angles or under specific lights. The usual solution in case of screen glares is to adjust the brightness settings, but Coast10 does not allow you to customize its brightness, which can be frustrating. The only solution at your disposal is to avoid bright lights.
Working in a relatively dark environment is not always feasible, and some artists may find the screen glare to be a significant drawback. Another possible solution is to apply the protective cover for the screen that comes included in the box, but that may not eradicate the glare.
If only the Coast10 tablet came with an anti-glare coating, it would have featured flawless display. Maybe the pen would scrub off the coating, and that’s why it was not applied. If you can deal with this occasional hazard, this tablet is perfect for you.
Complicated Setup
The biggest hurdle you might have to overcome is the initial setup of the Coast10 tablet. The installation CD that comes included with the tablet does not use proper English and can be difficult to understand sometimes. The default setup supports Windows systems, and the CD does not have pre-loaded drivers for Mac devices.
If you are a Mac user, we advise you to follow these steps to help with the setup process:
Download Mac drivers from the Parblo website.
Ensure that you install the drivers in this order – “Displaylink” followed by “driver.”
Unfortunately, you cannot find a manual for Mac on the Parblo website. The manual for Windows also fails to do an optimal job of explaining the process. So take the setup process and the manual with a grain of salt – you will probably have to spend some time getting the tablet to work initially.
The calibration setup for the pen can also be a challenge for some users. If you face an issue with the calibration where only the first red target appears on the screen, you should follow these steps:
Switch from duplicate display to extend display on your laptop or computer.
Select monitor 2 in the tablet software.
Calibrate again, and the red targets will appear in every corner of the screen.
Place the pen over the screen and move it around for a couple of seconds to get the cursor to jump to the correct position.
Although the initial setup is a bit complicated and can be frustrating, once you complete it, the tablet works seamlessly.
Sensitivity Around the Edges
Coast10 boasts of very high sensitivity and responsiveness. You may experience some sensitivity issues around the edges of the display. There may a slight skew compared to the point where you place the pen. Making marks within half an inch of the sides can be challenging due to this.
For the different projects we completed using the Coast10 tablet, we only faced this sensitivity issue once or twice. You will easily accomplish most of your tasks without encountering this problem. The Windows software allows you to recalibrate the device, which may solve this issue manually. For Mac users, there is no way around this trivial problem.
Customer Support
One of the win-win features of any brand that has captured a significant market share is excellent customer support and after-sales service. Being a relatively new brand, Parblo suffers from a faulty customer support system. Some users have mentioned the problems they have faced while trying to get help for the issues they have faced.
Having a complicated setup process, an imperfect manual and only Windows drivers will prompt many Coast10 customers to contact the Parblo support team. If you are not good with troubleshooting or cannot find the steps to overcome setup problems, you may be left with no solutions.
We hope that Parblo will improve its customer support services very soon. It has the potential to capture a significant market share with its affordable products and distinct features – the only thing it needs to focus on is enhancing customer satisfaction to retain them.
Final Verdict On Parblo Coast10
Take nothing away from the Coast10 – it is an excellent product with enough features to qualify as a must-buy for beginner and intermediate-level artists. Parblo was started not too long ago, and it has the potential to be a market leader in the graphic tablet industry.
The Coast10 tablet’s benefits and features outweigh its few downsides. There is no other digital tablet in the market that offers the same features at the same price. If you are an expert who is willing to spend a significant amount or you are looking for a bigger screen or a premium branded product, this is not the perfect option for you.
The Papasan chair is a symbol of the 1970s. From catalogs to films to television reality shows, it has been featured just about everywhere. It has had a variety of colors to flaunt and has had variations in its design from time to time. And while it once used to be everyone’s favorite furniture to have in their home, office or lounge, it has shown a decline in its popularity of late. For reasons unknown, it has been seen in sales and discarded with little consideration, something entirely unwarranted for a darling of an iconic decade.
But, it hasn’t gone out of style. In fact, the demand has been on the rise as postmodernism and homages to retro designs grow popular by the day.
What is the Papasan Chair?
So what is a Papasan chair? Bearing other names like moon chair, bucket chair, bowl chair, big round chair, bowl chair, elevated bowl, and many others, it is a circular piece of Filipino furniture that consists of a rattan or wicker frame, which does not break easily, a reliable base, and a stylish and extremely comfortable cushion on the top which can be customized in any conceivable way so that you have that furniture to appeal to anyone who visits.
The cushion and the design of the chair offer great lumbar support. A Papasan chair is the bean bag of the 70s, with a fully formed structure, because that’s how comfortable it actually is. This is why it is popular with young adults to hang out with friends and in gaming lounges or just plain home entertainment. I personally would just love to curl up with it and read books and get some sweet, comfy sleep.
The Papasan chair has been coming back in style for more than one reason. Firstly, a lot of old decor is gaining popularity due to a revivalist movement in the decor and fashion world, so it is not just the Papasan chair that is seeing good days. A lot of minimalistic and modern decor designs had become too much of commonplace and do not hold any distinction anymore, so people are tracing back to what worked best in the past, especially when they were younger and bolder in their choices.
Nostalgia plays a really strong factor in marketing and in selling. Most movies these days are banking on this very fact and reviving old franchises and giving them new yet nostalgic spins and drawing in newer audiences while also getting the old fans in the seats. So, old clothing styles and old decor are coming back for good, and it is an exciting time to shop! Secondly, a lot of vintage decor is more accentuated than the more minimalistic style, so from an artistic point of view, Papasan is a winner.
There are a lot of Papasan chairs available both online and in physical stores for you to choose from. The catalogs are delightfully enticing. The best thing about Papasan and mamasan chairs is that not only do they look great, but they have the most comfortable cushions that make you sink in them, and they aren’t even warm like leather or rexine cushions, the soft cloth feels velvet like and smooth and adds to the comfort level. These chairs are made for relaxation, and it is hard not to fall asleep in them.
Papasan Chair Design Ideas
The Pretty Pink Papasan
The bold and striking colors of this Papasan chair are sure to catch your eye. They are exciting, full of pop vibrance, and enticing. And if you’re the romantic lot, this Papasan chair makes for a very apt couple seater. Plus, the undeniable comfort of the bean bag cushion can never run out of deserved appreciation. I’d like this chair in my house, wouldn’t you?
The Ash White Papasan
This papasan chair has a serene ash white cushion seat, contrasted with a striated black, grey and patterned blanket and a multi-colored cushion. It looks delightfully comfy and goes really well with its surrounding. Imagine sitting in it and reading a good book.
The Striking White Papasan
Sometimes you don’t really need to go with a lot. Sometimes less is indeed more. Vivid colors, though having their own charm and attraction, can be a mismatch in a particular surrounding and sometimes they can also be a little too striking on the eye. Which is why this particular Papasan chair is one of the simplest yet really alluring of the lot. It has no extra cushions, nor does it have a shawl or a blanket and there are no colors except for the chocolate brown of the rattan frame and the milky white of the bean bag cushion. It resembles a chocolate vanilla ice cream and is cool to the eyes.
The Rustic Papasan
I love the shade of green that this Papasan cushion has. It feels rustic and beautiful and is a stylish contrast to the chocolate brown wooden polish. The knitted cushions and the warm blue blanket complete this gorgeous arrangement. As can be seen, it seems to be a perfect place to just sink cozily in and work away comfortably. And, I repeat again, I absolutely love the colors.
The Turquoise Papasan
Ah. Turquoise blue. So delightfully cool to the eyes and to the senses. Even looking at this in a picture calms the mind. Imagine how you’d feel relaxing in the ultra-soft cloth bean bag with a few cushions to make you feel even cozier, while you read or write something, or even watch television. How could a piece of furniture like this ever go out of style? We’re glad it is back in business and with such demand, because it deserves every bit of attention it gets.
The Peppy Papasan
This papasan cushion is so unabashedly seventies, I am overawed by the color scheme of it and the combination of the peppy blanket. An unmistakable standout in your living room or any room for that matter, this is one refreshing piece of decor that you would love to have in your home.
The Minimalist Papasan
This is a very different kind of Papasan chair. It is more modern and minimalist in design and does not have the iconic and classic bean bag cushion. Instead, it is netted on all sides and has a slim white and square seat to sit on and a patterned black cushion for back rest. Not something you would go for if you’re looking for maximum comfort, but something that is definitely chic and peppy to include in your living room and quite nice to relax in.
The Roofed Papasan
This is another really unique set of papasan chairs. One is your standard Papasan chair with a rattan frame, and a large white cushion and the other one is a little more special than most. It has a big rattan or wicker bowl which is tightly knit. It has a delightfully blue large cushion and multiple pillows and cushions for rest. But, apart from these amenities, it also has a stylish retractable roof to shield you from the sun and let you have an undisturbed and cozy sleep. It’s really luxurious, in both its appearance and the comfort it provides. I would love to spend my noontime resting on it.
The Small Papasan
This is a smaller Papasan chair than most. It also has a fluffy bean bag cushion that resembles a sunken marshmallow. It has a lower height and is perfect for you just to sit back and enjoy your leisure time, resting your head on the lovely blue pillow. And if you have a pet, like the people who own that chair do, this chair will serve as a large cozy bed for your pet too.
The Poolside Papasan
This is a two-chair set of papasan chairs to be usually used in the outdoors, preferably by the poolside. Even though the chairs themselves, with their bean bag cushions, are perfect companions for a pool and for people to relax in, the small cushions that come with them are specifically designed for such an environment. No, I don’t talk about their cool blue color which is obviously really relaxing, I speak of the material and the extra comfiness that cannot be deterred even if there is a big splash of water striking at them. Because, yes, these cushions are waterproof! Now that’s definitely cool.
This pair of Papasan chairs are the perfect pieces of furniture you need by your private pool. They remarkably contrast the cool blue of the pool with their soothing white cushions and yellow-brown rattan frame. Replacing the usual recliner beds, these are comfier and cozier alternatives to have on your poolside. Curling up comfortably in them and sleeping on a warm and sunny day seems like a really relaxing exercise.
The Papasan Set
This is not just a single Papasan chair, but a full set with a stool and a side table, all woven in a delightful rattan mesh which is then painted with an ash gray that has a very iron-like finish to it and one that looks quite ravishing. To contrast this grey, the cushions are charmingly scarlet in color with a matt finish that tones down the sharpness and enhances the beauty of the color even more. I’m in love with this set and would want it on my front porch!
The Wide Papasan
This large papasan chair has a wide diameter of its rattan frame which is lower in height than its peers. It has a colorful bean bag cushion which has different shades of blue and a multitude of flowery designs. That is complemented by a white and a zigzag patterned blue cushion. The carpet under the chair adds to the appeal of the decor. The pattern itself is very Caribbean in nature and also calls back to the seventies quite boldly.
The Victorian Swingasan
This is not your usual Papasan chair, neither in its design which is obviously not earthbound nor in the pattern it has for its cushion. This is a hanging Papasan chair with no stool to rest the frame upon and instead ropes to hoist it in the air, to give it a buoyancy which only adds to the comfort as it gently rocks in the wind and gives you a sweet sleep with lovely dreams. The bean bag cushion has a polka dot pattern with a white base and a companion cushion with a very Victorian floral pattern. O how I would love to have this on my lawn.
The Traditional Swingasan
This papasan chair is also from the line of swingasan chairs, but it features the more traditional circular Papasan chair design. It also has a wheel pattern on the decorative side which is really unique and cool! It also has an extremely comfortable bean bag chair that you can sink in. You can hang your legs out if you will and just rest and sleep or read something. You can always add more cushions to the mix to increase your comfort levels. But, even the default cushioning should be enough for you. Plus, you can move it around as it is portable though hanging.
The Beachside Papasan
Here’s a pair of papasan chairs which are lightweight and have black frames. The cushions have a color scheme of dark blue and white, with elaborate leafy embroidery covering almost the entirety of the cushions in a psychedelic and repetitive manner. Perfect, hence, for the beach and the front porch, these Papasan chairs can be carried around due to their lack of weight. So, ready yourself to have a deep sleep by the sea, because that’s exactly what I would do.
The Oblong Swingasan
This is a swingasan Papasan chair. It looks more like a hanging chair than a traditional Papasan chair and doesn’t feature the conventional round shape most Papasan chairs have. Instead, it has a comfy white cushion for seating and no cushion in the back. The frame is made out of rattan and has extremely intricate patterns that have explicit south Asian influences in their symmetry and geometry. Hoisted by a chain, this hammock cum Papasan chair is amply comfortable for your summer getaway. And if you want to add to the comfort and find the rattan backrest a little uncomfortable, you can always add additional cushions on the sides and in the back and insulate yourself with maximum comfort.
The Mamasan Sofa Set
I love this papasan chair/sofa set. It has not one, not two, but three Papasan chairs, with two single seater chairs on either side of a large papasan triple seater sofa which is called mamasan. This set also includes a small stool. And adding to this set’s appeal is the color scheme. The bean bag cushions are strikingly blue, cool to the eyes and relaxing over all. The center set is complemented by four cushions, of which two are striated with lime green, blue and white and are square, and the other two are single toned blue and white. The blue cushion is actually a small pillow, so if you want to sleep away on this, you can use this Papasan sofa as your bed.
The other two papasan chairs have floral and geometric cushion designs that go well with the overall decor. All in all, a unique sofa set you wouldn’t want to miss having in your backyard.
The Hippie Swingasan
This hanging Papasan chair is as traditional as they come and I mean it when I say that. This is unconventionally seventies in its make with the splash of netted colored linen and bold yellow polka dot cushions giving it such a nostalgic vibe. You could say this ravishingly peppy or hippie in its design. Not something everyone would go for, but something many did once upon a time. So, if you’re one to desire a revival of the old days, this particular Papasan chair is made for you. And even otherwise, it is really cool to have on your front or back porch.
The Postmodern Swingasan
This black Papasan hanging chair mixes the modern and the traditional in a delightful blend with the result being something quite striking. The chair looks like an easter egg sliced in half, and the dark chocolate color goes really well with the surroundings. The netted patterns that surround the chair filter any sunlight while also providing you warmth and air. The milky white cushion looks extra comfy and perfect for you to sleep on or read something.
The Lush Green Papasan
This is a very retro colored mamasan chair. I love the lush green color of the cushion contrasting the dark brown of the rattan frame. Seems like a cozy companion for your furniture and can snuggle up in a corner to give you enough comfort and warmth. Add a few cushions and a blanket, and you can have a sweet sleep waiting for you.
The Ammolite Mamasan
A mamasan chair with a cool white cushion, it looks great placed beside the window. It has silver-gray leaf patterns on it, and its companion cushion has a beautiful ammolite design that is quite charming. I love the overall look of it. Sometimes, having too much color can be a deterrent, so I prefer this lovely white setting with a dash of silver and some embroidery.
The Oval Mamasan
This oval mamasan chair is a lovely replacement for your old and worn out sofa. A double seater, it has a light brown rattan frame and a large white cushion with two charming small cushions, one with a drawing of a forest and a girl and another a plain orange color. Moreover, there are two blankets, one of fur and one plain, the options helping you choose if you want a fluffier comfort or not.
The Dual Mamasan Papasan Set
Here’s a set of two papasan chairs, one mamasan, and one Papasan chair. The mamasan chair has a navy blue cushion, and the papasan chair has a sandy colored cushion. Both complement each other pretty well, and if you want to stretch out more and sleep, then you can sleep in the mamasan chair and if you want to curl up then the Papasan chair will be a more fitting option. Either way, this set makes sure more than one person can enjoy the comforts of the Papasan chair at the same time.
The Grey Swingasan
This hanging Papasan chair, also known as a swingasan chair, is for the minimalist in you, with a sandy grey color and set of stripes and an ash grey cushion. The stand for this hanging Papasan is black and pretty robust. It also has a driftwood finish and will cost you less than four hundred dollars. Quite a catch, isn’t it?
The Ribbed Mamasan
This mamasan chair is built for comfort. The ribbed and boxed cushion is designed to give you great lumbar support while you rest, regardless of your usage of it. I just want a pillow on it and retire to sweet sleep and you can too, because it will cost you only three hundred dollars or so. Not bad at all for something so rewarding.
The Standard Papasan
This white Papasan chair costs just about two hundred dollars. You would think a beautiful furniture like this would cost more. But, most Papasan chairs are incredibly affordable.
So, what do you think of the Papasan? Is it something you find fitting for your home decor? Where would you like to keep it? In your living room? Study? Porch? Backyard? Office? The options are plenty, and this crafty chair will be a favorite of anyone anywhere it is kept. By choosing a Papasan chair, not only are you bringing a splash of color and style with retro and nostalgic decor themes, but you’re also giving yourself and others a chance to have the most comfortable seating, for reading, writing, leisure, and sleep.
There are no conceivable downsides to owning a Papasan chair. It is fantastic for your lumbar support; it doesn’t really cost all that much either. So, what are you waiting for? Order a Papasan or a mamasan or an entire set for yourself and welcome a whole new level of comfort that you won’t have enough of! The designs are plenty, and the number of cushions you can add is entirely up to you, so all that remains is how comfortable you want to be in a Papasan.
A garden or yard of the house is always incomplete without a fence; anyone would agree with that fact. But building a commercial fence is extremely expensive and could probably affect your budget, especially if you are looking to build it in a particular way, theme or even as a complement to the design of the house.
If you have been wanting to build a fence, yet cut down on the costs, there is a cheaper alternative – to build it yourself using pallets. Pallets are an amazing alternative to commercial fencing as they are durable and cheap, even free at times.
Moreover, since you’ll be the one doing the job, you can procure the right kind of pallets, add some style of your own and make it aesthetically pleasing, according to your own taste, that too, without burning a hole in your pocket. All you need are wooden pallets and some imagination and you’re good to go.
But if you need some help with the ideas, we are here with 35 ingenious ways you could build a pallet fence in your backyard, while saving some big bucks on fence panels thanks to the inexpensive nature of pallet wood. If you worry about the aesthetics you will notice rapidly that more pallet fence ideas in this list look posh and, with sufficient patience, your DIY fence will look far better than anything you could purchase honestly.
If you’re just looking for a simple DIY fence to the yard that’s just typical, then this plain wooden picket fence with a small gate could be the one for you. All you have to do is to decide where you need the fence, acquire some wooden pallets, nail them up around the yard, and give it a simple whitewash.
To make it look more pleasing, you could decorate the space around with some plants, and maybe even a small table with a couple of chairs to spend some time in the evenings.
More details at thewillowfarmhouse.com
Wooden Fence for Outdoor Dining Area
This one is ideal for people who do not want to just secure their yard area, but also have a dining set up for a relaxed lunch on a lazy afternoon, or a small barbeque party in the garden or the yard of your house.
Build a tall wooden fence with the pallets and varnish it with wooden-colored paint. For the dining area, you could consider various ideas for making the space cozy, probably go for a simple table with chairs and cushions. A few potted plants here and there would make it just perfect, and would also raise the eyebrows of the people who happen to have a look at it. Isn’t it interesting?
More details at palletwoodprojects.com
Gated Garden Fence with Trellises
For those who are in love with plants and gardening, this simple garden fence with trellises is definitely a great idea for the house. You can start off by building a simple fence and attach a few trellises to it where you can plant creepers or other small plants.
This way, you don’t just get to flaunt your creativity and frugality, but also show your love for plants whilst building something that gives your house more secure.
More details at fairywingsanddinosaurs.com
Pallet Fence for the Garden
It is always better to do a lot of research before fixating on the design for your pallet fence. Finding the pallets might be easy, but molding them as per your liking can be a little difficult job.
Some of you would be fine with a simple short fence of around 3-4 feet to keep the animals away, while some of you might actually crave fencing that gives you enough privacy as well as add beauty to your garden. If that’s the case, you could try something like this where the pallets are nailed close to one another, around the garden, at a greater height, somewhere around 5-6 feet, and add plants around on either side of the fencing.
More details at ccacademy.net
DIY Pallet Fence for your Poultry
If you’re living in the countryside or have a lot of chickens that need to be kept outside where they can move freely, but within a confined space, then you can opt for this simple pallet fence which is perfect for your poultry.
This DIY fence could be built in a small space around the hen-house, so that your chickens are not just confined to the house, but can get some air. You could fill in the place with soil or a bed of grass, and even keep a small bird feeder at one corner.
Source Unknown
Pallet Fence for a small Indoor Farm
For a family that’s all about sustainable living and organic farming, this could be the perfect fence for your small at-home farm. If you have a habit of growing your own fruits and vegetables at home and are worried about rabbits or other small animals entering in and nibbling away at your plants, you could build this simple square fence around your veggies.
It can be small, maybe around 3ft or a little more, along with a gate so you could access it easily. And since it’s just for a farm, you need not actually paint or decorate the pallets and leave them as they are.
On the contrary, this kind of pallet fence is also great for keeping your chickens in, of course, not with the plants in.
We often don’t realize that we spend a lot of money on herbs and other small vegetables. What if you could cut some budget by growing them on your own, along with the comfort of building a secure fence around the house?
This planter-topped fence is a perfect idea for those who want to do so. Unlike the one with the trellises mentioned above, this one has a simple fencing frame with pallet box planters on top. You could fill these planters with soil and some herb seeds which could give you a nice little harvest that helps you in the seasoning of the meals. Two birds at one shot, right?
More details at naturallyloriel.com
Pallet Picket Fence
This is one of the simple fencing ideas out there for those with huge backyard spaces in their homes, probably if you’re living in the countryside. Also, it could be done in a matter of a few hours.
Collect as many pallets as you can, and just fix them to the ground. You don’t even need to attach these pallets by nailing them together. Instead, just keep them close, at a diagonal angle. You could paint it in rosewood color to give it a classic look or use any other color as per your liking.
This is a perfect fence that keeps pets and other animals away from entering your yard.
More details at founterior.com
Designer Pallet Fence for Small Homes
If your house is small and needs fencing only for the front yard, then you could use this modern design with the look of dark timber wood. Precut the pallets into two different sizes, probably a thinner and a thicker size, and make two huge fencing frames with the latter for either side of the gate.
For the gate, you can use the thinner pallets and make a smaller frame, that can fit right between the fencing you’ve attached. And like any other simple house fencing, you could have some soil on the outer side of the fencing, outlined with stones, where you could plant some small shrubs or flowering plants.
More details at syonpress.com
Dress up your existing Chain Link Fence
This kind of fence is for those who have a chain link fence but crave a little more privacy. It could also work if you want a whole new fence, but can invest a little bit more than pallets, and like to mix things up a little – a wooden panel with chain links around.
Choose the part of the chain link fence, where you think adding a panel would give more privacy to your home, and nail the wooden pallets to the vertical frames. Make sure it is the size of the chain link fence to give it aesthetic value.
This is a completely unique and creative pallet fence idea, which not only makes your house secure but also gives it a peculiar garden-type look.
Instead of making pallet frames and linking them together, you can make boxes of planters and stack them one after the other, until the required height of the fence is achieved. You can put some soil in these planters and grow herbs, or veggies that don’t need much space to cultivate.
Another great thing about this fence is that you can unstack them whenever you want and change the design according to your tastes.
More details at indrahughes.com
Gated Pallet Fence
This pallet fence will almost cost you nothing and can be finished within 4 hours. All you have to do is drill a few pallet boards onto the walls for support and nail the other planks onto these support boards by stacking them one after the other horizontally. You can also make a gate to the fence the very same way, and attach it with a hinge.
When the sole reason you’re opting for the fencing of your backyard is only to keep small animals away, then you could go for this very simple and tiny fencing system for your front yard.
It has pallets nailed together into frames of different heights, which are lined alternatively. This easily serves the purpose and can help you keep a track of onlookers and passers-by.
More details at crowfootcattle.com
Pallet Design for the Gates
You can spice up your fence design and double it up as a yard device, in addition to using it for privacy or security.
This kind of fencing needs prior research about the design, as there has been a lot of emphasis on the design and the details. You might have to fix the pallets together without any space, with small pallets as designer frames and gates. It will probably take a lot of your time, but it’s definitely worth it.
More details at ccacademy.net
DIY Patio Pallet Fence
Another great way of decorating your fence is by creating a simple fence with wood from old pallets, and painting flowers, or any other art of your choice on it. This gives the fence a personalized look and feels that you can easily fall in love with.
Feeling colorful? Have extended space at the back of your yard with a small pond, or huge trees that you want to separate from a small garden? Then you could make this simple fence by dismantling the pallet wood into planks, fixing them up into the ground, and painting them in different colors. This definitely gives the fencing a vibrant and gorgeous.
More details at rprtphoto.com
Square Pallet Fence Idea
Not all fences are square in shape. But it is a great idea, especially if you are trying to put in your cattle, or grow some veggies or have a garden. It’s easy to make and doesn’t take you a lot of time to build. If you need, you can line the outer part of the fence by placing potted plants to give it a much nicer look.
More details at simplyjanelledesigns.com
Rustic Pallet Fence
If you’re into rustic things and want the same around for your fencing, then you could simply stack the dismantled wooden pellets, preferably old ones, one after the other, and fix them in the ground. Also, you could add wood from old doors or wooden furniture to give it varied textures.
Another way of creating a movable fence or gate is to make a simple fencing frame with wooden pallets, and attach them with hinges. As the final touch, attach some heavy-duty wheels and casters to the bottom of the fence, so that they could easily be moved around. Now you can place your fences wherever you want.
In case your kids keep stomping the yard, creating trails all along, then make this simple fencing by dismantling the pellets, squaring off one end, and fixing them up in the ground by digging holes. You can also add a few plants in the soil at the bottom to give it a nice end look.
If the front or backyard of your home is already covered with a wall, perhaps of a smaller height, and you need something out in the open that gives you privacy while you’re chilling out in the sun, this kind of pallet fence would be the right choice for you.
It’s built with lots of wooden pallets and looks like something along the lines of a gazebo. You could fix the fence on three sides, leaving the last side open, and put in some benches made of pallets. Also, to jazz it up a little bit, you can place some potter plants around. It would definitely be a great place to sit and read a book or have a coffee.
More details at iconhomedesign.com
Pallet Fence Idea for a Small Garden
If you only have a small area in the yard of your house where you want to grow some shrubs or flowering plants, then you can try building a small garden fence with wooden pallets around this little space. In addition to the bushes inside, you can allow creepers to grow on the fence itself, or attach some trellises to the fence.
More details at wolffsapplehouse.com
Fencing for Balcony Garden
Sometimes, it's better to think out of the box and go for an idea that’s completely different from the rest. Usually, balcony gardens don’t need fencing, as they have their very own railing and space to keep the pots.
But, if you are blessed with a huge balcony, why not try and build a fencing gate to it? This way, you can separate your balcony into the seating area and the garden area and have a mini-farm type of setting. How interesting could that be?
More details at themicrogardener.com
A pallet Fence Decked up in Herbs and Flowers
Now, you can not only create a rustic look to a simple pallet fence painted in dark-wooden color, but also deck them up in different herbs and flowers by fixing in boxes for small pots, or by directly nailing planters to the fence.
This is another style where you get to have complete freedom of customizing and decorating the fence the way you want.
For this, you need to just build a simple fence, like the one mentioned in the beginning, or fencing of any style. Then the actual fun begins, you can carve shapes out of the leftover wood, and nail it to the fence, or draw some art, or even graffiti onto it, in order to suit your style.
More details at 1001pallets.com
Tiny Garden Fence
If you have a small garden attached to one of the walls of your house, this might definitely be a cool way of making a DIY fence around the garden, at absolutely no expense. All you have to do is nail wooden planks to the support boards and fix them into the ground by digging up holes. You can then embellish the fence by painting it in your desired color, adding a planter box for creepers, and maybe even adding a couple of lamps.
A good and simple fence can really turn your eyes around. This is one simple fence idea if you don’t have much time in your hands. Just nail large pieces of horizontal pallets onto the vertical planks, and attach them to one another.
To give it a nicer look, you can paint it in dark maroon, brown, purple, or any other color that complements the paint of your house, and grow flowering plants and creepers on the inner side of the fence.
More details at ccadacemy.net
Wooden Fence with a Small Planting Area
Another wonderful way to ensure privacy through your fencing work while adding a little bit of gardening to it is shown in this design.
Here, you have to stack all the pallet planks together tightly without any space and fix it to the ground. You can always choose the desired height for the fence. Now, for the planters, you can attach small wooden boxes towards the inner side of the fence, where you can grow herbs. Also, you can throw in some soil by the bottom of the fence, outline it with stones and use it as a mini garden.
More details at 101palletideas.com
Pallet Fence with a Bench
In addition to creating a usual fence with pallets decked up one after the other to create privacy, you could attach a few dismantled planks together to the fence in order to create benches to sit on. This not only gives you privacy, but also a place to sit and relax.
This is a stylish and modern way to decorate the outdoors of your home. It’s perfect for the courtyard, or to separate a wall from the rest of the yard. Get the planks from the pellet and stack it to the desired height and nail them to the vertical frames. You could spray paint it in wooden brown, and use long flat planks as shelves where you can actually place potted plants. Further, you could plant bamboo, crawling roses or other trees of medium height, which could give the fence a trendy look.
More details at ccacademy.net
Movable Pallet Fence for Swine and Goats
Who said pallet fencing could only be for gardens or yards? It could also be used to protect your pigs or goats from the animals outside, and wooden pallets are the best materials to build one, as commercial fencing would be too much to just keep your swine or cattle in check.
You can just build the framing by nailing the pallets together and fixing them up, along with a small gate. What would be even more interesting is that, you could make it movable and reusable, by just making them into frames that can be easily removed, if necessary.
If you’ve dug up anything at your home recently, or if you’ve planted a favorite tree that you need to keep people out of reach, or if there’s any electric device or anything hazardous that needs to be secured, then this small square pallet fencing is the perfect idea.
It is short, sober, and fits right around the object you need to keep others away from.
More details at representingdads.com
Pallet Fence Design
If there are a lot of houses in the neighborhood and your garden is attached to that of your neighbor’s, you can simply try this pallet fence design to separate the gardens. Just make the fencing frames from the pallets and fix them through from the wall of your house all the way to the sidewalk.
More details at 1001pallets.com
Another Private Pallet Fence
It is uncomfortable when you can look right through to your neighbor’s house from your living room window, or the kitchen sink. That’s when you have this immense urge of privacy.
Here’s another incredible idea to build a complete private fence with pallets. Make frames with long planks and fix the wood dismantled from the pellets horizontally, without any space. You can then place them one after the other through the length of front yard. You can also grow a few decorative plants around to give it a great finishing look.
A garden full of climbing rose bushes or other flowering plants is definitely bewitching. Something as lovely as that needs a fence which is only adds to its beauty.
So why don’t you try opting for a simple wooden pallet fence and gate, paint it in blue or maybe even mauve, and let the roses crawl all over the fence? It could surely make the whole garden view much more gorgeous.
If you have a swimming pool and want to relax by the water in private, try building a small open fence around it. This is a rather novel idea, but something definitely worth working on.
Collect as many pallets as you can, separate them into wooden planks, and build a usual three-side fence. If you have more time on your hands, do use the planks as the floor by spreading them. Paint the whole thing white to give it a complementary look, and add some benches or a couple of wooden chairs to relax, and you’re done.
More details at 101palletideas.com
Herb Garden Fence
This design can be used both as a free-standing garden to plant herbs, as well as a fully functional fence. All you have to do is convert wooden pallets into planting boxes and attach them to supporting wooden frames (planks) using nails. These planters can be used to grow herbs, and you can either use just one or make multiple pallet herb gardens and stack them one after the other to make it a fence.
These are just a few DIY Pallet Fence ideas on how to make your own fences with wooden pallets, at a minimal cost. You too can create a beautiful one for your home, just add a little bit of creativity and imagination to the existing ideas, and customize them at your will.
What do you think about these pallet fences, what do you think about pallet projects in general? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
So, you're sick of mold and mildew growing on your walls and want to get rid of them as soon as possible?
There are quite a few simple and straightforward methods, such as simply painting, bleaching, or sanding the walls to eliminate them altogether. Yes, you read it right- removing mold is not as tough as it may seem to be.
Molds can deposit on both interior and exterior surfaces, especially in high-humidity areas. And constant exposure to them can cause irritation, allergic reactions like red eyes, sneezing, skin rash, and other issues.
Now, what can you do to get rid of this unwanted allergen? Will painting on it be enough? Will it be a very costly process?
We know loads of questions might be looming in your mind. But just stay calm and keep on reading to know all about effectively eliminating the problem of mold formation.
Painting Over Mold To Kill It
1. Can You Paint Over Mold?
Can paint be applied to mold? Will it kill a mold infestation, or make things even worse? If painting is enough, then which type should be used? And can you do it yourself or is there a need to call upon an expert?
We are here to provide answers to all of your queries. So first things first, yes, painting for killing mold completely can be a viable strategy, provided circumstances are right.
If you fix the underlying cause of mold growth, you can get rid of it permanently. You can apply one or two coats of mold-killing primer over the growing mold and then paint over it.
We’d recommend getting mold-resistant paint instead of a traditional one, as it’s an easy way to get rid of molds without putting extra effort into looking for something else. It can be a cheap and reliable option if you experience frequent mold manifestations in your house. With the availability of several mold-resistant paint options on the market, carefully go over them and select one that suits you best.
But don’t get overwhelmed by the choices you get. We’ll tell you what type to go for in which situations.
2. What Type Of Paint Will Be Viable?
As mentioned, several types of mold-resistant paints are available on the market. Some are based on ammonia formulas, some on beach formulas, and others on mold-eating enzymes.
Many of you might opt for vinegar-based paint, and we won’t discourage you from doing that. Being chemical-free and natural, it is found effective against most types of mold. However, it is not the ultimate solution, as it can be ineffective against some mold varieties and may also leave behind a heavy pungent smell, which can be challenging to get rid of.
That being said, it still works comparatively better than paints based on ammonia formulas, which don’t really work against the majority of molds. Even worse, it provides a suitable environment for them to grow and spread. So, you should definitely avoid them.
On the other hand, bleach-based solutions work in most situations but may not always. Although they may stain the surface, they may also and allow all the mold to keep growing underneath it. So, it becomes imperative to identify the type of mold that is growing on your walls before choosing a compatible paint, and we’d suggest you take advice from a professional painter.
3. Things Needed Before Painting Over Mold
1. Safety First
Many people try sanding over a mold-infested wall to clean it before painting, but this isn't the right thing to do. When you sand an infested surface, the tiny particles spread all around the air, which is not something you’d want. It reaches directly to your lungs, which can be very dangerous and potentially deadly.
If the mold infestation is that bad, we’d strongly suggest calling a professional. This might cost you some extra bucks, but the overall safety makes it worth the investment.
But if you find yourself capable of doing it well, we’d advise taking necessary precautions, like wearing 3M’s full-face respirator and rubber gloves before sanding. It will protect you from inhaling mold particles.
Putting on rubber gloves is always important to avoid contact with toxins that might be present in the paint. They prevent the chemicals from touching the skin, and you might not want to take any chances with your health. You will find quality gloves that can be reused multiple times.
Some may only be meant for single use and should be discarded after a certain number of uses. Also, make sure to discard them properly, away from humans and animals.
Even after sanding, you might find some patches that are difficult to get rid of. In such cases, consider applying a mold sealant prior to painting over the mold. This process, known as encapsulation, is used to seal remaining mold particles, which even sanding couldn’t remove. Once it dries off completely, you can apply one or multiple coats of a mold-killing primer and then coat it with the paint.
Just make sure to avoid any bleach-formulated paint on the surface; it can even make the mold problem worse. Furthermore, always wear quality rubber gloves while working to remove the mold.
2. Wipe The Area
It will always be essential to wipe the area with any clean and wet rags, as it provides an excellent base for paint to settle on. Once wiped and rinsed, dispose of the rag safely, away from animals and people.
3. Let Dry
Once the painted surface has dried off completely, apply one or two coats of the primer (like the Zinsser mold-killing primer), followed by mildew-resistant paint. You can use polyurethane rollers available on the market to apply the primerand paint. Just replace the foam covers, and you can use a single roller to paint your entire house.
Some things need to be taken care of during the process. If you are treating a vast area, make sure to use a sprayer that is ideal to use with your mold-resistant paint (wearing the protection, of course). Make sure you do not use your garden spray bottle, as plastic material isn’t always compatible with such paints.
Important Points To Remember
1. What Happens When You Paint Over Mold?
What specifically happens depends on whether you have a hazardous or non-hazardous mold on your wall. Determine that before you take any action. So, if you’re confused about whether the mold inside the house is toxic or not, call over a mold expert.
If there is no mold or mildew growth on your wall, it will be suitable to paint over areas with moisture problem that resists its spread and formation. And, it is entirely safe to paint over non-toxic cases such that it doesn’t get dangerous for you and your family.
Always make sure to apply single or double coats of primers or a mold sealant prior to applying a layer of paint.
Applying a mold-killing primer or mold sealant eliminates the root cause of the mold problem. It is not the case with the direct application of mold-killing paint. The residing mold continues to damage the house from the inside, and it oozes from the porous surfaces after some time.
Let me explain how? When you’re painting directly over existing mold, it cuts off fresh air circulation, leading to a severe mold issue. In case it is a humid room like a basement, kitchen, bathroom, laundry room, window frames, or other surfaces, the situation is even worse. You wouldn’t want that, obviously.
2. Painting Over An Anti-Mold Paint
Mold-killing paints might not look as glossy as traditional options available on the market, so many might want to have another coat of paint over it. It is highly unrecommended as applying a coat of another paint doesn’t allow mold-resistant paint to work its magic.
Also, before purchasing or applying any paint, make sure to see the product details on its website. These paints are generally applied in a room with a temperature above 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Also, the room needs to be properly ventilated to avoid any future growth of mold.
3. Choosing The Best Mold-Resistant Paint
Color is a primary lookout for anyone who is painting their house. After all, who wants their space to look dull, right? You will find some gorgeous and stellar bathroom paint colors on the online marketplace. Just a reminder, it is viable to have lighter colors in smaller rooms, which inhibits the growth of mildew.
You can remove molds with elbow grease, and a good cleaning solution is easily painted over an appropriate paint. Paints should be applied on high moisture areas and provide a facile growing environment for mold. But as all brands don’t offer similar quality products, you must check the formula used before going for a specific unit.
Again, paint doesn't kill mold entirely but prevents it from further growing. So, after you do the prep, choose the best paints that are affordable and deliver the best solutions. For damp areas like bathrooms and basements, Rust-Oleum is your best bet. The formulation of the paint locks out the moisture completely and deters any mold or mildew growth.
We have seen many of you go for mold-resistant additives and mix them into ordinary paints. It can be a viable solution as long as you mix it properly. In such a case, call over a professional, as they know mixture ratios and the correct application method. Many brands also offer a one-time free consultation about mixing and applying paint correctly.
Lastly, you already know that molds grow faster in an environment with lower pH levels. So, always go for paints free of any organic elements and alkaline and breathable.
What Else Can You Use?
1. Chlorine Bleach
Regular household bleach or sodium hypochlorite works best for destroying mold and removing fungal stains from a wall. However, it can be very harsh when in concentrated form, so you must dilute it before using it.
2. Hydrogen Peroxide
It is less harsh than a bleach solution but kills mold, and lightens stains as effectively. However, it will have a similar bleach effect as chlorine bleach; it works much slower compared to the latter and has no residue or fumes.
3. Distilled White Vinegar
Being acidic, it gradually breaks down the mold structure and kills it. Vinegar is gentle compared to the previous two solutions, but mold spots might pertain and you might need to further scrub it with a household cleaner.
4. Baking Soda And Borax
Baking soda (Sodium Bicarbonate) and borax, having a high pH value, inhibit mold growth and survival. Being inexpensive, it also doesn’t put a dent in your pocket. Additionally, it is non-toxic and mixes easily with water, serving as a quality agent for removing any stains but is not an effective cleaning agent.
Final Words
That’s it from our side. We hope that you have got a bigger picture of how you can paint over mold to kill it.
Once the paint has been applied and dried off properly, there’s nothing much that you can do after that. However, if you are still concerned about future mold problems, a lot of things can be done. Generally speaking, make sure that your room deters mold growth, by keeping it dry and ventilated for an adequate influx of air.
If your room is too susceptible to moisture deposition and new mold growth, you might need extra help from a dehumidifier. It will help keep your space dry and warm. Apart from that, you can constantly monitor the humidity levels of your room.
We hope that our efforts will help you lead a mold-free life. Good luck and take care!
Have you been thinking about using oil paints? If yes, then you must have come across various solvents.
The most common variants available on the market are the traditional paint thinners and mineral spirits. On the shelf, the bottles of both solvents look similar, and it can especially be confusing for a beginner to choose between the two.
Making the right choice is crucial to make a decision that would give you better results while applying the paint. As many people can be sensitive to these solvents, knowing about the products helps you to take better safety precautions.
Hence, we have come up with this informative guide to help you choose between paint thinners and mineral spirits. Moreover, we will take a look at each variant to see if they are really that different. And, don't forget to check our suggestions of ways to use the solvents.
So, without much ado, let's begin!
Paint Thinner Vs Mineral Spirits Differences
Before we get into the differences seen in the two solvents, it's important to look at an overview of each variant. This would give you a snapshot of what to expect from the solvents and to decide on the right choice for your task. So, let's have an in-depth look at both products.
What Is Paint Thinner?
When choosing a solvent, the most common option to come across is the paint thinner. It has been in use for a long time, and most of us recognize paint thinner because of its strong smell, which can be off-putting for many people.
This solvent used to be a go-to option for those when most paints used to have an oil base. However, paint thinners also work with acrylic paints and many other paints except latex-based products.
One of the things that you should know is that, like many other solvents, paint thinners are also a derivative of petroleum. Hence, it's highly flammable and toxic, so you should be extra careful while working with the substance.
From the very name of this product, you can understand that its primary use is to thin out paint, specifically oil-based variants. All you need to do is add the paint thinner in the right proportions to change the viscosity or thickness of the paint. And then, you can apply the thinned paint with a brush or use it for spray painting.
These thinners also work well to strip paint from a surface as well as to clean brushes. These can also be used as a cleaning medium for taking off grease and grime from metal tools or even sanded surfaces.
Compared to other solvents, paint thinners are less refined, containing a higher amount of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), such as methylene chloride, formaldehyde, and benzene. Thus, working in a well-ventilated space is always recommended while using a traditional paint thinner.
Furthermore, many people prefer to use paint thinners because of their low price, especially when bought in bulk. Having said that, these paint thinners aren't a good choice for those who are prone to skin irritation from chemical solvents.
What Are Mineral Spirits?
Mineral spirits are also widely available in the market and are sometimes sold under the name of white spirits. This solvent is also derived from petroleum, but it goes through an elaborate refining process to limit the amount of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
Even though all mineral spirits aren't free from toxicity, some manufacturers produce variants that are safe for the environment. One of the critical differences between mineral spirits and the usual paint thinners is their reduced smell. In fact, many companies have been able to get rid of the smell completely, and those variants are sold under the label of being "odorless."
Many professionals these days prefer to use mineral spirits inside confined spaces and homes because of their low toxicity levels. However, you should still avoid long-term exposure to the product.
When it comes to the use of mineral spirits, it's similar to that of the traditional paint thinners and can be used for the same jobs. Apart from working as a thinner for paints, some variants of mineral spirits are more potent, so it's much more effective when used as a paint stripper or a cleaning agent.
Another excellent feature of the mineral spirits is the low evaporation rate. Hence, it elongates the usability period of the paint, giving you a little more time to get a smoother texture.
Nevertheless, mineral spirits do come at a higher price point compared to traditional paint thinners. As only a tiny amount is needed for any task, a bottle of it may last you a long time.
So, if you're looking for a solvent that doesn't smell bad, and would work for indoor spaces, then you may think about opting for mineral spirits.
Differences Between Paint Thinners And Mineral Spirits
Are you a little confused about the differences between the two solvents? Let's have a detailed look at the contrasting points present between paint thinners and mineral spirits. While getting a solvent for your task, make sure to keep these points in mind to choose a product that will work according to your expectations.
Presence Of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)
One of the first things to know about both solvents is the presence of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). These are predominant compounds present in petroleum-based products, and they are emitted from the solvents in a gaseous form. And prolonged exposure to toxic fumes can lead to health problems.
Moreover, the effect of these compounds is especially felt in an indoor environment as there isn't a way for the gas to escape. And, these toxic organic compounds are commonly found in all kinds of paint thinners and even paints. So, it's always advisable to wear proper safety gear while working with these substances.
To be honest, both solvents have volatile organic compounds (VOCs), but the traditional paint thinners contain a greater amount compared to mineral spirits. Also, some manufacturers of mineral spirits have refined the solvent even further to bring VOCs down to the minimal level.
Because these compounds give rise to pollution, it's advised to choose a solvent that's safer for the environment. Hence, the mineral spirits do have the upper hand, especially when you are going to use the solvent in an enclosed space.
If it's your first time buying a solvent, check the label present on the bottle to see its toxicity warnings. Furthermore, make sure to see if the solvent is suitable for indoor tasks.
Composition
As both solvents are used to thin paints, they can sometimes be mislabeled as just paint thinners. However, looking at the composition of a solvent can give you a clue about its differences.
If you are searching for mineral spirits, make sure to have a look at the bottle to see that it contains 100% unblended mineral or white spirits. This solvent is usually colorless and almost odorless because of going through a rigorous filtration process.
In comparison, the usual paint thinners have a blended composition and may even contain additives. It may include compounds like blended mineral spirits, turpentine, naphtha, acetone, or other substances that can thin out the paint.
Moreover, paint thinners are also known for containing a certain level of benzene which can help to mask the smell and allow the substance to produce a smoother mix with paints.
Interestingly, some paint thinners are entirely made of turpentine, an oil derived from pine trees. But, most people steer clear of using it because of the strong smell, which is retained for a longer time.
Knowing the composition of a solvent is also quite crucial to use it for the right job. One point of similarity present in mineral spirits and paint thinners is the inability to work with latex-based paints. Other than that, mineral oils are thought to be a more versatile substance, but you should still have a look at the packaging to find out its compatibility with your project.
Odor
Most people will agree that an off-putting thing about most solvents and paints is the obnoxious odor. This is especially true for those who are sensitive to strong smells, and working with such substances can lead to adverse effects on their health.
Additionally, when a solvent is being used for an indoor project, the smell may last for a while. Hence, anyone using the space may feel the woes of the odor released by the substances.
In the aspect of odors, mineral spirits are our first preference as most of them are low odor variants. And, some manufacturers have even gone forward and come up with completely odorless mineral spirits. So, if you're averse to the strong smell of traditional paint thinners, go for mineral spirits.
However, if you are going to choose the usual paint thinner, try to find a low-smelling variant. Besides, while working with a smelly paint thinner, always wear a mask to protect yourself from the toxic fumes.
Effectiveness
As a solvent can be used for different purposes, you should definitely check its level of effectiveness before making a decision. You will notice that there's a raging debate between people who prefer to use traditional paint thinners and those who use mineral spirits.
The best way to check the effectiveness of a product is by testing it out, but that's not always possible. Hence, it's necessary to check out the previous reviews to ensure that the solvent will work for your task.
Now, a solvent that works well while thinning paint may not be the best substance for cleaning metal tools. So, before purchasing, find out the use case for the particular solvent.
After going through the opinion of professionals, we concluded that mineral spirits are more versatile and effective. Additionally, pure mineral spirits are an excellent cleaning agent that can even get rid of sticky adhesives.
And, the best part about using mineral spirits is the smooth texture that it renders to paint. If you are working with expensive paint, it's always better to opt for mineral spirits.
Having said that, for certain materials, the usual paint thinners might be the most effective option. In such a situation, you may need to choose the paint thinner over the mineral spirits.
Cost
Even though we should judge a product by its quality, most of us end up basing it on the cost. And, the usual paint thinner is one of the cheapest solvents available on the market. Hence, many people gravitate towards getting it but do think about the other factors before making a final decision.
Although mineral spirits are a tad more expensive, we do think that they can be a great investment, one of the crucial points being the safety that comes with them. Moreover, there are areas where paint thinners having a high VOC content are banned.
The pure or white mineral spirits can at times cost 40-50% more than traditional paint thinners. As they also tend to be more effective for any work, we think that it can be an excellent investment. Those who are working on a bigger project can always get the bulk packs to cut down on the cost.
Additionally, if you are working with home improvement contractors, make sure that they are using healthy and safe products. And, if the work deals with an indoor area, the best choice is to go for the mineral spirits because it comes with less toxicity.
Usages Of Paint Thinner And Mineral Spirits
A common confusion among people is about the use case of mineral spirits and paint thinners. Even though we have stated that the substances are somewhat different, one of the points of similarity has to be their usage. The most basic use of both substances is to thin out paint, usually oil-based and alkyd-based paints.
Apart from the paints used for home improvement, paint thinners are also used by artists while painting. And, you may have seen them being used to cleaning wet paint brushes because of their ability to strip paint.
However, contrary to popular beliefs, neither solvents can remove dried paint from paint brushes. Additionally, if you have spilled paint on any surface, you can quickly clear up the mess with the solvents.
Surprisingly, paint thinners and mineral oils are also used to rub off the waxy substance present on the wood. And, the solvents can clear any adhesive. We especially like how mineral spirits work as it isn't sticky so that you can control it easily.
Another common utilization for these solvents is as a cleaning agent. It's commonly used for car parts and auto equipment that are covered in grease.
Furthermore, odorless mineral spirits can be used around the house for various purposes. When your furniture is dirty, take a tiny amount of mineral spirits to remove all the dirt. And, you can even use it on the floor for a quick clean-up. For getting these uses, try to get mineral spirits that are non-reactive and always patch test on the surface before proceeding to do the whole job.
Also, when you're using mineral spirits for cleaning, it's necessary to clean up the area after that to avoid accidents due to its flammability.
Safety Measures For Using Paint Thinner And Mineral Spirits
By now, it must be clear to you that maintaining safety is crucial while using any kind of solvent. Hence, we thought of telling you about some safety precautions that must be followed while using paint thinners and mineral spirits.
First, it's a must to wear a mask to avoid the foul odor and the toxic VOCs that come out of these solvents. Rather than using a thin mask, try to wear a respirator to have better protection.
Moreover, every solvent comes with a safety data sheet that gives you all the precautions. If you are new to using solvents, it's a prerequisite to go through the material to understand how the toxic substance can be harmful.
Common symptoms after inhaling a chemical like benzene is dizziness, difficulty breathing, and nausea. The probability of facing such a situation arises when you work with paint thinner in a confined space.
Another point to remember while working with paint thinners and mineral spirits is to wear well-fitted gloves. As these substances are irritants and toxic, you don't want to ingest them. And, you should also ensure to wear clothes that cover most of your body.
If you feel that your skin has come in contact with the solvents, immediately stop working and proceed to wash the area with soapy water. If there is a sign of irritation, visit an emergency practitioner as soon as possible.
However, the most crucial safety issue with these solvents is their flammability. Even a tiny spark can quickly lead to a big fire, so the work area should be away from any source of heat or exposed flames. Also, be careful not to let anyone smoke around the area to avoid accidental fires.
Paint Thinner Vs Mineral Spirits FAQ
1. Is Paint Thinner Same As Acetone?
Even though both acetone and paint thinner are commonly used solvents, they aren't the same thing. Acetone is a more specific term used to describe a chemical solvent usually derived from propanone. Whereas paint thinners may be composed of various solvents.
One of the most familiar uses of acetone is to remove nail paint because of its paint stripping capacities. Other than that, acetone is also used in places like the metal industry. In comparison, paint thinners often have limited use of thinning paints and for cleaning surfaces.
2. Can I Pour Mineral Spirits Down The Drain?
No, as it’s a safety hazard, pouring mineral spirits down the drain is never okay. It can cause damage to the sewers, and there's also a high probability of it leaching into the environment, significantly contaminating the groundwater. As it's a highly flammable substance, you need to be very careful about its disposal, or else it can pose a threat to people who come close to it.
The best way to discard unused mineral spirits is by calling up your hazardous-waste recycler or landfill. They will tell you the steps to follow before discarding the solvent so that it doesn't harm anyone or the environment.
3. Is Baby Oil The Same As Mineral Spirits?
One of the common mistakes people make is to get confused between mineral spirits and mineral oils. The latter is the substance that you usually find in baby oils. Even though both products are derived from petroleum, the mineral spirits are toxic and odorous, while mineral oils are colorless and odorless.
Apart from being used in the beauty and skincare industry, mineral oils are widely used for finishing wood and easing constipation. In comparison, mineral spirits are primarily used for thinning out paint or cleaning various surfaces and stripping paint from brushes.
4. What Is The Difference Between Paint Medium And Paint Thinner?
If you're about to work with acrylic paints, it's essential to know the difference between a painting medium and a paint thinner. While a paint thinner is mainly used to reduce the thickness of paint, a painting medium adds texture to it.
It's common to see a medium categorized by a glossy or a matte finish that will render to the paint. However, a thinner will help to thin out the paint to make applying it easier. Paint thinners are also helpful in airbrush or spray paintings as it makes the color slightly transparent without changing the properties of the paint.
5. Are Mineral Spirits And Paint Thinner The Same?
The mineral spirits and paint thinners are quite alike to each other and used for similar tasks. But, the mineral spirits are usually more refined than paint thinners, making them almost odorless and less toxic. And, it hikes up the prices of mineral spirits and is often used in more sophisticated projects in contrast to paint thinners.
Verdict
We have come to the very end of comparing the paint thinner with the mineral spirits, and we're sure you're excited to know the winner among the two. However, declaring a winner isn't easy, as both solvents have their individual pros and cons.
Moreover, even the professionals who regularly work with solvents opine that both variants work quite similarly. But, some think that the mineral spirits are a bit more effective than usual paint thinners.
Besides, if you're sensitive to the strong odor of regular paint thinners, then mineral spirits would definitely be a better choice.
However, for those who want to save a little more money and have the means to follow all safety precautions, you may opt for the paint thinners. Also, do let us know if there are any queries regarding the two solvents.
The availability of multiple tools for a single task has surely made life easier.
But it also needs users to decide which one will be the best for your purpose. And that’s where the confusion arises.
Now, painting is one of those many jobs, and paint sprayers and rollers are two such tools that can be of great help for the purpose. But the confusion remains the same, i.e., choosing between them.
Each of the two types has different features and applications, and there are a ton of options under each category available out there, which makes the task more difficult. So, to help you out, we’ve picked the best 3 models of each type and have also included a detailed buyer’s guide to help you make a well-informed decision.
Metal.Amperage (A) : 9.0. Maximum Flow Rate (GPM) :...
Made in USA
If you need to finish your spray painting work quickly without compromising on precision, this model is the one to go for. With high-quality quality finishing on offer, any dull surface can be transformed completely using this paint sprayer from Graco Magnum. Notably, the tool has a 110V intake and includes a 1-year limited warranty.
Why Did We Like It?
We were glad to find that this unit lets us spray paint in the unthinned form. All you have to do is adjust the pressure to a higher level to get the job done. There are three tip sizes offered, with the maximum size being 0.015 mm.
Moreover, it’s equipped with a RAC IV tip-switch feature that lets you reverse the tip when it is clogged with paint. As a result, you can continue spraying without facing any interruption in between.
Another great feature is the flexible suction tub that’s integrated into the design. This makes it possible to spray the paint directly from a 1 or 5-gallon bucket of paint, thereby allowing maximum user convenience.
Speaking of its application, you can use it for a variety of purposes like painting garage doors, decks, fences, or even houses. Additionally, you get storage compartments in the package to store the spray gun, power cord, and extra spray chips that will come in handy while working.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The instructions for set-up and use in the included operation manual are quite lengthy. So, some customers, especially first-timers, may take more time to comprehend them. That said, it works pretty well without showing any major problems.
PAINT SPRAYER FOR COUNTLESS DIY PROJECTS: The HomeRight...
ADJUSTABLE SETTINGS TO SUIT ANY PROJECT: You can adjust the...
Get ultimate convenience with this efficient unit from HomeRight, which is one of the well-known brands in the paint applicator industry. It lets you complete all your spray painting jobs with minimum hassle and maximum efficiency. So, you can get through the otherwise strenuous spraying tasks with absolute ease.
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, three high-quality brass tips provided with this model help achieve superior precision and performance. Not only that, but these offer optimum flexibility and versatility for the various painting projects that you have to handle.
Furthermore, this paint sprayer runs with a power of 450 Watts, which helps you complete a variety of projects effortlessly. It can work with a range of varnishes and paints such as milk paint, enamels, chalk-type paint, clear sealer, and primers.
We also loved the additional adjustable settings on the sprayer, which lets you adjust its air cap to spray the paint in a round, horizontal, or vertical motion. You can even adjust the knob of flow control to decrease or increase the paint output. That way, you can customize the flow as per the coating needs for the particular surface.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Although this product works well to give you good results every time, the warranty included with it may not be useful in all cases, especially if you are facing minor issues. Some users have also complained of delayed responses to issues reported through the customer helpline.
Another unit that helps users get through the job easier is the Scuddles Paint Sprayer. You can get the ideal coat for almost every surface by applying minimal effort. As such, creating a smooth and beautiful finish for your wooden surfaces, walls, outdoor fencing, and several others will not be a problem anymore!
Why Did We Like It?
First things first, this paint sprayer uses 5 specialized nozzles to work with different kinds of paints and varnishes. Three 2.6 mm nozzles are suitable for spraying thicker paints such as chalk-type paints or latex. On the other hand, the two remaining ones with sizes of 1.8 mm and 2.2 mm, respectively are designed for thinner paints.
This model also has an efficient 34-fl oz container to hold a considerably large amount of paint and replacement bottles can even be bought at an affordable price. Such a bottle will help switch between paints easily and more quickly.
As far as cleaning and maintenance are concerned, the package includes a couple of tools to simplify the process. For instance, there’s an unclogging needle that helps unclog any hardened paint remaining in the machine, while a thick brush is included for easy overall cleaning.
Lastly, we really liked the high power output of 1200W, which helps achieve clean, smooth, and superior-grade finishes each time.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We felt that this unit takes a bit longer to complete larger tasks such as painting large fence segments in the yard. Hence, you’ll have to be slightly more patient while handling such tasks. Nonetheless, you can rest assured that this sprayer does its job quite well.
COMPREHENSIVE SET: Package includes 11 piece: Tray, Roller...
PROFESSIONAL QUALITY: This paint tray set is high quality...
The Bates Paint Roller delivers reliable performance by completing all painting jobs within a short period. It is equally suitable for beginners and professionals, thanks to its utility-based features. What’s more, you can get started with your painting jobs immediately as it comes with the complete set of tools required for the purpose.
Why Did We Like It?
Perhaps, the most noteworthy feature of this paint roller is the presence of thick filaments in the roller brush. Due to their thickness, these filaments are capable of holding more paint so that you can save more time while getting a perfect finish, unlike ordinary paint rollers.
Added on to this are the ½-inch thick naps of the roller, which help you paint something as big as an entire house smoothly. Both the naps and filaments are made from a sturdy material, promising years of service.
Beyond that, it’s quite convenient to operate owing to the lightweight build and consists of a durable plastic handle coated with rubber. The latter enhances your comfort, making the procedure much smoother compared to some of its competitors.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We think the packaging of this product could be improved since it is weaker and more prone to damage during delivery. The tray containing the roller and the other tools is fragile and may often arrive with cracks in several places. Also, the tools may be a bit untidy in some cases.
Quick release spring prevents roller slippage yet allows...
This uniquely designed paint roller from Wooster Brush consists of multiple efficient features that work to provide a praiseworthy performance. It is one of the most reliable paint rollers currently available in the market, offering optimum user convenience. Depending on your needs, you can even purchase this brush in packs of 2 and 3.
Why Did We Like It?
First and foremost, we were impressed with the effortless application of the brush, which is made possible with the internal bearings that help it to revolve smoothly over almost any surface. In fact, it maintains a smooth application even when there is more paint on the nap. So, you don’t need to worry about efficiency when painting large surfaces.
Plus, a quick-release spring is provided to prevent the roller from slipping while painting. Not only that but it can also be removed easily with a single tap after you’re done with the painting. Thus, you are relieved from the hassle of handling a paint-covered roller.
Beyond that, there is a durable nylon cage reinforced with green fiberglass that protects the bearings and the spring. Lastly, the polypropylene handle with reinforced threads provides a firm yet comfortable grip.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Some customers have reported that although the handle has a screw hole to fix it onto an extension pole, that fixture is not efficient enough, as it may loosen up after some time. So, the handle might spin slightly while painting.
Microfiber Paint Roller Cover Designed for use with all...
If you already have a roller at home and want a budget-friendly painting solution, going for these paint roller covers will be a great option. They are designed to deliver uniform coats on a range of surfaces to provide highly satisfying performance.
Why Did We Like It?
Undoubtedly, the biggest advantage of these roller covers is their lint-free finishing, thanks to the ½-inch microfiber material. It provides uniform coverage while ensuring minimal stipple and the naps are reusable after cleanup. This ultimately results in the long-lasting service life of the covers.
Another beneficial feature is that they are quite easy to use and maintain. Just insert one onto the roller head, and you’re good to go. And since the covers are washable, the cleaning process becomes pretty simple.
What’s more, they are very durable and have a polypropylene core that resists damage due to solvents and water, preventing cracks or tears. Last but not least, they can be effectively used for applying paint on both walls and furniture.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only disadvantage of using these covers is that they might sometimes slide off the roller frame during use. This can be annoying if it occurs regularly, as it involves the hassle of inserting them back each time. That said, they can deliver seamless finishes on a variety of surfaces.
Pros
Provide even coverage
Ensure minimal stipple
Easy to use and maintain
Long-lasting
Cons
Might slide off the roller frame
Paint Roller vs Sprayer Buyer’s Guide
You won’t be able to decide whether to go for a sprayer or roller by just looking at some of the best models of each type. Hence, it is important to know their key features and also understand where the differences between the two types lie.
So, let’s look at some of their most important features along with the several purposes for which they can be used.
Ease Of Use
For those who are beginners to using sprayers, the application may come across as a bit difficult the first time. It might require quite a few trial and error sessions to get accustomed to the process of paint-spraying. As such, drips, uneven coverage, spills, or runs are some of the inconveniences that are usually faced by first-timers.
Aside from that, the preparation may require more time than usual. In comparison, rollers are easier to operate and need minimal prep work. A crucial part of the preparatory system is masking, which we will discuss separately a little later.
It’s worth noting that if you feel tired or are interrupted for some reason, you can stop painting and continue the next day. That's because winding up for the day is not difficult. You are free to quickly wash the rollers or even stow them in a zipped bag to keep their efficiency intact. However, a downside of using a roller is that it may sometimes leave behind drips on the floor
On the other hand, if the sprayer is filled with paint, you have to continue the work until that paint is used up. Otherwise, it will dry up and might even cause clogs.
Time Taken
For those who can devote limited time to their painting jobs, the time taken to complete the task on hand becomes a vital factor. But let us assure you that neither of the tools will take an exceptionally long time for the purpose. Though using a sprayer will require much more preparation, the total time is almost the same as that of painting with a roller.
Coverage
The convergence offered by a painting tool is yet another crucial parameter because it determines the efficacy of your job. For instance, some tools may not reach certain areas (like in the corners or edges), or it may happen that the coat is applied thicker in some parts. By preventing such possibilities, you can achieve a uniform coat with superior finishing, just how you want it to be.
Now, with a sprayer, you can paint even the narrow crevices on some surfaces, which is otherwise difficult using a brush. Naturally, this advantage will come in handy for painting the hard-to-reach parts of various textured surfaces, such as brick walls, lap siding, popcorn ceilings, cornices, and brick walls.
Another great benefit of using sprayers is that experienced users can achieve a smoother finish devoid of any lap marks, as the sprayer aerates the paint for smoother coating.
However, if the surface is a bit dirty, a roller will make the paint adhere to it better than a sprayer. Thus, you should scrub the wall first to eliminate any dirt or debris before using a sprayer to ensure that you get the desired results.
Applications
The differences in the features, coverage, and preparatory requirements make these tools suitable for different applications. Generally, sprayers are used for outdoor projects and empty spaces. Exteriors that have matured landscaping like sunrooms, garages, or extensive decks can be painted quite comfortably using this tool.
As we have mentioned earlier, although greater accuracy can be achieved by using sprayers, there is a risk of overspray involved. That’s why this tool is suitable for empty spaces. After all, your hard work will not yield satisfactory results and the time saved won’t be worth it if the painting isn’t consistent and thorough.
On the other hand, if you have to paint an outdoor surface on a windy day, using a sprayer may not be the ideal choice, as there’s a high risk of spilling the paint. A roller will be much more useful in this case because it’s suitable for interior spaces such as walls and furniture. On a side note, if you need to paint a ceiling, a sprayer is a good option.
Cost
The cost is always a factor when you’re using a painting tool for your home or any other DIY project. Although there are various sprayers that have relatively affordable price tags, most of the good-quality models are a bit more expensive.
In comparison, rollers are more budget-friendly and hence are pretty cost-effective for painting small to medium-sized surfaces. As a result, you can use them for tasks such as painting furniture or other such fixtures at home.
With regards to maintenance, rollers have an upper hand as they can be washed and cleaned easily. However, sprayers must be maintained with utmost care to ensure proper and consistent paint application.
Masking Requirements
Masking is an important step of the preparation process before starting with the painting part. In simple words, it's the method of protecting specific parts of the surface that you don’t want to be painted. In the case of sprayers, the masking requirement is much more than when using rollers.
Ideally, you should cover every square inch of the space that doesn’t have to be painted with a masking film. If you don’t have a masking film, you can even use a drop cloth for the purpose. But since rollers don’t spray or “squirt” the paint, very little masking is needed to mainly protect the edges or corners.
Scope For Detailing
Sprayers offer scope for better detailing, as users have the chance to create different patterns and textures. Thus, you can use sprayers for tasks such as crown molding, deep exterior textures, masonry, and cottage cheese ceilings. In contrast, rollers are more suitable for plain painting tasks, especially those that need uniform coats of paint.
Verdict
Choosing the right tool is the key to achieving beautifully painted surfaces. So, make sure you have your needs and preferences in mind before heading on to purchase one.
And on that note, we have come to the end of our guide. We hope that by now, you have a clear idea about what paint sprayers and rollers can offer, making the decision to pick the right tool slightly easy.
But before we call it a day, let’s take you through our favorites from the list. The HomeRight C800971 Paint Sprayer is a great option if you are searching for a high-performing tool for painting large outdoor surfaces.
However, if you are on the lookout for a tool to paint your indoor furniture with utmost precision, the Bates Paint Roller will be a perfect choice.
That was all we have for you today. Till next time, take care!
Let’s face it, while we all love to host parties in the backyard with barbeque grills, cleaning them becomes a task.
It can involve hours of scrubbing the oven door, grills, floors, and other surfaces. The best oven cleaner will be able to remove all the stains, including baked-on grease, without damaging the surface.
Most aerosol sprays can dissolve grease, and caked-on food, and deep clean the entire oven. Since there are a number of choices on the market, you need to choose oven cleaners very carefully.
We made this list of the top oven cleaners to make the task easier. You should have sparkling clean oven racks in no time once you start using one of the options. Also, there are hacks that can be used to get a clean home along with clean appliances.
If you are finding baked-on grease difficult to remove, then we have an amazing option for you. The Easy-Off 6233804250 is one of the best oven cleaner options, and it will help you clean tough stains within a very short period of time.
HEAVY DUTY OVEN CLEANER: Specially formulated to penetrate...
MULTIPURPOSE: Use to clean ovens, oven doors, barbecue...
Why Did We Like It?
If you were trying to work with baking soda, let us tell you that this is a much stronger oven-cleaning option. You will be getting an advanced formula that will cut through grease and grime, leaving you with clean kitchen and oven racks.
Moreover, this oven cleaner is known to take care of grease stains within 3 minutes of application. All you need to do is spray all over the oven walls for deep cleaning. Then wait for 3 minutes and use a microfiber cloth to wipe it all off. You will get a sparkling clean oven without any additional effort.
Adding on, you can use this strong formula for cleaning barbeque grills, ovens, and broilers. You will receive a 710 ml container that can be kept handy for use after backyard barbeque parties. The formula is NSF-certified and very safe for home use.
What Could've Been Better?
In case you have pets in the house, it is important that you keep the formula away from them. It can be very harmful to pets, keep them away from the rooms and wear a mask while using it. Keep this in mind, and you should not face any problems.
Up next is a cleaner that will work perfectly for commercial use. The Zep Grill Cleaner ZUOVGR19 is known to be a restaurant-grade cleaner that can be used on various surfaces easily. You will admire its spot-cleaning capacity along with its versatility when it comes to usage.
POWERFUL RESTAURANT GRADE FORMULA: The cleaner is suitable...
DISSOLVES GREASE ON CONTACT: Thick foaming formula clings to...
Why Did We Like It?
This oven-cleaning solution will ensure that all your surfaces are cleaned well. It is not just an oven and grill cleaner, but you will be able to take care of ceramic, stainless steel, pans, pots, porcelain, and rotisseries too.
Next, this oven and grill cleaner contains a tough formula that will help you dissolve grease easily. The thick foam can be sprayed over the needed surface, after which you can use a wet cloth to clean it well. This works for barbeque drip pans, too, where grease can leave marks. The oven cleaner will penetrate deep into the stains and dissolve them.
Further, you will get 2 packs together, which can be kept at different places. You can use one for the kitchen and another for your backyard grill. This saves you from having to keep moving between the 2 places.
What Could've Been Better?
Please ensure that you wear gloves before using this product. Gloves will prevent the oven cleaner from touching your hand. We made the mistake of not using gloves, so the formula took around 5 days to remove completely. Be a little careful, and you should face no problems.
Hardened grease can be very difficult to remove, but with the Diversey CBD991206, you do not need to worry at all. It dissolves grease that is stuck on the surface and will ensure that no baked-on residue remains. We are quite satisfied with this concentrated cleaner, and you can read on to know more.
Breaks down tough, baked-on grease and grime on contact,...
Why Did We Like It?
While grilling or barbecuing food, there will be oil spills. Now, it is not possible to clean the parts immediately, and the baked-on messes can harden up in time. This powerful oven cleaner can be sprayed from any angle, which will ensure that all the stains are removed.
It includes burned-on spills, which are usually the most difficult to take out. This spray is such that you can attempt to reach narrow or tough spots that are difficult to work with. You can then take a damp cloth and wrap it around a stick. Use it to reach inside narrow spots to get a clean surface.
Moving on, this product is perfect for all kinds of use. You can work with it on ceramic tiles, enamel, porcelain, iron, stainless steel, and concrete. People use it for both industrial as well as personal purposes.
What Could've Been Better?
The only thing that bothered us was the fumes emitted every time we sprayed the formula. It is very strong, and you should not use it in a closed space. Always ensure good ventilation while working with this spray bottle.
Mostly all oven cleaners will come with a bad smell, but this one stands out. The Grab Green 899696002876 oven cleaner smells like thyme and fig leaf, which makes removing grease a pleasant experience. If you do not own a self-cleaning oven, then this is a product to keep at home.
Contains: 3- 16 Ounce Spray Bottles of Grab Green Natural...
Eco-Friendly: This biodegradable formula is free of solvents...
Why Did We Like It?
While most oven cleaners are not environment-friendly and come with a host of harsh chemicals, this one is safe for the planet. It is made without any ammonia, phosphates, formaldehyde, solvents, dyes, phthalates, or masking agents.
Furthermore, the brand believes in responsibly sourcing products making this a very good choice. Every item is derived naturally and is biodegradable.
The environment-safe ingredients will work well in spot cleaning and for taking care of a dirty oven. You can get tough marks off a dirty surface, which will ensure that your kitchen appliances are all cleaned well.
We were able to clean microwaves, ceramic stovetops, and many other horizontal and vertical surfaces easily. Since it is available in spray form, you will not face any difficulties spreading it over surfaces. It is used by people riding bikes to clean their bike chains. Chefs also choose to have a spotless commercial kitchen.
What Could've Been Better?
When we first placed an order, we were a little disappointed to see that the bottles were not sealed. Hence, we called customer care to ask for help. They were pretty responsive and agreed to replace the bottles. In case you face a similar problem, do not hesitate to call up customer care.
Are you looking for a cleaning agent that will offer you streak-free performance? The GP66 Green Miracle Oven Cleaner is an environment-friendly option that can be used on almost all kinds of surfaces. Read on to know more about its bells and whistles.
REMOVES THE TOUGHEST STAINS- GP66 is an industrial-strength...
ECO-FRIENDLY AND FAMILY APPROVED- Unlike harsh chemical...
Why Did We Like It?
Have you ever heard of an oven cleaner that can double up as a laundry detergent? This product will give you the benefits of both. You can use it to clean ovens, pots, pans, brick, grout, carpets, laundry, golf clubs, airway strips, microwaves, vinyl, glass, pet mess, stovetops, and more.
Moving on, this is a very concentrated formula that will immediately clean the surface that you are working on. Like most oven cleaners, it will not just create a film on top of the water. Instead, it will penetrate into it and break through the water allowing proper mixing. That, in turn, will remove the stains easily.
Besides, this is made keeping industrial use in mind. The oven cleaner is not tested with animals and does not contain a strong and harsh smell. There are no phosphates or bleach in the mix, making it safe for use.
What Could've Been Better?
Ensure that the product does not come in contact with the skin at all. This is very important so as to prevent your skin from itching all the time. Just make sure that you wear gloves whenever you touch it, as the formula is super-concentrated. Remember this, and there should not be any further problems.
If you are looking for a versatile oven cleaner for baked-on grease, then the Stax B074QLB1XK will serve you well. It can be used on a cold oven and oven racks, and it will leave you with a completely clean surface. We were able to get rid of all kinds of greasy oven stains with this.
Oven Cleaner - The Astonish cleaning paste works fast;...
Multi Purpose Cleaner - Our Oven & Cookware Cleaner makes...
Why Did We Like It?
While most oven cleaning products come in liquid form, which can be sprayed to keep your oven clean, this one is in the form of a paste. It is much stronger than a baking soda mix and can be used for the most stubborn greases.
This oven and grill cleaner can be used to remove rust from chrome surfaces. Just apply the paste, then wait for a while. Then use a damp sponge or a paper towel to wipe the surface. You will not need to use elbow grease for cleaning. Instead, you can just wipe it clean once the grease has melted.
Moving on, this grill cleaner also takes care of burnt oil left inside ovens. Just let your oven cool down, and then apply the paste over the oven surface.
What Could've Been Better?
The only thing that you need to be aware of is that the oven cleaner cannot be used on non-stick pans. The formula is very strong and can damage the non-stick coating.
So, in case you were planning to purchase a grill cleaner for all your kitchen appliances, keep this in mind.
Pros
Works in cleaning grease and stains
Elbow grease is not required
Cleans burned oil
Can be used for sinks and tiles
Cons
Cannot be used for non-stick pans
7. Member's Mark Oven Cleaner
One of our final suggestions is a product meant for commercial use. The Member's Mark Oven Cleaner will make your oven doors look new. It is perfect for cleaning baked-on messes from grills and ovens, and we were very satisfied with the performance.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
This is another powerful restaurant-grade formula that will act as a great oven and grill cleaner. It is often used in bakeries to clean ovens that are used regularly. You will need to spray the liquid on the area needed and wait for some time.
We will recommend waiting for 15 minutes to see proper results. Then use a soft cloth to wipe the area and clean it well.
Moreover, this is a perfect oven cleaner for baked-on grease. You can use it for a hot oven too, as the grease is easier to remove then. Just ensure that you have switched off the electrical connection before moving on to it.
On top of it, there are 3 bottles of liquid measuring 32 ounces each. Hence, you can use oven cleaners to clean all the surfaces of your kitchen appliances.
What Could've Been Better?
The only thing that bothered us was the odor, which was pretty strong. We will recommend wearing a mask to cover the nose well before you start working. Also, the fumes are not good for the skin, and you should wear gloves while working.
Pros
Ready-to-use formula with no mixing needed
Can reduce scrubbing and scraping
Works in taking off rust
Shows results in 15 minutes
Cons
Very strong odor
Oven Cleaners Buying Guide
The best oven cleaner will be able to clean baked-on grease marks easily. While some of you might be applying baking soda or a homemade oven cleaner to do the cleaning, these are much stronger agents on the market, as you have already seen. They will work to remove burned grease too from inside ovens.
Now, remember never to use strong commercial cleaners for self-cleaning ovens. They might damage the inner surfaces, and you might then need to spend a lot of money repairing them.
Choosing the best oven cleaner can still be difficult. Hence, we decided to write down some of the important factors. These need to be kept in mind so that you can make a thoughtful choice.
Spray V/s Paste
While most oven and grill cleaner options will come in a spray bottle, some might also be available in a paste form. The paste can be very effective in cleaning oven racks along with the oven door. However, you might not be able to apply it to the inner parts of a cold oven which is generally difficult to approach.
An oven-cleaning spray, on the other hand, will help in keeping the oven clean completely. It can reach narrow spaces, and you can then wipe it off with a wet cloth. So, we will recommend keeping a watch over the kind of surfaces you can use the product on before purchasing.
Also, there are sprays available, which are made from completely natural ingredients. Some people make these at home to prevent using chemicals. Vinegar is often used to make such natural cleaners.
Usage
Gone are the days when you would be spending hours using baking soda to remove marks. Oven cleaners are meant for various purposes, and most will not just clean an oven. You should be able to use them for grills, racks, along with other kitchen appliances. Please check the description to see what all can be cleaned with the oven cleaning spray before buying.
Moving on, some oven cleaners work well in removing stains from laundry, carpets, and chrome surfaces too. You might also be able to remove rust without elbow grease if you use certain formulas.
Safety
Many of the oven cleaners available on the market can have toxic and harsh chemicals, which can lead to chemical burns if they touch your skin. You need to be very careful while choosing a good one. Opting for a fume-free oven cleaner can work out well as they generally contain lesser harsh substances. Also, there are cleaners with natural ingredients, which can be used as an alternative.
No matter which cleaning agent you choose, it is best if you wear protective gear while working with them. This includes a mask and gloves to protect the nose, mouth, and hands. Some wear goggles too to prevent any damage from mistakenly spraying in the wrong direction.
Next, you need to be aware of the safety hazards that the product can lead to. Some formulas are so concentrated and powerful that they can remove paint off oven walls. A good oven cleaner should be such that it cleans well without damaging the surfaces. Keep this in mind before choosing.
Application Time
Please remember to check how fast oven cleaners work in cleaning off messes. It might be different for products from different brands. Please do not wipe off the formula before time as then the marks will not be removed properly. You can also go around and work on cleaning other parts of the house while you wait.
Verdict
The best oven cleaner will never lead to marks or corrosion. Please check the description well to see if it can be used on the surfaces that are required. Since these are chemical cleaners, harsh fumes might damage surfaces that the items are not meant for.
So, cover any other surface around and only then use this spray. The cleaning process should not take long. You can also use other cleaning tricks available on the internet to get a clean home.
Now, before we wrap up, let us take you through our favorites. The Easy-Off is a very efficient option for tough grease stains.
On the other hand, the Zep Grill Cleaner is a restaurant-grade oven cleaner, which will leave your oven sparkling clean. The Grab Green smells good and is environmentally friendly. Let us know about your favorites in the comment section below.
I know how much you love DIY projects especially those that recycle old objects. In this article you are going to see some Outstanding Ways To Reuse Glass Bottles in some really functional and decorative ways, you are going to be surprised by the array of possibilities in which you can recycle the bottles. If you have plenty of them in your home, the ideas below will get your inspiration going!
If you miss decorative objects in your home, now you don't have to spend money on new ones cause you can simply make them on your own. Use black spray to update the look of the old bottles, and then decorate them according to your personal style.
Get the birds into your yard, by offering them food with this lovely DIY project. Now you can make a bird feeder in no time by recycling a glass bottle.
If you are a chandelier lover, I believe that this is the project that you will choose to make. The bottles will help you create a cozy ambiance in your home. What are you waiting for? Get down to work and reinterpret the design!
By using washi tape you can give the bottle a chic and cool look and they can easily be turned into vases. Decorate your own ones, and display your floral arrangements in a fantastic way.
Have you already found the DIY crafts that you are going to make and repurpose the glass bottles in your home and yard? If you are still having second thoughts, then scroll through the photos once again or cast a glance over these wine bottle crafts, these glass diy projects, or these methods to repurpose glass insulators; also make you learn how to cut a glass bottle!
The kitchen is known to be the heart of the home and that's why we should do our best to decorate it in the best possible way, after all, we know very well that the most delicious meals are cooked here and you are going to spend a great deal of your time in this room. We ought to decorate it in a cool, cozy atmosphere that fits us.
The modern kitchen designs that follow are really stunning and it's hard to pick a favorite reason for which today we will showcase black and wood kitchens only so we`ve curated ideas that are meant to boost your inspiration. Scroll down through the photos below and see the Outstanding Black and Wood Kitchens That Will Add Style To Your Home.
They are all-time favorites and I'm sure that you are going to like a handful from the first glance !
It doesn't matter what style wears the rest of your home, these designs are going to blend in with anything.
Even if the space for your kitchen is small, don't hesitate to go for a black and wood design. The strong contrast will emphasize an unique atmosphere that will distract the inhabitant from the room`s boundaries. It is recommended to keep the ceiling white to emphasize the feeling of space.
These designs will charm you as soon as you enter the room, the black color is so sophisticated and glamorous that it has the power to captivate your attention immediately.
If you are considering an unique design for your backsplash, we suggest you to go for a wooden one, beautifully paired with the counter top. You will create a great focal point in and continuity that sill further contrast with the black elements, a beautiful, dense balance.
The black and wood kitchens are currently a hot trend and lots of homeowners decide to incorporate them in their homes. Are you considering them as well? The photos that follow will help you to make a pick!
If you think there's too much black in these designs, feel free to add white elements here and there. They are going to fit in with the rest immediately through contrast and your kitchen space will seem larger, lighter, airier.
I'm totally in love with these designs and i have already picked the one that i'm going to recreate when i'm doing some renovation in my home, have you ?!
Black and wood look amazing in high gloss, don't they?
Here's another example where the white color is added in the combination, and we have to admit that the designer pulled off an extraordinary design, great depth and splendid balance !
Aren't these designs truly fascinating? How do you like them?
What do you think about the cool black and wood kitchen designs above? We would love to hear your thoughts in the comment section below!
Outdoor mats are a great way of improving the appearance of your home while also preventing the entry of dust and dirt.
Unlike indoor mats, purchasing mats for the outdoors requires more research as many additional factors need to be considered. For instance, outdoor mats must be tough and resistant to harsh weather conditions. At the same time, they need to ensure that dirt from shoes does not enter the house.
We understand that shopping for outdoor mats isn’t a fun task; most people do not have the time to go through a list of the best options available. That is why we bring you our curated selection to help you select the right product.
Not only that, but we have also included a buyer’s guide that will inform you of the factors you should consider while selecting a doormat. So, without further ado, let us dive right in!
Let us start with the Plus Haven Coco Coir Door Mat, which is made of 100% pure coconut coir, one of the most durable natural fibers. These fibers help the mat easily capture dirt, moisture, and other particles, thus preventing them from entering your home.
Attractive Design: The eco-friendly material has a...
Indoor and Outdoor: The rug is designed specifically for...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, this coconut coir mat is a heavy-duty mat that can withstand regular traffic without shedding. The 0.60" thick pile also ensures that there are no see-through patches.
This outdoor mat is an excellent option for those who wish to follow a sustainable lifestyle because the coconut coir is a renewable material produced by hand. Now you can keep your house clean, and your planet too.
Not only that, but the fibers of this doormat have excellent water-resistant capabilities, making it a great option if you live in an area that sees heavy rainfall. On that note, it can be very useful for preventing any wet marks — sunshine or rain.
Also, as far as maintenance is concerned, this outdoor doormat is also very easy to clean. You only need to vacuum it once in a while to keep it in good condition.
What Could've Been Better?
It was nearly impossible for us to find any downsides to this impressive doormat, which is excellent for outdoor and indoor use. However, we would like to point out that the dye used in this product is pretty strong and can even stain the area where the mat is placed.
We bring you the Ubdyo Extra Durable outdoor doormat, an excellent product for the holiday season. This Christmas-themed doormat comes with rubber stripes and artificial grass that provide an attractive appearance to the mat while preventing the entry of dust and water inside.
Super durable rubber stripes of our garage door mat in...
Non-slip rubber backing - use our floor mats for home as...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, we were very impressed by the design of this outdoor mat. Ubdyo has rightly named it a functional smart design as it offers an attractive appearance while effectively capturing dirt particles.
This durable doormat has been manufactured in such a way that it will last a long time, even if your home witnesses a regular stream of visitors. Besides that, the raised pattern ensures dirt from shoes is completely scraped off when a person steps on the mat.
Furthermore, cleaning the product is simple and only requires you to spray water on the outside of the rubber doormat and shake it off. Alternatively, you can simply vacuum this product or wash it with warm water.
You will also be glad to know that the rubber backing is leak-proof and provides a non-slip design. So, you can ensure that there are no accidents even when the floor is wet.
What Could've Been Better?
Once we tested this product, we found that this doormat is incredibly thin and can easily be rolled up like paper. And while it does not compromise durability, some customers may prefer a thicker doormat, especially outdoors.
DII is a brand that has been manufacturing high-end products for homes for over thirty years, offering quality items for a great experience. The CAMZ11552 is a classic example of just how good their products are. It offers a timeless design with excellent dirt capturing capabilities for both indoor and outdoor areas.
100-Percent Natural coconut coir fiber face provides the...
Why Did We Like It?
We came across the DII CAMZ11552 while searching for an indoor-outdoor doormat and are happy to say it did not disappoint. This versatile product can be used in several locations, such as patios, garages, porches, etc.
Constructed from coconut coir, this is one of the best outdoor doormats when it comes to sturdiness and durability.
At the same time, the fibers of this doormat also do an excellent job of keeping dirt and debris out. And thanks to their water-absorption quality, this outdoor doormat is ideal for areas with frequently wet weather.
Furthermore, if you love customizing the look and appearance of your home, this product is available in several different colors and designs. It is great for adding style and personality to your entryway.
The CAMZ11552 also comes with non-slip PVC backing that prevents slipping by keeping the mat in its place in all conditions.
What Could've Been Better?
We loved the DII CAMZ11552 for its versatility, durability, and multiple design options. Unfortunately, these excellent features come at a significantly higher price. Indeed, this doormat is one of the costlier options on the market and may not be an ideal choice for those with a tight budget.
The 8541848335 model from Gorilla Grip is one of the best options on the market for those who are looking for a low-profile door mat. It comes with a premium build, a 100% natural rubber border and backing, and a woven polypropylene fabric center for welcoming guests in style.
THE ORIGINAL WEATHERMAX ALL SEASON DOORMAT: Gorilla Grip's...
STAIN, WEATHER AND FADE RESISTANT: constructed to withstand...
Why Did We Like It?
The Gorilla Grip 8541848335 model is manufactured by Hills Point Industries LLC, a manufacturer dedicated to bringing customers household products at affordable prices.
At the same time, this premium product offers excellent value for money, superior construction, and an appealing design. It also features a beveled border that helps trap moisture, mud, and dirt, preventing them from creating unsightly tracks indoors.
This outdoor doormat is also available in a wide range of stylish patterns and colors, making it easy to find a product that matches your home's decor. Not only that, but the design is also flexible enough to allow you to place the mat in various locations, such as living spaces, lobbies, and even office spaces.
Other than that, the low-profile design of the 8541848335 model from Gorilla Grip makes it excellent for doors and entryways with a low clearing. That said, you can easily use it in areas that are unsuitable for thicker rugs.
What Could've Been Better?
The only flaw we noticed with this otherwise excellent product is its relatively strong rubber smell, which emanates from the rubber backing and beveled borders. However, the smell tends to fade away with use and will completely disappear after a few weeks.
Outdoor doormats are not only meant to prevent dirt and grime from tracking into your home but are also one of the first objects guests come across while visiting. They can help create the right kind of impression, which is why the Barnyard Designs Welcome Doormat is a great choice.
Many of you must have heard of Barnyard Designs. It is a brand that focuses on designing and developing home decor products that make life easier and more comfortable. The Welcome Doormat from the brand offers an excellent way to greet guests while also making a bold statement.
One of the things that we liked most about this front door mat was the size. The Welcome Mat is one of the largest outdoor doormats that we could find on the market, which is great for capturing dirt and debris from a wide area.
This front door mat comes with a non-slip rubber back and is completely waterproof and weather-resistant. Not only can you use it in different weather conditions, but you can also clean it easily by washing it with a garden hose.
Another thing to mention is the excellent durability, which is why this doormat will last for several years.
What Could've Been Better?
This Welcome Door Mat from Barnyard Designs offers a delightful experience, making it difficult for us to find any significant drawbacks. If we had to nitpick, we’d say that this welcome mat does not come with a finished edge, so you will need to place a rug underneath it for a better grip.
Moving on to the next product on the list, we bring you the BeneathYourFeet outdoor doormat, one of the highest-rated products on the market. It is a multipurpose door mat that comes loaded with several exciting features that will be incredibly useful for your home.
Charming Mats For Your Home: our outdoor mat is made of...
Traps Dirt Well: the concave word and convex border helps...
Why Did We Like It?
There are many reasons why we decided to include this product on our list, the first of which is the excellent construction. The BeneathYourFeet mat is made of premium PVC material, making it one of the most durable products in this segment. Even with heavy use, you won't be needing a replacement anytime soon.
Furthermore, the concave embossed word and the convex border work flawlessly for trapping dirt and mud from shoes and feet of pets. We tested out the product and were delighted to see that it could even trap snow as well, making it suitable for all weather conditions..
The manufacturer has also made it very easy to clean the mat. The simplest way is to shake the mat outside, and the debris will fall off. Otherwise, you can also use a broom to sweep away the particles or use a vacuum cleaner.
What Could've Been Better?
While testing out the mat, we discovered that the non slip backing works very well on dry surfaces to prevent slipping. However, the manufacturer advises using the mat only on dry surfaces as the backing is not very effective. Water under the rug can cause slippage.
A steadily increasing number of manufacturers are now offering products that meet sustainable standards, as demand for them is multiplying. Sierra Concepts is one such brand, and its SC105, made of eco-friendly material, is one of the finest outdoor doormats that you can buy right now.
Includes 2 Indoor Outdoor Floor Mats: Enjoy two amazing...
Durable, Safe & Easy Maintenance: Cleaning and maintaining...
Why Did We Like It?
The Sierra Concepts SC105 is the perfect option if you are looking for the best value for money option on the market. It includes two indoor outdoor floor mats in a set, helping you save money without compromising on the product quality.
The mats are available in a large size and are made of high-quality polyester and recycled PVC materials. These recycled materials provide additional sturdiness to the mat while also preventing moisture leaks.
Additionally, the PVC material provides a non-slip backing to the mat, which reduces the chances of slipping by keeping the mat in place.
Moreover, these outdoor doormats have a ribbed surface ideal for scraping dirt and mud off dirty boots and feet. As mentioned earlier, the SC105 is an indoor outdoor welcome mat and can withstand different weather conditions reasonably well.
Additionally, there are multiple color options available for use with different types of decor.
What Could've Been Better?
These heavy-duty mats are undoubtedly one of the best ones we tested while compiling this review. The only concern was that they were prone to slipping if water got underneath. It is recommended not to keep them on surfaces where water can go under the mats.
We are nearing the end of our list, so it is time to introduce you to the MontVoo Front Door Mats. MontVoo is well known for its range of home and kitchen products. This welcome mat is another excellent product from the brand, offering premium quality with exceptional performance.
Water Absorbent&Dirt Trapper: Terry polyester surface with...
Natural Rubber Backing: Crafted with a textured heavy-duty...
Why Did We Like It?
MontVoo is one of the newer entrants in the home products industry and is rapidly making a name for itself through its extremely high-quality home products. This doormat from the brand is one of the best ones we came across, suitable for heavy-duty use and offering multipurpose functionality.
It comes with a non-slip rubber backing, which helps it stay in its place on all types of floors. We tested the mat on marble, concrete, and even wood and were impressed with the results. Additionally, the A-class absorbent polypropylene surface that absorbs moisture from shoes and feet.
Since the mat is highly resistant to weather and seasonal changes, you can also use it in several types of different locations. Besides performing well in rainy weather, we also found that it does not fade even when exposed to direct sunlight for prolonged periods.
What Could've Been Better?
There is hardly any drawback worth mentioning about this product, which offers the perfect combination of durability and versatility. The only thing we wished was there were more attractive designs and colors to select from. The available patterns are somewhat limited compared to what the competition is offering.
The Chichic Entrance Door Mat is the final product on our list, but don't let that fool you. This fantastic product has a high-quality construction that ensures long lasting durability and impressive performance. The unique fabric also provides it with an attractive design, so you can impress visitors easily.
Material and Unique Design: Made of sturdy rubber; flocked...
Why Did We Like It?
Starting with the design, the Chichic Entrance Door Mat comes with a flocked fiber surface that helps provide it with a beautiful appearance. Not only that, but the fabric is very effective in trapping dirt due to the patterned grooves.
You can place this mat near the front door, back door, porch, and other similar areas, and it will stay in its place due to the excellent rubber grip backing. The chances of anyone slipping due to this mat are extremely slim.
This durable doormat is also available in different sizes suitable for various types of locations. One thing that we liked most about this mat is that maintenance is effortless. It can be easily cleaned by either sweeping, vacuuming, or washing it with a garden hose.
Furthermore, the firmly stitched edges provide it with an elegant look while ensuring additional durability.
What Could've Been Better?
This mat is one of the costlier options currently available on the market. Those who are willing to spend that much can get an excellent product with superb features. However, if you think the price is too much, it would be better to look for more affordable alternatives.
Pros
Beautiful design
It can be used in many different areas
Sturdy construction
Suitable for heavy usage
Cons
Costly
Outdoor Doormat Buying Guide
We have listed the best outside doormats that are available on the market. To make your task even simpler, we also include a buyer's guide. This guide lists all the critical factors that should be considered before making a final decision. Read on to learn more about these factors.
1. Build Material
One of the primary considerations when purchasing an outdoor doormat is the type of materials that it is made up of. Manufacturers use different materials, such as polyester, coir, recycled, etc. Each material comes with different advantages and disadvantages.
For instance, polyester is easy to clean and slip-resistant, while coir offers a more natural look and is environment-friendly. On the other hand, recycled rubber is non-porous and long-lasting.
2. Shape And Size
Outdoor mats are also available in different shapes and sizes, even unique ones like round, oval, semicircle, etc. Since mats are meant to be used in various locations, the numerous options make selection easier.
It is recommended to select that mat size that can fit comfortably in the required space while ensuring proper coverage and protection. The shape can be selected based on personal preference, looking at what might be most suitable for the existing decor.
3. Surface Of Doormats
The surface of the doormat not only determines how the mat looks but also how effective it is for capturing dirt and grime. For instance, ribbed textures are highly efficient in capturing mud particles and help the mat stay in place. Different mat surfaces can be used with various types of decor.
Verdict
Outdoor mats are the perfect solution for preventing dirt from tracking into your home while also adding to your home decor. We hope you found our review-based guide helpful in selecting the right product to keep your indoors clean and outdoors more beautiful.
Before you go, check out our favorite products from the list. Firstly, the Plus Haven Coco Coir Door Mat is our overall favorite as it is suitable for heavy-duty use and is a sustainable option.
And if you are looking for a versatile and low-maintenance option, then the Ubdyo Extra Durable outdoor doormat might be more appropriate. Finally, DII is an excellent choice for those who want multiple color options and a sturdy build.
With that, it is time for us to sign off. Until next time!
Traditional orbital sanders do their jobs remarkably well but generate massive amounts of debris and dust during the sanding process.
And continuous exposure to wood dust and debris may affect your health. You may experience skin and/or eye irritation, asthma, allergy, reduced lung function, and even nasal cancer.
This is why you must have a power tool for doing your renovationor sanding project. Interestingly enough, jobs like cleaning dirt, varnishing, removing old paint, and many others can be done easily using a sander. However, the real issue lies in finding the perfect one for your needs.
We understand that finding the best sander can be a difficult task, as the market is filled with numerous options. But fortunately, we have done our research and prepared an exclusive list of the five best orbital sanders available on the market.
Without talking much, let’s dig in!
Listed below are the Best Orbital Sanders With Vacuum Attachment:
DeWalt: The DeWalt DEW6423K compact power tool excels in dust collection. Lacks a customizable adapter for dust collection process enhancement.
Makita: The Makita BO5030K is well-suited for prolonged tasks with its ergonomic design and added handle. Higher cost and weight may be noted.
Black & Decker: The Black & Decker BDERO100 is an affordable compact sander ideal for occasional use. Struggles with speed control due to a fixed speed system.
Milwaukee: The Milwaukee Electric Tools 2648-20 M18 boasts flexible and user-friendly pad-changing features. Regular maintenance may be required for the hook and loop system.
Bosch: The BOSCH ROS20VSC Excellently sands curved surfaces and offers micro-dust filtering. Notable for a lengthy filter cleaning process.
Here's the list of the 5 Best Orbital Sander With Vacuum Attachment for cleaner and healthier sanding projects.
1. DeWalt
An industrial tool company, DeWalt is an American-based worldwide manufacturer of hand tools and power tools for manufacturing, construction, and woodworking industries, as well as for DIY projects. Being operational for nearly 100 years, they have delivered quality and innovative solutions to their customers. Similarly, the DEW6423K is a heavy-duty yet powerful orbital sander that delivers exceptional performance.
This petite, Dewalt random orbit sander is regarded as one of the most powerful units. Now, you may look for a bulky and heavy-duty sander thinking it’d be powerful, but having a smaller one will help you in sanding small and tight corners.
Small-sized sanders are more liable to produce wood dust, chippings, and other debris while sanding, and this increases the chances of them entering your eyes and lungs. However, this model comes with a dust collector bag that collects these particles efficiently. Additionally, its locking mechanism allows you to attach the vacuum hose while working with the sander.
Not only that, but it can also operate in the 8,000-12,000 OPM range, allowing you to speed up your cleaning process.
Besides, the rubber cover on the switch makes for a comfortable and soft grip top while protecting the sander from dust. Hence, this tool ensures a faster yet more efficient sanding process.
It was almost impossible for us to find any drawbacks of this small yet powerful orbital sander. However, we would like to point out that this tool does not include an adapter to allow you to customize your dust collection process. Other than that, it is hands down one of the best sanders on the market.
What We Like
Compact, lightweight, and efficient
Excellent dust collecting system
Rubber cover makes a stronger grip
Low vibration
What We Don't Like
Doesn’t have an adapter for customizing the dust collection process
Power Source: Electricity | Dimensions: 10.38 x 7.25 x 6.2 inches | Weight: 3.94 pounds | Amperage: 3A | Speed: 12,000 OPM
2. Makita
Makita designs and develops some of the best and most highly-rated professional and industrial products for its clients worldwide. The BO5030K is a classical, and heavy-duty tool from Makita suited well for complex and lengthy jobs like sanding hardwood floors.
If you plan to start a lengthy and challenging sanding project, the Makita BO5030K will come in handy. Its ergonomic design and rubberized grips ensure a stress-free working experience even when you’re working for more extended periods.
It's a common saying that the more the merrier. Likewise, this sander comes with an extra handle for added support and control when sanding small and tight spaces.
Other than comfort, its powerful 3-amp motor with ⅛-inch output ensures speed is never a concern for you. Also, it has different speed settings from 4,000 to 12,000 OPM, which suits different user requirements.
Last but not least, the package includes a vacuum-port adapter and dirt-collecting bag that allow for easy customization according to their sanding needs.
This heavy-duty orbit sander can be a tad expensive for some users. However, its durability and long-lasting guarantee ensure your investments do not go to waste. Other than that, some might find it heavy to handle and difficult to operate.
What We Like
Long, comfortable, and easygoing handle
Two-finger trigger for better efficiency
Has a variable speed control system
Swirl-free finish
Rubber grip
What We Don't Like
Might be too heavy
A bit too expensive
Power Source: Electricity | Dimensions: 15 x 7 x 10 inches | Weight: 2.87 pounds | Amperage: 3A | Speed: 12,000 OPM
3.Black & Decker
For over a century, Black + Decker has been delivering innovative solutions to its customers worldwide. Their vast product portfolio and quality customer service have enabled them to gain a top position in the industry.
Some people might look for budget sanders for occasional use, and this is where the Black + Decker BDERO100 comes in. So, without further ado, let’s get into the details.
Are you looking for a quality orbital sander that is small, powerful, yet budget-friendly for performing your complicated sanding tasks? Look no further, as this tool by Black + Decker is perfectly tailored for your needs.
This model is another innovative and durable option that is one of the best available on the market. With a powerful 2-amp motor and 12,000 OPM capacity, carrying simple tasks will be hassle-free.
It also comes with a vacuum attachment with a dust collector switch, ensuring no dust or debris enters your body.
In terms of usage, a comfortable, rubberized handle allows you to get a firm grip and perform your task quickly and seamlessly. Plus, its compact design and lightweight ensure a swirl-free finish, even on curved surfaces.
The only flaw with this otherwise quality product is the absence of a speed control system, which means the speed is stuck at 12,000 OPM. But rest assured, you will be able to perform your simple household task without any hassle.
What We Like
Lightweight tool
Compact design ensures a smooth finish
Dust-sealed switch
Reasonable price
What We Don't Like
Fixed speed
Power Source: Electricity | Dimensions: 7 x 5 x 6 inches | Weight: 3.16 pounds | Amperage: 2A | Speed: 12,000 OPM
4. Milwaukee
The next entry on our list is a powerful yet lightweight orbital sander by Milwaukee. Whether you’re looking for multiple speed settings, an attached universal vacuum hose, or an efficient dust cleaning, it's got all covered. Besides, the rubber top and ergonomic design deliver a comfortable working experience to a user.
This random orbit sander is integrated with a 3-amp variable-speed motor and lightweight design. This efficient, versatile, and flexible tool will come in handy in most situations.
In terms of functionality, its adjustable speed feature becomes a crucial feature for multitasking, and you can also choose between 7,000 and 12,000 OPM. A one-finger on/off switch is added to the unit, making its operation much more effortless.
One thing that sets it apart from its peers is that it allows both loop and hook along with the PSA system to change the rubberized pad. Its convenient and lightweight design does not tire out your hands even after working for a long time.
Last but not least, it comes with a combination of filter and dust canister along with an attached universal vacuum hose, which means cleaning up post-work won’t be an issue.
After testing the product, we found that the loop and hook require regular cleaning. Also, the price might come as a burden for many. However, going by the design and the features it offers, spending those extra bucks is entirely justified.
What We Like
Easy pad changing
Variable speed control option
High speed motor
Excellent ergonomic design
What We Don't Like
Hook and loop requires regular maintenance
Power Source: Battery | Dimensions: 6 x 11 x 7 inches | Weight: 2 pounds | Amperage: 3A | Speed: 12,000 OPM
5. Bosch
Bosch is a manufacturer of unique solutions, and with its umbrella of brands, it intends to make people’s lives better in any way possible. Regardless of the surface, the random orbit sander from Bosch will provide you with the best solutions. This powerful tool is suitable for both polishing and sanding, even on curved surfaces.
Bosch has outperformed expectations with its premium and high-quality sander. Its 2.5-amp motor with vacuum attachment can attain up to 12,000 OPM. Added to it, its ergonomic design with rubber hose ensures comfortable design and that you are completing your tasks hassle-free.
Most of the sanders available market has one primary issue: their inability to work on curved areas. Fortunately, the Bosch sander is integrated with a disc attachment mechanism, ensuring its impeccable performance on curved and plain surfaces.
Its padding is rubber, which provides a firm grip and makes sanding in corners much easier. Moreover, it is a top-class dust collecting system. Using this tool will enhance dust cleaning efficiency and make the process hassle-free.
Lastly, you also wouldn’t need to purchase a separate adapter to attach vacuum with this one.
The random orbital sander by Bosch is laid with impeccable and exciting features, which makes it the best in business. However, the sole flaw we found in this unit is that it takes a considerable amount of time to clean the filter.
What We Like
Smooth finish
Unique filtering system filters microdust particles
Excellent swirl marks removal
Easy sanding discs attachment system
What We Don't Like
Takes a long time to clean the filter
Power Source: Electricity | Dimensions: 9 x 5 x 6 inches | Weight: 3.5 pounds | Amperage: 2.5A | Speed: 12,000 OPM
What Is the Best Orbital Sander With Vacuum Attachment?
The selection of the most suitable orbital sander with a vacuum attachment can be made easier by comparing critical parameters. These parameters include the type of power source, the physical dimensions of the sander as measured in inches (length x width x height), the overall weight indicated in pounds, the electrical current used (Amperage), and its operating speed specified in Orbits Per Minute (OPM).
Buying Guide For The Best Orbital Sander With Vacuum Attachment
Now that we have provided a list and a comprehensive review of the best random orbital sander with vacuum attachment, it might have given you some idea about picking the right one. But let’s dig deep into the aspects to be considered before purchasing an ideal orbital sander.
We have prepared a comprehensive buyer’s guide to help with the process. So, continue reading.
Speed
The first aspect you need to look at is the speed of an orbital sander. Two types of speed options are present in products currently available on the market, variable or fixed. In variable speed sanders, speed ranges from 4,000 to 10,000 OPM.
Fixed speed sanders, on the other hand, are inexpensive than variable-speed ones but their range is fixed. You wouldn’t be able to perform versatile tasks using these.
Moreover, you need to be aware of its speed and usage using a fixed-speed sander. These sanders are generally available in 12,000 OPM, which lets you perform only a particular set of tasks.
Interestingly, a 4,000-6,000 OPM sander is suitable for working with or polishing soft materials, whereas 6,000-12,000 OPM sanders are for a good finish. So, it will depend purely on your choice. But, we suggest you go for variable-speed ones if you have an adequate budget.
Power
Motor power is another crucial aspect if one opts for a quality electric orbital sander attached to the vacuum. Simply put, a powerful motor power ensures better performance.
Sanding speed is directly controlled by motor power, and therefore if you want to complete your work efficiently and effortlessly, a powerful motor will be most suitable. Usually, the sanders available on the market have their power in a range from 2 to 5 amps, and the more the merrier.
Dust Collection
When it comes to choosing the best orbital sanders with vacuum attachments, you must consider the dust-collecting ability as well as the mechanism that is used. Sanders available on the market come either with a plastic see-through canister or cloth bag.
Choose one according to your preference but importantly, the focus must be on how quickly and effectively the vacuum can suck up dust. Some products come with an attached dust canister, such that no dust remains uncollected.
Vibration And Noise
Vibration and noise do not determine how effective and better a sander is. This is why some of the top companies are offering vibration control features in their units. Vibrations can affect the quality of polishing of the finished project. Even if your sander does not have one, a simple rubber grip can help solve the problem.
Usually, most random orbital sanders working above a speed of 14,000 OPM produce greater noise and vibrations. But if you want a regular model, just look at its product details.
Weight
Orbital sanders are available in different weights and you will need to select one according to its use. For example, if you are going to use it on a daily basis, lightweight sanders are a no-brainer.
On the other hand, heavy-duty random orbital sanders are mostly used for industrial purposes, so you can just have an easygoing sander for your use. Just make sure, it presents all-sufficient features.
Cord Length And Grip
Similar to the above criteria, if you are looking for a sander to use daily, it must have extra handles and a soft grip for better control. Just holding the handle will give you an idea of the grip it will provide. Also, make sure that grip helps reduce vibration as much as possible. Apart from the grip, you also need to get an idea of its cord length, unless you opt for a cordless one.
Random orbital sanders with long cords are always preferred during sanding, as they don’t need a separate extension cord. An ideal cord length stays between 9-12 feet and anything more or less can be an issue.
Apart from that, some units also feature extra handles for added palm grip to allow easy one-hand maneuverability. In case you have to do a lot of sanding, go for a unit with a two-handle grip for seamless operation.
We hope by now, you have developed a clear idea about top-notch orbital sanders. As it primarily depends on how you use it, we leave you to select the best one.
Before signing off, we'd like to share some of our preferences. So, if you are looking for a heavy-duty and long-lasting unit, the Dewalt random orbital sander will be an ideal choice for you. Its small size and high power make it a suitable choice for someone who wants a long-lasting product for regular use.
On the other hand, if you are looking for a powerful, easy-to-use yet budget-friendly unit for occasional use, take a look at the BDERO100 model by Black + Decker. Its compact design and powerful 2-amp motor ensure you carve your wood efficiently.
Now, it's time we leave the choice to you. Hopefully, you find a perfect match and when you do, let us know about it. But do not forget to wear a dust mask before starting the work. Signing off with best wishes!
Are you a woodworking enthusiast confused between buying an orbital and palm sander? Well, you’ve come to the right place!
Whether you are a seasoned professional or someone just starting out in the woodworking game, a sander is an essential tool to own. It not only helps you shape wood but also enables you to remove leftover paint and varnish to create a smooth and paintable surface.
Although sanding is a process that can very well be achieved with sandpaper and a little manpower, it is not always the ideal way to do it. Most experienced woodworkers will always prefer owning a sanding tool to sanding by hand, especially when working on larger projects.
This is chiefly because sanding by hand can be very tiresome, especially since it requires you to exert a large amount of force continuously. Hence, in this context, sanders come in particularly handy because they drastically reduce the exertion required while providing a more professional finish to the process.
Orbital Sander Vs Palm Sander
There are many different types of sanders available on the market, such as disc, belt, drum, oscillating spindle sanders, etc. But the two variants that we will primarily be focusing on today are the commonly used orbital and palm sanders.
Both these power tools are almost equally efficacious and popular amongst professionals and DIY enthusiasts alike. So, how do you figure out which is the better tool to invest in? Well, that’s what we’re here to help you figure out.
While both tools are essentially handheld sanders, they differ in how they are structured and function. Hence, to make this choice a little simpler for you, we have compiled this guide detailing the important features and differences between the two.
First off, we will start by providing you with one-to-one introductions and details regarding both types of sanders. After that, we will discuss the critical differences between them to help you understand the features that set them apart. So, without any further ado, let’s jump right into it, shall we?
More runtime and capacity over standard units delivered by...
The cordless impact driver has an optimized application...
An orbital sander is a tool that works by spinning small sanding plates in circles (also known as orbits) against wooden surfaces. They are substantially sized and ideal for sanding and finishing large wooden projects.
Now, there are mainly three kinds of orbital sanders available on the market: standard, random, and finishing orbital sanders. The standard orbital sander is built with square-shaped pads and enables users to sand difficult-to-reach edges and tight corners with particular ease.
On the other hand, the random orbital sander has round pads that facilitate a separate sanding process, leaving zero marks behind after usage. And finally, the finishing sander is smaller or compact in nature and is meant specifically for sanding tricky edges and corners.
The first classification of sander discussed above is what people usually refer to when they speak of “orbital sanders”. This type can be further classified into subcategories differentiated according to the size and shape of their sanding pad. The two most popular ones are quarter-sheet orbital sander and half sheet orbital sander.
While the first variant can be fitted with a quarter sheet of sandpaper, the second is supposed to be equipped with half a sheet of sandpaper. Moreover, the former provides users the chance to get four usable pieces out of one sheet of sandpaper. And the latter only provides two usable pieces. Hence, the main difference between them is the size and not the device’s functionality.
These sandpaper sheets are usually attached to the sander with a spring or metal clamp system that holds the paper against the sanding pad. Both these sanders move in the same tight orbital motion and hence facilitate faster sanding and material removal.
Features
Power And Speed
Amps usually measure the power of any device. However, to measure the power of an orbital sander, one also needs to look out for its ‘orbits per minute’. This measurement represents how fast the sander rotates; the standard rate is around 10,000 orbits per minute.
The higher orbits per minute automatically signify a higher speed of the device, which is perfect for sanding large wooden projects in a short period. However, the fast pace of the sander offers less control and may lead to more sand marks being left behind on the surface of the finished wood.
A few orbital sander models come with speed customizations that can be handy when you require more control while sanding a tricky area. In contrast, a faster-paced sander will always facilitate faster sanding and project completion. Hence, when considering a unit, buying one with speed customizations is always a better option.
That being said, a drawback of this sanding tool is that it is not powerful enough to remove wood material and shape surfaces effectively. Hence, this is a good option to consider when you want to actively avoid sanding too much wood from the project while you’re at work.
Handles And Grip
There are quite a few varieties of handles and grips available for orbital sanders. The Pistol-grip, for example, is considered the most preferred option by professionals. It requires you to use both hands simultaneously, where one is used to direct while the other is used to apply pressure.
Other than that, there are the unusually structured jug-grip handles. This kind is usually better suited for projects where you might need to reach under a wooden piece to sand it. Finally, we have the most common handle, also known as palm grip handles. These are the most lightweight options equipped with a comfortable grip that makes them easy to use.
Sandpaper
Orbital sanders are very versatile when it comes to the installation of sandpaper. They support both Velcro as well as peel-and-stick design applications that make attaching sandpaper extremely easy.
Additionally, you don’t need to buy any special kind of sandpaper for this particular sanding tool because it already supports all the standard types of sandpaper. Hence, you can use pretty much any sandpaper you get for operating this device.
Corded/Cordless
They are available in both corded and cordless variants. The choice between the two kinds usually depends entirely on the user. Some people prefer the cordless type to eliminate the disturbance of the cord getting in the way of their work. However, one letdown of this variant is that you will need to charge the batteries regularly between usages.
Alternatively, although a little trickier to maneuver, the corded sander is usually much more powerful than its cordless counterpart. It further requires no charging intervals and hence can be used for sanding multiple projects for extended periods of time.
Dust Collection Mechanism
The formation of dust is a natural outcome of sanding any wooden surface. Therefore, sanding with a device as fast as the orbital sander can create a lot more dust than people can handle. Hence, most models of this equipment come equipped with relatively robust and dynamic in-built dust collection mechanisms.
The dust collection system is usually either passive or vacuum powered. A passive dust collection mechanism usually involves attaching a dust collecting bag to the regular vacuum hose to aid dust removal. Alternatively, a vacuum-powered mechanism works by automatically sucking up the dust while you’re operating the device.
What Can You Use It For?
An Orbital sander is a sturdy piece of equipment that works best with big expansive projects. The larger the project, the better performance this device will deliver. Furthermore, its ability to reach tricky corners and grooves makes it ideal for finishing projects like wooden staircases.
If that wasn’t enough, this sander is also excellent at stripping off the remaining paint or varnish from a project. So, other than stairs, it also works remarkably well on second-hand furniture you plan to redo or other similar projects.
What To Look Out For?
As we mentioned earlier, the term “orbital sander” in this article automatically refers to the standard orbital sander specifically. It is, however, common for newbies in the woodworking game to get confused between the standard and random orbital sander because of their similar structure. Hence, we wanted to make sure you understand the difference between these two types before moving on.
The round-shaped sanding pads of the random orbital sander make it functionally entirely different from its standard counterpart. While the former provides a cleaner finish with no sanding marks after use, they cannot sand deeper corners and edges as effectively as the latter. This device is also constructed with varying speed customizations that enable users to pick a particular speed for their project in hand.
Alternatively, the square-shaped standard orbital sanders do not have any such additional features and speed customizations. The speed of this device is set at a constant high speed that facilitates quick and efficient project completion. However, it also tends to leave behind sanding marks on the wooden surface, which the former does not.
Pros
Has high speed thereby covers large projects fast
Square shape allows it to fit into project corners seamlessly
Works effectively in tricky and tight spaces
Cons
Leaves sanding marks behind sometimes
Not capable of shaping wooden projects effectively
SMOOTH FINISH: pad dampening system designed to eliminate...
EASY DISC ATTACHMENT: through Bosch's signature Hook and...
Palm sander, also commonly known as sheet sander, is a small and compact power tool used to shape and finish woodworking projects. It derives its name from the compressed structure and size of the device that easily fits in the palm of your hand.
This power tool provides a smooth and subtle finish on wood and is ideal for projects that you don’t plan on painting. Hence, this is a rather popular tool in carpentry workshops that build furniture with the original wooden finish. It’s a versatile piece of equipment that can be used on a variety of projects depending on the kind of sandpaper that you choose to utilize.
Much like the orbital sander we discussed above, this one also has a square or rectangular sanding pad. This particular shape enables the sander to reach corners and other tricky spaces with relative ease.
Furthermore, all palm sanders are available in two standard sizes: quarter sheet and half sheet. The first is operated with a quarter sheet of sandpaper and provides four workable pieces from one sheet. The second operates using half sheets of sandpaper and hence only provides two workable pieces from a sheet.
When it comes to the motion of this sander, it has a circular and patterned back and forth movement. It oscillates and vibrates in the user’s hand at a low speed giving you more control over its general direction. Additionally, this device is very affordable, making it quite ideal for novice woodworking enthusiasts to invest in.
However, one of the drawbacks of this machine is that it does not have a very effective dust collection mechanism. Although constructed to minimize the formation of dust, most models are unable to eliminate the dust entirely.
Features
Power And Speed
palm sanders are comparatively gentle tools that run on an average power of 2.0 amps. Most models of this sander thereby have a motor ranging between 2-3 amps that are great for a versatile set of projects. Purchasing a tool with more than 3 amps of power consumption is essentially a waste of money because this device works optimally in low-power settings.
When it comes to speed, a palm sander has no customizable variations provided. It functions at a relatively low constant speed that naturally consumes less power. However, this low speed usually lengthens the process of finishing a project. Hence, it is not considered very ideal for shaping or finishing substantially big wooden projects.
Handles And Grip
palm sanders are constructed with a lightweight and compact body that is easy to maneuver and control. Hence, they do not require a variety of handles on them to operate with ease.
Some models, however, come equipped with a comfort-grip handle that makes it more comfortable for users to hold on to. And, as we all know, handles are integral in providing users with a safe and enjoyable operation experience.
Sandpaper
This sanding power tool is compatible with all kinds of regular sandpaper, making it as wonderful and hassle-free to operate as its counterpart. Standard sandpaper is also really affordable and thereby makes the sanding process rather budget-friendly.
However, one thing to note regarding the palm sander is that it consumes a lot of sandpaper during operation. Equipped with hook and loop fasteners, this piece of equipment operates while continuously feeding on sheets of sandpaper.
Hence, you’re required to constantly feed the sandpaper into the machine as you work. This thereby substantially increases paper consumption, forcing you to invest in more sandpaper in the long run, which can be draining for the pockets.
Corded/Cordless Machine
palm sanders are also available in both corded and cordless formats. The cordless devices are all battery operated and thereby optimize the maneuverability of the machine. Apart from that, most cordless sanders use batteries that can be interchangeably used with other power tools. This will enable you to use the same battery for multiple power tools, which can come in very handy.
One way to ensure that your tools function on the same battery is by buying products from the same company. For example, if all your power tools are from the company DeWalt, then the chances are that they are compatible with the same kind of battery as well.
Now, purchasing a battery-operated sander also implies that you will need to recharge and change the battery between uses. However, since the palm sander does not consume that much power, it usually runs on a single set of batteries for much longer.
Dust Collection Mechanism
The dust collection system of a palm sander isn’t as robust or effective as we would like it to be. This is, in fact, one of the main drawbacks of this particular variant of sanding tool.
In most cases, you will need to fit your sander with a separately purchased dust bag. These bags are freely available on the market; however, it is vital to look through user reviews to ensure it has reliable sealing technology.
A handful of palm sanders also come equipped with vacuum-based dust collection mechanisms. However, these models tend to be more expensive than their standard counterparts. We additionally recommend looking for a sander model with pre-sealed filters and switches meant to protect the device from the dust it creates.
What Can You Use It For?
A palm sander is an ideal investment for people who either don’t see themselves using sanders very often or only require them for small projects. The flexibility and versatility of the product enable you to use it on a variety of DIY projects. Hence, it’s also a great choice for woodworking hobbyists who require portable, compact, and lightweight tools that are both easy to store and budget-friendly.
The small size of this sander enhances the overall precision provided by it. Hence, it doesn’t leave any sanding marks on the surface being finished and it’s also good at removing material and shaping wood effectively. This property makes them the perfect tool to sand down a previously treated or painted project.
Furthermore, the sander is the ideal tool to purchase when working on projects that won’t be painted or refinished after sanding. This includes certain types of furniture that are meant to maintain their original wooden finish.
Pros
Lightweight and compact structure
Compatible with standard or regular sandpaper
Budget-friendly price tag
Does not leave sanding marks after usage with practice
Cons
Consumes a significant amount of sandpaper
Not ideal for larger projects
Not equipped with a very robust dust collection mechanism
Differences Between Orbital Sander And Palm Sander
Now that we’ve given you a comprehensive idea regarding how each sander functions, we can highlight the most significant differences between them. This comparison will provide a clear picture and help you ascertain which sander is the better option for investment.
Shape And Size
As we discussed earlier, orbital sanders are square in shape and much more heavy-duty in size as compared to a palm sander. Alternatively, the latter is usually rectangular in shape and is more lightweight and compact in comparison. Both are equally good at sanding and finishing difficult-to-reach or inaccessible corners because of their four-sided sanding pad.
Furthermore, the orbital sander is usually preferred by seasonal professionals and workers in the woodworking industry. However, the substantial size of this machine makes it less than ideal for home-based woodworkers to invest in.
In this context, the palm sander becomes a good alternative for DIY enthusiasts to invest in. These are not only lightweight and easy to carry, but they are also effortless to store in cramped or limited woodworking stations and other spaces.
Sanding Motion
The sanding motion of a palm sander is a back and forth movement paired with a circular pattern movement. Compared to this, the orbital sander has tight circular and elliptical motions that help it clean and shape the surface faster. The distinct way each of these sanding power tools moves has a huge influence on its functionality, and hence is a significant difference to note between them.
The fast motion of the orbital sander, while allowing it to cover more surface area in a long time, also gives it a more unpolished finish. The high speed also makes it difficult to maneuver the machine in the direction that you want it.
Speed Of The Sander
As we previously established, the orbital sander has a more tight orbital motion that leads to a comparatively fast-paced movement. The average orbital sander makes about 10,000 orbits a minute, which, as you can probably tell, is impressively high.
When compared to the above, the palm sander is a relatively gentler and slower device. The slow speed lends it higher precision but also makes it time taking and exhausting to sand large surfaces.
Project Specifications
The sizable and heavy-duty construction of the orbital sander along with its enhanced orbiting speed, make it ideal to sand large projects. Other than that, the square or rectangular-shaped sanding pad gives you access to difficult-to-reach corners and flat edges.
As compared to this, the palm sander is only recommended to be used for small to medium-sized projects. It is, however, equally good at sanding inconveniently placed nooks and crannies of a project
Furthermore, since the orbital sander leaves swirly sand marks on the surface, you should only use it on projects that will be repainted or refinished. Otherwise, the scars left behind may give an unprofessional look to the project. Compared to this, palm sanders provide beautiful and smooth finishes on most surfaces. Hence this is the ideal device to provide the final finish or a wooden project.
Sanding Finish
As we mentioned earlier, the lower speed and gentler motion of the palm sander gave it precision that is unmatched by its orbiting counterpart. This precision further enables the device to provide a more subtle, fine, and smooth finish on a variety of different surfaces.
Furthermore, it has the ability to leave no swirly sanding marks on the surface, as long as it’s used right. However, it might take some practice before you can create completely flawlessly sanded surfaces. Additionally, this sander has really good shaping and removing capabilities and is ideal for removing old paint and varnish from surfaces.
On the other hand, the orbital sander, while being high speed, tends to leave a lot of swirly textures behind. This is an even more common phenomenon when used the wrong way.
Hence, during operation, it is crucial to sand in the grain direction of the given piece of wood. If users are not cautious about this, it will end up leaving some really stark cross-grain scratches on the surface that are difficult to remove later.
Furthermore, although this device can cover a large surface area easily, its enhanced speed disables it from doing so with precision. Hence, this is not the product you’re looking for if you’re planning to attempt pre-painted surfaces. Similarly, this device is also not very effective in removing material and shaping surfaces when compared to its counterpart.
Price Points And Features
The price of a palm sander is decidedly lower than that of an orbital sander. This can be attributed to a variety of reasons, however, there are only two main ones. Firstly, the orbital sander is markedly bigger than the former and secondly, it comes equipped with a lot more adjustable features and mechanisms. This includes its innovative and robust dust collecting mechanism as well as its customizable speed options.
What’s more, this sander also comes with a variety of different handle options. Some models of this device come equipped with a jug-grip handle that is specifically designed to enable inversion. This process gives you access to sand the underside of any given project. This feature is exclusively available in orbital sanders. However, not all orbital sanders are equipped with the jug-grip handle and hence are capable of performing it.
The palm sander, compared to this, is structured rather simplistically and lacks most of the inbuilt mechanisms of its counterparts. While certain models may have a dust collecting mechanism installed within themselves, it usually requires users to buy the disposal bags separately. Lastly, it also only comes with one type of
Maneuverability And Usage
As we mentioned above, the orbital sander has a rather substantial build and structure. The enormity of this device thereby hinders the overall maneuverability of the same. And since directing and controlling the sander is crucial to the finish it provides, most people find it quite challenging to operate optimally.
Consequently, numerous models of this device come equipped with a variety of different handles. The pistol-grip handle, for example, is a dual grip handle constructed to give the user more command over the device. However, even with its enhanced handling features, this device is admittedly more difficult to control.
The palm sander, as compared to this, is incredibly easy to maneuver and operate. Since the stature of this device is substantially smaller than its counterpart, it’s perfect for most beginners and woodworking novices to try their hand with.
Moreover, the lightweight structure of this device in no way hampers its finishing and shaping performance. Additionally, this should not be operated with too much body pressure. The excess pressure usually eliminates the tool’s spinning motion, thereby reducing the overall quality of your finish. Hence, it is recommended you allow mostly the tool’s weight along with only a little bit of pressure from your hand to work the tool.
Which One To Choose: A Clear Winner?
With that, we’ve come to the end of our list of differences between the orbital sander and the palm sander. Both devices have some rather compelling and impressive features to consider. But how do you decide which device is the better one?
Well, we’re of the opinion that you’re asking the wrong question. The right way to approach this dilemma is not by asking which device is better but rather which device is more useful for your needs?
Now that you’ve glanced through a detailed analysis of both these popular sander models, it is clear to see that they each provide different functionalities. So, if you’re someone looking to expand into the professional woodworking field, the orbital sander might be better for you. The same is true for any and all people planning to attempt substantially large-sized projects.
Alternatively, if you’re just starting out in the woodworking game or just do them for fun, you might want to consider purchasing the palm sander. They’re easy to store and even easier to operate making them a wonderful beginner-friendly piece of equipment. Apart from that, this sander is the single best device to purchase for people who only attempt small to medium-sized projects.
Lastly, it is also crucial to remember that both sanders require a fair amount of practice to provide optimum results. However, the orbital sander is always more challenging to control and therefore only recommended to be used by professionals.
Final Thoughts On Orbital Sander Vs Palm Sander
So, it’s clear that both the orbital and palm sander are unique in their functionalities. The best way to determine which product is the best for you is by matching them to your personal project specifications and requirements.
If you are a seasoned woodworker trying to decide between the two, we would recommend you go for the orbital sander. Since it’s comparatively versatile and equipped with more features, it comes in handy while finishing a variety of woodworking projects.
However, this recommendation is only relevant under the assumption that you will mostly be handling large projects. If you’re a professional who specializes in smaller projects, then the palm sander is undoubtedly the better option.
Hence, it’s evident that there can be no clear overall winner between the two. But hopefully, with the help of this guide, you can ascertain which of the two is your best bet!
Oil pastels are vastly different from all other mediums and yet it is versatile enough to be used in a huge variety of painting scenarios.
They provide fluidity in motion and consistency in texture simultaneously. This is why plenty of artists prefer oil pastels as their medium of choice.
Pastels
If you are not familiar with oil pastels, you should know that there are two types of pastels - soft (chalk) pastels and oil pastels.
Soft Pastels or Chalk Pastels are the same ones that you used as a kid in school. Oil pastels, in fact, share a lot of similarities with soft pastels which we'll get to in a moment.
Oil pastels are constituted out of pigments, and the oil that runs through these pigments is linseed oil.
The linseed oil lends these pastels a smooth consistency which is similar to oil paints. Thus oil pants are widely regarded as a painting medium, even though you are actually drawing with them.
Oil pastels have a distinct resemblance to soft pastels, but in many ways, they are also very similar to crayons.
Their Similarity to Soft Pastels
Because oil pastels consist of an oil binder, they are less powdery than soft pastels.
Oil pastels are less powdery than soft pastels, because of the oil binding in them. Thus, it will be tough for you to blend different colors with a finger or a blending stump.
Oil pastels can even be used to make layered paintings. However, if you end up applying too much, the colors are bound to get muddled. In fact, the top layers might start pulling out colors from the layers underneath it.
Their Similarity to Crayons
The first layer of oil pastels on a piece of paper always look like a crayon painting. At this point, the color doesn't yet have the fluidity that is associated with oil pastels.
Fortunately, as you load on more layers on top of the first layer, you start to get that buttery texture which lets you mix and blend the colors with much more dexterity.
Here, in this article, we'll write out a few basic oil pastel techniques which should help you get started and then provide you a bunch of resources on how to get better.
But first, you need to decide on your choice of painting paper.
Surfaces for Oil Pastels
There are several choices of painting surfaces for every painter from paper to canvas to cardboard. However, for oil pastels, you would mostly prefer paper.
The texture and the weight of the paper determine the quality of the painting as well. The papers differ in varying degrees of thickness and surface grain.
Artists generally paper rougher papers with high thickness because it can absorb more layers of colors without wilting. So if you want to make a detailer, multilayered painting, rough papers are the way to go.
Smoother surfaces have more shine and gloss to them, but they can't absorb multiple layers of paint as well as rougher papers.
Oil Pastel Techniques
It's best to illustrate with an example. Suppose you want to paint a pear with your brand new pastels.
Your first step is to create an underpainting
Before you start painting, your first job is to create a loose and basic underpainting with a basic color scheme.
This is more similar to an initial drawing rather than painting. The overall shapes and structures of your painting should be drawn out here.
Layer your colors
Create layers with different colors, so that they blend together to give your painting depth and detail. To know which colors blend the best and which layers should be put on top of one another, you just have to keep on practicing.
Add in color slowly
Be careful that you don't add in too much color all at once. Be sure you let the paint dry out for a bit and then put in additional coats of paint unless the paint might get muddied.
Put in a background color
If you want your pear to stand out and you want to create a sharp contrast, you can color in the background with a bright color. This will also highlight and clean up the edges of the pear as well.
Now that you've got the basics panned out, it's time to move on to bigger and better things. For that purpose, we have compiled a list of tutorials that should be a big help to you on your journey.
Oil Pastel Video Tutorials
Rules of 3’s With Patrick Neumann
The first one on this list is this entertaining video tutorial by Patrick Neumann. What he does in this video is he tells the viewer to implement the Rule Of 3s in their paintings.
Rule Of 3
Most people use their oil pastels to color a certain section with only one color, thereby forming only one layer. What this does is it makes the painting look childish as there is no detail or depth.
What you should do is, instead of using one color, use 3 separate but similar colors to color the same section in your drawing. This will give your painting that much needed layered oil paint-feel.
Which Colors to Use
You should use colors which are analogous to one another and which would go well together like greens and blues or reds, purples and blues.
You should avoid colors which are far away in the spectrum, like red and green or orange and blue.
How To Paint
Now when you paint you should remember to paint in a dashy or blobby way, not all over the surface like a crayon. This will leave some blank space in between your color applications.
This white space should be filled in with subsequent applications of color. Keep dasing and leaving spaces in between. Your third and final layer should fill in all the last remaining blank spaces.
Painting in this fashion lets your colors blend in seamlessly. Don't be afraid to put in colors. Just do it and let loose. You're doing this for yourself anyway. So just have fun with experimenting.
How To Draw An Apple By Matt Fussell
Drawing an apple is the staple beginners painting in any form of painting. However, it's not just a subject for beginners - it's also an opportunity for experienced artists to showcase their talents.
Why Apples?
An apple can allow for a full range of colors - meaning it can have several different shades of red in it and it can also have blacks and whites over the surface as well.
Because an apple can support such a wide range of colors, it's a favorite among painters everywhere.
So How Do You Start?
You start by painting in the darker areas first. You can use colors like dark rose, rose grey and yellow ochre as well. If you want to make your colors particularly dark, you can put in a dark brown.
Remember to not paint like a crayon but rather lightly touch the paper with the paints - dab, not scrape. Remember to make sure there is enough empty space where you can put in other shades of color later on.
How To Put in Shades And Layers
The most useful tool in your arsenal here is the colorless blender. The colorless blender has the binder of the paint but no pigmentation. It is used to make the colors blend with each other more seamlessly.
Her is an example of how the blender is used:-
Because the light is coming and hitting the apple in a certain way, there are certain lighter areas and shadowy areas. To make the shadowy areas darker, you put on a few touches of black over a dark red and then use the blender to blend those two colors together.
Similarly to make the lighter parts more prominent, you can add in layers of white and if you want to increase the intensity, you can add in some yellow ochre as well.
The Finishing Touches
Once the apple is finished, you need to paint the shadow that is cast by the apple and the background. The tutorial teaches you how to create a subtle, lukewarm shadow with a light blue that does not overshadow the rest of the painting.
Finally, the stem of the apple is drawn by an application of Burnt Sienna, brown, white and black. See what we meant by a whole range of different colors and their shades.
Finally, a white background is painted to clean up the edges of the apple and bring it to the forefront.
How To Paint Van Goghs The Starry Night
This isn't exactly a tutorial on how to start with oil pastel painting. Instead, it's a tutorial on how to reproduce Van Gogh's Starry Night.
Start By Drawing
This tutorial starts with a detailed description of how to draw this iconic painting with a pencil. First, you draw the tree in the middle, then the houses and the mountain line in the background. The initial drawing also involves drawing the stars, the moon and the swirl pattern in the sky.
The first layer of coloring
Next, come the basic colors - you fill in the tree, the mountains, the moon, and the stars. Keep your first layer of coloring light. Make sure you use the side of the pastels instead of the head, such that the coloring is more diffused.
Make sure it's a deeper shade of yellow on the stars and the moon. These colors won't change much.
Adding Definition
You need to draw the current that goes around the sky. Use dark bold blue lines to make dashes along the sky, mountain edge and the houses as well.
Next, you use a white pastel to de-emphasize the blue colors and put in more of a swirling, fluid sky feeling which is the hallmark of this painting.
Put in a darker green and brown on the cypress tree and finally, take out the black. Although it's dangerous to use too much black, it's great for painting lines and adding in darker values of a color.
Oil Pastel Use Demonstrations By Kaitlin Niznik
If you're new to oil pastels, you must first figure out what to buy. There are plenty of choices in the market today, and anyone would get confused as to what to buy.
This video lists out 4 popular brands. Depending on your budget, you can choose any one of the 4.
Different Oil Pastel Brands
The first brand on display is the Portfolio Water-soluble oil pastels. They are very affordable and student-grade. If you're starting out, you can buy them to get a feel of what oil pastels are like.
Or you can keep them as spares to use in a large drawing which require a large amount of paint.
The next one is the Van Gogh water pastels. They are slightly more expensive and a little harder as well. Paint quality is good, but these pastels are a little hard.
However, the most premier Water pastel goes to the Sennelier Oil Pastels. They are absolutely top of the line and are really fluid and super easy to work with.
Widely regarded as the best in the market, they are often compared to lipstick.
The painters favorite, however, is the Mungyo Gallery Soft Oil Pastels. They are available in full boxes of 48 colors - and this comes at a cheap price.
They are creamy enough yet affordable. If you can splurge just a little, this should be your choice of pastel.
Scrapers
Next, this video tells you what scrapers are and what they are used for. They are used in the process of subtraction. If your painting has several layers of single or multiple colors, the scraper can be used to scrape out the top colors and top coats.
The scraper can be used to create magnificent subtraction pieces, which the painter shows how to do in the video later.
Color Shapers
Color shapers have rubber heads, and they are used to make sharp lines in your painting. They are used whenever strong lines are required.
Blending Stumps
Blending stumps are extremely important, and they are used to make colors of different values blend together to form one seamless gradient of different values of color.
Blending stumps are absolutely necessary to showcase the play of shadow and light on a painting.
Landscape Drawing
Oil pastels work great in landscapes. Because of the relative ease in layering, oil pastels are great for painting landscapes with a wide range of values.
You can put on the initial layers pretty quickly by a broad application of paint. These areas can then be reworked to build up additional depth and detail in the paintings.
Also, because of the added versatility of oil pastels, you can use them to put in a variety of effects, most notably, you can add an impressionist feel to the paintings. This makes the painting your own - and not just a reproduction of somebody else's work.
Books On Oil Pastels
You'll find loads of great videos online on Youtube, but there are a few books out there as well, which can really help you become a better painter.
Many consider this to be the definitive book on Oil Pastel painting. This book covers everything about oil pastel painting, starting from the most rudimentary and going up to expert level guides.
What Does This Book Have?
Every page of this book is jam-packed with useful information. It provides meticulous step-by-step illustrations that show you how to use your pastels to achieve nearly any effect you desire.
It covers all oil pastel painting techniques like layering, scraping, washing, blending, and scumbling to achieve an endless variety of effects from delicate lines to very fluid swirls of color.
It even has sections on how to make your own pastels, work with molten pastels, and also use oil pastels in arts and crafts and mixed media.
Featuring the author's work and the work of 40 different artists, this book really has something for everyone.
This is the second book on our list, and it also provides a number of invaluable lessons on how to work with oil pastels.
What's Special About This Book?
Where this book really scores a lot of points is that it takes a step-by-step approach to painting various subjects from flowers to animals to portraits to landscapes.
The steps are written out in such a way, that the reader can go through the first few steps and come up with a moderate, well-defined painting. Anybody can follow the first few steps.
But you can choose to take that painting even further and make it even more realistic and detailed if you keep following the steps. The steps get more involved and intricate as you go along and you may come across a large number of words you haven't heard before like gesso or ground medium.
We weren't entirely sure whether we should include this book in our list because it talks about painting with oil, pastels, and watercolors but not oil pastels per se.
However, we decided to include it as we thought going through the contents of this book would be immensely useful for someone who likes drawing portraits and wants to get better at it.
What Does This Book Contain?
This book will first teach you about the essential elements of painting. You'll begin with learning up the essentials first - drawing, value, color, composition, and edges.
Then you'll learn how light and shadow affect these principles, and then you apply them to create a perfect reproduction of the skin tones of your subject.
You'll also learn about the four major skin color groups - Caucasian, African American, Asian, and Hispanic. You'll also learn how to create skin tones using multiple combinations of these skin color types.
This book also illustrates the differences in tone and texture between males and females, and how your skin changes as you grow older.
Most importantly, you'll learn how light and it's temperature affect the color of the skin of your subject - and how this effect varies depending on whether it's natural or artificial light. If there's light, there must also be a shadow, and there are several elements involved in the painting of shadows as well.
Online Courses In Oil Pastels
Reading and learning by yourself is great, but if you want a structured learning environment with a course that teaches you everything you need to know in an organized fashion, look towards online courses.
Udemy and other online platforms are making it easy and convenient for everyone to learn painting and only at a fraction of the cost involved with traditional classes.
Here are a few courses that we want to share with you.
This course is mostly meant for kids aged 8-12, but if you're looking for a basic, rudimentary course that you can get through fairly quickly, this course is the best.
Why Is It Good?
This course has 7 art projects that are great for initiating you into the world of oil pastel painting. Apart from teaching you how to paint, they will also teach you how to express yourself and create a capacity for self-reflection and guide you to view the world in a certain way.
The teacher has 20 years of experience in art studios and elementary classrooms, so she has a good grasp on how to teach something from ground zero. All the projects are laid out in a detailed, step-by-step manner, which is easy enough for anyone to follow.
You might find the drawings a little childish and simplistic, but it's still an excellent course. It's best if you and your little kid both sign up for this course together. It'll be a good bonding experience.
Jerry’s Artarama Free Pastel Art Lessons
If you want a comprehensive library on oil pastel painting, make your way to Jerry's Artarama.
It's not just oil pastels, Jerry's website has a load of details about painting supplies - like canvases, surfaces, easels, and whatnot.
Apart from that, they have a number of free lessons on how to use oil pastels for painting. These clips cover all the basics, and some are quite advanced as well.
For example, they've got a video on how to do blending and crosshatching. Then there are videos on plein air drawing and also, how to draw perspective pieces and reflections on objects.
This is a real treasure trove of painting information and is also simultaneously, a good store for buying painting supplies.
Final Words
Oil pastels are a great medium for painting. They are not as hard to paint with as oil colors, yet they are versatile enough to be used in a variety of painting applications.
They are especially great for layering and are used to make individual pieces with complex and intricate shading.
There are plenty of tutorials available online which will help jumpstart your painting journey. But obviously, patience and practice are the biggest teachers. So stay dedicated, and I promise, you'll see great results soon.
It is common knowledge that oil painting commenced centuries before acrylic painting was even invented. After all, famous paintings like the Mona Lisa were done using oil paint and the procedure of mixing small amounts of color to bring about the desired effect.
Acrylic painting according to history did not begin until the early 1940s and is basically a water-based paint that is preferred by many amateur painters because it can take as little as 15 minutes to dry, whereas oil paintings can take as long as weeks because it is thicker, is totally combustible and should be used in a well-ventilated area ensuring also to keep kids at bay.
One of the good things about working with water-based paints like acrylic is that they can be thinned, unlike oil paints which cannot. It is however possible to use acrylic paint in an oil painting as well as an undertone. It’s similar to painting a house, where one has to use a primer before applying the last coat of paint. In the same manner, acrylic paint can serve as a primer for an oil painting to give it a more enhanced finish.
As oil paintings did come first, and made history, today we are going to enjoy some oil paintings today as inspiration, cast a glance and do let us know below which you've enjoyed the most!
Oil Painting Ideas
Oil Painting Photo Action Designs
This portrays a woman playing a musical instrument. The picture shows a person in action, and this looks truly gorgeous. You can settle for 4-5 color types and play with them throughout.
Modern Oil Painting
If you are looking for a modern design, this one will fit the bill. It has a blue doorway-like structure in the middle, followed by an abstract background. There are a number of colors used to make it very vibrant.
Dirigible – Oil Painting Design
This has an oil painting that has a giant airship along with buildings in the background. It looks like a fantasy image set in ancient times.
Oil Painted Background
Up next is a beautiful picture with a light-colored center and dark swirls around it. One can decipher it as the end of a tunnel where light is pouring in. It gives off a very positive vibe and will look great with a yellow or white-toned wall.
Rooster Dance Oil Painting
If an impressionistic, modern, whimsical art piece is on your mind, try this rooster out. It is a printed piece originally created by Karen Tarlton and you can use this as an inspiration to create something as vibrant and beautiful.
Klimt The Kiss Oil Painting
This is known to be one of the most romantic paintings ever painted. It had been originally created between 1907 and 1908 and still stands as a beautiful and innovative creation.
Portrait of A Girl
If you want to stick to painting humans, this is a great idea. The artist has used only 3 colors, red, black, and peach, and played around with these tones. This resulted in a gorgeous and vibrant picture of a woman in red.
Black Light Forest Oil Painting Poster
The walls of the house reflect your personality and hence you can put up a vibrant picture if that matches. Paint this scenery of a forest on a quiet autumn afternoon and you will cherish it for a long time.
Dancing Girl
Do you want a human figure in your portrait? You can try this beautiful picture of a girl dancing in the woods. The main colors that have been used are shades of yellow and black. A splash of red in the middle enhances the picture.
Nature Canvas Painting
If the hills bring you peace, you can choose this remarkable painting of mountains and a river flowing in between. The sky is painted with clouds and the sun-rays come from in between them.
Girl With Flowers
If you find bright colors to be attractive, this is going to be a great option. You can paint a woman with a basket of roses in a yellow hue. The color makes the picture stand out and it shows impeccable shading work.
Freedom – Acrylic Oil Painting on Canvas
This art piece is an exact depiction of freedom with a girl running away toward the light. It shows hope, and paired with a beautiful white dress, the picture catches the eye immediately.
Oil Paint Effect Package
Do you want to work on digital painting but use oil paintbrushes? This package allows you to paint letters and shapes with oil paint texture. You can play around with objects, layers, shades, and colors to create your own unique pieces.
Reproduction by Picasso
If you think canvas art is your forte, this is a beautiful example of a colorful abstract painting. It has a number of colors and is very vibrant.
Abstract Background
If you are a fan of abstract artwork this one can be a great inspiration. It seems a number of colors and it looks like they have been splashed across the canvas. A vibrant and contemporary work, this design goes well with 21st-century houses.
Nature Walk
Love nature and forest trails? This is another example of a forest scenery where a path leads on. It is empty but looks extremely tempting. The colors are bright and the picture seems very optimistic.
Elegance – Hand-Painted Artwork
We loved the color play in this picture. A girl stands in a fog of colors and she looks beautiful in a white dress. Red color complements the white and the dark brown of her hair stands out.
Minimalist Modern Painting
Do you find shapes attractive? Then this is a modern art piece that will look appealing with stripes of blue, grey, and white. The blue stands out from the rest and is very easy to paint.
Greenwood Painting
If you have a mid-century designed home, this painting will look great in it. It has an old-world charm and the colors that are used are subdued to provide the effect.
Painting Hummingbird
This is a painting of a hummingbird which is made mostly with dots. It has a number of colors but none of them overpower the white background. We feel that it will work very well with minimalist decor.
Pro Oil Painting Action
Do you want an oil-painted image but do not have the patience or the expertise to create one? This is a great way to transform your images into oil-painted ones within seconds in Photoshop.
Abstract Art-Original Painting
This is a gorgeous example of blue, mustard, and white put together. It has splashes of all colors and is painted to match well with minimalist decor.
Oil Painting Abstract Art On Canvas Heavy Texture
If you are enchanted by the color blue, this is a painting that you will like. Made with umpteen shades of blue, it looks very attractive and can be an accent piece on a statement wall.
Painting Of A Woman
The light and shadow effect is perfectly done in this picture of a woman. The lovely shades of yellow and brown are painted with utter finesse. Also, it is not very vibrant and will be a classic addition to your walls.
Original Gray Painting
Up next is a mystical creation with shades of yellow and grey. The colors fade into each other, providing an enchanting abstract painting for you to enjoy.
Oil Paint: Spiderman
If you have a spiderman obsession like some of us, then you will really like this design. It has an image of spiderman with a shadow play in the picture.
Yellow flowers
This piece of artwork can be created on Photoshop cc. You will have to take an original picture and edit it with an oil paint effect to get this result. A quick and easy way to turn a beautiful picture into a painted one.
New York Rain Textured Oil Paint Work
This is a beautiful scenery that can be painted on canvas. It is a moment captured from Central Park and painted in a number of colors.
Beach Sunset Painting
The vibrant blue of the ocean and the sky looks very attractive in this picture. It brilliantly captures the heart’s desire to be on a beach, by the sea. A bunch of red flowers stands in contrast while adding to the scene.
Black & White Oil Paint
There are 2 ways to go about this painting. You can create it with the help of Photoshop CS6-CC or you can paint it from scratch. If you want to recreate it on photoshop, remember to choose a picture with distinct lines. A low quality image will not work.
Hiding: Oil Painting
Do you love realistic paintings? If so, this is going to be a great option to get inspired from. The shadow falls beautifully and the placement of the hands is brilliant. You can see the subtle shine of oil colors helping in achieving perfection here.
Abstract Art Mixed Colors
If you want an abstract painting with colors that match your decor, this is a great idea. It has a brilliant color mix and if you plan to recreate it, you can use different shades but remember to blend them well at the edges.
Portrait Of A Face
This is another way of creating an oil-painted image in photoshop. It is for digital enthusiasts and you can create eye-catching old oil paint pictures within a few minutes.
Oil Painting On Canvas Fabiano Millani
Up next is a sensuous piece painted so carefully that it almost looks like a real image. Look at the detailing and the shadows that this artist has created. This picture could be a great inspiration if figures are to be drawn.
Nasmyth Alexander Artistic Painting Canvas Oil
Are you looking for a mystic scenery of the mountains with a house on top? This has a very picturesque scenery made with subdued shades. We were immediately reminded of summer afternoons by the creek.
Oil Paint Stratagem
If you want to work with the old-world charm, this can be a great art piece design to hang in your living room. It has a man with a cowboy hat and gun which reminds us of the old countryside.
Intimate Engagement – Beautiful Oil Painting On Canvas
This is a beautiful picture of a couple dancing with a musician behind. If you want to frame a romantic moment from your life, this is going to be a great source of inspiration.
Fine Art Print Beach Babes
Love the beach? A great way to show your love is to keep a painting of the beach. Multiple shades of blue with traces of white and yellow have been used to bring this scene to life.
Love Lost – Hand-Painted Oil Painting on Canvas
We loved the surrealistic vibe that this painting has. It is made from shades of yellow and red and makes for a beautiful art piece. It will match well with white minimalist decor.
Gold Leaf Silver Leaf Fall painting
How would you like golden leaves painted against a midnight blue background? Yes, it evokes royalty and sophistication and the white and grey compliments them well.
Modern Figurative Oil Painting
Do you want a painting that will fit well with modern decor? This oil painting has a woman standing in front of a dresser with her bedroom in the background. It is modern and chic and the overall blue hue creates a dreamlike appearance.
Custom Dog Portrait
Are you a dog lover? If so, this is a realistic dog portrait that you will love. Painted against a dark background, the face stands out and we loved the expression.
Abstract Original Oil Painting On Canvas
Here we have another example of abstract art with 2 humans in it. Painted to give you good vibes, it has layers of yellow and depicts a romantic scene.
Mediterranean Evening Harbor: Korean Fine Art
Next, we have one of our favorite hand-painted art pieces of a gorgeous Mediterranean evening with pretty cottages, greenery, and a harbor too with warm lighting at different places. It is pleasant to look at and seems to be a dream-like scenario.
Original Fruit Still Life Oil Painting
What about a bright yellow peach painted in summer colors? It is painted on Blick cotton duck canvas and high-quality Grumbacher oils are used. You will love the realistic picture and the details that are present in it.
Final Words
Bright colors catch the attention of people more while subdued and pastel shades will create a relaxing ambiance. Remember this while you decide on the kind of oil painting that you wish to have. Also, pair it up well with the surroundings and it will stand out for sure.
If you are going for pop colors, a minimalist or light-color-themed room will match well. However, in case you’re looking at paintings made with white or pastel shades, these can be good additions to a cozy room.
With this, we come to the end of our discussion. Let us know about your favorite ideas in the comment section below.
With work-from-home turning into a semi-permanent solution that’s here to stay, the search for a private workspace continues to soar high.
Employees of different companies are taking over bedrooms and basements to set up their home offices. But that’s not a feasible solution as the rest of your family members also need their personal space.
That’s why people are turning to their backyard sheds to work remotely while being free from the confinements of their bedrooms. These structures serve as the perfect dedicated workspaces once they’re equipped with the right furnishing and office essentials.
On that note, are you planning to use your garden shed as your home office? Well, we’re here to help you out. Through this guide, we’ve explained the steps involved in converting your cabin log or wooden shed into a perfect office.
So, without further ado, let’s begin!
Steps To Convert Your Shed Into A Perfect Office
The ongoing pandemic has allowed people all over the world to see the concept of working from home in a different light. Employees are expected to work remotely through the end of the year and into the beginning of next year, if not longer. That's why a dedicated workspace within the boundaries of your house is the need of the hour.
But that doesn’t mean confining yourself to your room. Whether you’re a freelancer, full-time worker, or running a business, you can prevent distractions while working by transforming the garden shed into your dream office.
That being said, we’ll now be taking you through a step-by-step guide on how to convert a shed into a perfect home office. So, let’s get right to it.
Step 1| Planning
Before you begin the conversion, it’s important to plan the kind of home office you want, based on the type of work you do. Think about how you’ll use this space and list out the items required for the purpose.
Suppose you need to constantly use a laptop or a computer for work. In that case, your shed will need a secure and constant supply of power. Similarly, take account of what needs to be done prior to using the shed as a dedicated home workspace.
Step 2| Getting The Required Equipment & Office Essentials
Now that you’ve decided on how you’ll be utilizing your shed, it’s time you thought about acquiring the necessary essentials. Consider crucial factors like the furniture, accessories, and storage you’ll need, depending on your job profile and work requirements.
For instance, if you’re a designer or artist, you’ll need a desk or table to draw, sketch, or sculpt. Along with this, you’ll require plenty of natural light and a comfortable chair to get you through the day.
What if you’re a writer? In that case, you may not require a large desk space; instead, you’ll need more wall space to install bookcases or whiteboards. You may also consider getting your garden office space equipped with a fridge and kettle for quick access to much-needed refreshments.
The possibilities are endless; just make sure you utilize the entire space while keeping your work requirements in mind. What’s more, ensure that the shed has access to water and a stable internet connection. It should feature the right type of light fixture, including spotlights, strip lighting, and lamps.
And don’t forget to ask yourself, “Will I need an open-plan design or a multi-room office?”
Step 3| The Design Selection
Do you plan on using your shed for work regularly throughout the year? In such cases, your priority should be to insulate the building and make sure it’s fully weather-proof.
Your shed can be at risk, especially if you’ll be storing electronics inside it during the cold winter months. That’s why it’s crucial to ensure that it’s structurally sound and fully weather-proof.
Having said that, let’s now take a look at the two most popular garden office shed designs for you to consider.
Log Cabin
A log cabin is the perfect example of a luxury shed office, offering a high-quality space for you to work from all year round. There is a wide range of design and style options to choose from based on your style preference and work requirements. You may consider opting for a log cabin with multi-room or open-plan designs.
Wooden Sheds
If you’re in search of a reliable home office, a wooden shed is probably your best bet. It comes in a wide range of designs to suit individual style preferences with ample space for alterations.
There’s no need to worry about factors like durability as windowed wooden sheds built using groove cladding and overlap are stronger and more weather-resistant than the others.
Step 4| Size & Layout Of The Shed
You’ve already listed out the furniture and office essentials you wish to have inside your garden shed. But how can you be sure that all these items will fit without looking too clumsy? This is why planning the layout and size of your new home office space is a must.
First things first, when purchasing or building a shed, consider the size of your garden to estimate the space it will take up. And if you already own one, ensure that you invest in the furnishing of the right size so that each item fits well.
Sheds are available in a variety of sizes so you can easily find a suitable garden office, depending on how big your garden is. That said, let’s take a look at the three primary shed sizes for you to consider.
Small Office Shed
You don’t really need a large shed to convert into a workspace. A small office shed is ideal for storing a desk and your office essentials, especially if you don’t really need a space to work remotely every day or have a small garden.
Wooden sheds ranging upwards in size from 4 x 6 square feet are primarily used as garden offices. You may also consider maximizing the space in your garden by installing a shed in the corner of your garden.
There’s no need to worry about the longevity of your office space. You can easily purchase a small log cabin featuring a more durable and better-quality construction.
Medium Office Shed
Suppose you need to keep a hefty amount of office essentials and equipment, including multiple bookcases and desks. In that case, a medium-sized garden office shed is ideal. It will provide ample space for you to work in peace, along with room to store items like printers and files.
A 10 x 8 square feet windowed wooden shed will provide sufficient space for placing a desk and storing office equipment. The windows will allow plenty of natural sunlight to enter the premises, creating a comfortable environment for you to work in. You may also consider opening the windows to ensure proper ventilation throughout the garden shed.
Large Office Shed
In case you need a large office space for starting your own business, you can save costs by investing in a log cabin. It serves as the perfect solution, providing you with a spacious area to work remotely at a fraction of the cost.
That said, you can choose a cabin from a wide range of designs and styles to suit your garden and individual preferences. The contemporary pent-style shed is ideal for modern gardens, while traditional and reverse apex designs perfectly complement traditional gardens.
You’ll find log cabins offering an open-plan multi-room design that’s perfect for separate offices and storing equipment and office essentials in different areas. These workspaces also provide you with the choice of multi-purpose bedding.
Now, suppose you desire a combined office space for work, relaxation, and entertainment. In such instances, the need for a shed with three separate pods should be highlighted.
All you have to do is ensure that these cabins come with dividing walls and two sets of double doors. The inclusion of these features will allow you to access separate areas for different purposes without being disturbed.
Step 5| Assessing Your Garden Shed’s Condition
This is another crucial step as it involves assessing the condition of your garden shed to check whether it’s fully watertight or if it requires any kind of alteration. Analyze the roof felt and look out for tears while ensuring that it’s securely attached.
You’ll also need to test the doors and windows of the space to make sure they’re in the right shape. That’s not all; we’d advise you to empty out the shed completely to look for signs of mold, leaks, wood rot, or dampness. And the assessment should be done before you begin converting the particular space into a home office.
In case you’re not sure about the stability of the shed, seek assistance from a professional builder. You may even consider purchasing or building a brand-new shed or cabin log for the purpose.
Step 6| All Set - Begin The Conversion
Once you’ve made all selections and assessments, you’re set to convert your garden shed into your dream workspace. Start by treating the exterior of the cabin to make it waterproof. This will safeguard it from the risk of dampness and damage, which, in turn, extends the overall lifespan of the shed.
Next up, the only thing left to do is transform it into a real office for you to work from remotely during the ongoing pandemic and even after that if needed. For this, you’ll need to think about the following factors and features.
Heating
Working remotely from your garden shed during the cold winters or any time of the year for that matter can be uncomfortable. To make it a pleasant experience, you’ll need an electric heater, which is portable and can be easily mounted on the wall.
You may even consider using tube heaters as they take up very little space and are cost-effective and safe ways to keep your shed warm. Heating your garden workspace will also prevent damps and keep your electronics and important documents from getting damaged.
Lighting
You’ll obviously require adequate lighting to work in, irrespective of the presence of sunlight. The various types of lighting will complement your office needs differently. For instance, halogen lights help in providing overhead lighting, but they can also be used for track lighting and as adjustable spotlights.
On the contrary, desk and floor lamps serve as cheap and portable lighting options for decorating your new garden shed workspace. At the same time, the versatile LED lights can be used as spotlights to make specific areas of your home office brighter.
Electricity
Like any real office, your dedicated home workspace will need electricity to run your laptop, charge phones, and power lighting. It’s better to contact a professional electrician to carry out all the electrical work of your shed; instead of trying to do them yourself.
Prior to them making the electrical connections, provide relevant information on how many sockets and light switches you need. Also, let the electrician know about all the equipment you plan on working off the electric mains.
However, if you don’t really use electronic gadgets and appliances, this step can be skipped.
Insulation
In order to protect your shed from dampness and other damage and keep them warm, have its ceiling, floor, and walls insulated. You should also soundproof the building, especially if you work in the music industry or enjoy working with loud music.
Step 7| Set Up A Well-Organized Storage Area
Image9
You’ll require a well-organized space to minimize clutter and maximize your overall work productivity. That’s why it’s important to assess how big your shed is and how much storage space is needed for the purpose.
The installation of open shelving units will help in the utilization of space in tall sheds, providing more room for you to walk and work. You can also use wall-mounted pegboards to optimize the wall storage of your shed, while clear storage containers stacked together are perfect cheap storage alternatives.
They are perfect for storing chargers, paperwork, ink cartridges, and other office essentials, keeping them close at hand. We also encourage the use of metal strips for holding metal objects such as scissors if you plan on utilizing your garden office as a practical space.
And those who have small sheds can use the space for storing items by repurposing old items. For instance, attach a spice or wine rack to the wall for organizing pens, paperclips, and document tubes. On the other hand, hanging a shoe rack behind the door can help keep small items in one place so that you do need not to worry about misplacing them.
Step 8| Decorate Your Garden Office Shed
Once you convert your shed into a workspace, it’s quite obvious that you’ll be spending the majority of your time working in it. That’s why it’s important to enhance the feeling and aesthetic appeal of the space by decorating every nook and corner according to your style preferences.
We’ve provided a few tips to help you out, so take a look.
Add A Pop Of Color
Now, whitewashed walls are indeed a popular trend when it comes to modern office sheds, but you may also stick to light and vibrant colors. You don’t have to bother much about the exterior; it can be painted in any of your favorite colors. Just ensure it complements the garden and the surrounding area.
The Personal Finishing Touches
You can create a homely feel to your garden office shed by adding photo frames or other personal items to its walls and your desk. In fact, framed posters are great inclusions to enhance the vibrancy of the space. They also help in covering up old cupboard doors.
Adding A Bit Of Greenery To The Place
Sheds can be brought to life by adding a touch of greenery. Plants not only make your workspace look good, but they also help detoxify the air, creating a better environment for you to work in.
However, if you are not someone who can take proper care of plants, we’d recommend getting artificial plants. You won’t have to work hard to keep them alive!
Make It Comfortable
Converting a garden shed into a proper office space will enable you to work in peace without any distractions. So, you’d definitely want it to be comfortable at all times.
Adding a rug and suitable furnishing with cushions can help in ensuring optimal comfort while you spend time in your home office.
Final Words
It’s a known fact that the year 2024 has drastically changed the way we live. With everyone working and learning from home, there’s been a shortage of personal space for the rest of the family members.
This has led to the popularity of garden shed offices, which have proven their worth as comfortable, dedicated workspaces for one or more members of a family. And seeing the current scenario, we’re sure that sheds will continue trending even in the coming years.
On that note, we have reached the end of our step-by-step guide to converting your shed into a perfect office. Here’s hoping we were able to provide all the required information to help you.
With this, we’ll take your leave. Till next time, stay safe!
Whether you are working from home or in the office, you need to have an ergonomic office chair to sit for prolonged periods without back pain.
However, the problem is that the wheels of most of these chairs are abrasive and can cause irreparable damage to your hardwood floor and carpet with time. For this reason, you need chair caster wheels that are specifically designed to be used on carpets.
Having said that, choosing a quality option that glides smoothly and sports a sturdy construction is easier said than done. With many factors to consider and the availability of a ton of options on the market, zoning in on a single product can be pretty complicated.
That’s why we decided to help you out in the selection process by putting together a list of the top 7 office chair casters on the market. Don’t worry; it was only after hours of research and testing that we provided detailed reviews for each of our recommendations.
So, without further chit-chat, let’s begin.
1. Lifelong
Lifelong is a popular brand known for manufacturing innovative and high-quality products useful in our day-to-day lives. The BL-2374 Office Chair Replacement Wheels are yet another quality addition to its versatile repertoire. Made using industrial-grade steel, this product sports unmatched durability to stand the test of time.
To begin with, this desk chair-wheel replacement is not going to smudge, damage, or scratch your floors. With them, you can enjoy a safe and carefree glide across the carpet, tile, vinyl, laminate, and hardwood floors. Hence, you no longer have to use office chair mats once you buy this product.
Additionally, these heavy-duty chair wheels are constructed from industrial-grade steel, ensuring that they are durable enough to withstand the test of time. Thus, we think it’s pretty safe to say that they are the last office chair wheels that you will buy.
What’s more, they work with most office chairs, which is great. However, we strongly recommend that you check the size of your wheel stubs before ordering to avoid unpleasant surprises.
Lastly, the brand claims to offer a full refund in case you are not satisfied with the performance of these LifeLong office chair wheels. This shows that the manufacturers have shown faith in their products.
Without a doubt, these replacement caster wheels are a great substitute for the abrasive wheels most chairs come with. However, it’s important to note that these chair wheels add to the height of the chair. Thus, if you have it on the lowest setting, installing these wheels will raise you a little bit, which might be an issue for shorter people.
What We Like
Sports a steel construction
Offers carefree and quiet rolling of office chairs on carpeted floors
The Office Oasis is one of the leading manufacturers of rollerblade office chair wheels in the US, so we thought it would make sense to add the OAS-1010. Encased with smooth and soft polyurethane, these caster wheels are safe to use on your carpet floors and hardwood floors.
First and foremost, the Original Rollerblade Chair Wheels are easy to install. This is because they come in a universal standard size and can be used as replacement wheels for almost any rolling chair. All you need to do is pull out the old ones and pop them in. Rest assured that there are no tools or DIY expertise required.
Additionally, the rollerblade wheels are encased with smooth and soft polyurethane, making them safe to use on tile, carpet, and hard floor surfaces without leaving any marks or scratches. So, you won’t have to spend money on buying a desk chair mat to protect your hardwood floors.
Talking about the build quality, these heavy-duty caster wheels are made of high-grade steel, which ensures they can support up to 650 pounds without breaking. On top of that, they are backed by a lifetime warranty. Therefore, you can return them for a full refund if they don’t live up to your expectations.
We couldn’t find any considerable downsides to this product during our usage, and maybe that’s why it sports such a steep price tag. Therefore, it may not be ideal for those on a tight budget. However, given the performance it brings to the table, we’d recommend it nonetheless.
Our next pick is a great product from the house of BF Brightfield. The CW-2 Office Chair Caster Wheels sports precision ball bearings with polyurethane tires to give you a silent and smooth roll. Let’s learn more about what these smooth casters can offer in the following sections.
The sturdy and reliable construction of these heavy-duty casters is what caught our attention right from the start. Their entire support bracket including the internal parts is constructed from high-grade steel, offering years of hassle-free rolling and durability to withstand weight up to 650 pounds.
A major issue with most office chair wheels is that they often damage hardwood floors and carpeted floors as they use quality and cheap materials. But that’s not going to be a problem with these caster wheels because they are sheathed with polyurethane, which ensures that they don’t leave marks or scratch wood floors.
Apart from that, it can be installed easily without any tools, which is great. But especially pleasing is the fact that it is backed by a 1-year warranty, saving you from spending hefty amounts on repairs and replacement for the first year.
Overall, these are some of the best caster wheels for office chairs that we have used so far.
Many disgruntled customers have complained that they tend to hang up on thick carpets when changing direction, which is, no doubt, disappointing. But, given the budget-friendly pricing of this product, we don’t think most buyers will mind this minor inconvenience.
STEALTHO is an American leader in office supplies committed to meeting our requirements with its line of highly functional products. On that note, allow us to introduce the 8541740421 Replacement Caster Wheels from the brand that sports a slew of features that work to provide ideal user convenience.
For starters, these office chair caster wheels are safe for all floors, including carpet, tile, linoleum, hardwood, you name it. Naturally, that makes them an ideal replacement choice for your traditional office chair wheels.
As for the build quality, it couldn’t be more durable. The wheel body is made from high-quality tool steel, which has been shaped at a temperature of 3,000 degrees; that’s why it can withstand up to 660 pounds. Thanks to the industrial-grade elastic urethane of these caster wheels, you can move the office chair easily, without leaving scratches or marks on your floor.
Furthermore, users worried about stumbling at night will love its glowing function, which can help them determine the location of the chair when it’s dark. Thus, it gives these wheels an edge over other options in a similar price range.
First of all, the caster wheels are opaque and not semi-translucent as advertised, which is annoying. Also, we noticed that it’s not silent; they tend to make a squeak now and then when smooth rolled. Other than that, we felt it was a little overpriced, so it’s certainly not for everybody.
Next, we’ve chosen these highly functional office chair caster wheels from ATOMDOC, which are a great option if you want your new office chair wheels to glide smoothly every time. Customers from across the world have praised it for its pragmatic features. From our experience, we can assure you that you will be more than happy with its performance.
This caster-wheel set could be your best bet if you want to stop damaging the carpets and wood floors with low-quality chair wheels.
With it, you can enjoy smooth gliding on the low carpet floor, tile floor, and even your hardwood floor throughout the day without using a computer chair floor mat. This is because the office chair caster wheels are encased with a soft polyurethane material that ensures the wheels don’t leave marks or scratches on any surface.
On top of that, they are highly durable and sturdy. The bracket and all-metal bearing rod are constructed from high-quality polyurethane, enabling them to provide years of durability and smooth rolling. Besides, each caster wheel has a maximum weight rating of 110 pounds, which is truly remarkable, given the budget-friendly pricing of the product.
Lastly, they are easy to install; you don’t need additional hardware or tools to set them up. Simply pull out the old wheels and push the new ones in, and that’s about it.
During our research, we didn’t find any relevant information related to the warranty of this product. As such, we can’t tell for sure if it is backed by a warranty or not. Moving on, we noticed that the replacement caster wheels are not so easy to roll on thick-padded carpets, which honestly left us frustrated.
Now that we are nearing the end of the list, here’s another product from Omyoffice that you should consider. Affordable and suited for home and office use, these Office Chair Caster Wheels are always easy to control and firm when rolling. Obviously, there’s a lot more on offer, so keep reading.
For us, the USP of these caster wheels for desk chairs is the high-quality polyurethane construction. This ensures they can protect hardwood, slate, laminate, ceramic tiles, and other hard material floors from scratches and damage. As such, you won’t have to use an office chair mat anymore to secure your expensive floor.
We were also impressed with the 1,000-pound weight-bearing capacity, which means it’s safe for a heavyweight person sitting on an office chair. Plus, they are easy to move and control despite their stable construction, which is no less than a bonus in our books.
Apart from that, these chair wheels offer an easy and quick installation; just take out the old ones and pop them into the slot till they are firmly fixed. Therefore, it’s safe to say that they can be used as replacement wheels for most office chairs and stools.
While the brand has a responsive support team, it didn’t back the product with an actual warranty, which was annoying. So, you might have to make additional expenses on repairs and replacements if they break down in the near future.
This table highlights a range of office chair caster options, detailing item weight (in lbs), material type, wheel width (in inches), weight capacity (in lbs), and stem size (in inches).
Now that you have gone through our top recommendations, were you able to make a choice? If not, there’s nothing to worry about as in this section, we have explained a few important factors that’ll help you choose the right product based on your requirements.
We strongly suggest that you read the entire thing carefully; otherwise, you might miss out on a few important things.
1. Stem
One of the most important factors you need to consider when purchasing a set of office chair casters is the stem. It’s best to go with those wheels that come with universal stems as they are known to fit most office chairs. Most office chair wheels today feature universal strength, but still, make sure you confirm it before buying.
2. Size of the Wheel
This is another crucial factor that you cannot afford to ignore when choosing caster wheels. Ideally, you would want to go with larger wheels as they can move effortlessly on thick carpets. That’s because the bigger the surface area of the wheel, the better it can handle the friction that occurs when it touches the carpet.
It goes without saying that if you have a thick carpet, smaller chair wheels will have a tough time rolling around. Plus, bigger caster wheels are more sturdy than the smaller ones, which is all the more reason why you should go for them.
3. Design
The design plays a massive role in how quietly and smoothly the chair casters will glide on the floor. Besides, it determines how much weight they can carry.
There are mainly 2 kinds of wheel designs: twin wheel casters and single wheel casters. The former features two small wheels in one set and is mainly used under office chairs, while the latter features a single wheel and is commonly used in industrial furniture.
As far as office chairs are concerned, the twin-wheel design is perfect for them as it allows for more even weight distribution.
4. Build Quality
The build quality of the wheels should be durable and sturdy as they are subjected to constant movement through the chair. Thankfully, most caster wheels available today are made with high-quality steel and polyurethane that ensures longevity, so you don’t need to worry about it too much.
That said, don’t forget to check the specifications to confirm the materials used in constructing the wheels before buying.
5. Warranty
A warranty ensures that you don’t have to shell out a hefty amount for repairs and replacement if the product stops working down the road. So, it makes sense to go with a set of caster wheels that are backed by a warranty.
Even though more often than not, they are durable and can withstand heavy weight, a warranty provides much-needed peace of mind.
How do I choose the right casters for my office chair?
To choose the right casters, consider factors like the type of flooring in your office, the weight capacity of the chair, and your mobility needs. Hard floor casters are suitable for smooth surfaces, while soft wheel casters are better for carpeted floors.
Can I replace the casters on my office chair?
Yes, most office chairs allow for caster replacement. Ensure compatibility by checking the size and type of the existing casters before purchasing new ones.
How do I remove and install new office chair casters?
To remove casters, gently pull or pry them from the chair base. For installation, align the stem of the caster with the socket on the chair base and push until it clicks into place.
How often should I replace my office chair casters?
The lifespan of casters depends on factors like usage, weight, and caster quality. Generally, consider replacement every 3-5 years or sooner if there is noticeable wear or damage.
Can I use office chair casters on a hardwood floor?
Yes, specific casters designed for hardwood floors are available. They typically have soft, rubberized wheels that won't scratch or damage the surface.
Can I use casters with a locking mechanism on my office chair?
Yes, casters with a locking mechanism are suitable for those seeking to prevent their chair from rolling when stationary. This feature is particularly useful in situations where stability is important.
If you are worried about the chair wheels ruining the look and feel of your expensive floors, then a set of quality office chair casters is a must-have.
On that note, it’s time for us to sign off. But before we do, we’d like to let you in on our favorite products from this list to assist you even further.
For us, the Lifelong is the best overall because it is ergonomically designed and offers an easy installation. Additionally, theOffice Oasis is a great choice as it is one of the few products that is backed by a lifetime warranty and safe for all floors.
And if you are looking for a product that can withstand heavy weight, we highly recommend that you go with the BF Brightfield.
Do let us know in the comments below if you agree with our top picks. Until then, it’s a wrap.
In this Nutribullet vs Vitamix comparison, I'll try to help you decide which brand offers the better blender FOR YOU.
We all know about Nutribullet's famed Magic Bullet and its versatile cup that can produce a yummy smoothie and sauces. That said, it can't make you a hot soup like Vitamix blenders.
So, which brand should you choose? Keep reading to find out!
As we all know, Nutribullet has a vast selection of blenders. To name a famous few, we have the Nutribullet Pro series, Nutribullet Blender Combo, and Nutribullet Rx.
Similarly, Vitamix provides a wide range of products. Their Ascent series is a well-known favorite, while their Explorian line caters to those with a limited budget.
To compare the performances of these two brands in this Nutribullet vs Vitamix showdown, I examined the Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo and the Vitamix 5200 in particular.
They're comparable in terms of power, capacity, and functions. However, keep in mind that this isn't a fully fair comparison as both units do different things at drastically different price points.
Let's begin!
Type
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo combines a full-sized and personal blender with great features designed for various quantities and everyday use.
Its motor is powerful, and it comes with pre-programmed settings for maximum convenience.
The Vitamix 5200 is a more powerful blender designed for various heavy-duty uses with a large capacity and a tamper to help with thicker ingredients.
Capacity
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo comes with a 64 oz pitcher and two single-serving cups, allowing it to handle both small and large quantities.
The pitcher's bigger capacity is excellent for batch prepping or entertaining guests, while the single-serve containers are convenient for on-the-go use.
Similarly, the Vitamix 5200 has a large capacity of 64 oz that can handle huge quantities of ingredients. However, Vitamix's single-serve containers need to be purchased separately.
Dimensions
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo has a more compact design. It measures 10.7" x 8.1" x 17" and weighs around 8.3 lbs.
This makes it easier to store as it requires less space in your kitchen.
The Vitamix 5200 is larger with dimensions of 20.5" x 8.75" x 7.25" and a weight of around 11 lbs.
However, it isn't ridiculously huge that it would take a lot of real estate on your countertop.
Price and Warranty
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo is an affordable blender, making it an accessible choice for many. It comes with a 1-year warranty.
The Vitamix 5200, meanwhile, is one of the more expensive models, but its quality and durability are exceptional.
When investing in this high-end kitchen tool, it has a more extended 7-year warranty for your peace of mind.
Mode
The Vitamix blender offers more control over your blending experience with variable speed options.
It is more flexible with textures and consistency. Aside from smoothie recipes, it can easily make nut butters, frozen desserts, and hot soups.
The Nutribullet Smart Touch offers several pre-programmed modes, making it easier to blend specific ingredients.
However, though it can blend smoothies perfectly, it may struggle to blend hot soups due to its limited temperature capacity*.
Note
Nutribullet Rx is a model that provides a heating function.
Noise Level
The Vitamix 5200, though very much audible, operates at a quieter level of around 82 decibels while still offering excellent blending power.
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo is also powerful, but it can be rather loud and emits between 91 and 97 decibels, depending on the mode.
Cleaning
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo and the Vitamix 5200 are both relatively easy to clean.
The Nutribullet cups and pitcher are dishwasher-safe, while the Vitamix has a self-cleaning function.
However, the Nutribullet's extractor blade can be trickier to clean as it isn't dishwasher safe, and the motor base needs to be wiped down with a damp cloth.
Smart Features
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo offers excellent features such as Bluetooth connectivity, smart touch controls, and the ability to conveniently customize presets.
Additionally, it has a safety feature that prevents it from operating if the pitcher or the lid is not securely locked in place.
The Vitamix 5200 is a more straightforward blender and doesn't have such smart advanced features. However, it does come with a speed control dial for precise blending control.
Accessories
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo comes with multiple accessories, including various-sized cups, lids, blades for different functions, and even a book of recipes.
In contrast, the Vitamix 5200 has fewer extras included. It comes with a wet and dry blade container, a tamper, and a cookbook.
Speed Settings
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo has a variety of speed settings, including four pre-programmed settings, variable speeds up to 10, and even a pulse function.
The Vitamix 5200, on the other hand, has a variable speed dial that allows users to adjust the blending speed from 1 to 10 to a high-speed option.
Materials
The Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo and Vitamix 5200 are both well-built and made of high-quality materials.
The Vitamix 5200 features a stainless steel body and blades, while the Nutribullet Smart Touch Blender Combo has a plastic body with stainless steel blades.
That said, the Vitamix seems to have a more heavy-duty and robust build quality compared to the Nutribullet.
Motor
The Nutribullet's 1200-watt motor is strong, but the Vitamix blender has a more powerful motor with a 2-horsepower machine, ultimately delivering better performance.
Though both can blend frozen ingredients, for example, the stronger motor on Vitamix gives smoother textures and more consistent blends.
Nutribullet Blenders: An Overview
Nutribullet is a brand that specializes in making budget but powerful blenders for healthy living.
Their product line includes personal blenders and full-size blenders, with the Nutribullet Pro, Nutribullet Rx, and Nutribullet Combo being some of the popular ones.
Nutribullet first gained recognition with its first blender, the original Magic Bullet, a versatile kitchen gadget that can make smoothies, juices, and even grind coffee beans.
Nutribullet stands out in the market because it focuses on making smoothies accessible and easy for people to adopt healthy habits into their daily routines.
Their blenders are primarily designed to handle many ingredients and create nutrient-dense blends that support a healthy lifestyle.
Nutribullet offers a range of accessories, including cups and blades, to make the process even easier.
Some users find parts of the blender to be challenging to clean
Vitamix Blenders: An Overview
As the leading brand in the high-performance blender market, Vitamix offers more power than probably all other brands of blenders with their 2-horsepower motors.
Vitamix blenders are favored by serious home cooks and professionals due to their versatility, ease of use, and exceptional blending capabilities.
Another standout feature is their variable speed control, which allows users to adjust the speed and texture of their blend to their desired consistency.
The Vitamix Ascent 3500 is one of their most popular models. The Vitamix Ascent line offers advanced features like Bluetooth connectivity and self-cleaning technology.
The Vitamix Explorian E310 has a relatively lower cost but exceptional performance. For those looking for a compact option, the Vitamix One is a newer model that takes up less space.
While Vitamix blenders tend to be pricier, they are worth the investment thanks to their exceptional performance and durability.
Exceptional power can handle almost any ingredient
Variable speed for precise blending
Durable and long-lasting
Versatile use (hot soups, nut butters, dough, etc.)
Excellent customer service and warranty
Cons
Vitamix blenders are expensive
Some users find the interface confusing
May have difficulty blending small quantities
May require additional attachments for specific tasks
Alternatives to Both Blender Brands
As I mentioned, Vitamix vs. Nutribullet isn't a totally fair comparison. Let's look at other blenders that are comparable:
Ninjaand Nutribullet are both popular personal blender brands. Ninja models generally have more powerful motors and larger-capacity jars.
Ninja may be preferable for users who want to blend larger quantities or more challenging ingredients.
On the other hand, Blendtecand Vitamix are comparable in terms of their powerful motors, variable speed dials, and high-quality build.
Blendtec may be preferred over Vitamix for its unique jar design, pre-programmed blend cycles, and slightly lower price point compared to Vitamix. Read this Vitamix vs Blendtec rev for a more detailed breakdown.
Which Blender Brand Should You Choose?
When deciding between Nutribullet vs Vitamix, consider your budget and intended use.
Nutribullet is incredibly affordable and suitable for personal use, with a compact size and cup for making smoothies.
Conversely, Vitamix is a full-sized blender with a stronger motor and variable speed controls. However, Vitamix, across the board, comes at a higher cost.
Aside from making green smoothies, Vitamix is also ideal for making other recipes like nut butters, hot soup, frozen desserts, and sauces.
If you're looking for a budget-friendly machine with simple recipe options, go for Nutribullet.
If you're willing to invest in a kitchen appliance for a broader range of culinary applications, Vitamix is the better choice.
FAQs Related To Nutribullet Vs Vitamix
Here are some answers to questions many people want to know regarding Nutribullet vs Vitamix:
Why Do Professionals Always Use a Vitamix Blender?
Professional chefs prefer Vitamix blenders because of their powerful and versatile machine options, which can handle various cooking and kitchen tasks other than making smoothies.
It helps chefs save time and effort in cooking by achieving smooth and consistent results every time.
If you’re serious about cooking and choosing between Vitamix vs. Nutribullet, go with the former.
While the Smart Touch Combo, Nutribullet Rx, Nutribullet Combo, and Magic Bullet are all impressive in their own rights, they can’t quite compare to a Vitamix in pro applications.
Is the Nutribullet Blender Combo Good for Crushing Ice?
While the Nutribullet Blender Combo is capable of blending smoothies and crushing ice, it is still recommended to use a small amount of liquid, such as water, milk, or juice, to help the blender do its job.
The blades of the Nutribullet Combo are robust and designed to crush ice, but it’s important to follow the manufacturer’s instructions to avoid any damage.
Nexgrill and Weber are 2 of the best manufacturers when it comes to quality gas grills. We can already say that choosing between these products is quite difficult. With the introduction of these products, Nexgrill and Weber have been able to establish a reputable name in the market for grilling and barbecues.
To help folks make a sensible, informed purchase decision, we decided to put together this budget grills product comparison that answers all your questions. We are going to discuss two of the top-selling models i.e. Nexgrill Grill and the Weber Spirit II E-210 and by the end of the review, you’ll be in a better position to decide which product is the better choice for you. First, however, let’s begin with individual reviews for these products.
Weber Spirit II E-210
The Weber Spirit II E-210 44010001 is among the latest and top-selling products from the Weber brand. You will find that this product comes with a 2-burner grill and a very sleek design.
1. Grill Size
The Weber Spirit II E-210 has a total workspace area of 450 square inches and about 360 square inches of these are used for the primary cooking space. The remaining space of 90 square inches is dedicated solely to the warming rack.
2. Cooking Power
The Weber Spirit II E-210 features 2 burners that are made of stainless steel and will be capable of delivering total heat outputs of as much as 26,500 BTUs/hour. This also means that for every square inch of the grill, there will be an equal spread of about 73 BTUs/hour. (26,500/360).
3. GS4 Grilling System
The Weber Spirit II E-210 has a GS4 Grilling System that ensures a reliable and easy grilling experience for users. For this very reason, the GS4 system consists of 4 important components. These components consist of the grease management system, flavorizer bars, powerful burners, and infinity ignition.
4. Side Tables
Another important and user-friendly feature of this product is the folding side table. With the help of this, you can always keep your platters, tools, and seasoning handy or even benefit from a little extra space while you barbecue. These side-tables, however, won’t cause you any problems when you want to store your grill away because all you would have to do is press a button and fold them in.
Nexgrill Grill
In our budget grills product comparison, we decided to include the Nexgrill since it is a great substitute for the Weber Spirit II E-210. This product can also be bought with 2 steel burners that are made of stainless steel. It also features extra side tables on both sides of the unit. These side tables can also be folded down to give you more work space or for easy storage.
1. Durability
The Nexgrill is made from corrosion-resistant materials, making the product more functional and with increased operational life. Other than this, the product consists of 2 porcelain iron casts that ensure that the grill can be cleaned easily.
2. Heat Output & Size
As mentioned before, this product also has 2 burners that can deliver a consistent maximum heat output of 15,000 BTUs/hour. The cooking space offered by this product stands at about 385 square inches plus the extra 65 square inches for the warming rack. This means that the overall coming area of the product stands at 450 square inches.
3. Versatility
One feature that gets a lot of love from most grillers is its ability to operate on propane as well as natural gas. The Nexgrill also features an infrared technology which will be able to provide its users with different cooking methods for different conditions.
Nexgrill Vs Weber
If we were to compare the Weber to the Nexgrill with regards to heat output, then we can assure you that the Weber will be a clear winner. This is because of the fact that the Weber has the ability to deliver a cumulative heat output of 26,500 BTUs. The Nexgrill model is left behind by just a notch as it stands at 15,000 BTUs/hour.
Other than this, both of these products are set apart, despite many of their similarities, by their price tag. The Weber Spirit II E-210 has a larger price tag as opposed to its competitor and both of these products have the same cooking space at 450 square inches. Both of these models also have a really great design but the Weber series may only explain its premium price with its ultra sleek design that makes it look really sophisticated.
With regards to cooking performance, the Nexgrill has definitely made its way to the top. The Weber Spirit II E-210, however, has an ace due to its infrared cooking technology. Weber does have some tricks up their sleeves too because of their really innovative flavoring bards that help ensure a really delicious food for users.
Besides all of the above, the Weber series also offers its users a quality grease management system. This system makes cleaning the product much easier while the infinity ignition makes things even more user-friendly. To end it all, the fuel gauge and temperature indicator in this product are very simple to understand.
Final Verdict for Nexgrill Vs Weber
If you still can’t decide on what to buy from our budget grills product comparison, then we believe you need the Nexgrill. This grill will give you a better heating output at a lower price. If, however, you want some of those brilliant extra features for a heftier price, you still wouldn’t have made a wrong decision!
The Google Nest wireless doorbell is one of the best wireless doorbells that features easy installation and cost-effective functions. But the wired option may be more suitable if better video resolution and field of view are a priority.
If you’re looking for the best wireless doorbell, chances are you’ve come across the Nest line of devices from Google.
These include both wireless and wired options and offer some exciting features, but many people find it confusing to choose between the two. That’s where this guide can come in handy to learn about the advantages of each option before making a decision
About Google Nest
The Nest brand was originally founded by Matt Rogers and Tony Fadell, former Apple employees, in 2010 and specialized in the development of smart home devices. In 2014, Google purchased the company and merged it with its home devices unit in 2018. All Google Home smart devices were rebranded as Google Nest devices in the same year.
Since 2019, Google Nest has become a household name synonymous with smart home devices, among which the best known is the Nest Learning Thermostat. This device automates the process of water heating, as well as controlling the temperature of the room.
Another popular device is the Google Nest Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Detector, which detects fires quickly and can be controlled using a smartphone. It also includes a smoke alarm and can inform you about the location of the fire.
Then there are the Google Nest cameras for indoor and outdoor purposes. These come with glass lenses and need to be connected to the main power supply to function smoothly. All Google Nest devices are compatible with various smart home products from the brand, and might even work with devices from other brands.
Common Features Of The Nest Wired And Wireless Doorbells
1. Colors And Design
The wired and wireless Nest doorbells feature a similar design, which makes them a popular option. This modern and elegant design is well suited for most contemporary homes and includes standard drill holes for installing the doorbells easily with the existing doorbell system.
They are also available in multiple colors, and Google has used the snow white, ash gray, linen beige, and ivy green options for both wired and wireless versions. Depending on which color you pick, the device can stand out or blend in with the surroundings.
2. Video Recording
The Nest line of doorbells features excellent video recording, which can help you know who is at the door. This includes night vision recording as well but the resolution of the videos recorded differs slightly between the two devices.
Additionally, the camera can be turned on or off depending on the location, and its functionality can be enhanced with the Nest Aware subscription. This turns on the Face Detection feature and is available for both wired and wireless options, but it is more useful in the case of the former.
3. Functionality
Despite belonging to different generations, the Nest wired and wireless doorbells function in a similar manner. When someone presses the button on the device, a message will appear on their smartphone, which can be answered directly. In case you cannot answer, there is a selection of premade messages that you can use.
Both devices feature a Quiet Time function for disabling the chime functionality for short periods when you are not at home. These smart doorbells utilize machine learning to differentiate between people, pets, packages, and even vehicles.
4. Compatibility
Both the Nest wired and wireless doorbells are only compatible with Google Assistant smart devices. This means that you won’t be able to use them with other assistants like Alexa or Siri. However, the recordings of the wired version can be viewed using devices like Amazon Fire TV and Echo Show.
Google Nest doorbells work with your existing chime, which can be used instead of smart speakers for alerts. And both devices work flawlessly with Google Smart Speakers to announce who is at the door. The doorbells even work Nest Hub, Google Nest cameras and other smart devices from the company.
Differences
While most of the features and functionality remain the same, there are a few differences between the wired and wireless Nest doorbells.
1. Dimensions
Both the battery-powered and wired Nest doorbells have similar designs but slightly different dimensions. The wired Nest doorbell is smaller, with a height of 5.15 inches, compared to the 6.29 inches of the battery-powered Nest doorbell. Also, it has a width of 1.6 inches, which is slightly more than the 0.94 inches of the wireless version.
The depth varies of the wired Nest doorbell is 1.1 inches while the battery-powered unit has a depth of 1.81 inches. This difference in dimensions is due to the built-in battery of the wireless model.
But these subtle differences are usually only visible if you place both models next to each other.
2. Video Quality And Field Of View
The most significant difference between the Nest battery-powered doorbell and the wired option lies in the video recording quality. While the wired Nest doorbell can record videos at a 2K resolution, the wireless one is limited to 1080p Full HD recordings.
Similarly, the wired Nest doorbell offers a 180-degree field of view while the second-generation wireless version comes with a 145-degree field of view. It even records videos in portrait mode, compared to the wired option that records it in landscape mode.
Keep in mind that the camera capabilities directly affect the cost of the device, which is why the wired Nest doorbell is costlier than its successor.
3. Installation And Removal
Despite coming with a built-in battery which makes the wireless version slightly beefier than the wired option, installing it is easier. It can be screwed onto the wall outside the house with the help of an angle wedge without much effort, or you can wire it into the existing doorbell circuit.
The wireless option can also be removed easily whenever required, such as in situations where you might be planning to move.
In contrast, for installing the wired Nest doorbell, you will need a 16 to 24V AC transformer. It may also require an internal chime to provide sound alerts without relying on speakers powered by Google Assistant. But you may need to hire a professional to get it installed.
4. Storage
Storage is an important factor to consider when buying a device such as a smart doorbell. Ideally, the device should provide an event video history that can be viewed easily whenever required. However, more and more manufacturers are making this a premium feature.
This is also true in the case of Google, which offers the Nest Aware subscription for its smart devices like doorbells. The subscription provides 30-days of video history along with the capability of detecting people or packages, which makes it especially useful for the wired option since it lacks offline storage. It even includes a feature to call emergency services while providing intelligent alerts.
On the other hand, the wireless doorbell allows you to record 3 hours of video without additional storage. Since this feature does not depend upon WiFi, it can prove quite handy. The wireless doorbell further comes with object detection to record packages, people, and vehicles. However, it does not offer 24/7 recording, only available with the wired version.
5. App Control
Despite the two Nest doorbells coming from the same brand, they are controlled using different smartphone applications. The wired Google device is managed using the Nest app, while the battery-powered one can be controlled with the newer Google Home app.
As for ease of use, the Nest app is a bit easier to use than Google Home, especially when it comes to finding recorded videos. But the company has announced that it plans to combine the best features of both apps into a single one in the future.
6. Performance
Specifications aside, differences exist in the real-world performance of both video doorbells. The wired Nest doorbell can record videos in landscape mode in 2K resolution, with sharp image quality, well-exposed lighting, and details that are not obscured by shadows.
In this case, the only exception is fast-moving videos, where some details may be lost. On the other hand, the Nest battery-operated doorbell records videos in 1080p in portrait mode, with a 145-degree viewing angle. Images, while being well-balanced and clear, are overall inferior in quality compared to those taken by the wired doorbell.
The wired Google Nest doorbell can also send notifications to your Google device or smartphone quickly. But the battery-powered version requires more time to perform such actions, especially if it isn’t hardwired.
7. Cost
The wired Nest doorbell comes with certain features that are missing from other options, such as higher video recording resolutions and a wider field of view. Because of that, it costs more than the wireless variant, which despite being newer, is more cost-effective.
Nest Doorbell Wired Vs Wireless FAQs
Can the Google Nest doorbells detect noise?
The audio detection feature is present in the wired Nest doorbell, which can detect loud noises but cannot detect low sounds. Once it detects such noises, the device sends a notification to your Google device.
But this feature is not available in the battery-powered version, though its motion sensing capabilities can be enhanced using the Nest Aware subscription. Alternatively, you can pair it with the Nest Hub to search for sounds.
How is the Ring wired doorbell different from the wireless version?
If you’re confused about the Ring doorbell wired vs wirelessoptions, here are a few differences between the two. The Ring wired doorbell, also known as the Ring Pro, has a 160-degree field of view, compared to the 155-degree viewing angle on the wireless option.
It also has a smaller form factor, though that does not affect its functionality, and inbuilt LED lights for higher-quality videos.
Is it possible to use the Nest doorbell without an existing doorbell?
The answer to this question depends upon the type of Nest doorbell you plan to install. In the case of the Nest wired doorbell, it needs to be connected to the existing doorbell system of your home.
Meanwhile, the battery-powered option can be installed directly if it is installed wirelessly. But if it has to be hardwired, then it will also require an existing doorbell system.
Can you use more than one Google Nest doorbell?
You can use more than one Google Nest doorbell; however, the maximum number of such devices should not exceed 10 per home. And this includes both wired and wireless doorbells.
The number of doorbells you can actually use will depend on your internet bandwidth, with higher bandwidths supporting more devices.
Is the Google Nest doorbell waterproof?
Both the wired and wireless Google Nest doorbells come with an IP54 rating, which means that the devices are protected against water sprays and dust. That said, the IP54 rating does not make these devices waterproof, and they should not be submerged or soaked in water. The doorbells can tolerate splashes of water, such as from rain, but nothing more than that.
Nest Doorbell Wired Vs Wireless Conclusion
Both the Nest wired and wireless doorbells offer different advantages and are suitable for various needs. This means selecting between them is ultimately a matter of personal preference, so you need to consider which factors are most important.
For people who require easy installation and removal, the Nest wireless doorbell is a better option. It does not require hiring professionals for installation and can even be removed if you plan to move. The only downside is that the device has to be taken down every time it has to be charged.
On the other hand, when you’re looking for a device with impressive video recording capabilities, the wired option is a better choice. The 2K video recording and a wider field of view deliver a better experience but comes at a higher price point.
Those willing to spend a little extra should go with this option, while others can save more by choosing the wireless one. There are several other manufacturers offering smart doorbells, such as Ring, Arlo, and more. And it is a good idea to make comparisons, such as the Arlo wired vs wireless doorbell, and comparing them with the Google devices to make a decision.
Tip
If the Nest doorbell keeps going offline, restart the modem and WiFi by unplugging the power cords. Wait for 30 seconds before replugging the cords and check the doorbell video stream to see if you are back online.
Awe-inspiring bedrooms overall are easy to find in the internet era yet finding something tailored to your chain of thought remains difficult to find; we are all unique, it is known, it is natural to seek unique solutions.
More often than not we overlook the great importance of the bedroom yet today we address this exactly and you're here because we have a common point of interest, and one of great beauty that is, we're searching for inspiration on navy blue bedroom ideas!
Yep, this awesome color has inspired a lot of people, the very dark shade of blue is timeless and thus here to stay!
If you are wondering, the name of navy blue in contrast with white was worn by officers of the British Royal Navy ever since 1748 and was subsequently adopted by other navy groups rapidly, in the 19th century already being the usual color of sailor's uniforms back then entitled marine blue.
The earliest use of the term navy blue goes back to 1840, when Oxford English Dictionary surfaces a citation from 1813.
In the meantime, the former blue uniforms of the United States Navy and many other navies around the world changed to black as better response to combat fading.
So after this brief history you still have an interest in this awesome color?
Brilliant, let's proceed, cast a glance on our collect of navy bedroom ideas and please do leave your valuable feedback in the comment section below!
Navy Blue Bedroom Ideas
1. Navy Dark Blue Bedroom With Golden and Copper Accents
The elegance and stability of the navy blue is here enhanced by herringbone patterned wooden floors and herringbone gray rug both adding dynamic to an otherwise still interior, neutral palettes are used on textiles while rose copper and golden accents are being inserted on the light fixtures to increase the sumptuousness of the interior.
Image via nighslee.com
2. Rattan and Ochre Tone Support the Navy
A very earthy interior anchors the bedroom above to the ground, ochre tones earthen the bottom half of the picture while navy blue contrast the stark white walls contrasting the bottom half with the vastness of the oceans and/or the skies, one limit defines the other, one elements supports the other.
Yes, navy blue might be a difficult color for small spaces but there are solutions, in the example above, wooden floors anchor it while stark white embrace it with airiness, an additional glass gallery offers a small storage space backed by a mirror that bounces the light through out the interior even further emphasizing the feeling of space.
One ought to have an affinity for the blue color palette to express it throughout the bedroom so epicly. The interior above exudes elegance and sophistication beautifully. White wooden floors support it along with white fur and a white painting swimming in blue; together they bring airiness in heavy yet splendid interior.
Navy blue can be translate into sheer luxury, the right palette beautifully tied to an airiness ambiance with golden accents creates an image like nothing else, cast a glance over the image above. Nothing looks unattainable or hard to find right? The deep blue bedding here beautifully highlights and accentuates the whole.
Source Unknown
6. Bring Navy Blue in Through Textiles
All white, light wooden floors, birch airy nightstand and rattan light fixtures create a space that breathes and exude light in superb atmosphere. In this setting, the royal navy blue steps in through two elements, a bed cover and a pillow and that's it, a versatile insert with superb aesthetics.
7. Eclectic Mixture of Elements Bound by Navy Blue
A rustic bench holds magazines and candles modern round wall art, wooden pieces contrast black and white picture frame. Neutral tones are used throughout yet everything comes together aggregated by the navy blue, subtle wooden textures and neutral textiles support with airiness beautifully.
A simple bedroom that highlight it's Scandinavian inspiration through a splendid ambiance, everything is simple yet everything matters in here, textiles, furs, chromatic balance and rustic wood in equilibrium.
Image via blog.apartminty.com
9. Fresh Navy Blue Flooded by Light
A youthful vibration is of-course brought in by the floral duvet and pillow covers, this is anchored into elegance with the herringbone wooden floors and stripped navy blue bed, everything screamss sophistication, everything is flooded by light.
The right colors are sometimes enough yet when they're doubled by the right texture, things change. Gaze for a second on the vibration of the wallpaper in the image above, it seems far away, old yet dynamic, a sober elegance that enhances other shades of blue.
Source Unknown
11. Modern Dark Navy Blue Bedroom Design
Yes, the radiator brings the retro accent in but the rest of the furnishings are modern, simple and elegant. Navy blue contrasts white and wood here too, natural matches of the tone. In the bedroom above, the splendid drawings subdue everything and rightfully.
12. Navy Blue Interior With Intricate Patterns
A rather simple interior is here spiced up but small intricate details at textiles level and material level, notice the light wooden floors paired with the wired bed frame and lightness of the room. Despite the amount of dark shades, the interior remains balanced, light on its feet.
Image via Pinterest
13. Sumptuous Navy Blue Bedroom With Golden Accents
Chic interior brought in which really exquisite one of a kind looking items shine; navy blue walls are flooded by light, golden accents complement beautifully where white bedding and pink armchair create contrast.
Spices, spices all over isn't it? A multitude of different complementary blue patterns sparkled the interior above, they are different but they work somehow without blending one into the other, a fact that might distress one and please the other, how do you feel about it?
Do note the beautiful vaulted ceiling and the immense amount of light, great assets to blue spiced up interior!
15. Golden Retro Accents Defining a Dark Blue Bedroom
Yes, the golden accents are key here, they're the cherry on the top of a balanced natural materials and royal colors, notice the rug and how the multitude of wooden textures blend together to serve the navy blue god and his golden trinkets!
Wooden nightstands and white taupe tones complement really beautifully a navy blue accent wall, golden nightstands once more add a pinch of glamour to a sober ambiance.
Two really sophisticated tones tones that exude sophistication in a dance of colors. A combination hard to pull off and easy to love and hate; what do you think?
Source Unknown
18. Navy Modern Bedroom With Wooden Wall Art
A recipe of wood, gray and lightness paired with navy blue is bulletproof and here too it fits like a glove. Notable, the wooden trunk slices of wood art enhance with coziness and warmth.
by Denis Krasikov
Source Unknown
19. Gray, White and Blue Bedroom
Gray on the floor, white on the ceiling, navy blue in the back in a room flooded by light; everything simply spectacular. Accents here are brought through texture, black and white at pillow level; through color on the blanket and small round pillows and through materiality at the giant knitted duvet end on the bed. Flowers add organicity all around.
Balanced, what do you think?
Image via Pinterest
20. Sober Tones of Navy Blue
The humongous knitted blanket strikes again! In this setting it meets different tones of dark blue that leave little room of anything else; in here artwork receive more attention and the atmosphere is extraordinary sober, elegant, masculine.
In the image above, the bedroom is defined by the stark contrast between white and navy blue splendidly enhanced by light and a small pattern on the bed cover, despite the small interior, the high contrast unloads the dark navy color easily in a splendid ambiance.
Image via Pinterest
22. Natural Navy Tones
The color palette here is a far more more mature, the navy tones are a tad more subdued, in a more elegant balance with the grey and wood presence around.
Image via Pinterest
23. Light Navy Blue Bedroom in Contrast
With a lighter tone of navy blue, one can can find the contrast with white and gray in a less intense, more delicate bedroom interior design. The vibrant interior is supplemented by geometric patterns a great deal, note the pillows, bed cover and nightstand lamp.
Image via Target
24. Balanced Bedroom With Navy Blue Accents
Simple interior design, wire-frame nightstand emphasizing the airiness and feeling of space along with white wood bedding where simple navy accents create contrast.
Natural materials and extraordinarily elegant, delicate patterns define a bedroom above, one in which the navy blue color handles the contrast at a chromatic level without taking the first seat in the space. Note the density of natural elements, wooden textures, fur on the chair, vegetation by the mirror.
Earthy tones on the small half slide into shades of pink to create a more feminine presence near a masculine navy blue color, artwork make their presence felt in an epic position, note that all art pieces are white or black and white.
Image via Pinterest
27.Navy Blue Bedroom Interior Detail
This is a splendid bedroom that aims to create focus on a couple of great elements: the black and white rug, wire-frame nightstand with wooden top, blank wall art on navy blue wall, suspended greenery in rope and small but golden nightstand by the bed, have you seen the pillows too?
Note the wall to ceiling detail, the bedding, the fluffy cloud lighting fixtures and even the texture on the navy blue, they all bring in a unique, familiar vibe to a rather simple but certainly not dull interior. How much do you think the navy blue wall contributes to this ambiance?
30. Naturalness at Home in Navy Bedroom
The greenery, rough floors and powerful contrast make the whole space, gaze at how little it takes to create an extraordinarily powerful, vibrant atmosphere!
31. All Navy Blue Bedroom Design
This might not be everyone's cup of tea but it certainly is extraordinary beautiful and shatteringly beautiful space. It is dense, masculine and extraordinarily elegant! One could argue that the nighstand in this picture is unfit for the interior, what do you think?
32. Navy Blue Bedroom With White Base
Here a tall white base breaks the connection between splendid wooden floors and a great shade of deep blue, note how all the tree elements now enter in contrast one with the other, an harmonious contrast for which the wick basket and super plant as a nightstand has only words of praise, just like us.
33. Earthy Tones in Blue Bedroom
Neutral taupe tones come in to root a room down to the ground, a white base disrupts the between wooden floors and navy blue wall yet here the rug stops the contrast abruptly further enhancing the taupe presence in bottom half of the room.
Source Unknown
By now you should have an idea of what is trending around the navy blue color and how you would like to proceed.
In short, navy blue works extraordinarily when contrast is created around it or when it dominates the room completely, it is a tone far too powerful color to sit in a position of uncertainty.
The most common mixtures include natural materials, wooden floors, stark white walls and a lot of light to balance the darkness brought by this serious tone. If you would like to create more sophisticated contrasts, rose gold and golden accents are brilliant, a more feminine presence that complement and contrast the scene at the same time are the pink shades!
Navy blue whether it's as a dark blue, deep blue or marine blue hue, is a difficult but beautiful and sophisticated color, what do you think?
How would you use it?
Looking forward to hearing from you in the comment section below, happy redecorating!
Gas grills come in all shapes and sizes. From the small compact grills to the large grills that cater to larger families. But, how do you know which grill suits your needs? In this article, we are going to take a look at one of the large grill options that are available in the market today. In fact, if you’re looking for a large gas powered grill then the Napoleon Prestige Pro 500 is an easy choice.
80, 000 BTU's, 4 Stainless Steel main burners, 900 in total...
Dimensions: 66.50" W x 25.50" D x 51.75" H (Lid Closed)...
While the brand Napoleon is a relatively new arrival in the niche of high-quality gas grills, the brand has made quite a splash in the industry by releasing one great product after the other. This puts the Prestige Pro 500 in good company.
With the Prestige Pro 500, Napoleon is looking to make its entry in the large grill niche that caters to large families or commercial use. For this, the company has decided to go with extra-large cooking space along with six burners that make cooking fast and hassle-free.
Napoleon has had a good track record of delivering premium quality grills at an affordable price and the Prestige Pro 500 is no exception. From the looks of it, the company has gone the extra mile in making sure it delivers a superior product that’s all set to become an instant hit with its fans.
Specifications
Six stainless steel burners
900 square inches of a total cooking area
Four stainless steel burners: 80,000 BTUs.
Side burner: 14,000 BTUs
Rotisserie kit with smoking channel: 18,000 BTUs
Four caster wheels
The Design
Like all the other grills by Napoleon, the first thing you are going to notice is the premium quality feel that this grill offers. The company has used 100% stainless steel for the body and frame of the grill, which gives it a top-shelf look right off the bat. But, another selling factor of the Prestige Pro 500 is its imposing design which will easily stand out in any setting. The high-grade stainless steel grill can easily pass off as a commercial unit in terms of both style and functionality.
Talking about style, the Prestige Pro 500 offers a large cooking space that’s larger than most other grills that are available in the market today. Its sleek design and smooth edges make it a great choice for families that have small kids or just don’t want to get cut by sharp stainless steel metal.
The Prestige Pro 500 features interior lighting which is a nice addition to the overall design. The addition of a cutting board across the sizzle zone infrared burner is also a nice addition and allows you to hook useful utensils and tools off the side.
But, the reason we are all here is because of the impressive cooking capacity of the Napoleon Prestige Pro 500. The propane/gas grill features up to six burners and can pump out an impressive 80,000 BTUs in cooking power.
The cooking area features an infrared side burner that’s used for searing along with an infrared rotisserie-style rear burner. The Prestige Pro 500 also features detachable stainless plates, making hibachi style cooking possible. In total, users get up to 500 square inches of cooking space with 260 square inches of warming area.
The Features
Six Stainless Steel Burners
Napoleon boasts of being one of the most powerful gas grills that are available in the market today. The six primary burners can generate an outstanding amount of heat for faster more efficient cooking. If you’re searching for a grill that has a large capacity and makes you cook fast then the Napoleon Prestige Pro 500 should be a no-brainer.
Built-In Electronic Ignition
Napoleon has decided to go with a built-in electronic ignition system this time around. This simple tweak has made a major difference in the overall experience of this grill. With the help of the new electronic ignition system, users have complete control over the primary burners and the rear rotisserie burner as well. This ensures you get to cook more foods at different temperatures quicker than most other gas grills, making it the ideal choice for large families.
Oversized Warming Rack
As if all these features weren’t enough to get buyers to purchase the Prestige Pro 500, the company has also included a super large warming rack, which makes this the ideal grill when hosting parties or large get-togethers at home.
Heavy-Duty Accu-Probe Temperature Gauge
The Napoleon Prestige Pro 500 features a heavy-duty Accu-Probe temperature gauge that makes it easy to find out just how hot the grill is before cooking.
Other Features
The Napoleon Prestige Pro 500 grill offers a complete grilling experience in more ways than one. From the easy to use side storage shelf that makes it easy to store away utensils or other accessories neatly to the nifty drip pan which is easily detached to get rid of the grease, juices or moisture collected from the grill. You also get a large storage space that features a bottle opener and built-in ice bucket. In short, the Prestige Pro 500 just makes it easier to carry out any type of cooking you would normally do in a grill outdoors.
Multiple Warranties
It’s clear that the Napoleon Prestige Pro 500 has been designed and built to last you a lifetime. This can be seen with the impressive ten-year warranty that the company offers for its stainless-steel burners. Other warranties include a five-year warranty for the stainless-steel sear plates and other parts. You also get a three-year warranty for the rotisserie burner coupled with a 50% discount on burners you purchase for five years.
Pros
Great quality of burners and large cooking space gives full marks in utility
Build with stainless steel provides a classic look and is easy to clean
With inbuilt illumination, gives you the freedom to cook any type of food whether at daylight or night
Large storage cabinet
Four heavy-duty caster wheels that lock in place
Cons
The price tag
Napoleon Prestige Pro 500 Conclusion
With the Prestige Pro 500, Napoleon has managed to deliver a superior product that’s unlike anything that is available in the market today. You get a premium quality 100% stainless steel grill that offers extra-large cooking space for versatile cooking and all the bells and whistles you would want to have in an outdoor grill.
A couple of years, decades ago napping at work would have constituted solid grounds for being fired out of some offices yet things are massively improving with the advance of technology today. Thanks to this insanely rapid growth you can actually take a nap at work. In fact, tech giants such as Google or Facebook are installing napping pods in their offices to encourage you to have this healthy refresh at your workplace. The simple idea behind this new epic trend is that a swift nap will actually increase your productivity as they rejuvenate the mind and body.
The most common presence in the trend are the EnergyPods envisioned by MetroNap, they look futuristic, greatly fit for a tech setting. In the following article we will go to through a couple of nap pods that might fit your workplace, cast a glance.
A nap pod in the wild awaits a subject to immerse into deep sleep.
a break with capsule pods
As previously mentioned, the EnergyPods are the most popular choice when it comes to these refresh capsule, they are basically C-shaped pods that have the bottom part extended to accommodate the taller individuals.
In certain workplaces there are dedicated napping rooms where one could rest peacefully.via Wellbeing Workout
The napping rooms sometimes include simpler setups like camp tents, pillows and blankets in a cozy cabin-like atmosphere that is meant to calm the individual and soothe its nerves, this is the case with the HootSuite napping room in Vancouver.
In Sidney the Google offices have tailored epic fluffy compartments for quiet work time, and they`re naturally being used as nap pods too. If you feel the need to work in a more comfortable setting sometimes though, you can do that here, you can find refuge in a small comfortable pocket and work in peace.
The nod pods sometimes take an odd space-travel inspired shape. Above three pods reside in a London office, they were installed in a room with a soft light in the attempt to make the refresh session easier, more efficient. This London office also features a small lounge, showers and a kitchenette thus encouraging one to feel at home, especially when a deadline is ahead and every creature comfort matters threefold.
You can stack nap pods too, nestle comfort in your company.
Podtime offers great customization options, and while the base poly-carbonate tube remains constant the company could choose from things that range from the technology in the tube up to the doors and light of the pod.
Capsule sleeping is already quite spread around the globe reason for which in the following section we will cover a few from various offices, we will start with the Facebook offices in Seattle. In this particular design the capsule is entered differently, on the long side thus making sleep far more accessible. It goes without saying that the capsule looks really comfortable, we would grab that pillow right now, wouldn`t you?
via The Daily Telegraph
Another sleeping pod has been noticed in the land down under, in this case, the pod is being used by Australian footballers, the ones that make the team entitled Sidney Swans. These capsules are especially useful for athletes when they have more than one training a day, it allows them to rest and refresh in between easily.
via Robert Aberman and Daily Mail
In particular scenarios in which getting to and from work becomes significantly difficult the approach of sleeping in the workplace has been adopted by certain companies. In 2012 the Summer Olympics have buzzed London beyond belief and for some business that cannot be interrupted Interxion installed their space pods, the PodTime capsules mentioned above, in the attempt to make the commute easier or eliminate it completely during those Olympic traffic times. Employees were able to take an hour nap after work to leave the office when things cooled down a bit or could have come in early to avoid it.
In Japan, people that are unable to reach their home for more than a couple of hours of sleep are occasionally using capsule hotels around the workplace to maximize their sleeping time. In this way they avoid running home and from home the next day for two-three hours of sleep, businessmen use these when 24 hours in a day are not enough.
One sure imagined once in the library that a nap would be the cherry on the top, a small break after hours of reading awesomeness would have been purfect before you would re-engage the world of written knowledge. The Library Australia’s University of Queensland has read your mind, a student now luckily can take a short sleeping break in full comfort using the EnergyPods, this ought to encourage studying and the time spent in the library itself.
EnergyPods can be found in the United States libraries too, the last example of a pod in universities comes from Wesleyan University in Connecticut, naturally, in a student library. You can enjoy a short nap in a super comfortable reclined seat, surrounded by soothing sounds and rhythms and a privacy visor.
Epic Dedicated Napping Space
In the start-up culture and tech companies in particular,world-wide, the versatile space is a must. Sleeping and relaxation areas get a great deal of attention, as they`ve proved that they can increase the productivity, health and well being of the employee. In the following section we will present relation areas from various office around the world.
Capital One Lab in San Francisco offers elevated sleeping nooks only accessible through a ladder, every bunk includes a soft mattress and various amenities meant to encourage you to relax whilst offering you the opportunity to read your mail, newspaper or book in silence.
In Pittsburgh at Google things are different, an immense rope area offers you the opportunity to sleep in full comfort, you are in your office, elevated off the ground in thin air, surrounded by pillows and invited to rest, sounds like a pretty good selling point for the office.
In certain offices the small space will not allow one to enjoy a sleep in a regular bed, in these cases there are alternatives, the Ostrich Pillow is one of them. Various workplaces around the world have stocked a few of these to encourage their employees to rest. They look weird and funny, they are comfy and they block sound and light, they encourage sleep. You can order one for yourself and try it out, if the current office is not offering you nap options you could use this one in your launch break for a quick 20 minutes refresh.
If your workplace lacks a sleeping option and the Ostrich Pillow simply ain`t enough to put you to sleep certain establishments have been envisioned for you, you get out of your office when need be and simply go to sleep somewhere, above illustrated, Natureland, offers reflexology sessions, you can get a massage, spa-like treatment and a nap in full comfort, happy times for folks living in Singapore.
Napping in the office might not work in every industry or every workplace but the trend not only encourages sleep and relaxation but a less stressful work environment altogether, something that will be surely felt in absolutely every job at a certain point as we get closer to robots that will start to replace stressful, irritating jobs. What do you think is going to happen next in the workplace environment and how do you see the napping pod trends? We would love to hear from you!
Covering the best options available today, we are here to guide you through this process of buying the ultimate shop vac for your needs.
With a wide range of options in the market, we know the dilemma you may face over choosing a vac for your garage. There are differences in specifications and features, and it is a task to look through seemingly endless lists.
So to make your life a little easier, we surfed through hundreds of reviews to come up with the best of the lot.
Every product has its benefits, and we have tried to cover all the aspects of the devices recommended in this guide. There is a product for every need, and we are confident that you will be able to find the perfect fit for your workshop.
Without further ado, let's proceed.
Most Powerful Shop Vacs For Your Workshop & Garage
If you are worried about big messes around the house, this product will blow all your worries away. With a powerful 5.5-peak horsepower motor, the device cleans up efficiently and leaves us with nothing to worry about. We can end each day with a clean workshop.
With SVX 2 motor technology, this shop vac runs extremely quietly and prevents you from getting any kind of unwanted hearing problems. You can carry on a conversation with the device switched on.
Also, we loved how the design was extremely user-friendly and loved by a lot of customers according to the reviews we had gone through. We especially liked the secure latch system, which prevented any kind of unwanted injury.
To add to all that, the device came with a tank drain and multi-placed handles. This allowed for easy draining after you are done cleaning. And what’s more, with the handles, you could easily lift it and carry it around.
Lastly, this device sucks up light dust and debris very efficiently, which front and side blowers cannot do. This machine is specially designed to be able to achieve this. Our workshop remains spic and span when we leave every day, thanks to this device.
What Could Have Been Better?
Though the product was excellent and met all our expectations, the hose that came along with it was made of cheap material. At times, we were worried that it may break at any point if it is pulled too hard. This was a slight inconvenience for us, but not a deal-breaker.
If you have a small workshop with many narrow places that get dirty but are extremely difficult to clean, fret no more because this machine will take care of those woes. This shop vac is made to clean up narrow spaces with a long thin hose, which is designed especially for this purpose.
With a powerful 6.0 peak HP motor and a 14-gallon tank capacity, this machine works amazingly well with messes created in narrow areas. We work with wood a lot, and the debris tends to settle behind furniture and the workbench. With this wand in hand, the task of cleaning becomes very easy.
Also, we were very happy with its tank capacity as the bigger it is, the better it worked to clean up large messes in one go. In fact, this 19.8" x 19.8" x 25.8" product is known to be one of the largest available on the market.
Lastly, we were pleased with the filtration capacity of this device. It is designed with three layers to suck up the tiniest of particles easily. This will ensure that all the dust is cleared from your workshop.
What Could Have Been Better?
The device is one of the largest in the market, and that makes it a pretty heavy machine. Thankfully it comes with wheels for easy portability, but it is tough to lift and thus is not a good device to carry up the stairs.
If you are searching for a small machine for your smaller needs of cleaning up dust or dirt, this could be a remarkable choice. With a strong four-horsepower motor, this device is easy to maneuver, and even a kid would be able to carry it easily.
【STRONG SUCTION& HIGH PERFORMANCE 】4 HP motor provides...
【VERSATILE】Multiple accessories and 15 ft cleaning...
Why Did We Like It?
This machine ranks high on portability. Not only can you carry it easily with a handle on top for convenience, but this machine also allows you to gently swivel it around with swiveling casters attached. We would drag it when required up the ramp to our workshop, and the machine would not show any signs of damage.
To add on, the machine comes with a dual filtration system. This ensures that most pollutants and dirt are trapped and do not go back into the air. This also leaves the air clean and dust-free. Since we are allergic to dust, this machine proved to be a boon.
Further, the vac cleans up both dry and wet messes in a jiffy. It may look small to you, but there are no complaints about its functionality.
What Could Have Been Better?
Though the machine worked really well for us, we have one complaint. The power cord was really small, and it was challenging to take it anywhere without carrying an extension cord along with it. We recommend you keep one handy if you are choosing this cleaner.
Worried about where to store the vac in your workshop? What if you could mount your vac up on the wall and use it? The Shop-vac 1.5 Gallon can be mounted up and saves a lot of space. If you have a small shop and there is no floor space to keep a vac, this product is precisely what will fit your needs.
COMPACT POWER: This wet/dry vacuum offers the power of a...
ACCESSORIES INCLUDED: This wet/dry vac includes 1.25"...
Why Did We Like It?
The best thing we liked about this model is that we did not need to carry it around. Instead, the machine could be mounted onto a wall, and the extensions provided along with a 7 feet long hose could be used to reach the corners of your room.
To add on, the package included one crevice tool, one dual floor nozzle for the floor area, which was carpeted, one round brush, and one gulper nozzle. The multi-functionality of this vac impressed us a lot. Like the previous model, this device came with sufficient storage space, and we could easily store extensions inside the body of our machine.
To add to the features, this model came with an 18 feet long power cord, which gave us yet more space to move the vac or mount it. All in all, this vac did not leave us much to complain about.
What Could Have Been Better?
One issue we faced was with the storage capacity. If there is a considerable amount of water or waste that has to be taken in by the vac, the liquid tank capacity will not be sufficient. We had to empty it and complete the task in parts when we had to remove water after heavy rain.
If you face severe dust allergies and need to make sure that the garage is clean at all times, this machine will do the job. With a vast tank capacity, you can clean the tank at the end after a whole day, saving time while you work in a clean environment.
Backed with a 5-Year Limited Warranty, this stainless steel...
Accessory bag and hose storage keeps vacuum attachments...
Why Did We Like It?
The best part about this device is that it does not make too much noise. It is one of the quietest machines in this list with a noise level of 77 decibels at max.
Our garage is very close to the main house, and the kids wake up every time we try to clean. With this machine, we can finally clean in peace without disturbing anyone.
Also, the wheels attached to the device are large, allowing it to be pulled easily on different terrains. A rougher terrain cart is attached along with a robust stainless steel drum and a stable platform. This makes sure that the machine does not tip over even if it wobbles.
Moreover, it can clean up both dry and wet messes easily using a hose with a 2.5-inch diameter. The different nozzles given with the pack ensure that all your needs are met efficiently.
What Could Have Been Better?
With a capacity like this, the machine works brilliantly. But it is more expensive than most of the devices in the list. If you do not have a problem paying extra, then this device is a great option to choose from.
This device will solve all your woes related to electrical points. If you do not have ample charging points in your shop or garage, this product could make life a little easier. DEWALT has come up with this master machine, which can run on batteries as well as via a cord.
Plenty of Storage - 2-gallon tank capacity provides enough...
Why did we like this?
With its dimensions being 17.2" x 12.3" x 13.1," we can easily call it compact and easy to move, But even though it is smaller in size, it works like a beast. We have had no complaints about the functionality of this product.
Further, our workshop is in the outhouse, and it has only one charging point, which is usually used to power appliances. This device appeared as a boon for us as we could clean the place without having to switch off any running appliances.
Also, the batteries are reliable and last for a considerable amount of time. You do not need to worry about changing the battery too frequently.
Like most vacs, this one also comes with additional benefits like an extension wand, a carpet attachment, a crevice tool, and a wide nozzle tool, making it very simple for us to reach and clean the absolutely hidden corners of the room.
What Could Have Been Better?
We were excited to have ordered this vac but were very surprised to see the battery or the power cord did not come with the machine. We had to order it separately, thus leading to increased expenses. This is not too problematic now that you already know of it and can order the batteries and cord together.
If you are looking for a smaller machine that can be carried about with ease, this device is a great choice. While being small, it is still very powerful and has excellent suction abilities. We had a great time using this product and could easily store it in the workshop itself.
This machine is known for its portability. It's constructed with only 17.8 x 12.5 x 17.1 inches in size and is 13.5 pounds of weight. You can imagine how light that is. If you have a two-storied workshop and you need to carry the gadget up and down the stairs, this device will be perfect.
It also comes with a storage box inside the body, which enables you to store the power cord. You no longer need to worry about it hanging outside and becoming a hassle.
To add on, the device has unparalleled suction capacity. This is a small device that works like a beast. Moreover, pressing a button can turn the portable vacuum into a leaf blower! You can use this to clean away fallen leaves from your porch or shed roof.
What Could Have Been Better?
The one thing we were not happy about is the tank capacity. It was only 5 gallons and cannot be used to take in large amounts of waste at one time. It needed to be cleaned out frequently. If you need a machine for smaller tasks and you do not plan to use this often, then this product is the right choice.
If you are looking for a device with a large hose to be able to take in larger waste items, this will be of great benefit. We had to clean up screws and pieces of wood while working, and this machine did it in a matter of a few seconds.
HEAVY-DUTY: Powerful 6.5 Peak HP provides extra power for...
BUILT-IN BLOWER PORT: Rear blowing port on this wet dry vac...
Why Did We Like It?
What we really liked about this device is that not only is the hose wide enough, it also is 180 degrees flexible and can be used to move around efficiently. You do not need to worry about kinking, and the device enables free movement.
Also, we had to clean up a lot of water after a mishap, and this device easily took in a few gallons of it without having to be emptied. Thanks to the large tank capacity, you can rest assured that the tank would not need to be cleaned too often.
So if you are looking for a high-capacity machine, this vacuum cleaner will serve the purpose of three types of nozzles to help you clean different items.
What Could Have Been Better?
It is essential to provide a manual whenever a machine needs to be assembled. The only thing which disappointed us is that no instruction manual was provided along with the pack. This made the installation and assembly process very tiresome. We had to search for instruction videos for it.
Pros
Extra power to suck up large items easily
Quick and efficient cleaning grass clippings or leaves
We wanted a powerful machine that would clean up wood debris and dust in our garage. By the end of the day, there would be debris everywhere, and this machine did an excellent job with it. The Porter-Cable PCC795B helped us clean up the mess. It worked like a wizard, and everything was cleared up very quickly.
The cordless shop vac has a powerful suction for quick...
The PORTER-CABLE vacuum has a portable 2-gallon tank with...
Why Did We Like It?
With one of the most powerful suction pumps, this machine cleaned up debris in a jiffy. Also powered by a 4 APM power battery, this device runs cordless for 24-28 minutes efficiently without having to replace the battery. Similar to the previous product, we liked this feature and believed it to be a great addition to our workspace.
To add on, with a 7 feet long soft hose, we were quickly able to reach otherwise unapproachable corners of the space. The material used for the hose allowed it to be more flexible than normal hard ones. Also, we were not afraid of snags that could occur with other hoses.
We also appreciated that the vac not only cleaned dry and wet wastes but could also be used as a blower, thus making it useful to clean up the front porch or backyard. You need not worry about fallen leaves anymore as this machine will be able to blow them off your porch.
What Could Have Been Better?
We faced some minor glitches with the suction pump as sometimes our machine would slow down, leading to the consequent slowing down of its pump. This had occurred once or twice with us over four months. It is not a giant problem, but you can talk to customer service beforehand.
If you want a powerful cleaner that will take care of all your cleaning needs without taking up too much space, this is the device to go with. This Vacmaster model is sturdy and comes with wheels for easy maneuverability. Let's get to the major features.
Converts to Detachable Blower with One-Hand Release and...
Max Blowing Speeds of 210 MPH
Why Did We Like It?
Equipped with wheels and a top handle to make it easier to carry and move the device, this can also be used as a leaf blower for your front and back porches. We had leaves strewn all over the roof of our garage, which we removed easily by just holding up the vacuum and switching on its leaf blower mode.
Also, with sturdy polypropylene construction, this vac has a strong body and can sustain very frequent usage without getting damaged. Our kids once overturned it, and there was absolutely no damage done.
Lastly, this product comes with a wide range of accessories to make the job easier. These include a crevice tool, two extension wands, a car nozzle, a blower adapter, an 8-inch utility nozzle, a blower nozzle, an air/noise diffuser, a reusable foam filter sleeve, and a standard cartridge filter. What more could you possibly want?
What Could Have Been Better?
The one thing which did not satisfy us was the power cord, which could have been longer. Though the device is easily movable, the power cord does not allow a lot of it. Also, this machine is comparatively noisier than most other machines, which makes it difficult to be used at odd hours.
While this is a smaller model and is not as powerful as the previous one, it does pack a punch when it comes to medium-sized messes. We did not need a premium machine as we were only going to tackle accidental messes. This device helped us do the job wonderfully.
The best part about this device is the price. While it comes with all the basic necessities, it does not burn a hole in the pockets, and we were so glad.
To add on, it also offers a blower at an attractive rate. We did not need the device frequently. It was on events when we would be completing some DIY projects or required to clean the backyard in autumn when this device came to use. And needless to say, it worked so well.
Also, with a 6-gallon capacity, the tank is small but good enough for cleaning dirt and dust, both dry and wet. While working, we realized that it does not make too much noise. This was an added benefit we got. All in all, the product served us well.
What Could Have Been Better?
We were unhappy with the absence of a drain port. A drain port would have easily enabled us to empty the tank, but without it, the task becomes time-consuming. But again, the product has a number of features, and at the price range it comes with, we could ignore this disadvantage.
If you are looking for a wall-mountable product, this device will impress you without a doubt. This a wet-dry vacuum that is easy to store and will be an excellent fit for smaller garages or workshops. This machine is extremely convenient to use and will take care of the complete cleaning of your space.
The one thing we loved about this product is the large diameter of its hose. This made it possible for us to pick up large debris while the pack also came with a narrower hose. This hose allowed us to reach the hidden corners of the place without any additional effort.
Also, we were very happy with the suction capacity of this vacuum, even with the extended hose attached. This is one of the strongest reasons for us to buy this product as we have seen suction capacity falter with other products the moment an extension wand is attached.
To add on, this product is compact and has a 5-gallon tank capacity. The smaller size will allow you to control it easily. Moreover, we could leave the vacuum mounted on the wall and use it to clean spider webs and dirt from the ceilings of the workshop and garage. There was no need for any additional effort.
What Could Have Been Better?
We were happy with the features of this product, but we had issues with the noise level. The machine works loudly and could be a hindrance if you want to use it at odd hours when people are sleeping. If your workshop is soundproof, then there's nothing to worry about.
If you want a good vacuum but do not have the budget to buy a premium one, this shop vac will not disappoint! While it functions well, it was well within budget, and we were thrilled to use it. It also works as a vacuum and a leaf blower together.
Blower Feature; Built In Portable Leaf Blower; Onboard...
Cord Length: 18 Feet; Hose Size: 2.5" Diameter
Why Did We Like It?
A blower wand comes with the pack, which on attaching to the main machine converts this vacuum to a perfect leaf blower. We used this blower to clean flower beds outside our garage. Also, if you want to keep your kids engaged, use this to create leaf piles in which the kids can jump in.
To add on, a 120-degree elbow accessory comes with the pack, which enables us to use the blower to quickly clean out overhead gutters without the need for ladders. Moreover, a crevice tool is also included, which makes it easy for us to reach tight spots.
Lastly, this product comes equipped with an 8-inch utility nozzle, an ergonomic elbow grip, a blower nozzle, and a concentrator nozzle, which made it super easy to do multiple types of cleaning with one device.
What Could Have Been Better?
This machine works exceptionally well for dry waste but is not suitable for wet waste. It does not have a foam sleeve, which helps separate damp waste, and thus, we did not use it for anything which was not dry. This was a little disappointing.
Pros
Easy to maneuver
Cleans wet/dry messes and spills
Good value
Cons
Doesn’t include foam sleeve for wet pickup
Most Powerful Vacs Buyer's Guide
Now that you know about the 13 most powerful vacs in the market today, half of your work is done. But you still need to know the basics that have to be kept in mind before buying a vac. We will provide an informative list dealing with the possible queries you might have while choosing a cleaner.
Motor
Do you need a machine for picking up minor waste like dust or dirt particles? If that is so, a cheaper device with a less powerful engine will be sufficient.
But if you are looking for a machine to meet more extensive needs like picking up screws, wooden bits, and pieces of water, you would need a more durable motor. A larger and more powerful device will come at a higher cost but will solve the purpose efficiently.
Power Cord
If you have a single power point in the workshop, you would need a longer power cord. This might seem like a very petty thing to keep in mind, but in the long run, this happens to be crucial. A long power cord will ensure that you can move the device easily, and there is less risk of tripping over.
Battery
Having a battery-operated device is always beneficial. This will keep you prepared for any emergency or power cuts that you may face. Make a note of the number of power points you have in your workshop or home.
If you do not have too many, select a vac that is battery-operated. This will save you the hassle of a power cord altogether while giving you the same functionality.
Accessories
This is something you should pay attention to. Some of the essential accessories you are probably going to require are an extension wand, a crevice tool, and a detail brush. Make sure it is coming with the package
Also, there are different nozzles provided for different types of usage. See to it that the package includes this too. If not, buy them separately and then calculate the costs. Most vacs come with this basic set.
Storage
A vac with inbuilt storage is always beneficial. Look at how the accessories are to be stored as most machines will have onboard storage, which is beneficial. You would not want to keep the extensions separately as it leads to taking up more storage space.
Also, if you have a smaller workshop, it is easier to store the parts inside or along with the machine's body to save space.
Noise Level
If a vac makes too much noise, it can be a hindrance to your neighbors or your household members. Also, working at odd hours becomes difficult because of the fear of waking others up.l So it is best to select a machine that makes little to average noise. This will not only make it easier on your ears but will keep your neighbors happy too.
Verdict
We have finally reached the end of this guide and it is time to buy the best shop vac for your needs. This is a difficult choice to make, considering that all of these devices have their sets of advantages and disadvantages.
But if we had to choose our favorite, the Shop-Vac 5989500 is a clear winner with great tank size and easy portability. The engine is powerful, and the machine makes very little noise. It is a wonderful choice to make, and we were very happy with its remarkable features.
Coming to our other favorite, if you are looking for a device that works well as a vacuum as well as a leaf blower, the Vacmaster VFB511B0201 is a winner in this category. It is small and easily portable while it functions wonderfully.
It is time to gear up and order your favorite. Make work-life a tad bit easier with a vac of your choice.
Remember those painstaking days of sweeping driveways and yards with nothing but a broomstick, after a massive storm?
Who doesn’t? With that came quite a lot of back pain. And often a not-so-clean driveway, or whatever you wished to clear up. This is why when leaf blowers came to the scene, people left their brooms for good and embraced this nifty device!
What’s even more impressive is, the invention of this smart device led to the easy solution of hundreds of other jobs.
Well, let’s say, garage cleaning. Even a decent mid-range leaf blower can tidy up your garage or workspace, including all its tight corners almost as efficiently as vacuum cleaners. Or, have you ever tried cleaning your car with it? Do it sometime. It works wonders.
If we keep listing the utilities, we will be here for a while. And so, without any further ado, let’s begin with the reviews.
Most Powerful Leaf Blowers
From corded electric to battery-powered and gas-powered options, this list encompasses a range of models to suit different preferences and requirements. So, if you're ready to take your leaf-clearing game to the next level, here's the list of the 8 best leaf blowers that will make your outdoor maintenance a breeze.
Toro is one of the go-to brands when it comes to gardening equipment, and they’ve always remained true to their tagline. ‘Keeping yard work simple’ is something that each of their products adheres to, which is why we chose the 51621 model.
Let’s now find out whether this leaf blower can fulfill your needs.
Superior blowing and mulching proven by controlled...
Powerful up to 250 mph degree. 350 CFM blow mode and 410 CFM...
Why did we like it?
To begin with, the Ultra Plus Leaf Blower weighs around 9 lbs, which definitely can’t be considered lightweight. But what amazed us is its uniform weight distribution throughout the length of its body, which leads to minimum hand strain. Moreover, its 3-in-1 versatility of being a blower, a vacuum, and a mulcher is further enhanced by a maximum airspeed of 250 mph.
One thing to note is that you shouldn’t confuse this vacuum feature with the functioning of a vacuum cleaner. What this triplet combo does is, first, it blows the leaves, and with the vacuum option, you can suck them all into a bag. Finally, with the mulcher, you get to grind the leaves further, to make it ready for composting.
And the variable speed technology doubles down on the blowing process with the 3 specialized nozzles. Talking of which, the 3 nozzles comprise a power insert, a concentrator, and an oscillating nozzle. While the first is for optimum speed, the concentrator nozzle is narrower to create a more reliable flow of air, best suited for blowing the corners and crevices. The oscillating nozzle maneuvers the air from left to right, which increases the full blowing path.
And one last point about the mulching mechanism is it can reduce almost all the collected leaves into bits and pieces of 0.5 inches. So, overall, it’s a perfect leaf blower for households.
What could have been better?
First, let us tell you this is an excellent leaf blower. But we found some minor pitfalls with this product and one of them is the short cord length. So, to cover your entire garden area, you gotta buy an extension cord. Moreover, some people mentioned this device is too powerful for them to handle, as, at full throttle, it leaves the hands shaking.
Pros
Easy controls
Variable speed
Different nozzles for different speeds
Highly versatile
Leaf collection bag included
Cons
No extension cord included
Power Source: Corded | Motor Power: 12 A | Max Air Speed: 250 MPH | Airflow Cap.: 410 CFM | Weight: 8.9 lbs | Noise Level: 68 dB | Vacuum Function: Yes
If the previous model had a short cord and wiring issue, this brushless leaf blower from Greenworks has removed the hassle of cords altogether. And needless to say, this is one product the environmentalists would love.
The Greenworks Pro model takes a clear lead when it comes to choosing one of the most powerful cordless electric blowers. Well, no fossil fuel usage means zero carbon footprint, so you can rest assured you are doing absolutely no harm to the environment by taking home this axial blower.
Coming to its features, the device doesn’t have precise variable speeds, but 3-speed changing settings. And it’s noteworthy to mention that on speed 1 the battery will last for a generous 70 minutes, for speed 2 it’s up to 28 minutes of continuous runtime, and the highest speed works for only 12 minutes. We believe for most, the first-speed setting should suffice; and unless your lawn is covered with wet leaves, you don’t need to access the higher-speed settings.
The highest speed works excellently on corners and crevices of walls. Talking about speed, the maximum air velocity is 125 mph, while the airflow volume maxes out at 500 CFM. So, despite being a cordless model, we have very little room to doubt its performance.
Moreover, what’s even better is its noiseless operations. While most corded and cordless blowers make a hell lot of noise, Greenworks performs everything like a breeze at less than 60 dB. And powered with a quick-top-up battery, you’ll never get stuck in the middle of your leaf-blowing sessions due to lack of power shortage.
What could have been better?
Well, this is a pretty great model with ingenious technology. But here’s a minor error with the weight/size balancing ratio. The thing is, the batteries of this model are quite heavy, and the blower gets a bit dizzy in your hand once loaded. Still, with a little bit of maneuvering, you’ll get used to this minor disorder pretty soon. Nothing to worry too much about!
Pros
Brushless motor
Cordless
Lightweight
3-speed settings for versatility
Noise-free operations
Cons
Weight/size imbalance
Power Source: Battery | Motor Power: 80 V | Max Air Speed: 125 MPH | Airflow Cap.: 500 CFM | Weight: 8.9 lbs | Noise Level: 60 dB | Vacuum Function: No
Well, while we were reviewing those rugged, all-rounder snow blowers of this company, we wondered about their other outdoor home care products. And incidentally, we stumbled upon 2 Husqvarna models, which we have included in this list, each having its own USPs.
The 125B handheld blower is one of our favorites because of the optimal packaging of features in a mid-range model. Now, let’s find out whether this leaf blower can suit your needs.
The first aspect that caught our eye about the 125B model is its lightweight and compact build. It comes at a weight of mere 9. 4 lbs and is also considerably slimmer than other gas-powered models. Moreover, the blower tube is intricately designed to minimize stress on the hands by reducing the rotation force your wrist gotta apply. And as it’s quite lightweight, women and people with bone-degenerative diseases would love operating this device.
Coming to its other features, the model features an air volume of 425 CFM, which is more than what’s required to blow out not just leaves, but also twigs and sticks. And its 170 mph maximum speed is an expert at hitting out at any kind of debris with optimum force, careful not to spread the piled heaps and turn your garden into a further mess.
And finally, the blower comes with 2 different nozzles: one is circular, and the other is high-velocity. Additionally, you’ll also get a cruise control that maintains uniform speed throughout the operational time. This comes to great use when someone is blowing through a large area such as an estate or vast swathes of golf fields.
What could have been better?
We don’t know why Husqvarna left this fault in their design, but it’s really not that great for lefties. That’s because the fan is located on the right, and if you aren’t being careful and also a lefty, the blower will suck your clothes right in. We hope the 125B gets a fresh upgrade real soon. Otherwise, the world will miss out on a great leaf blower just because of this minor pitfall.
Pros
High max speed
Easy controls
Very lightweight
Minimum strain of hands and wrists
Very compact
Cons
Not suited for lefties
Power Source: Gas | Motor Power: 2.1 HP | Max Air Speed: 180 MPH | Airflow Cap.: 692.17 CFM | Weight: 22.5 lbs | Noise Level: 94 dB | Vacuum Function: No
Well, as promised, we are here with another model of Husqvarna. It’s a mid-range model that comes to great use because of its versatility. If you start listing all its features one by one (don’t worry, we’re here to do it for you), the product becomes all the more irresistible.
Its USP lies in the fact that it has an X Torq engine, which increases fuel efficiency and reduces harmful exhaust emissions.
Let’s start with the utility of the X Torq engine. Well, as the company comes with 325 years of designing homecare products, they always manage to come up with some ingenious technology or the other. And Husqvarna’s patented Torq engine works like a pro in minimizing gas usage and emissions by up to 60%. And consequently, the output increases by a decent 20%.
It wouldn’t be an exaggerated claim to make that this is one of the most fuel-efficient gas snow blowers currently on the market. What’s more, despite a weight of 22.5 lbs, the device has its weight distributed with utmost precision, and with the shoulder and waist straps, you won’t even feel anything weighing down on you while wearing the blower.
Talking about its speed, the air velocity maxes out at 215 mph, one of the highest among all the blowers we have reviewed thus far. And just like the 125B model, there are 2 nozzles here as well that can produce 431 and 191 CFM of air volume to suit a wide array of jobs. Moreover, with variable speed, cruise control, and auto-return stop switch, the smooth workflow that this model delivers is unparalleled.
What could have been better?
Errmm, noise! Too much noise from a robust little beast. It produces a significant amount of whirring sound, hitting close to 90 dB, and that’s a bit annoying. The 125 B model makes significantly less noise than this but lacks in versatility when compared with the 150BT. But you can overrule the noise factor by the rest of the features it has to offer.
Pros
Easy to start
Perfect ergonomic design
Variable speed
High maximum speed
Patented X Torq engine for reduced emissions
Cons
Difficult to assemble
Noise
Power Source: Gas | Motor Power: 2.1 HP | Max Air Speed: 251 MPH | Airflow Cap.: 434 CFM | Weight: 22.5 lbs | Noise Level: 94 dB | Vacuum Function: No
There’s a saying that no one gets more excited than a Spanish commentator when he sees a football about to reach the goal. And the same goes for us when we see Dewalt products. The thing about this company is not just about how renowned it is. The fact that it never ceases to improvise and invent brand-new technology is what fills us with wonder.
The XR Brushless blower is another popular product in the company’s long line of prestigious power, construction, and home care tools.
Battery operated leaf blower gets up to 400 CFM of air...
High-efficiency brushless motor maximizing run time and...
Why did we like it?
Honestly, when we saw Dewalt has come out with a brushless motor leaf blower, we instantly sought to review it. And sure enough, as expected from the company, the durability and efficiency of the motor are many times more than the other blowers in this price range. On top of that, what amazed us was its noise and gas-free operations with a smooth startup, just at the pull of a trigger.
Its lightweight design combines with the axial fan to regulate an air volume of 400 CFM and a maximum speed of 90 mph. Well, you may think this is quite lower than the other cordless blowers, but as it’s an axial fan, things are different here. If you aren’t aware, axial fans compensate for this low speed with its high flow rate.
One major point of departure from the other backpack models is its intelligent battery placement. We have seen even famous brands like Husqvarna failing to include this feature in their models. But Dewalt pushes through another step to balance the entire unit perfectly so that there is no hand and arm strain even after long hours of usage.
And talking about longer spans of work time, the cruise control feature maintains a constant speed quite efficiently.
What could have been better?
The difference between axial and centrifugal fans doesn’t show any significant change in their performance, except the fact that axial fans tend to be a bit on the noisier side. So, yeah, this model is a bit noisy, but the way it handles leaves entirely compensates for this pitfall. There is no question about the machine’s performance.
Pros
400 CFM power perfect for medium-sized patios, garages
Low maintenance
Gas-free
Large bow tube to cover a large area
Variable speed with speed lock
Cons
Noise
Power Source: Battery | Motor Power: 20 V | Max Air Speed: 90 MPH | Airflow Cap.: 400 CFM | Weight: 7.1 lbs | Noise Level: 61 dB | Vacuum Function: N/A
Like the Toro 51621 model, here we have another corded electric leaf blower from the legendary Black+Decker. Very few need a separate intro for the manufacturer as we all know how they earned and consistently kept the spotlight on themselves.
As they never fail to come out with some of the most user-friendly, technologically-advanced, high-end products, we thought to review one of their leaf blowers.
This 250 mph corded leaf blower blows through leaves and...
Disposable leaf bag system for easy, no hassle leaf...
Why did we like it?
Yeah, the 51621 Toro model matches quite a lot of features with this model. First of all, it’s a 3-in-1 blower-vacuum-mulcher model that will carefully tend to all your leaf-blowing needs. Second, it also comes with a collection bag, where the device collects all the mulched leaves after shredding them to pieces.
And to add to the user’s convenience, the secure tool-free mode changing facility allows swapping between blower and vacuum in seconds. What’s more, Black & Decker understands the hassle of wires, which is why they have included a built-in cord retainer to keep the extension in its place and enhance uninterrupted usage.
Furthermore, the 12-amp motor makes 50% less noise (according to company claims) and delivers an air volume of 385 CFM. This combines with a massive airspeed of 250 mph (with 2-speed selections) to clear out driveways, sidewalks, decks, and garages of all debris. Last but not least, the 2 speeds are for collecting flower beds and matted leaves, both of which demand different rates to ensure proper assembling of all debris.
Oh, the mulching feature! Well, this model will keep all your mulching needs at bay because it can mulch 16 bags of leaves down to 1. So, why waste money on fertilizers when Decker has you covered with perfectly ground 0.5” mulched leaves?
What could have been better?
We faced no performance issues with this product, as expected from the manufacturer. However, the collection bag is made of cloth, which is why it leaves a heck lot of dust behind. This is a serious downside because the soil will cover you from head to toe. So, keep some dust-resistant suits handy for the task.
Pros
3-in-1 model
Lightweight
Efficient mulching
High CFM
Low Noise
Cons
Collection bag leaves dust behind
Power Source: Corded | Motor Power: 12 A | Max Air Speed: 250 MPH | Airflow Cap.: 400 CFM | Weight: 8.1 lbs | Noise Level: 68 dB | Vacuum Function: Yes
Kobalt is another well-renowned company that has recently gained a lot of following among American households because of its durable homecare products. And when we saw that this leaf blower comes with a massive 630 CFM, we were frankly quite astonished. Instantly we checked the price tag, and that amazed us even more.
Check out this 80 V model from Kobalt, which pretty much fits the definition of convenience.
Well, like the Dewalt model, Kobalt also incorporates an axial fan in this cordless blower. This forms the very core of the high flow of the model, which is, as we mentioned before, 630 CFM. Moreover, this axial blower has an excellent runtime of 75 minutes on the lowest setting. The Greenworks model we chose has a runtime of 70 minutes, and Kobalt stretches it to a few more functional minutes, that too at a lower price.
Talking about its power, the 2.5 Ah battery hits the motor to give airflow of up to 140 mph, which perfectly suits heavy dirt, debris, and leaves of all sizes on most surfaces. So, driveways, patios, backyards, rooftops, this intelligent device covers them all!
Finally, with a variable speed trigger, the highly efficient brushless motor system provides excellent power and torque but with zero noise. What’s more, the lightweight design of 9 lbs moves like a feather in your hand, making all leaf-blowing and cleaning tasks a complete cakewalk.
To sum up, this is a device with straightforward controls, some great features of convenience, and extreme power.
What could have been better?
Although the battery proves its worth in the neutral mode, in the turbo settings, the juice drains out pretty quickly. This is one fault of the product, which caused a bit of annoyance, but considering the extensive CFM, it seems like a reasonable tradeoff.
Pros
Powerful brushless motor
Convenient controls
Very high CFM
Noise-free operation
Lightweight
Cons
The battery runs out fast in turbo mode
Power Source: Battery | Motor Power: 80 V | Max Air Speed: 140 MPH | Airflow Cap.: 630 CFM | Weight: 8.9 lbs | Noise Level: 74 dB | Vacuum Function: No
How is it that power tools or homecare products’ lists fail to accommodate a product from Worx? Ermm, nope. Their products are so compelling, they list only ‘Worx’ by including a Worx tool! And the manufacturer has proved its worth once again with this unique turbine leaf blower. Check out this model, and thank us later in the comments.
TURBINE FAN TECH: WORX engineers figured out how to get a...
TWICE AS FAST AS PRO BLOWERS: Professional-grade gas blowers...
Why did we like it?
Worx has made an outstanding entry into the world of leaf blowers with an insane turbine motor, the kind they put in jet engines. Well, what is it exactly? The motor comprises a hyper-stream nozzle and a dynamic flow design that can push a large amount of air at an extremely high velocity. This is the reason behind its impressive 600 CFM and maximum air velocity of 11 mph.
What the device lacks in speed, is well compensated by the outstanding air volume. Worx has set a benchmark with this motor type as it can shift huge piles of wet leaves from a distance of about 8 ft. Most leaf blowers of this price range would probably fail to achieve this feat.
We also like the fact that every aspect of this blower speaks of convenience. First, the 2 variable speeds cater to a clearing of tight corners and pavements as well as large, open lawns. Second, its lightweight build combines with the ergonomic single-handed operation to reduce any chance of difficulty during all blowing activities.
And the hyper stream nozzle has another function, which is to concentrate all the air volume into a specific area of a smaller radius. This increases the leaf-clearing efficiency a lot more than the other models of this price range.
What could have been better?
The only pitfall that we found about this trailblazing model is its short cord length. Being a corded model has this disadvantage, but we think everything can be accommodated when a turbine jet engine motor enters the scene!
Pros
Excellent CFM
Very convenient
Super-fast assembling
Lightweight 6 lbs design
Cons
Corded
Power Source: Corded | Motor Power: 12 A | Max Air Speed: 110 MPH | Airflow Cap.: 600 CFM | Weight: 7.2 lbs | Noise Level: 75 dB | Vacuum Function: No
These high-performing leaf blowers have been carefully shortlisted from a wide array of products. And if you’ve gone through tool-hunting before, you must have an inkling of what lies in store! Out there, in the market or on the web, it’s difficult to find any difference between the marketing strategies of various companies.
More often than not, false claims overwhelm you before getting time to think about the specific needs which inspired the search in the first place. This is why we wanted to skim through the few basic features one needs to keep in mind. If none of the products from this list suit your needs, read these few guidelines, and then hop into the market.
CFM
Here’s what you need to know about this characteristic: the higher, the better. But that’s what they tell you as well, right? Well, CFM stands for Cubic Feet per Minute, and it’s the central choosing criteria for leaf blowers. It’s a measure of the amount of air the device can blow in a single minute, and a higher CFM ensures your leaf-blowing process is not just neat but smooth as well.
MPH
Many fancy marketing gimmicks carefully brush past the CFM and show the MPH instead. No doubt, the MPH factor is an important one, but not more than CFM.
Anyway, that being said, as you must be knowing, MPH stands for mile per hour. In other words, it’s an indicator of the force with which the device will push the leaves, and with increasing MPH, the power increases as well.
But here’s the catch. If a device has a large pushing capacity (more MPH) but doesn’t have enough air (CFM) to push the leaves, it actually lowers the productivity of the blower.
So, always keep in mind to have a delicate balance between these two factors. And once you get the hang of these 2 aspects, the rest of it is a cakewalk.
Looking for comprehensive kits
We always advise people to look for those blowers that come with a waist and shoulder strap, different types of nozzles, and of course, a long hose. Moreover, if you’re looking at wired models, make sure you buy one that has a long cord or one with durable extension facilities.
The focus should be on what eases your job the most, and other than the device, these small parts go a long way in fulfilling your convenience quotient.
Powerful Leaf Blowers FAQ's
What types of leaf blowers are available?
Leaf blowers are available in three main types: gas-powered, electric corded, and battery-powered. Gas-powered leaf blowers provide high power and mobility but require gasoline and emit exhaust fumes. Electric corded leaf blowers offer consistent power but require access to an electrical outlet. Battery-powered leaf blowers are portable and eco-friendly but may have slightly lower power and limited battery life.
Are leaf blowers noisy?
Leaf blowers can produce varying levels of noise depending on their power source and design. Gas-powered leaf blowers tend to be the loudest, followed by corded electric blowers. Battery-powered blowers are generally quieter. It’s important to follow local noise regulations and consider using hearing protection when operating a leaf blower.
Can leaf blowers be used for other tasks besides clearing leaves?
Yes, leaf blowers can be versatile tools that can assist with other tasks. They can be used to clear grass clippings, remove light snow, clean debris from gutters, and even aid in drying surfaces. Some models offer attachments or functions that allow them to convert into vacuums or mulchers for collecting and shredding leaves.
Are leaf blowers environmentally friendly?
Gas-powered leaf blowers can have negative environmental impacts due to noise pollution, exhaust emissions, and fuel consumption. Electric leaf blowers, both corded and battery-powered, are generally more environmentally friendly as they produce zero emissions during use. Battery-powered leaf blowers are the most eco-friendly option, especially if powered by renewable energy sources.
Can leaf blowers cause damage to surfaces or plants?
Improper use of leaf blowers can potentially cause damage to delicate surfaces, such as fragile plants, flowers, or mulch beds. To minimize the risk, adjust the blower’s power settings, avoid directing the air stream directly at plants, and maintain a safe distance from fragile objects. It’s important to follow the manufacturer’s instructions and exercise caution when using a leaf blower.
Can I use a leaf blower to remove wet leaves or debris?
Most leaf blowers are designed to handle dry leaves and debris more effectively. While some models may have the power to handle light moisture, it is generally recommended to avoid using leaf blowers for wet or heavy debris as it can clog the blower and reduce its performance. Wet leaves are often best removed manually or with a specialized vacuum attachment.
Conclusion
We are at the end of this extended piece and have a hunch that at least one of these listed products would suit your needs.
But, we also understand that choosing from a wide array of equally compelling choices is not just confusing, but a painstaking task. The worst part is, anxiety creeps in because we’re always apprehensive about getting our hands on the ‘best’ product.
So, here’s our final verdict for the day.
If you’re looking at decent-budget models, the Worx model is a clear winner due to its extensive leaf-blowing capacity and insane technology. But the Dewaltand Black & Decker models aren’t a lot behind and impressed us with their unique features. Still, Worx blew us away!
And among the high-end models, we’d choose the Husqvarna 150 BTmodel due to its unique X Torq engine that maximizes productivity and minimizes fuel consumption.
We hope you found this extensive guide pretty useful. Tell us if there’s anything that we missed or any trending product that you’d like us to review. All in the comments!
Are you looking for an economical heating option that warms you up, but doesn’t hurt the pocket?
Space heaters are one of the best alternatives when it comes to heating requirements. More energy efficient than centralized systems, space heaters are a great choice when adding that extra layer of heat to your home or workspace.
But with a mind-boggling collection of heaters out there, it can become challenging to choose the right one. So to help you with that task, here’s a list of the eleven most energy-efficient space heaters you can consider in 2024.
And what’s more, we’ve also included a lengthy buyers’ guide that can help you make the right choice among the ones listed. So stick around till the end.
Let’s not wait anymore and dive right in!
Best Energy Efficient Space Heaters
Whether you need a heater for your home office, bedroom, or living room, these heaters have been chosen for their exceptional energy efficiency ratings and positive customer reviews. Without further ado, here's the list of the 11 best energy-efficient space heaters to keep you warm while being mindful of your energy consumption.
Mr. Heater’s reputation precedes it, and the MH9BX is no exception. With a sleek design, red-black color scheme, and portable form factor, this is one heater that ticks all the right boxes. And it runs on propane, which makes it more cost-effective.
The first thing that caught our eye regarding this model is that it runs on propane. This promises independence from electricity grids and usability in the face of power outages. It’s also an excellent solution for outdoor use.
Operating the device is easy due to the presence of a simple rotary knob and the Piezo ignition button. The device is completely portable and has a foldable handle that makes transportation and storage a simple matter. Further, the ceramic burner tiles installed on shock-absorbing insulation allow the device to handle any shock received during transport.
But perhaps the defining feature of this unit is the automatic safety mode, which includes auto-shutoff features in the event of being tipped over. The unit also has a low oxygen safety shutoff, and an auto-shutoff mechanism in case the pilot light goes out. It further boasts of a high-temperature wire guard.
What Could’ve Been Better?
In this otherwise excellent product, two points of concern stood out for us. The first is that the device doesn’t come with a thermostat that allows one to control the temperature; the second is that none of the controls of this unit are digital. But if you choose to look past these two relatively minor points, this is one of the best heaters money can buy.
Pros
Multiple heating modes
Excellent safety features
Powered by propane
Suitable for use anywhere
Cons
No thermostat for temperature control
Heating Technology: Radiant | Heat Output (BTU): 4,000 - 9,000 | Heating Area (sq. ft.): Up to 225 | Oscillation: No | Timer: No | Remote Control: No | Safety Features: Oxygen depletion sensor, Tip-over protection
Lasko is yet another brand that comes with a positive reputation, and the ceramic series doesn’t disappoint. With designer looks, an ornate stand, and multiple operating modes, this is one heater you certainly want to consider.
The Lasko model is one of the most competitively priced units on the market and comes with built-in safety features that caught our fancy. The unit provides three temperature settings that allow you to adjust the level of heat you desire. To make things even more efficient, it uses a ceramic heating element for heating large spaces.
The most noticeable feature of this unit is its outstanding designer looks. A far cry from traditional box-type heaters, this model proves that a space heater needn’t be boring. The ceramic jar shape accentuates the elegance of the model, while the ornate stand adds a dash of old-world charm. Couple that with the four available modes of operation, and you’ve got a real winner here.
The unit can be operated using electronic controls or via remote, and the digital thermostat makes things more efficient. This means you don’t have to get off the sofa to change settings. The device also has an auto-shutdown feature that comes into action in case of overheating. And we’d like to mention that though the unit has a wide heating range, it’s surprisingly noiseless for a device of such power.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This model gets full marks from us except for the fact that, unlike the MH9BX, this one doesn’t have a tip-over shutoff feature. Other than that, there’s nothing else to detract you from purchasing this beauty.
For those of you searching for a space heater that’s also pretty cool, the Dyson AM09 is the one to go with. The stunning design, brilliant colors, and unique features make this unit one of the most coveted heaters in the market. And what’s more, it can act as a cooler as well, so you actually get two for the price of one.
Year-round use: quickly heats the whole room in winter with...
Patented Air Multiplier technology effectively projects...
Why Did We Like It?
Like every Dyson product, this device comes with patented technology that promises the best service all the year-round. The heater has an extensive range and operates quickly to heat any space within a small amount of time, while the powerful fan cools you down during those scorching summer months.
Safety and efficiency are the hallmarks of this product, and we don’t mean it lightly. There are no exposed heating elements that can lead to accidents, and the device automatically shuts down when it is tipped over. It also scores on the efficiency front through the use of an intelligent thermostat, which monitors the ambient temperature and adjusts the heating levels accordingly.
But that’s not all! The AM09 also features a sleep timer, and a handy remote control, and also comes with a Quiet Mark Accreditation. Overall, a device worth the buy.
What Could’ve Been Better?
There really can be nothing to complain about a product as fantastic as this, but if you ask us, the price tag is a bit steep for regular buyers. However, with so many features that’s only to be expected. Bear in mind that this is a heater as well as a cooler, so the price point is justified.
If efficiency is the crux of your search, then De’Longhi is one of the brands you should definitely consider. The HMP1500 Mica uses micathermic technology to quickly and efficiently heat any surroundings. This makes it one of the most cost-effective heaters on the market.
QUIET HEATER - Best for medium and large rooms, the...
MAXIMIZE EFFICIENCY - This De’Longhi heater converts 100%...
Why Did We Like It?
The first thing that catches your eye about this model is its slim look. Room heaters are generally known to be bulky devices, but this one is slim enough to slip into a backpack. But that doesn’t mean it compromises on quality. The device uses a dual combination of convection as well as radiation and reaches the maximum operating temperature in about a minute.
The HMP1500 has triple heat settings that offer you the flexibility of choice. The two power modes allow you to control the amount of electricity consumed, and the thermostat monitors the room temperature and adjusts according to your specifications.
Coming back to the thinness of the product, it’s the micathermic technology that holds credit for the ultra-thin design of the product. This makes it simple to pack, store, and transport. To further facilitate moving this product, there is a set of wheels that allow it to be slid easily from place to place.
Apart from ease of transport and efficiency, De’Longhi doesn’t compromise on the safety side of things. The device comes with a thermal cutoff to prevent overheating, and there’s an automatic tip-over function that guards against accidents. The unit also flaunts power and caution indicator lights for extra protection.
What Could’ve Been Better?
In spite of the slim design, the device is surprisingly heavy. This makes the use of the wheels a necessity when moving the unit from one location to another.
Pros
Multiple heat settings
Super-thin design
Overheating protection
Automatic tip-over switch
Cons
Slightly Heavy
Heating Technology: Mica | Heat Output (BTU): 1,500 | Heating Area (sq. ft.): Up to 300 | Oscillation: No | Timer: No | Remote Control: No | Safety Features: Thermal cutoff, Tip-over switch
This is perhaps the cheapest device on this list, and also the smallest. But don’t go judging it by these two parameters. The UberHeat Ceramic Heater from Honeywell is a powerful little beast that can heat up a room in a jiffy. Don’t believe us? Just take a look below.
ENERGY EFFICIENT HEAT: The UberHeat Ceramic Heater offers...
EASY TO USE: Ideal for tabletop or floor placement, this...
Why Did We Like It?
As mentioned before, this model is compact and lightweight, so it can be moved from one room to another with ease. But surprisingly, it delivers a sufficient quantity of heat wherever it is placed. The powerful 1500-watt heating system is responsible for this stellar performance, and that won our hearts over, just as the price won over our pockets.
The device comes with dual low-wattage heat settings and a programmable thermostat that can deliver the exact temperature that you desire. On the looks front, the device has a compact feel and stands almost alarm-clock-like on two non-slip rubber feet. The housing is plastic but doesn’t get heated one bit in spite of prolonged use.
Finally, safety has been made a top priority of this product. The device features overheat auto-shutoff as well as 360-degree tip-over protection that shields the unit from damage. And the energy-efficient settings contribute towards lowering your power bills. So it’s a win-win deal for anyone.
What Could’ve Been Better?
After seeing such exquisite products as the Lasko and Dyson series on this list previously, the simple black-and-white appearance of this product might seem a bit bland. But we don’t want that to dissuade you from buying this otherwise fantastic product.
Pros
Powerful heating function
Programmable thermostat
Auto shutoff and tip-over protection
Easy to store and transport
Cons
A bit low on the design quotient
Heating Technology: Radiant | Heat Output (BTU): 1,500 | Heating Area (sq. ft.): Up to 150 | Oscillation: No | Timer: No | Remote Control: No | Safety Features: Overheat protection, Tip-over switch
We are back again with another stellar product from the house of De’Longhi, and it doesn’t get any better than this. A fully functional radiator-based heater, this device simply epitomizes the concept of efficient heating and maintenance-free operations.
Digital control panel with LED display for easy selection...
De'Longhi Exclusive: 75% more radiant surface area than...
Why Did We Like It?
The very first thing that’s noticeable about this product is the patented, high-quality steel chassis that houses the unit. This makes the device extremely durable, and as a result, it requires very little maintenance.
The design of the housing is also unique in that it features thermal slots that maximize heat flow into the surroundings, and at the same time, prevent the unit from getting warmed up. With 1500 watts of pure heating power, you can expect every corner of your space to get heated to perfection.
The device comes with an electronic display that records and shows the ambient temperature. Also, the adjustable thermostat allows up to three heat settings that give you the freedom to customize your heating profile.
As far as safety is concerned this unit scores full marks. The thermal shutoff works flawlessly to prevent overheating, and the permanently sealed oil reservoir never needs refilling. So that’s one less thing you have to worry about. And finally, the entire arrangement comes on top of a four-wheel assembly, so moving the device around is simply a matter of rolling it along.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Again, we’d like to mention that this De’Longhi product too is heavier than it looks, so the wheels are required. Also, the price point is a bit too high, but that’s only expected, given the premium quality of the product.
Yet another product from Lasko, the 5586 tower heater heats as good as it looks, maybe even better. Offering 1500 watts of heating capacity, this one is the perfect blend of form and function. With a sleek, futuristic design and fully digital controls, this is a product to watch out for.
CUSTOMIZABLE COMFORT WITH QUIET OPERATION: Choose from 2...
Why Did We Like It?
Lasko prides itself on efficiency and safety, and this device ticks the boxes in both aspects. The ceramic heating element houses built-in safety features that guarantee peace of mind, and the programmable thermostat with an easy, eight-hour timer makes for a smooth operation. Add to that an elongated heating element, wide oscillating area, and deep penetrating push velocity to drive the heat, and you’ve got the perfect device for the purpose.
Coming back to the safety features, the self-regulating safety ceramic element and cool-touch housing provide protection from accidents. Further, the electronic control panel makes adjusting the setting on this unit a breeze. And if you feel too lazy to get up and do the needful, there’s always the remote to use.
What Could’ve Been Better?
One of the important features that we couldn’t find on this device is the auto-shutoff, which we feel should have been incorporated. Other than that, there’s nothing that should prevent you from going with this option.
As far as portable heaters go, Dr. Infrared is a trusted brand and is very popular with customers. The heater uses infrared technology to warm up your space and hence is incredibly energy efficient. It also comes with a range of other nifty features, as listed below.
Can heat up a large room with Auto Energy Saving Model With...
Dual Heating Systems featuring infrared quartz tube + PTC...
Why Did We Like It?
With a vintage radio-like theme and visible electronic display, this heater does its job superbly. The model has an excellent heat distribution system that spreads the warmth across a wide space effectively and efficiently.
A significant difference between other room heaters and this unit is that while most heaters heat the air in a room, this product works by heating individual objects. The ambient heat from the objects then contributes to the overall temperature. This results in significant power savings in the long run.
Besides infrared heating, this model also comes with excellent safety features. There are no exposed heating elements, so it’s perfectly safe to use around children. Also, it has a tip-over protection system and overheats guard that makes it doubly safe.
Apart from the above, the model boasts of a dual heating system, a programmable timer, and remote-controlled settings. Add to that the super-quiet operation, and you’ve got the perfect heater for your home.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This is one room heater where anyone would be hard-pressed to find a fault, with so much packed into it. But the very feature-richness of the device adds to its bulk, and makes this unit take up considerable space. But considering the fact it has wheels attached, portability shouldn’t be a problem.
Pros
Infrared heating technology
Digital thermostat
Multiple heating modes
Noise-free operation
Cons
Slightly bulky device
Heating Technology: Infrared | Heat Output (BTU): 5,200 | Heating Area (sq. ft.): Up to 1,000 | Oscillation: No | Timer: Yes | Remote Control: Yes | Safety Features: Overheat protection, Tip-over protection
This model from LifeSmart Offers you safe and secure heating for larger rooms. Perfect for big houses or office spaces, this heater uses infrared quartz elements to provide all-around heating. Efficient, effective, and pocket-friendly, this heater is yet another stellar product that you can consider buying.
3 heat settings: 1,000w / 1,500w / and ECO-maintains a...
Why Did We Like It?
The defining feature of this product is the infrared heating technology that warms up even large office spaces in a short while, yet saves on the electricity bill. The device has three different heat settings that can be used as per your requirements and a 12-hour start-stop timer for extra control.
Further, the unit comes with a remote-controlled digital thermostat that can be used to change heat settings without you having to get up. It also houses a lifetime washable filter and an Eco Setting that uses only 500 watts to heat a smaller space.
Finally, the entire arrangement is housed in a stylish metal cabinet that doesn’t get heated despite the ambient temperature. And as the device uses infrared heat, no fuel residue leaves a significant carbon footprint. And unlike other convection heaters, it doesn’t dry out the air, thus preserving atmospheric moisture.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Because it packs so many unique features in a single unit, this product is a heavy one. And while we do wish that it were lighter, we are grateful for the EZ Glide casters that make moving the unit a simple task.
As we near the end of this list, we are going to present you with two options from either end of the price spectrum. Our first choice is the ceramic space heater from Brightown which comes with a modest price tag. But that doesn’t mean it’s low on features, as the following sections will make clear.
Superior blowing and mulching proven by controlled...
Powerful up to 250 mph degree. 350 CFM blow mode and 410 CFM...
Why Did We Like It?
This portable heater epitomizes value for money; it comes with three heating modes (High Heat/Low Heat/Cool Blow) that give you year-long operation. Quiet and powerful, the soothing, radiant heat that this device provides is calming as well as comfortable.
The compact dimensions of this device make it ideal for both indoor as well as outdoor use, so camping nights needn’t be cold anymore. You can also use it in an office setting as the noise level is very low and will not cause any disturbance.
And finally, despite the low price point, this device does not compromise on safety. It offers both over-heat as well as tip-over protection, and this makes it an ideal choice for domestic environments. And as far as efficiency goes, you can rest assured that your bills will be lighter when you use this product.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The only thing we wish this device had was an included remote control; that would’ve made things easier. But at this range, you certainly can’t expect the entire world. Still, it doesn’t hurt to wish, does it?
Pros
Adjustable thermostat
Lightweight and portable
Multiple heat settings
Excellent safety features
Cons
No remote control
Heating Technology: Radiant | Heat Output (BTU): 1,500 | Heating Area (sq. ft.): Up to 200 | Oscillation: No | Timer: No | Remote Control: No | Safety Features: Overheat protection, Tip-over protection
This is as advanced as room heaters get. This Heat Storm model is WiFi-enabled so that you can control and change the heater settings right from the comfort of your smartphone. You can also monitor room temperature and make adjustments accordingly. Now you don’t have to return to a cold house anymore! But wait, that’s not all.
(Wall Mounted Heater Only.) Wi-Fi enabled makes it possible...
Tip-Over safety shut off, Touch screen with digital...
Why Did We Like It?
The heater delivers a whopping 1500 watts of power, which allows you to heat a 300 square feet area as a primary heat source. The device can act as a supplemental heat source and can quickly warm up to 750 square feet. The infrared technology of this unit allows smooth and even heating, and doesn’t leave a significant carbon footprint.
And it’s also wall-mounted, which means there’s no need to occupy floor space. This makes it perfect for both home and office environments, where placing a large heater might become cumbersome.
Finally, the unit also has excellent safety features; the grill is safe to touch, and the body and walls do not heat up even after prolonged use. So it can be safely installed in homes where there are kids.
What Could’ve Been Better?
There isn’t much to find wrong with this product, but still, we’d have preferred it if the price tag had been a bit lower. But since this is almost a smart device that’s internet-enabled, we’re sure you wouldn’t mind parting with a few extra bucks.
Pros
WiFi connectivity
Wall-mount design
Advanced safety features
Infrared heating element
Cons
A tad on the expensive side
Heating Technology: Infrared | Heat Output (BTU): 5200 | Heating Area (sq. ft.): Up to 150 | Oscillation: No | Timer: Yes | Remote Control: Yes | Safety Features: Overheat protection, Tip-over protection, WiFi connectivity
Best Energy Efficient Space Heaters Comparison Table
Buying Guide For The Best Energy-Efficient Space Heater
So now you know all about the thirteen most energy-efficient space heaters of the year...but does it mean you should go out and get one? Even thirteen is a sizable number to choose from, and you are sure to have trouble deciding which one to go with.
To help you along that path, we’ve got the following buyers’ guide that is sure to come in handy when making the decision. This guide will help you to understand the many factors that you should keep in mind while choosing the right heater for your purposes. It’ll also clear some details about the finer points of room heaters.
So, let’s start!
The Room Size
The first thing that you need to keep in mind when choosing a room heater is the size of the room where you will be using it. The room size plays a crucial role in determining the energy efficiency and heating effect of your device. So before you settle on that room heater, take the time to consider the dimensions of the room, and make the choice accordingly.
Once you know the size of the area that you are going to heat, check out the wattage of the heater. Typically, a room heater uses 10 watts of power to heat each square foot of space. So once you know the room size and the heater wattage, it’s merely a matter of basic math to calculate whether a particular model will suit you or not.
Keep in mind that the above is only a general rule, and heating capacities vary based on the type of technology that the heater uses as well. This is what we are going to discuss next.
Type Of Heater
The next important factor to consider while settling on a heater is the kind of heating technology the heater uses. And while multiple heater styles can be found, typically every heater falls under one of the following four categories:
Convection heaters, provide uniform, large-area heating.
Radiant heaters, provide targeted heating and are more suited for smaller spaces.
Fan Heaters, which use an internal fan to circulate the heat.
Micathermic heaters provide all-around, energy-efficient heating and also economize on space.
Based on your needs, the type of heater that you choose will vary.
Also, another factor that you should consider is whether you need to get a floor heater or a wall-mounted heater. Standing heaters are usually bulky and take up a lot of space, but they are portable and can be moved from one room to another. So if you are looking for a portable option, then you can easily go with this variant.
If, however, you are looking to save floor space, then you should opt for a wall-mounted variety, such as the Heat Storm or Steibel models on our list. These are usually attached to the wall and hence offer significant space savings. Perfect for homes or offices with a lot of furniture.
Safety Aspects
Unless heaters are properly monitored, they can quickly turn into hazards at home. Hence, the safety features are something that you should always pay special attention to. Look for features such as cool-to-the-touch surfaces, automatic shutoff in case of tipping, and overheat sensors.
These components are essential not only for the safety of the device but also of your property and loved ones. If safety is the top factor on your mind, then you can go with Brightown, Duraflame, or De’Longhi, to name a few.
The Noise Levels
Being the electrical appliances that they are, heaters often emit a considerable amount of noise. While almost all heater models give off a particular volume of sound, some models are notorious racket makers. Noise is usually a severe irritant in the boardroom as well as the bedroom, so the place where you plan to use it should determine your tolerance level.
Usually, fan-based heaters are known as noise-makers, so if you are using the heater in an office environment, be sure to go with a baseboard heater or an oil-filled radiator as these make less noise. But if you are looking for a fan heater minus the noise, then go with the Stiebel Eltron model on our list.
Energy Efficiency
This, of course, has been the common thread in our discussion. If you are concerned about energy conservation and want to save on the power bill, be sure to compare energy efficiency figures before making the decision.
Energy efficiency is determined by two primary factors: the heating technology that your heater uses and the dimensions of the room where you are going to use the device. However, additional features such as multiple heating modes that allow you to conserve energy can also contribute towards energy efficiency.
Other add-ons such as programmable thermostats, adjustable timers, and low-wattage heating can also contribute towards lowering power costs.
Fuel Type
Finally, the last and most vital factor that you should consider while choosing the right heater for your purposes is the type of fuel used. While the term ‘heater’ invariably brings the electric variety to our minds, there are, nonetheless, different makes of heaters available. Some of these are discussed below.
Electric heaters are the most common type of heaters that are used. Simple to use, these can be run from your home or office power supply, or even on rechargeable batteries. Some models can also be integrated with your centralized heating system. Electric heaters are the most energy-efficient and least polluting of the lot.
But if you are looking for a cheap option, then go with propane heaters, such as the Mr. Heater model mentioned above. The great advantage of propane heaters is that they don’t need to be used near a power source; this makes them perfect for outdoor use.
Energy Efficient Space Heaters FAQ's
How do energy-efficient space heaters save energy?
Energy-efficient space heaters incorporate various features and technologies to save energy. These include programmable timers that allow you to set specific operating hours, thermostats that regulate temperature and prevent overheating, and advanced heating elements that deliver efficient heat output. Additionally, some models have built-in sensors to detect when the desired temperature is reached, automatically turning off or reducing power consumption.
Are energy-efficient space heaters cost-effective?
Yes, energy-efficient space heaters are designed to be cost-effective in the long run. While they may have a higher upfront cost compared to conventional heaters, their energy-saving features help reduce electricity consumption, leading to lower energy bills. By heating only the specific areas or rooms you need, energy-efficient space heaters allow you to reduce overall heating costs in your home or office.
Can energy-efficient space heaters be used as the primary heating source?
Energy-efficient space heaters can be used as a primary heating source for smaller spaces or individual rooms. However, they may not be suitable for heating an entire home or large areas. It’s important to consider factors such as the size of the space, insulation, and climate conditions when determining if an energy-efficient space heater can adequately serve as the primary heating source.
Can energy-efficient space heaters help reduce carbon footprint?
Yes, energy-efficient space heaters can contribute to reducing your carbon footprint. By consuming less energy compared to traditional heaters, they help conserve resources and reduce greenhouse gas emissions associated with electricity generation. Choosing energy-efficient models with eco-friendly features, such as timers and programmable settings, further enhances their environmental impact by optimizing energy usage.
Conclusion
Thank you for reading our comprehensive article on the best energy-efficient space heaters. We hope it has given you some valuable insights and helped you figure out the best option for your needs. After thoroughly analyzing various factors, we've narrowed down our top three recommendations.
Out of these 11 best Energy-Efficient Space Heaters, here are our top three recommendations:
1. Mr. Heater MH9BX Buddy is an ideal option for those who prioritize safety features, portability, and a heating solution that runs on propane. The automatic safety mode, foldable handle, and ceramic burner tiles make this heater incredibly convenient for both indoor and outdoor use.
2. Lasko Ceramic Designer Series is a good option for anyone who wants an energy-efficient heater that also boasts a sophisticated design. In addition to multiple heating modes and a digital thermostat, this model stands out with its elegant ceramic jar shape, beautifully accented by an ornate stand.
3. Dyson AM09 Fan Heater is the right choice for those seeking a versatile and stylish heater-cooler combo. With patented technology, a sleep timer, a remote control, and a Quiet Mark Accreditation, the AM09 delivers fantastic performance all year round.
Your satisfaction is our priority, and we genuinely hope that your choice among these space heaters brings you the perfect blend of warmth, energy efficiency, and design. We appreciate you taking the time to explore our recommendations and wish you a cozy and comfortable experience with your new energy-efficient space heater!
What better way to relax and unwind than swinging on a hammock on a summer evening? If this is on your mind, read on!
We have listed down our favorites when it comes to hammocks with intricate details mentioning the advantages of buying each and what it is meant for. Choosing the one that fits you and your needs will not be an issue anymore.
Be it a hammock needed for camping purposes or one that you want as a part of the decor in the house, we have got multiple options! Get surfing and take a step towards being the proud owners of a hammock as you skim through the list of the best hammocks to swing in 2024.
Most Comfortable Hammocks
Get ready to elevate your lounging experience and embrace the blissful embrace of these exceptional hammocks. Here's the list of the 7 best comfortable hammocks.
If you are looking for a travel-friendly hammock that would fit easily into a bag, the Eagles Nest Outfitters hammock is for you. Be it taking a vacation on a boat, heading out on a hike in the mountains, or exploring the wilderness, this hammock is going to be your best option.
Ready for some me time: The SingleNest is the perfect...
Adventure ready: Weighing only 16 ounces, the SingleNest...
Why did we like it?
We loved the parachute design of this hammock. Made with high-strength breathable 70T high-tenacity nylon taffeta, this product is sturdy with a capacity of 400 lbs and dries off quickly in case you face a sudden downpour. So, there is no need to worry about unexpected spills because the hammock will dry before you know it.
Those days are gone when you would take an hour to set up a hammock. Now it is quick and convenient, making it feel like a breeze!
Talking of convenience, equipped with a compression stuff sack, the hammock can be packed off easily and rolled into a softball. It can fit into your luggage or rucksack, thus making it perfect for traveling and hiking.
When the roads are long, and you are tired, what better way to relax than on a hammock letting the breeze play with your hair? This is the exact feeling we got when we took this hammock with us on our hike.
What could have been better?
The product comes in 24 color shades, thus giving one a lot of options to choose from, but the color combinations may vary from the image provided online. Therefore you may not get the exact shade you want.
Also, the hammock straps did not come with the product, and we had to buy it separately.
Pros
Can hold up to 400 lbs
Strong aluminum Carabiners
Quick-drying material
Compression sack makes it easily portable
24 color choices
Cons
Straps not included
Material: Nylon | Weight Capacity: 400 lbs | Dimensions (L x W): 9' 4" x 4' 7" | Suspension System: Attached carabiners | Spreader Bars: No
This hammock is our choice when it comes to relaxing in utter comfort. Feel the solace of sleeping on a swinging bed when you want to spend a lazy day in the backyard with a glass of your favorite drink. The hammock is known for its ‘cocoon’ effect making it one of the most comfortable choices in this list.
No products found.
Why did we like it?
Made with high-quality colorfast 65% cotton thread and 35% polyester, this product could be left outdoors without any issues as they are easily washable and dries off quickly. It could survive for years outside in your backyard and still look new. Also, it is fashionable and becomes a pretty nice addition to your decor.
Coming to how much the hammock can take, it has a 475 lb capacity, which is pretty much a lot, and we did not need to worry about a collapse.
Also, the bed resting area, which is 98 inches long and 59 inches wide, provides enough space for one to roll over while on the hammock. We could easily fit in books and a lunch bag with us on the hammock. You can get your kids or your pet too since they are easily cleanable and dry off quickly. One does not need to worry about any sort of soiling.
What could have been better?
It took us a while to get the hammock to accommodate two people. The hammock needs time to stretch, and it took us two weeks to do so.
Also, the hammock cannot be machine-washed and needs to be washed by hand. But again, one can easily remove spills and you can only wash the specific area instead of washing it completely.
Pros
Can take up to 475 lbs
Free bag provided
Extremely comfortable
Soft colorplast cotton fabric
Child and pet-friendly
Cons
Cannot be machine-washed
Is not made of waterproof material
Material: Cotton | Weight Capacity: 400 lbs | Dimensions (L x W): 10' x 5' | Suspension System: Included ropes | Spreader Bars: No
Imagine taking a day off to laze in the sun with your partner or cozy up in the evening by the fireside on a hammock; the Lazy Daze Double hammock is the perfect choice to make. Be it a romantic evening or a day of snuggling with a book; this hammock is the coziest choice in the market.
Lazy Daze Hammock Combo, the weather-resistant double...
Self standing hammock stand is constructed of heavy duty...
Why did we like it?
We couldn’t resist the soft 100% weather-resistant cotton/canvas fabric with which this hammock is made with. The supple fabric made it a treat to lie down in. Also, the material is strong and durable, and it could take up to 450 lbs weight.
You don’t need to stress about trees to tie the hammock to because this one comes with two sturdy ropes, which can be linked to two 9 feet heavy rods. The gauges are weather and rust-resistant, and even if you leave it outside, the body will remain as shiny as ever.
The stands are lightweight and easily portable, thus making it easier for you to handle them and move them whenever needed.
The hammock comes in 12 different shades and designs, and we chose our favorite according to our backyard decor, you can do so too.
What could have been better?
The hammock is massive, and the additional gauges make the package bulky if you are looking to transfer it or take it on a trip. This hammock works best if you buy it for your home, but it may not be a viable choice to make if you are a frequent traveler.
Are you a person who equally enjoys chilling in your front yard or watching the stars from your private patio? Do you enjoy traveling to different places? Whichever you choose, this is the best choice available in the market. With its versatile design and features, all you need to do is set it up for a beautiful and comforting experience.
Cozy & Spacious: Made from 100% USA-sourced cotton, the...
Heavy-Duty & Durable: The 9-foot stand is constructed from...
Why did we like it?
We were amazed by the materials used to make the Vivere Tropical Double hammock. You could choose from 100% cotton, polyester, or Sunbrella fabric, all of which are of supreme quality, and it feels lovely to lie down on. The fabric is tightly woven with 100% extra thick and soft material, which provides additional comfort and like the previous option, it can take up to 450 lbs.
We were so excited about the stands which came with the hammock as we did not have proper trees to tie the hammock to in our front porch. The legs are zinc coated for extra strength and are rust-resistant.
The space here is also large enough for two people to fit in. It is kids friendly too as it is easily washable, so you can leave your kids and pets to play on the hammock.
Talking about the colors, the hammocks come in 12 different shades and designs, which are pretty attractive.
What could have been better?
The weight is a bit of an issue as it is bulky, considering it comes with gauges. Although there are hooks provided for easy convenience, it can be a little tricky to attach the rope to the hooks. The price of the product is on the expensive side, but you are paying for supreme quality making it worth the price.
Pros
Available in three variants
Space-saving steel stand
Strong zinc-coated legs
Premium Fabric quality
Carrying case provided
Cons
On the expensive side
Bulky
Material: Cotton | Weight Capacity: 450 lbs | Dimensions (L x W): 9' x 4' 7" | Suspension System: Included steel stand | Spreader Bars: No
Want to feel like you are lying down in the middle of a desert observing stars? The same comfort and luxury can be achieved with the Pawley's Island Original Collection hammock. You can relax and lose yourself in dreams for hours while the hammock provides you with all the solace you need.
DURACORD ROPE: Synthetic blend feels soft like cotton yet...
OAK SPREADER BARS: Premium oak hardwood repeatedly hand...
Why did we like it?
The Pawley’s Island rope hammock is made from hand-woven, mildew-resistant DuraCord soft spun 3-ply polyester rope, which has a continuous weave, thus making it very durable even when left outside.
To add to the sturdiness, the hammock comes with custom-designed spreader bars made from seasoned solid oak. This makes the hammock very durable as well as classy to look at, with a maximum capacity of 450 lbs.
We were impressed by the heavy-duty zinc-plated rings and chains to be used to suspend the hammock. These are also rust-resistant, and all you need are two trees or posts to attach them with.
To add to the classiness, the Pawley’s Island hammocks come in 7 color varieties, including oatmeal, brown, coastal blue, garnet, green, meadow, and tan. Some of the colors are uncommon, giving you the option to have a very different but exotic-looking hammock in your backyard.
What could have been better?
After using the hammock for a few months, we noticed that the materials used to make the bed are not meant to be left outside for days. Try storing it inside so as to keep it from wearing away too quickly. Also, the cords are very tightly woven at the top of the hammock, making the bed part slightly stiff.
Pros
Handwoven soft-spun polyester 3-ply rope
Sturdy design
Solution-dyed colorfastness
Seasoned solid oak spreader bars
Rust resistant
Cons
Expensive
Tightly woven cords add stiffness
Material: DuraCord fabric | Weight Capacity: 450 lbs | Dimensions (L x W): 13' x 4' 7" | Suspension System: Included ropes | Spreader Bars: Yes
If you are looking for a cozy afternoon nap under the sun, the quilted weave hammock is for you. Made from soft all-weather OLEFIN acrylic fabric, this is the bed of your dreams, and it comes in a beautiful shade of navy blue, which makes it look all the more comfortable.
Our Soft Weave Hammocks are woven from soft, all-weather...
Fabric thread is solution-dyed, so the color isn't applied...
Why did we like it?
Since the weather fluctuates way too often, we wanted something which will withstand the forces of nature. This product is made with all-Weather and Solution-Dyed Synthetic DuraCord Fabric, which makes it resistant to rotting, mold, and mildew.
The fiber used to make the padding of the hammock is non-absorbent. It lets the liquid drain off and thus does not make the hammock wet. This makes the hammock an excellent choice for areas with sudden rainfall.
Further, the hardware is zinc plated and would not rust even if kept outdoors. It also helps increase the overall life of the hammock. Brazilian teak hardwood has been used to make the spreader bars adding a very premium feel to the product.
Also, it is pretty extensive and can hold two people easily considering the upper weight limit is 450lbs. You can relax with a drink alone or with a special one, your choice!
What could have been better?
The presence of padding and spreader bars makes it difficult to transfer this hammock from place to place. Although it is perfect for your backyard or porch, using it for excursions or holidays would be tough. This was the only major glitch we had with this product, which was otherwise a perfect hammock.
Pros
Soft all-weather acrylic fabric
Zinc plated spreader bars
Non-Absorbent fabric
Cumaru Spreader Bar
Cons
Pillows and stands are sold separately
Expensive
Material: Polyester blend | Weight Capacity: 450 lbs | Dimensions (L x W): 13' x 4' 7" | Suspension System: Included ropes | Spreader Bars: Yes
Want to go hiking in the forest but are scared of mosquitos and insect bites? Well, the Everest double camping hammock was our choice when it came to camping and excursions in the wilderness. Equipped with a mosquito net to safeguard you, this one will keep you swinging without any worries.
When we are out in nature, we want the experience to be therapeutic and not stressful. This hammock gave us the pleasure of comfort in places where bugs are inevitable. You get the comfort of your home while you are sleeping somewhere in the middle of a forest!
When it comes to space, this hammock is enormous, allowing two people to easily fit in while a single person will have ample space to turn and roll around. It can take up to 400 lbs and thus will not be a hindrance if you want to take in your pet too.
Another prominent feature would be that it is effortless to install and set up. The hammock can be folded into a bag, and it is pretty light and easily portable, and reversible. We could take it camping without having to pull a giant bag with us at all times.
What could have been better?
This is the most viable option for you if you are a frequent traveler, but it is on the expensive side and will cost you more than most other hammocks. Also, the zipper is not ideal, making it a slight hindrance to entering it with the zipper opening only two-thirds of the way.
Pros
Great endurance and versatility
Mosquito and bug-free hiking
Attached side pouch
Detailed instruction manual
Cons
Expensive
Zipper doesn’t unzip completely
Material: Nylon | Weight Capacity: 400 lbs | Dimensions (L x W): 9' 10" x 6' 3" | Suspension System: Included straps | Spreader Bars: No
Now that you know the top ten hammocks available in the market today, you have taken a step towards getting your hammock. To make the final step, equip yourself with the buyer’s guide, which will give you details of the factors to keep in mind before you finalize on a hammock.
Portability
Some hammocks are meant mostly to be kept in one place as the gauges become too heavy to take with you on the move, while others are portable and lightweight and could easily be carried. Depending on your purpose to buy the hammock, make an informed decision.
If you are looking to decorate your backyard, go with a hammock with beautiful wooden gauges that you do not need to move often. If you want easy mobility, go for a lightweight model.
Single v/s Double capacity
One of the most important things to keep in mind is if you need the hammock for yourself or do you plan to share it with someone. If you are undecided, it would be safer to go with the double model as it comes with ample space in case you change your mind later.
Again, if you like to travel and hiking is on your list, then it is best to buy a single hammock, which is more portable and is easier to carry.
Rain tarps and Mosquito Nets
There are hammocks where you can lie down under the open sky without any form of hindrance and then there are those that provide you with mosquito nets and rain tarps. If you plan to be going to a beach or party in your backyard, the open hammocks would be your best choice.
This is because you do not want the view of the open stars to be restricted in any way. If you are looking at going to deep caves or forests, hammocks with layers of protection are what you should opt for.
Water-resistance capacity
Keep this in mind, especially if you intend to travel a lot with the hammock. If the material used to make the hammock does not dry quickly, it will cause a problem for you. Look at quick-drying or water-resistant materials to have a hassle-free hike.
Single strap v/s double straps
Some hammocks come with a single strap, which may be sturdy but still invokes a risk if a lot of weight is put on the product. In such cases, tie it lower. Double straps ensure double the safety, and thus you can tie the hammock higher as there is no fear of falling.
Spreader bars v/s non-spreader bars
Hammocks with spreader bars are stretched out, and it is good to relax for a while, chill by the pool or sunbathe. But it may get a little uncomfortable if you intend to sleep on it.
Hammocks with no spreader bars will mold to your body, thus giving you a cocoon-like feeling, and you can rest much more comfortable in it. If you have issues with getting into a hammock, this is your best bet, as it is pretty simple to climb into it.
Most Comfortable Hammocks FAQ's
What is the most comfortable material for a hammock?
The most comfortable material for a hammock depends on personal preference. Cotton hammocks are soft and breathable, while polyester hammocks are durable and quick-drying. Both materials can provide comfort when properly designed and constructed.
Are hammocks suitable for sleeping overnight?
Yes, hammocks can be suitable for sleeping overnight. However, for comfortable overnight sleeping, choose a hammock with a wider and longer design, supportive fabric, and proper insulation options such as an underquilt or sleeping pad.
How do I hang a hammock properly for maximum comfort and safety?
To hang a hammock properly, find sturdy anchor points such as trees or posts. Ensure the hammock is hung with a slight sag for proper body contouring. Use reliable straps or ropes, ensuring they are securely attached and adjusted to the appropriate height and angle.
Can hammocks be used indoors?
Yes, hammocks can be used indoors if you have suitable anchor points such as exposed ceiling beams or sturdy walls with proper hardware. Indoor hammocks can provide a cozy and unique seating or lounging option.
Are hammocks suitable for children?
Hammocks can be suitable for children under proper supervision. Look for hammocks with appropriate size, weight capacity, and safe design features. Ensure that children understand and follow safety guidelines while using hammocks.
Conclusion
Thank you so much for taking the time to read our article on the best comfortable hammocks out there. We hope it has been an exciting and insightful journey for you, as it was for us testing and experiencing each of these hammocks. We truly believe that finding the perfect lounging spot to unwind and relax is essential for everyone, and having high-quality hammocks makes it an even more enjoyable experience.
We had a wonderful time testing these stunning products and providing you with this comprehensive list of hammocks, tailored to meet your specific needs. Remember, hammocks aren't just a luxury; they are an essential part of relaxation and rejuvenation, and having the perfect hammock can significantly enhance the way you spend your leisure time. So go on, treat yourself, and indulge in one of these beauties – it's time to sit back, relax, and enjoy the weightless bliss of a comfortable hammock. Happy hammocking!
When we say the word sleek to mind come simple and minimalist designs with neutral or simple color schemes. The beauty of these subtle interiors will take you by surprise as soon as you see them. Their elegance will never go out of style, and your home will never be out of fashion.
In this article you can see the Modern And Sleek Interiors That Will Leave You Speechless, so maybe you'll get inspired for the next home renovation, who knows!
For these designs less is more, so keep that in mind when you start decorating!
Sleek designs are just perfect for the open-floor homes as these emphasize their simplicity, thanks to these simple designs your home look a tad more breathable, bigger and far more spacious.
I'm totally in love with these simple kitchen designs, they are the perfect settings to cook delicious meals!
When you stick to two-there colors in one room you will get a good looking interior that will look clean and stylish. If you decide to go for a simple design expression, remember not to go for lots of colors because you can certainly overdo it!
Sleek kitchens look super expensive and glamorous, this space is dominated by edgy lines that highlight a glamorous, expensive atmosphere.
When it comes to the color of the walls, we suggest you to leave them white as the space will look airy, serene. You can play with a grey or beige statement wall but keep in mind that colors should never challenge the extraordinary neutral atmosphere created.
As previously stated, the neutral color scheme is popular with these interiors, but it's not a mistake to incorporate a lively color that will brighten and enliven the space. yellow through pillows and an ottoman are beautiful chromatic accents in the interior design below.
The clean, edgy lines are common in sleek home designs, if you want to design your home in a sleek design there's one rule worth considering : use no curves!
Keep it simple and you can't go wrong with these interiors, simplicity is the new black. The simple and sleek designs are a hot trend nowadays and it isn't planning to go anywhere soon!
What do you think about the interior designs above ? We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below !
Having the right cutting tool in your workshop is integral to completing any DIY or professional-grade project.
As such, while you’re choosing a cutting tool, you need to be extra careful to ensure that it’s perfect for the kind of projects that you’ll engage in. But the problem lies in the availability of a huge variety of such tools on the market. This makes users confused between those that are somewhat similar to each other.
Two such commonly confused cutting tools are circular saws and miter saws. Though both of these are highly efficient, they are different in many ways. And many users often tend to choose the wrong one for their jobs owing to insufficient knowledge regarding their features and applicability.
That’s why we’ve put together this guide to clear any such confusion once and for all. So, without further ado, let’s dive right in!
Miter Saw vs. Circular Saw
To clearly understand the differences between these two cutting tools, you’ll first need to have a fair idea about each of them and an overview of their usage. That’s why we’ll begin by giving you a brief introduction to these two types.
This power tool comes with a circular and flat blade that rotates at top speed, enabling you to cut a variety of materials, including plastic, plywood, and metal. Its operation is also pretty straightforward, and you can get it in both cordless and corded variants.
Notably, some users refer to it as the mobile version of a table saw due to the structural similarities between the two.
Another significant advantage of going for this cutting tool is that it’s relatively cheaper than the other high-end power tools on the market. This is why you can find it in nearly all garages and workshops. If you’re a DIYer interested in woodworking or carpentry, you’ve surely come across the handheld version of a circular saw by now.
Specialized for making accurate miter cuts and crosscuts at the desired angle, miter saws also come with circular blades but are mounted on the arm powered by swivel action.
This lets you move the arm, and consequently, the saw to the left and the right to make different angles as per the need. The arm is, of course, locked in place after being positioned at the angle you require. You can use miter saws to cut doors or picture frames, crown moldings, cupboards or fences, window casing, and in many other applications as well.
Differences Between Circular Saws And Miter Saws
Kinds Of Cuts
Miter saws and circular saws are different cutting tools since their working mechanism enables them to make very different cuts.
Firstly, speaking of a circular saw, it’s an all-round tool as it can make a wide range of cuts. This makes it suitable for a variety of jobs. If you are experienced in working with different materials and have a certain extent of technical knowledge, you can use this saw to make almost any type of cut.
In fact, it can even be used to make bevel and miter cuts, for which you’ll normally use a miter saw.
On the other hand, a miter saw is a specialized tool for making angled cuts, as we mentioned earlier. This might make you wonder about the purpose of this type since circular saws can also be used to make miter cuts. But actually, the speed and accuracy of the miter cuts differ a lot, with miter saws giving rise to more accurate cuts at a greater speed.
In comparison, it is more difficult to get an accurate and straight cut using a circular saw. It will actually require a great deal of practice to get the cut right, and the chances of making an error are naturally much higher.
Working Mechanism
Let’s start with miter saws this time. In the case of these cutting tools, the blade drops from above the material you’re dealing with to make the cut.
Note that the blade comes down in a slow and controlled motion, with the workpiece held onto a fence to provide a precise angle for the cut. This angle is between the plane of the longest edge of your workpiece and that of the blade.
Furthermore, this saw has a miter index which lets you change the blade angle with the fence. While the majority of miter saws allow for precise one-degree changes in the miter index, some provide “stops” that let you set the miter index quickly to the commonly used angles.
Coming to circular saws, they use a toothed blade that spins around an arbor-like structure to cut materials of different kinds. Usually, the blades of the saw come in different designs based on the material to be cut. And to keep the workpiece level and steady while it is cut, there is a plate in the middle which surrounds each side of the saw.
Easy Of Use
Any saw, or for that matter, any kind of tool, should ideally be easy to operate. This is why it’s a crucial factor to consider while you’re trying to know the differences between circular saws and miter saws.
Notably, the miter saw is a step ahead of the circular saw in this regard as it allows much greater control during a cutting job while keeping your hands at a safe distance.
Miter saws also let you adjust the direction of the required angles according to your requirements, which is beyond the abilities of a circular saw. As such, you can use this exceptional feature to make a variety of useful fixtures. These include the interesting wooden arrows which are fixed on the wall to enable easier navigation at any place.
Apart from this, certain features common to both the types of saws include finger triggers to operate the blades and a slight kickback when the motor starts functioning.
Versatility
Versatility is one of the most important features that both DIYers and professionals seek in a cutting tool. After all, a versatile cutting tool can manage almost all the cutting jobs that they might have to complete from time to time.
The circular saw outperforms the miter saw with regard to versatility since it is capable of making many different kinds of cuts, as we mentioned earlier. So, having this tool at your disposal is enough for the cutting work concerning any woodworking or carpentry job that you have at hand.
On a side note, the process of achieving a straight rip-cut using this saw is slightly more lengthy than the other cuts. You’ll first have to get a straightedge cut from the edge of a hardboard sheet and then clamp it on the material to utilize it as a jig. Another alternative will be to get ready-made guide rails as that would assist you in making accurate straight cuts.
In comparison, the applicability of a miter saw is limited to only specialized jobs. That’s why it won’t be suitable for making long rip-cuts and cutting large plywood pieces.
Rather, those who are planning to build something that needs a great deal of trimming should invest in a miter saw as it will make such jobs easier, more accurate, and faster. These include projects such as making small tables, other furniture (for the finer trimming), photo frames, and decks with 2x6 or 2x4 wood pieces.
Portability And Storage
Portability is a major factor for DIYers who require working on a range of projects in different parts of the home. It’s also important for professionals who need to travel to different places for their work. As such, you’ll have to consider your needs in this regard before choosing the type to go for.
Circular saws are ahead of miter saws in this criteria as well since they are generally quite small and lightweight. As a result, you can move the former quite easily, especially if you own a cordless one, and can keep it in the car with equal ease.
But for moving a miter saw, you will need to put in more effort as it is much heavier than a circular saw. Speaking of easy storage, a miter saw will need a stand or a table to be stored efficiently. In contrast, a circular saw can be stored even in very limited spaces since it’s quite small and compact.
Cost
When you’ve set a particular budget for purchasing a cutting tool, considering its price is also essential. Generally, circular saws are priced much lower than miter saws, so you’ll be able to find several good-quality models within an affordable price range.
On the other hand, truly efficient miter saws cost significantly more. We’d suggest browsing through sites like eBay or craigslist as you might find some relatively affordable models there.
Prior Skills Required
For using a cutting tool, you should be aware of any prior skills required. After all, that would ensure you can handle the tool properly to achieve the desired results. But this may not be applicable in the case of all types of cutting tools.
For instance, using a miter saw doesn’t require any prior skill but just needs going through the guide coming with the model to understand its operation properly. The setup for this saw is also fixed, and there are multiple functions available such as that for setting up the different cutting angles. All these factors make the usage smooth and convenient.
But handling a circular saw will need more skill since it doesn’t come with such automatic functions as in a miter saw. So, you will need to understand some crucial requirements like the force that needs to be applied, its motion, and keeping the balance while you’re driving it in an angled manner.
Additional Features To Look Out For
Considering that each type of cutting tool is available in lots of variations, here are some additional factors you need to consider while choosing the ideal model.
The Blades
It’s the blades of a cutting tool that ultimately do the job, so it’s a must to take into account the several aspects associated with the blade. Be it the diameter or the type of the blade; these aspects can create much difference in the variety of cuts that can be made using the tool.
You must keep in mind the project you’re working on and the cutting needs for the same to choose a suitable saw. Generally, a saw with a blade diameter of 6-10 inches is ideal for use in home DIY projects. But if you’re working on a more heavy-duty project, it's better to go for a larger diameter.
Power
Both the saws that we’re dealing with are motorized tools, so the power that they use determines their cutting ability through different materials and their working efficiency. So, the higher the power of a tool, the more cutting jobs you will be able to complete. For instance, a high-power saw will be able to cut through quite a few stacks of lumber easily.
But the quantity might not always be a huge concern for a small home project. In that case, you should look for a tool with a reasonable power capacity to match your requirements.
Brand
Irrespective of whether you’re going for a second-hand or a first-hand cutting tool, you should always choose a reliable option. After all, the saw that you’ll buy will be a long-term investment, and you should be sure that the tool is manufactured by a reputable brand in the first place.
If you haven’t dealt with cutting tools in the past, you may not be acquainted with the brands on the market and various aspects associated with them.
In that case, it’s best to inquire about the replacement, warranty, and return policies offered by the brand and check the customer reviews for its products.
To make an efficient choice, you can even discuss these factors with a local woodworker near your place. They'll surely be able to throw light on the brands that can be trusted and offer beneficial policies to ensure maximum customer satisfaction.
Safety Features
Safety considerations are crucial when you’re dealing with cutting tools. Hence, it’s mandatory to check the safety provisions offered in any saw. Note that such safety features will vary based on the model you’re dealing with. There may also be some additional attachments for ensuring further safety of the users.
Precision
You would always want the cutting jobs to be as accurate as possible to ensure the ultimate result meets your expectations. This is why accuracy is indispensable to cutting tools and should always be considered while choosing a suitable saw. However, the extent of accuracy required will vary based on whether a project is light or heavy-duty.
While some miter saws have laser guides or LEDs to enable improved accuracy, circular saws require additional tools for measurement to increase precision.
Safety Tips To Adopt
Getting the most precise cuts at a faster speed for all your projects is, of course, the priority, but ensuring your own safety is no less important. That’s why you must understand and diligently follow certain safety precautions and tips prior to using power tools like circular saws and miter saws.
So, in this section, we’ve compiled all such essential safety precautions and tips for using these two cutting tools.
A. Circular Saw
Performing A Saw Check
Before you start the work, it’s a must to check each and every part of the saw to ensure it’s working in the right manner.
First of all, you should check its retracting lower guard as that will make sure proper retraction as well as recovery. The lower guard is an essential safety feature built into a circular saw. As such, if you spot any defect in the lower guard, you should first get it corrected before using the tool.
On a side note, you should always ensure that the saw is not plugged into the socket while you’re checking it. And if it’s a cordless circular saw, remove the battery before checking it. This way, the saw will never be switched on accidentally while the checking is on.
Using Safe Depth Settings
Setting the depth of cut food matching the thickness of the workpiece is another thing you need to be careful about.
While adjusting the depth, take care to ensure that too much of the blade is not exposed below the workpiece. In effect, the lowermost tooth of the blade must not extend by more than ⅛ inches beneath the workpiece. When the depth of cut is set in this manner, you can always get a safe and precise cut.
Hold It Properly
Holding the circular saw properly is essential for operating it in the right manner and also ensures your hands are always safe while you’re using it. Note that circular saws are available in both right-handed and left-handed variants based on how you must hold them.
So, if you’re a right-handed person, you should always go for a right-handed circular saw. You must hold the main handle of such a saw with the right hand and the knob or auxiliary handle with the left hand. Keep in mind that both hands must not cross each other while you’re using the saw.
But if you opt for a left-handed circular saw, your hands will always cross each other, which is not the ideal case and is also not very safe. Your hands might be sprained accidentally while you’re using the tool. Likewise, left-handed users should always go for left-handed circular saws.
Use A Sharp Blade Only
While you’re cutting any material using a circular saw, you’ll have to direct the tool through the cut and not force it through the material. If you sense that too much effort is needed to make cuts using the saw, or it has to be forced through the material, then you’re applying dull blades in all probability.
Using dull blades will make your cuts imperfect and will require much more effort to make each cut. So, make sure that the blades that you’re using can cut through the material easily.
B. Miter Saw
Use Safety Clamps
Using a safety clamp is crucial while you’re applying a miter saw for your cutting jobs. These clamps secure the wood or any other material while cutting, thereby preventing it from slipping accidentally. So, you can carry out your cutting jobs pretty smoothly without such concerns.
The clamps ultimately ensure the cuts are even, smooth, and highly accurate.
Use Blade Guards
The blade is the part of the miter saw that you should handle with the utmost care, as any negligence might cause fatal injuries. That’s why it’s always better to use safety attachments such as blade guards. A blade guard covers the outer edge of a saw blade and lifts up when the blade touches the material.
Notably, blade guards are available in opaque and transparent varieties. Going for the latter variety is better as it would allow you to see the spot where the blade hits, which is regarded as a beneficial feature by most professionals.
Dust Extraction
The dust that’s accumulated while using a miter saw must be disposed of to prevent it from flying up the ears, mouth, or eyes suddenly. It might also trigger a fire hazard if you don’t remove it from the saw. So, having a dust collection system in a miter saw is really essential.
In case your miter saw comes with a dust bag, you must learn the process of attaching a shop vac to the saw to enable an effective system of dust collection. Apart from providing protection against flying debris, an extraction system also contributes to extending the service life of a miter saw.
Don’t Forget To Depress The Lockout Trigger
A lockout trigger is actually a safety switch on the handle that you must depress to allow the saw blade to spin. Using such a safety feature ensures the saw is never turned on accidentally. So, the saw blade will be turned on only if you press the switch and depress the lock trigger at the same time.
Extension Cords
Though standard miter saws don’t come with extension cords, you will need to use one if you’re working with the saw in different parts of a room. You should note here that it’s essential to check whether the extension cord you’re planning to use can handle the amperage of the miter saw.
Final Words
Don’t you find it much easier to distinguish between a miter saw and a circular saw now? So, pick the ideal one for your projects and get the ball rolling! But if you still have any queries in this regard, feel free to reach out to us in the comments section below.
Before we bring down the curtains, here’s the last point we’d like to share with you. The applicability of circular saws and miter saws is different, as evident from the points we’ve discussed in the article.
While the former can handle more common types of cuts, such as crosscuts and miter cuts, the latter is useful for more skilled and angular cuts. So, neither of the two can be labeled as being superior or inferior to the other.
With this, we’ll call it a day. We’ll come up with some more interesting content soon, so stay tuned!
There has been a recent rise in the number of people buying the "miracle" that is the Himalayan salt lamp. No matter where you look, online or offline, there are believers everywhere. Indeed, people who have already bought it and been using it for some time now, swear by its miraculous healing abilities, the best Himalayan lamps out there make wonders apparently!
Salt lamps are known to cleanse the air of the home they are in and make it more breathable and pure. When turned on, its ions are converted to negative ions, similar to what happens before a rain-storm, and those ions deal with all the pollution in the air that made your lungs weak and you unable to stop coughing.
These pretty little lumps of miracles will deal with your allergy, asthma and mood swings while at it. So, it is no surprise if you are a recent convert looking to buy one of these for your own home or office. But, pretty and effective as they are, you need to take care of a few things while buying them so you can avoid knock-offs and other messes.
Don't Make These Mistakes When Buying a Salt Lamp
Here's a list of things you need to keep in mind so you can avoid making mistakes when buying a salt lamp:
Research well
It stinks, yes, but you need to do these before you spend a big stash of your hard-earned money on these lamps. If you are buying them from an online seller or website, read the reviews and check the ratings. Learn to differentiate between fake and real reviews and proceed accordingly.
Any website that seems to have a crowd of buyers and fans and has a lot of good reviews is usually good to go. If you are still a little skeptical about the usefulness of the said product, read up. The reviews will usually have stories that happy customers have shared after they brought the lamp into the house. There should be a lot of tales of vanishing allergies and better mental health.
This serves two purposes: one, this way you know that the seller is selling the real deal and two, it should convince you of the effectiveness of buying these lamps.
Don't look for cheaper options
When buying an original Himalayan salt lamp, there are no cheaper options. These lamps might not look like it, but they have been painstakingly mined from the vast cavern and tunnels running under the ranges of the mighty Himalayas. This is not just the regular salt you keep on your table.
So, in case you found a seller somewhere who seems to be selling really cheap salt lamps, Houston, there might just be a teeny bit of a problem. Salt lamps are extremely fragile and expensive to transport. That, combined with the mining, means that these cannot come cheap.
If they do come cheap, rest easy knowing that yours is probably a fake, especially if it is a white crystal lamp and not the colored ones. The white salt crystals are rarer and, hence, more expensive. If you get this one cheap, you are not going to be happy to know that it is definitely a fake.
So don't look for the cheaper but the best options while buying these lamps. Don't worry. These last you a lifetime so it's not like you will have to buy another one soon.
Don't go for the brightest options
All that glitters is indeed not gold. As a rule, salt lamps are not very bright by nature. They cannot even hold a candle to your regular fluorescent light, and that's just how it should be. The different crystals of your salt lamp will diffract and refract the light in different ways, so all you should be getting from your lamp is a dull, warm glow and nothing that lights up the entire room.
The heavier and bigger ones usually give off even less light so you have to be careful when you are buying a new lamp. Check if it works as a regular fluorescent light. If it does, go to a different seller because this place is selling knock-offs.
Don't be worried if your lamp weeps a little
If you looked at a lamp at a friend's place and it seemed to be sweating puddles, don't reject their seller thinking something is off. After all, this is completely normal behavior for your lamp. Original Himalayan salt lamps tend to sweat a lot.
What you must remember here is the fact that these lamps are basically big lumps of salt. And this is how salt normally reacts to moisture. So, you will notice a lot of sweating in your lamp if you live in an especially humid area.
Don't worry. You can easily avoid this by leaving the lamp on all the time. The Himalayan salt lamps consume very little energy, so you don't need to worry about the environment or your electricity bills. Also, they are not a fire hazard so you can easily leave them on all the time.
Leaving your salt lamp on all day every day will ensure that crystals stay heated up and do not absorb too much moisture. So you will never face the sweating problem again.
Don't dunk it in water to check its authenticity
Seriously, though, don't. Don't use too much water when checking if the lamp is real. Better yet, use other methods to confirm its authenticity.
Too much water may damage the electrical parts of it. Also, because salt lamps are basically lumps of salt, they do not handle moisture well. So, if you dunk it in water, it will absorb all that moisture and well, melt. At least then you will know that your lamp is real.
So, you see, buying a salt lamp is perhaps less easy than you thought it would be. But hundreds of people who have actually bought it swear that it is worth the effort. Just keep the points above in mind, and you will be good to go.
You need so many things to decorate a good-looking dining room, but do you know what is the first thing that people notice when they enter yours? The dining chairs! That's why we decided to pay special attention to dining chairs, we`re going to talk about them a little today. It's not easy to choose the design of your dining room table and chairs because there are lots of things that you should take in consideration such as design, style, color, comfort and of course quality. If you are having a hard time picking them, and you can't decide on a single design, then we suggest you to choose various of them. The playful game of chairs is a hot trend nowadays, so take a look at the Mismatched Chairs That Will Add A Unique Touch To Your Dining Room.
If you want to try out this trend, but you don't have the guts, then we suggest you to add only two mismatched chairs to your dining table. In this way you will still have mismatched chairs, but you will keep the symmetry and your dining room will still look elegant and gracious.
Mismatched chairs don't always require different designs. Sometimes you can stick to a single design but go for different colors. I really like the gradient change of colors to the chairs in the dining room below. How do you like them?
What do you say about sticking to the same color but going for different chair design? Be creative and go for some fun and modern designs that still tie the whole dining room together.
Three on three! This is the perfect balance for your dining room. The wooden chairs add warmth to the space while the blue ones give it a more modern and contemporary look.
The strong contrast of mismatched chairs looks incredibly interesting and fun and your dining room will never look boring. They will immediately grab your attention and you will be fascinated by their striking beauty.
These chairs will help you add character to the dining room, so take the risk and go for a more dramatic look. Play with different colors and textures, and see how the chairs transform the space with ease.
When you are choosing the chairs for the mismatched look keep in mind to always check the height of each chair and choose chairs of similar height. You probably don't want your guests to bob up and down all over the place.
The mismatched chairs can be found in all of the styles, so don't have second thought about your room, but just go for it.
The possibilities are endless when it comes to mismatched chairs, so let these photos serve you as guidance when you are decorating your dining room.
Light shapes everything in a spectacular manner. Light creates ambiance. Light coming from within an item creates one of the most mesmerizing atmosphere that we can experience. Paper star lanterns gracefully suspended into air, exuding fragility, beauty and sophistication while being lighten from within. Brilliant. Mindblowing beautiful Star-Shaped DIY Lanterns will be covered in the detailed guide showcased below, these are meant to beautify your interior and exterior in a spectacular inexpensive personal manner.
These simple diy masterpieces have been realize using Silhouette but you can use any other cutting technology at hand, laser cutter included. A free pdf template can be downloaded below. The instructions are exactly the same. The guide covers a simple basic star lantern as the one showcased below but you can materialize absolutely any design you envision.
The pieces already cut that have been showcased below are a little different from the ones provided in the template, the ones that you will print and cut yourself. The instructions are the same though and for a better understanding, the three different pieces below have been labeled A, B and C.
Pieces A and C are different because they feature a small hole through which you will introduce a thread that will later tie the star together, they are different because basically piece A wears the hole near the outside edge while piece C wears it in the middle.
Piece C and A will be cut one time each while piece B will be cut three times for this tutorial.
If you have the possibility add dotted lines for a smooth professional fold. You can use a needle to dot it a little yourself if you do not have any other method at hand.
In this tutorial a double-sided cardstock has been used for explanatory purposes, basically the right side is the dark blue one while the wrong side side is the light blue one. After cutting the five pieces of star out of your print, lay them down with the wrong side up and the long flap close to you to begin the folding of the four long folds away from you.
To ensure smooth connections between volumes open the entire piece out again and with the right side up this time fold both short flaps toward you.
The piece A, the one with the hold on the edge, will be the first tasting glue, apply paper glue on the single long flap. You can also apply tape in these areas but the holding power of glue is recommended.
Lay the piece down now and press the outside edge over the glued edge to glue it into place.
Now simply repeat the process for all five points of the start, finishing it with the C piece. If you maintain this order you will basically have them dried in the order you need them for the next step when you are going to glue them together.
Now to glue the five points into the desired shape we should respect the order A-B-B-B-C. This is utterly important because the piece A and C have those small holes adjacent to each other, these pieces will not be glued together. Start with A, which hopefully, is the first piece that you have glued together and apply glue to the two bottom flaps.
Insert the two glued flaps in the interior of another two plain edges, part of a piece B, as shown below.
Hold them into place until they dry out properly.
Repeat the process, apply glue to the two flaps of the piece you have glued on. Repeat the process for all the remaining B pieces.
Now for the ending point of the star it might be easier for you to just fold the entire star accordion like and with caution glue the C piece one flap at a time whilst holding them into place until they dry.
At this point it should as showcased below. Between A and C a gap remained, this will allow you to fold the star flat for storage later on. Most paper lanterns brought from a store will arrive folded in a similar manner. If you want only to hang it and have no intent in storing it later on you can just glue it together for good.
To hang it through a thread or string make use of a needle and a long piece of monofilament thread that looks invisible; insert the needle into one of the holes as displayed below.
The illustration below will explain the procedure better.
Get the needle out through the other hole. This will leave the loop hanging out of the first hole, allowing you to insert the needle back through the loop.
After pulling out the thread simply tie the piece together, closing the gap and offering the viewer the illusion that it "floats" in the air magnificently.
You are done! The extraordinary diy paper lantern has been materialized. It is extremely easy and yet extremely rewardful. What do you think?
Below, through the Silhouette program little stars have been added to beautify the star. You can enlarge the stars or change the model in this one and customize it in a great manner.
The one showcased below had consistent cut outs which have been filled with tracing paper.
The next star is extremely beautiful and delicate yet very sturdy because it has been realized out of watercolor paper, the cutouts have been doubled by tracing paper here as well. Sensible and special.
You can always trespass boundaries and go the extra mile, below different paper lanterns are basically respecting the same thread of thought, both have been shaped out of plain white cardstock yet one has been painted into a copper color.
This last piece has been modelled after Pottery Barn’s Bronze Star Luminary. This as well has been cut from cardstock and spray painted copper. You can now purchase the cutting files for this lantern in the Etsy shop here)
We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below. This extraordinary tutorial has been the work of Debbie from http://www.meandmydiy.com/ and we would like to publicly thank her for sharing such extraordinary tutorials on her blog, we would like to thank her for the extraordinary amount of knowledge that she shares with the rest of the world.
We can spot pallets all around the home and yard when we are decorating with DIY projects, and we have to admit that they make some awesome up-cycling projects which allow you to have new decorative objects on a low budget. If your budget is limited this Christmas, don't be desperate because you can decorate your home in some pretty stupendous ways by using pallets. You will find these Mind-Blowing Christmas Pallet Projects That Will Give A Festive Touch To Your Home really amazing and would love to give them a try immediately.
If you have pallets in your basement that are just collecting dust, it's time to put them to a good use and beautify your home for the holidays. Everybody is going to love the cheerful and creative ambiance in your home, trust me! Now get some ideas from the photos below!
Making a Christmas wreath has never been easier! Get some pallets, cut them in small pieces of different size, color them in the festive colors and use nails to stick them them together. Add a nice final touch with some burlap and red ribbon!
Does your home miss a Christmas tree this year? The alternative designs that require pallets come in abundance, and you can choose the design you like the best from the plenty of trees in this article.
The pallet Christmas trees are great both for the home as well as your backyard. Do you feel like going big this Christmas with decorations? Fill your yard with these adorable trees and brag to the neighbors that you have done them yourselves! They will certainly envy you and compliment you on the good work!
Express your Christmas wishes in a super creative way by making a sign out of pallets and writing your message on them. It's an unconventional way of saying Merry Christmas that everybody will notice for sure!
I can't describe the uniqueness of all these Christmas trees, and I find it really hard to pick a favorite. All of them look totally fabulous, so see which one will fit the best in your existing decor and copy the design.
Source
Do you love these pallet projects as much as we do? I hope that you have put your eyes on your favorite decoration and that you are going to give it a try pretty soon!
![3 Best Personal Air Purifiers of 2024 [Review & Buying Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/Best-Personal-Air-Purifiers-of-2021-112.jpg "3 Best Personal Air Purifiers of 2024 [Review & Buying Guide]")
Key Highlights
![Miter Saw vs. Circular Saw [Differences & Winner]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/miter-saw-vs-circular-saw-1.jpg "Miter Saw vs. Circular Saw [Differences & Winner]")
![Mindblowingly Beautiful Star-Shaped DIY Paper Lanterns That Will Beautify Your Special Moments [Printables Included]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2014/11/Mindblowingly-Beautiful-Star-Shaped-DIY-Paper-Lanterns-That-Will-Beautify-Your-Special-Moments-Printables-Included-homesthetics.jpg "Mindblowingly Beautiful Star-Shaped DIY Paper Lanterns That Will Beautify Your Special Moments [Printables Included]")
